Integrum http://integrumtech.com Revolutionary Teams, Organizational Transformation Sat, 30 May 2015 06:08:16 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=5.5.1 Episode #148 – What’s a Culture Fit? http://integrumtech.com/2015/06/episode-148-whats-a-culture-fit/ http://integrumtech.com/2015/06/episode-148-whats-a-culture-fit/#respond Thu, 25 Jun 2015 06:00:09 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7678 Derek, Clayton and Chris slowly remember what they were talking about… Oh ya! Culture Fit! Including mono-cultures, hiring, diversity of ideas and behaviors enforcing culture.

The post Episode #148 – What’s a Culture Fit? appeared first on Episode #148 – What’s a Culture Fit? appeared first on Episode #147 – Agile: It’s Supposed to Hurt! http://integrumtech.com/2015/06/episode-147-agile-its-supposed-to-hurt/ http://integrumtech.com/2015/06/episode-147-agile-its-supposed-to-hurt/#respond Thu, 18 Jun 2015 06:00:48 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7676 Derek, Clayton and Chris discuss the idea of how difficult it is to work in an agile environment, embrace agile methodologies and do the right …

The post Episode #147 – Agile: It’s Supposed to Hurt! appeared first on Episode #147 – Agile: It’s Supposed to Hurt! appeared first on Episode #146 – Listener Question: Technical Projects http://integrumtech.com/2015/06/episode-146-listener-question-technical-projects/ http://integrumtech.com/2015/06/episode-146-listener-question-technical-projects/#respond Thu, 11 Jun 2015 06:00:23 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7674 Derek, Clayton and Chris answer a listener question about technical side projects and how they fit into the bigger picture.

The post Episode #146 – Listener Question: Technical Projects appeared first on Episode #146 – Listener Question: Technical Projects appeared first on Episode #145 – Lean Coffee with Mark Ng http://integrumtech.com/2015/06/episode-145-lean-coffee-with-mark-ng/ http://integrumtech.com/2015/06/episode-145-lean-coffee-with-mark-ng/#respond Thu, 04 Jun 2015 06:00:52 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7671 Derek, Clayton and Mark do a Lean Coffee episode and discuss: Retrospectives, Visualizing flows across teams, Backlogs and more.

The post Episode #145 – Lean Coffee with Mark Ng appeared first on Episode #145 – Lean Coffee with Mark Ng appeared first on Episode #144 – Presence http://integrumtech.com/2015/05/episode-144-presence/ http://integrumtech.com/2015/05/episode-144-presence/#respond Thu, 28 May 2015 06:00:06 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7666 Derek and Clayton talk about presence. How do you indicate presence? What does presence look like for distributed teams? What happens when there is little …

The post Episode #144 – Presence appeared first on Episode #144 – Presence appeared first on Episode #143 – Feedback Loops http://integrumtech.com/2015/04/episode-143-feedback-loops/ http://integrumtech.com/2015/04/episode-143-feedback-loops/#respond Thu, 23 Apr 2015 17:55:00 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7648 Clayton and Derek discuss feedback loops.

The post Episode #143 – Feedback Loops appeared first on Episode #143 – Feedback Loops appeared first on Episode #141 – WTF is Wrong With Agile? http://integrumtech.com/2015/04/episode-141-wtf-is-wrong-with-agile/ http://integrumtech.com/2015/04/episode-141-wtf-is-wrong-with-agile/#respond Wed, 08 Apr 2015 06:00:19 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7632 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: the state of Agile today.

The post Episode #141 – WTF is Wrong With Agile? appeared first on Episode #141 – WTF is Wrong With Agile? appeared first on Episode #140 – Our Ideal Team http://integrumtech.com/2014/09/episode-140-our-ideal-team/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/09/episode-140-our-ideal-team/#respond Thu, 04 Sep 2014 06:00:00 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7636 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, and Roy van de Water discuss: Our ideal team. Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello, welcome to the “Agile Weekly Podcast,” I’m Jade …

The post Episode #140 – Our Ideal Team appeared first on Episode #140 – Our Ideal Team appeared first on Episode #139 – Rapid Team Growth http://integrumtech.com/2014/06/episode-139-rapid-team-growth/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/06/episode-139-rapid-team-growth/#respond Thu, 12 Jun 2014 13:00:31 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7612 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Roy van de Water discuss: How to deal with a rapidly expanding team. Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to …

The post Episode #139 – Rapid Team Growth appeared first on Episode #139 – Rapid Team Growth appeared first on Episode #138 – Principles or Practices http://integrumtech.com/2014/06/episode-138-principles-practices/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/06/episode-138-principles-practices/#respond Thu, 05 Jun 2014 13:00:32 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7608 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Roy van de Water discuss: What is more important, principles or practices? Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello welcome to …

The post Episode #138 – Principles or Practices appeared first on Episode #138 – Principles or Practices appeared first on Episode #137 – Central Control http://integrumtech.com/2014/05/episode-137-central-control/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/05/episode-137-central-control/#respond Thu, 08 May 2014 13:00:32 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7446 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Roy van de Water discuss: What happens when someone has central control Transcript Derek Neighbors:  Hello, and welcome …

The post Episode #137 – Central Control appeared first on Episode #137 – Central Control appeared first on Episode #136 – Simple http://integrumtech.com/2014/05/episode-136-simple/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/05/episode-136-simple/#respond Thu, 01 May 2014 13:00:24 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7444 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Roy van de Water discuss: Simplicity Transcript [laughter] Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  It is hard doing that every week. [laughter] …

The post Episode #136 – Simple appeared first on Episode #136 – Simple appeared first on Episode #135 – Ticket Driven Agile http://integrumtech.com/2014/04/episode-135-ticket-driven-agile/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/04/episode-135-ticket-driven-agile/#respond Thu, 03 Apr 2014 13:00:23 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7438 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Jake Plains discuss: Ticket Driven Agile Cross team collaboration Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello. Welcome to another episode of …

The post Episode #135 – Ticket Driven Agile appeared first on Episode #135 – Ticket Driven Agile appeared first on Episode #134 – Cross Functional? http://integrumtech.com/2014/03/episode-134-cross-functional/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/03/episode-134-cross-functional/#respond Thu, 27 Mar 2014 13:00:50 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7436 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Jake Plains discuss: How to get more cross functional How to overcome the challenges of working with very …

The post Episode #134 – Cross Functional? appeared first on Episode #134 – Cross Functional? appeared first on Episode #133 – Changing too fast or too slow http://integrumtech.com/2014/02/episode-133-changing-fast-slow/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/02/episode-133-changing-fast-slow/#respond Thu, 27 Feb 2014 13:00:36 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7433 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: What is the right pace for change in an organization Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello, welcome …

The post Episode #133 – Changing too fast or too slow appeared first on Episode #133 – Changing too fast or too slow appeared first on Episode #132 – No Surprises! http://integrumtech.com/2014/02/episode-132-surprises/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/02/episode-132-surprises/#respond Thu, 13 Feb 2014 13:00:15 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7430 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Derek Neighbors discuss: No Surprises Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello. Welcome to another episode of the Agile …

The post Episode #132 – No Surprises! appeared first on Episode #132 – No Surprises! appeared first on Episode #131 – Autonomy, autonomy, autonomy. http://integrumtech.com/2014/02/episode-131-autonomy-autonomy-autonomy/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/02/episode-131-autonomy-autonomy-autonomy/#respond Thu, 06 Feb 2014 13:00:12 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7427 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, and Derek Neighbors discuss: Autonomy Autonomy Even more autonomy Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello, and welcome to the Agile Weekly …

The post Episode #131 – Autonomy, autonomy, autonomy. appeared first on Episode #131 – Autonomy, autonomy, autonomy. appeared first on Episode #130 – Roles, huh, yeah. What are they good for? http://integrumtech.com/2014/01/episode-130-roles-huh-yeah-good/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/01/episode-130-roles-huh-yeah-good/#respond Fri, 31 Jan 2014 13:00:07 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7424 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors and Alan Dayley discuss: Roles Collective Ownership Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of …

The post Episode #130 – Roles, huh, yeah. What are they good for? appeared first on Episode #130 – Roles, huh, yeah. What are they good for? appeared first on Instant BDD/TDD Feedback With BlinkyTape http://integrumtech.com/2014/01/instant-bdd-tdd-feedback-with-blinky-tape/ http://integrumtech.com/2014/01/instant-bdd-tdd-feedback-with-blinky-tape/#respond Sat, 11 Jan 2014 07:05:30 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7399 Roy and I were trying to figure out something cool to do with a Blink(1) when we had a great insight: What if we could …

The post Instant BDD/TDD Feedback With BlinkyTape appeared first on Roy and I were trying to figure out something cool to do with a Blink(1) when we had a great insight:

What if we could instantly see the status of our automatic test build without having to tab out of our editor?

For our Ruby on Rails projects we use Guard to monitor file changes and instantly run our specs. We had previously written the initial tmux notifier and using other notifiers that guard provides, yet it wasn’t quite good enough. We practice ping-pong pairing and red-green-refactor in extremely tiny iterations, there is a lot of tabbing out of the editor to check the status of guard.

We wanted to know at a glance: Has it even started running yet? What was the previous status? Is it running a focused spec or the whole spec suite?

Unfortunately the Blink(1) was out of stock (and still is as of this writing), which made it hard to replicate on other machines and spread to more teams. I kickstarted the BlinkyTape project and it recently shipped. The BlinkyTape is even more amazing, and much more visible. We wrote an Arduino sketch, a ruby gem, and an easy way to integrate guard.

We have quickly become addicted to this setup and find it slow and difficult to work without it. I can’t wait to see what amazing ideas others have.

Here are some sample shots of what it looks like in action.

ready

single_was_passing

failed_was_passing

passed_was_failing

all_was_failing

all_passed_was_failing

looks_great

The post Instant BDD/TDD Feedback With BlinkyTape appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=7387 A little while back I was talking with one of our clients and happened to show him a copy of our company values.  He said, …

The post The Value of Values appeared first on Integrum Values and Principles

  • We value courage. Be transparent with our team and our clients. Have the strength to say what they need to hear, not what they want to hear, but be open to other people’s feedback and opinions.
  • We value dreams. Dream big. Empower others to achieve their goals, maximize their potential, and change the world.
  • We value love. Care for people enough to help them see their potential. Confront conflict head on, and commit to resolving it and strengthening your relationship.
  • We value family. Treat each person on our team as a family member. Trust them, confide in them, and support them without fail.
  • We value excellence. Demand the best from each other and our clients. Never settle for mediocrity.

The post The Value of Values appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=7382 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Jade Meskill discuss refactoring your Ask For Help to get better results.

The post Episode #129 – Ask For Help Refactoring appeared first on Episode #129 – Ask For Help Refactoring appeared first on Episode #128 – Smaller Teams http://integrumtech.com/2013/12/episode-128-smaller-teams/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/12/episode-128-smaller-teams/#respond Thu, 12 Dec 2013 13:00:16 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7377 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Jade Meskill discuss the benefits of smaller teams.   Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello, welcome to the …

The post Episode #128 – Smaller Teams appeared first on Episode #128 – Smaller Teams appeared first on Episode #127 – Do we need frameworks? http://integrumtech.com/2013/12/episode-127-need-frameworks-2/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/12/episode-127-need-frameworks-2/#respond Thu, 05 Dec 2013 13:00:30 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7375 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors, and Jade Meskill discuss the need for frameworks.   Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello. Welcome to another episode of the …

The post Episode #127 – Do we need frameworks? appeared first on Episode #127 – Do we need frameworks? appeared first on Episode #126 – Prescriptive Coaching? http://integrumtech.com/2013/11/episode-126-prescriptive-coaching/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/11/episode-126-prescriptive-coaching/#respond Thu, 14 Nov 2013 13:00:36 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7365 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Jade Meskill discuss trying a different approach to get a high performing team. Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello. Welcome …

The post Episode #126 – Prescriptive Coaching? appeared first on Episode #126 – Prescriptive Coaching? appeared first on Episode #125 – Being Lazy http://integrumtech.com/2013/11/episode-125-lazy/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/11/episode-125-lazy/#respond Thu, 07 Nov 2013 13:00:15 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7363 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, and Jade Meskill discuss the benefits of laziness. Transcript   Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of …

The post Episode #125 – Being Lazy appeared first on Episode #125 – Being Lazy appeared first on Episode #124 – Automate it http://integrumtech.com/2013/10/episode-124-automate/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/10/episode-124-automate/#respond Thu, 24 Oct 2013 13:00:44 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7356 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Jade Meskill discuss why everything that can be automated, should be automated. Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello. …

The post Episode #124 – Automate it appeared first on Episode #124 – Automate it appeared first on Episode #123 – Standards vs Innovation http://integrumtech.com/2013/10/episode-123-standards-vs-innovation/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/10/episode-123-standards-vs-innovation/#respond Thu, 10 Oct 2013 13:00:35 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7346 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, and Jade Meskill discuss standardization and the effect it has on innovation. Jade Meskill: Welcome to the …

The post Episode #123 – Standards vs Innovation appeared first on Episode #123 – Standards vs Innovation appeared first on Episode #122 – Multitasking and Multiple Commitments http://integrumtech.com/2013/10/episode-122-multitasking-and-multiple-commitments/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/10/episode-122-multitasking-and-multiple-commitments/#respond Thu, 03 Oct 2013 13:00:12 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7338 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Jade Meskill discuss the danger of multitasking. [music] Jade Meskill: Hello, welcome to the “Agile Weekly Podcast”. I’m …

The post Episode #122 – Multitasking and Multiple Commitments appeared first on Episode #122 – Multitasking and Multiple Commitments appeared first on Episode #121 – Ask For Help http://integrumtech.com/2013/09/episode-121-ask-for-help/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/09/episode-121-ask-for-help/#respond Wed, 25 Sep 2013 13:00:49 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7333 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Jade Meskill discuss asking for help Why you should ask for help Rescuing people who won’t ask for …

The post Episode #121 – Ask For Help appeared first on Episode #121 – Ask For Help appeared first on Episode #120 – Presence over Planning http://integrumtech.com/2013/09/episode-120-presence-over-planning/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/09/episode-120-presence-over-planning/#respond Thu, 19 Sep 2013 13:00:25 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7335 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Jim McCarthy discuss presence over planning.   Transcript Jade Meskill:  If only I knew… …

The post Episode #120 – Presence over Planning appeared first on Episode #120 – Presence over Planning appeared first on Episode #119 – Slowing Things Down http://integrumtech.com/2013/09/episode-119-slowing-things-down/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/09/episode-119-slowing-things-down/#respond Thu, 05 Sep 2013 13:00:14 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7320 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, and Derek Neighbors discuss: How to deal with people who want to slow things down. Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello, …

The post Episode #119 – Slowing Things Down appeared first on Episode #119 – Slowing Things Down appeared first on Episode #118 – Having Fun at Work http://integrumtech.com/2013/08/episode-118-having-fun-at-work/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/08/episode-118-having-fun-at-work/#respond Thu, 29 Aug 2013 13:00:15 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7315 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich and David Foster discuss: Can you have fun at work? What if your org. culture doesn’t support fun? How …

The post Episode #118 – Having Fun at Work appeared first on Episode #118 – Having Fun at Work appeared first on Episode #117 – Product Owner as the Customer http://integrumtech.com/2013/08/episode-117-product-owner-as-the-customer/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/08/episode-117-product-owner-as-the-customer/#respond Wed, 21 Aug 2013 13:00:24 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7311 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Derek Neighbors discuss: A common pattern of teams with many masters. The Product Owner as the Customer and …

The post Episode #117 – Product Owner as the Customer appeared first on Episode #117 – Product Owner as the Customer appeared first on Episode #116 – What ever happened to XP? http://integrumtech.com/2013/08/episode-116-what-ever-happened-to-xp/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/08/episode-116-what-ever-happened-to-xp/#respond Thu, 08 Aug 2013 13:00:42 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7308 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, and Derek Neighbors discuss: What happened to eXtreme Programming? Vacation Transcript Jade Meskill:  Hello, and welcome to another episode …

The post Episode #116 – What ever happened to XP? appeared first on Episode #116 – What ever happened to XP? appeared first on Episode #115 – Commitment Considered Harmful? http://integrumtech.com/2013/07/episode-115/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/07/episode-115/#respond Thu, 25 Jul 2013 13:00:04 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7303 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors and Jade Meskill discuss an article that was published on Agile Weekly this week: Commitment Considered Harmful …

The post Episode #115 – Commitment Considered Harmful? appeared first on Agile Weekly this week: Commitment Considered Harmful

 

Transcript

Jade:  Hello, welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast, I’m Jade Meskill.

Derek:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

Clayton:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zegich

Roy:  And I’m Roy Van De Water.

Jade:  Guys, today we wanted to talk about an article that will be published in Agile Weekly tomorrow.

Roy:  Product tie in there.

[laughter]

Jade:  Subscribe to the Agile Weekly Newsletter at AgileWeekly.com. Written by Allan Kelly, the title is, Commitment Considered Harmful. I know we have no opinions or thoughts about this, so this might be a very boring podcast.

Roy:  I’m curious, why is commitment considered harmful? By who, maybe is a better question?

Jade:  Allen has to say that he has seen through some of his interactions with clients and other people, that…this is a quote from him. Commitment protocol for filling an iteration is actively damaging for software development teams in anything other than the very short‑run.

Derek, you’re shaking your head.

Derek:  I don’t know. Maybe it’s too many years of therapy coming out.

Jade:  Too few?

[laughter]

Derek:  If I follow the trail…when I first saw this article, I immediately thought that it was part of the no estimates crowd shtick of stuff.

Jade:  He specifically states that he does not follow the no‑estimates crowd.

Derek:  Yeah, but I certainly thought it was going down that route. What I tend to see is this pattern of, there’s something, there’s something, there’s something, and it’s all rooted in two things. Every software manager is evil and the people will manipulate the system or me.

To me, going back to McCarthy’s core protocols and the perfect boss, I expect to work in a place with fucking adults. At some point, how long can we basically say, the boss might manipulate me? Well then go to a fricking job that doesn’t have a boss that manipulates you.

That’s got nothing to do with commitment. The boss that’s manipulating you with commitment or estimates is going to manipulate you if you don’t have commitment or estimates either, because they’re a manipulating asshole.

Roy:  Yeah, that argument’s just too broad. You can replace whatever with, there’s this thing that some people have used, so you don’t do it.

Jade:  Let’s step back a second, though. We do a lot of consulting. We’ve been to a lot of companies. How many have you showed up at that are full of fully functioning adults?

Derek:  Not a ton, but I think my problem is attack that problem. Don’t attack the lack of commitment as being a problem. I hear commitment. I hear estimates. I hear accountability. I hear all of these things.

The very first thing that was thrown out here is, “Well, you can’t have commitment, because people will game it.” Well, people will game anything. So if you have a culture that is OK with people gaming things.

Roy:  We talked about it in the past that‑‑what is it? I think, Jade, you quoted somebody that said, “96% of a person’s ability to self‑improve is dictated by the system.” Do you remember who that was?

Jade:  W. Edwards Deming.

Roy:  There you go. That may be the same problem in this case. What if it is a culture of a commitment that is holding these people back from becoming the adults they can? Because they are currently being rewarded for making false commitments or for gaming the system.

Derek:  Right. I would argue that in that point they’re not really making commitments. The word ‘commitment’ is being bastardized to control somebody to say, “You have to tell me how much you’re going to do,” and then I’m going to threaten you, or lord over you, or manipulate you.

Jade:  They’d beat you with a stick.

Derek:  Beat you with a stick, beyond that. Well, to me, that’s not a commitment. A commitment is me saying what I really can believe, and me truly believing in that and doing that. That’s not somebody else saying, “Hey, Jade. I want you to commit to mowing my lawn tomorrow. All sorts of bad things are going to happen if you don’t mow my lawn. You’re OK with that, right? Your job is depending on it. You’re OK with it?”

I feel like to me, that’s not a fair thing for commitments, or for estimates, or for anything else.

Jade:  No. I think that what we would argue if we were working with a team, and they said, “Well, we’re doing commitments.” I think from our point of view, we would say, “OK. Why don’t you look at the work that you do?” Maybe the team, they look at one story, and they say, “This is all we can do.”

The manager, I think the way that people abuse commitment, and say, “Hey, you guys have 150 hours over the next sprint, that all you are going to be working on this.” You have to have 150 hours of work to do.

I think we would say, “If you want to commit to doing 20 hours of work, and that’s all you want to commit to, that’s all your going to commit to.” That’s an acceptable scenario, as far as I think we’re concerned with how commitment works. That’s now how most people… Bad managers aren’t going to abuse that, and so that comes out his commitment is bad.

Derek:  What about the idea though, if you’re feeling rushed, and that making the commitment is the most important thing above all else, like keeping to your word, the idea that you allow quality to suffer because of that. That you might choose to take some shortcuts or to cut some corners, because you are trying to push it out the door.

You don’t necessarily do all the good practices that you want to have, and maintain a quality suffer project. Those things will buildup over time to create a ton of technical debt that you can no longer maintain.

Jade:  Yeah. That’s just part of, I think, if you’re committing to doing something and you have some standard for what it needs to be done. If the standard of done means half‑assed, then, OK, fine. No, that’s not really how you want standard done.

I think that is part of the bigger picture of, “What does it mean to be done?” If we’re going to rush through something, are we really done? Did we really “hit our commitment”? Probably not.

Derek:  I think that it’s kind of the straw man out there, right? People like to throw it out. I see so many teams that have no sense of commitment that have really crappy quality.

Like to me, those things are not linked. I think what happens is when somebody is forcing you to the trough to drink water and really just slams your head in, you’re going to do stupid things. But I don’t think that’s because commitment is bad.

I would say that a team that is truly committed and committed in everything they do, they say, “Hey, we’re going to have…we’re going to write tests first. We’re going to make sure that our product owner is happy with the work that we’re doing. We’re going to commit to all these things and we’re going to commit to do what we say we’re going to do.”

You can’t say, “We finished everything, but it doesn’t meet the product owner’s requirements and it’s not tested and it’s not…” because at that point you don’t have a commitment either.

Jade:  But technically, it’s done.

Derek:  I know…

Jade:  The way you said, the phrase, “Do what you say you’re going to do.” I think that was a big shift that we had an [sp] integrim of the concept. It sounds so simple, right? Do you what you say you’re going to do.

I think that’s really to me is what commitment means. I’m going to say I’m going to do something and then, I’m going to do it, but that’s not easy.

Derek:  No. It’s not easy and I think commitment isn’t easy. Like committed to do something is difficult, right? But it doesn’t have to be this, you know, abusive tool.

Jade:  I think to me the thing that I really love about Agile when it’s done really, really well is it becomes the truth killer. So if you can go around and say, “My team is so awesome. I’m so awesome,” and all this stuff and make all these promises and never, ever fulfill them like you’re just a lying piece of crap.

Who can trust you? Whereas, if you say, “Hey, I can only do this really, really small thing,” but I think a lot of developers have problems with this because when they say, “Oh yeah, I can do this. I do this,” and somebody says, “OK, so you’re committing to that and I’m going to kind of hold you to that. Let’s talk about it at the end,” and then, you can’t do it.

The developer doesn’t say, “Man, maybe I think I’m way full of myself and I should not commit to nearly as much, less time, next time. I should commit to half of that, because I didn’t even get close.”

Instead they say, “Well, the problem was this and the problem was that.” Everybody else in the world was the problem and it wasn’t me.

I think that’s just…if you’re honest with yourself about wanting to improve and you really want feedback, the only way you can do that is to measure yourself. So if you’re not saying, “I think I can do X,” and then, going out and doing it and measuring can you do it, how the hell can you improve?

Derek:  So we can go from the standpoint of commitment adds at least some level of stress to the…

Jade:  True, it does.

Derek:  …to the developer, right? Because now they are kind of freaking out about this promise that they made and trying to keep it. But what positive benefit does a commitment actually get?

If I’m a developer making a commitment, what benefit do I get by, other than stressing out about it? Is that stressing out, is that the benefit that I get? That I get more accurate at estimating sounds, I get more accurate at committing sounds great.

But getting better at committing if committing itself doesn’t give me any value, am I just getting better at something that doesn’t matter?

Jade:  I think you can build some trust. Or if you say you’re going to do something and you do it and you repeat that multiple times, you can build some trust that when you say you’ll do something, you’ll do it.

I think, it also is a discipline thing. Having a commitment, I think, helps you be disciplined. Discipline, I think, is a very difficult thing to have in software development.

A lot of teams lack that and I think that’s just another mechanism that helps reinforce that.

Derek:  I think the other thing is commitment is a two‑way street. It’s not just the developer who’s committed. The idea is that I’m saying, “I will do this if you don’t bring in anything else to me to do during this period.”

Jade:  Like the [sp] Schrum?

Derek:  Yeah. I mean, I think it’s part of the whole contract. So when people say, “Like we do Schrum, but we don’t do this and we don’t do any of this stuff.” It’s like, “Well, how can you even live up to the basic premise of Schrum, which was we’re going to agree to do X, Y, Z, you agree to leave us alone?”

One of the things I’ll add is any developer out there that thinks that estimates, commitments, everything else are horse crap, come work for me and let’s talk about how we pay you. Is every week I’ll decide what we pay you?

I’m not going to tell you what you get paid until after you’ve done the work and it’s entirely negotiable up to me whether I think you deserve the money or not. You may get money. You many not get money and you’re going to be happy about it.

That’s what you do to every damn product owner you work with when you have no ability to say, “This is what you’re getting.” They’re spending money on you. They are giving money to you to do a job.

If you don’t do what you say you can do, and you continue to extend…this is why so many companies have problems is contractors or independent third‑party companies where they get to the point where they’ve not delivered what they said they were going to deliver and everybody ends up pissed off and everybody gets sued.

This is why this happens. I think it’s almost juvenile or naive to think, “Why can’t we just meander and do whatever we want and you just pay us?”

Man 2:  This state of affairs would be totally unacceptable in just about every other industry.

Derek:  Sure, it would be.

Jade:  What is it about software development that allows people to think that that’s OK?

Derek:  It’s creative. It’s an art. It’s an unknown magic. I give money to this group of people that have weird social habits. That I do not understand and I have never experienced them before. They do some magic.

The type of the keyboard and magic happens. Then, they have this thing that I cannot possibly understand how it works. I could never possibly do it myself. I couldn’t learn how to do it.

So, I just have to keep appeasing the magic over here.

Jade:  But this happens to people that do understand that world as well.

Derek:  That goes back to the hope thing, then, right? If people are hoping that…at the beginning of this, you could have the worst possible sprint and have a retrospective where you’re talking about all these terrible things.

A lot of times when the sprint planning starts the next time, it’s like, “OK, we have a clean slate. Everything’s in the air for this time. Everyone is very hopeful.”

Because people want to be hopeful, right? They want to think that this time’s going to be different. So they repeat the same mistakes.

Jade:  Robo Roy did you have something to say?

Roy:  If I hold this is in, maybe it’ll get better. It’s getting better.

I think that’s one of our things is we don’t see ourselves as developers. Often times, it’s somebody delivering a service of some kind and having an output. I think failure is OK.

I think it’s entirely OK, but the failure shouldn’t be that we aren’t able to deliver something. It’s whether what we deliver or not necessarily is usable or meaningful, right?

We should be able to deliver something that somebody can learn from. The business should get something at the end that they can put into practice and say like, “Oh, this is right or this is wrong.”

Derek:  Do y’all know the [inaudible] you’re saying?

Roy:  Yeah.

Derek:  I’m just going to sell it now.

Roy:  I think ultimately we just…as practitioners if we could do what we say we’re going to do, that would go so much further than where we currently are today, it’s not even funny.

Jade:  So how do we get there? We’ve got two minutes to solve this problem.

Derek:  Hey, I didn’t commit to anything. I would say the best thing that I think works for teams if they want to improve commitment is basically really take a deep dive in look at what it means to do what you say you’re going to do and also, understand that you can say you’re going to do smaller things than other people want you to do.

I can commit to less work than people want me to commit to and if I can do that and have success and build and learn and inspect it to death and improve, I think that is a better long‑term outcome than basically lying every time and not ever fulfilling my promises.

Jade:  Is that part of the major problem?

Roy:  Yes.

Jade:  Is that people can’t reconcile that fact?

Jade:  Yes.

Derek:  They don’t feel empowered to say no to those things. Either by themselves or by some other constraint.

Roy:  I think they are stupid on purpose, too. Most teams I see are still doing two week sprints, still doing like…I mean, if you’re not able to do what you say you’re going to do, go to a smaller block of something and say like, “If I say I’m going to do this in the next two hours, can I really do it.”

You’re much better off at failing at doing something in two hours, then you are failing in doing something in 10 days or 15 days.

Derek:  I was working with a team and I ripped down the board and said, “Show me what you can do in one hour.” They couldn’t do it.

Roy:  I think that’s a big problem. I don’t think it’s a matter of not allowing people to be creative or not giving them license to do something.

I think in teams that are high‑performing, they are not doing a bunch of planning. They are not doing a bunch of estimating, but they don’t need to because if they say, “Hey, we can deliver you something kick‑ass in four weeks.”

There’s trust that they’re going to do it in four weeks. I don’t have to think twice about it, right? Where you have to get into the legalism of things are when there is absolutely no trust.

The problem is the only way to build trust is to do what you say you’re going to do. Until you can do that, you’re screwed.

Jade:  Tell us what you guys think about commitments. Any experiences that you’ve had with teams or yourself, failures to commit, all of these things.

You can find us on Twitter @Agileweekly, and on Facebook, facebook.com/agileweekly. Talk to you next week.

[music]

Announcer 1:  If there is something you would like to here on a future episode, get over to intergramtech.com/podcast where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques and events in the Agile community, sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly for free.

The Agile weekly podcast is brought to you by Integram Technologies and recorded in Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out integramtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

Announcer 2:  Need help with your Agile transition? Have a question and need to phone a friend? Try calling the Agile hotline. It’s free. Call 866‑244‑8656.

The post Episode #115 – Commitment Considered Harmful? appeared first on Episode #114 – Sprint Failure http://integrumtech.com/2013/07/episode-114-sprint-failure/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/07/episode-114-sprint-failure/#respond Thu, 11 Jul 2013 13:00:37 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7296 Roy van de Water and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: What is a failed sprint? How should the team react? What should the team demo? What should …

The post Episode #114 – Sprint Failure appeared first on Episode #114 – Sprint Failure appeared first on Episode #113 – High Costs and Negative Value of Pair Programming http://integrumtech.com/2013/07/episode-113-high-costs-and-negative-value-of-pair-programming/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/07/episode-113-high-costs-and-negative-value-of-pair-programming/#respond Thu, 04 Jul 2013 13:00:42 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7293 Roy van de Water and Clayton Lengel-Zigich provide a rebuttal to an article that has been circulating within the Agile community this week: High Costs …

The post Episode #113 – High Costs and Negative Value of Pair Programming appeared first on High Costs and Negative Value of Pair Programming

 

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the “Agile Weekly Podcast.” I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Roy van de Water:  And I’m Roy van de Water.

Clayton:  Today we’re talking about an article that we came across, it was this week. It’s called the High Costs and Negative Value of Pair Programming. It’s by Capers Jones at the Namcook Analytics blog, we’ll put that in the iTune net.

Basically, it’s, like a white paper almost, about why pair programming is harmful, and it’s not really a good idea, and you shouldn’t do it, or at least, you shouldn’t do it yet, until you do lots of research about it. It struck a chord, I guess. We came across the post on Twitter, and it kind of generated some buzz on there. Then, we talked about it internally, so we were hoping to share our ideas.

The first point that I thought was, that resonated with me was the author makes mention that para‑programming is something that came out of the non‑scientific. It wasn’t measured very well in the Agile community. I would probably give him that, that the Agile community has lots of things that we do that are not necessarily based on hard scientific evidence, a lot of its just anecdotal experience. That’s probably a fair statement.

Roy:  It becomes very difficult, too, though. I think we’ve had something that we’ve run into in the past, right? Where it becomes, because of the nature of every team being different, different projects being different, the codes bases being different, like a lot of the para‑programming and not just para‑programming, a lot of the types of practices that teams are experiencing with are very difficult to measure in a scientific way. It’s very difficult to have a control group that’s identical except for this one variable.

Clayton:  The thing that was…while I agree with that general idea that the Agile community is very unscientific about how they measure things, I felt the way that they went on about, goes without measuring things in the article was kind of lame because they just made up a bunch of stuff and put it in Excel it seems like. I don’t know. My guess is you have to take a healthy grain of salt.

Roy:  The thing that I thought was most interesting in the beginning is that the author tries to make the point that there are a lot of different scenarios about para‑programming that were not considered in most cases. He goes through all these different examples of single programmers using static analysis versus expert single programmers compared to average pairs and novice pairs compared to all these ten different permutations of all these different things.

Which, I guess, there are probably not many organizations that have all of these things and they are only going to have two or three at most. I thought it was odd that you go so far out of your way to make a big point of not comparing all these things, especially when there probably isn’t a whole lot of opportunity to compare them all?

Clayton:  I thought the static analysis bit was interesting because he specifically talks about the number of defects that a single programmer using static analysis produces versus two pair of programming produce. I think the ratio is something like a single programmer using static analysis develops one defect for every 15 that the pair programmers develop? I guess maybe I don’t understand what static analysis is, because I don’t understand. Do you mind explaining real quick?

Roy:  The idea that static analysis is going to evaluate your code and find defects for you? I have written plenty of defects that static analysis wouldn’t have caught. There’re plenty of things that static analysis would tell you that wouldn’t be defect that you could spend a bunch of time fixing. That seems like it’s just a silly thing to even bring up.

Static analysis can be important and it can hint you in the right direction and help you find different things with your code. The idea that it’s like this great tool for finding defects or even a tool for finding defects seems like a stretch.

Moving on, another downside the author states for pair programming is that it won’t scale. The example that he gives is a huge software project with 500 engineers. How could you get them to pair? How could you hire another 500 more people? Which seems odd, because any software project that had 500 people working on the same thing that sounds like a nightmare, no matter what you’re doing.

Clayton:  Right. Exactly. You are going to have so many people doing many random things and wasting a ton of time, even pair programming at that point when you have a project that big, it becomes unmanageable.

Roy:  If it’s 500 people across an entire organization all working on different things, then you could still pair. There’s nothing that says you couldn’t, the idea that it wouldn’t scale? That seems kind of silly.

Clayton:  That’s the mindset difference, right? Because he’s thinking from the perspective of “I have 500 people and I need to maintain my current productivity level, which means I have to hire 500 more.” Instead of saying, “I have 500 people and that means I have 250 pairs.”

Roy:  That’s a good point. Kind of the next thing that is the problem with pair programming is why hasn’t this been tried with other business functions or other job functions? They talk about architects and BAs and testers and all these other things which, if you talk to those who are actually doing pair programming, they have tried to do some form of pairing with people who are not just software developers.

This one stuck out to me as someone that has kind of betrayed the experience the author has with pair programming and the idea that no one has tried that before.

Clayton:  In fact, in my experience, the biggest gains from pair programming come when you have the most different types of experiences combining. Say, you have a graphic designer and a programmer, or something like…as different as possible.

Because, if you put two people that are almost identical in front of a computer, the most you’re going to get out of it is maybe a slightly lower defect rate, because one of them is proofreading what the other one is writing.

But, if you have two people that have totally different ways of approaching the problem that gives the pair a greater diversity of options to choose from, and it makes it more likely that they might pick the right one.

Roy:  The thing that struck me as the biggest bullshit indicator of the whole article was that one of the measurements that’s used in this calculation is lines of code. The measurement is how fast is an expert single programmer, based on how many lines of code they write?

That’s what is used in all the economic calculations. I wouldn’t doubt that pair programming is probably more expensive, and probably slower, than single people working on things, but that’s entirely ignoring all the other benefits that you can get.

If you’re just doing lines of code, if you’re working on a software project that all that matters is that you’re just pumping out lines of code, then just hire a bunch of monkeys and they can just pound on the keyboard. You don’t need pair programming at that point.

It seemed like an odd comparison. I would even say that if your software project is so simple that you can just crank out lines of code, then you probably don’t get any benefit from pairing as far as collaboration, or redundancy or anything.

Clayton:  You probably don’t get any benefit from collaboration of any form. You should probably just outsource, and try to get your code written as cheap as possible.

Roy:  Right, because if all it really takes is that you just are pumping out code, then you can just replace that person with someone else, and it doesn’t matter. But, that’s not the case, I think, in most software organizations.

Clayton:  I was going to say, how many projects are actually out there where you can just put anybody in front of it and pump out code?

Roy:  A lot of people try and do that, especially, I would say, shops that are doing outsourced software development, where they’re solving the same problem multiple times. They probably do just have a set way of doing things, where they could get pretty close to just pumping things out, and it doesn’t really matter who’s working on it.

But, for most organizations that are developing either products for customers or developing products for internal customers, where there is a need for that collaboration and giving some creativity, and having that redundancy, so that you don’t have the single point of failure with the one person who knows everything…

Clayton:  That’s true. That’s one thing that’s not really acknowledged all that much. I believe one of the lines in that article states something about like, “If you look at the data in Table three, you can clearly see that the most efficient course of action is to hire a bunch of individual expert programmers.”

If you’ve followed many of our podcasts in the past, then you’ll know that that does not really fly very well with the way we like to work, and that that sets organizations up for failure, because you end up with all of these single point of failure where if any one of them…Each one is a link in the chain, and if anyone is gone, then the organization falls apart.

Roy:  The single expert programmer is usually a hero and a cowboy. They are the ones that are going to stay up until 3:00 AM heroing some solution for some problem, and then they’re going to cowboy‑code their way…

Clayton:  They’re pumping out lots of lines of code.

Roy:  Yeah, exactly, and they’re going to cowboy‑code their way through everything else.

If you ask any IT hiring manager, the idea that you can just go pluck expert programmers off the street…which, to the author’s credit, he does make the point that that probably only makes up about 10 percent of the hiring pool that’s available, the programming talent.

I feel like that advice is…”You should only hire expert programmers” is like telling your little sister, “You should only date guys that are really nice to you, and that are financially secure, and that treat you with respect.” That’s not going to be everybody in the world. That’s probably not very good advice, right?

Clayton:  I don’t want my sister dating everybody in the world, though.

Roy:  I agree, but the idea that a hiring manager is just going to go out there and find some expert programmer and say, “Hey, we can solve all of our problems by hiring three of you, instead of having a few pairs.” That seems silly.

Clayton:  It’s short‑sighted, too, to think of things in terms of moving faster because you have a pair, because it’s a single person moving faster. If you have a single person making poor decisions, and maybe moving very quickly but creating this monstrosity that’s going to be impossible to maintain, sure, you’re moving faster for now, for the next few weeks.

But then, all of a sudden, when defects come in or change requirements come in or whatever, and you start needing to adapt the system to meet the new demand, that’s all of a sudden when things start to slow down, because you didn’t slow down to begin with.

Roy:  Yeah. The way that the example is set up in the article, it’s very tipped in favor of the single programmer, and not in favor of a more, I would say, real‑world scenario, or at least a scenario that we see with our clients that have a dynamic application or a legacy system, or they’re trying to build a new product.

They need lots of creativity, and they need that collaboration, so that they can get lots of different ideas, and so that there’s the redundancy. Those are the things they need. They don’t need people just pumping out code.

Clayton:  That’s, I think, we see in almost every organization that I’ve ever worked with. The biggest problem has always been with figuring out what to build. Not building something quickly. Building something as fast as possible has never been the issue.

Roy:  I would say the other thing, I think, that we see a lot is there are scenarios where saving money is a beneficial thing. I think this article comes from the standpoint, the fact that they bring it up in the very beginning, that Agile is sort of not very good with economics.

Or at least, that’s the claim they’re making. Drives to the point, I think, where all they really care about is the bottom line. Which, you know, I think if you spend enough time in the community you realize that going faster and more better, faster, cheaper. That line, which is, I think, how a lot of people view Agile, maybe Scrum especially.

Clayton:  And Lean as well.

Roy:  Especially with Scrum, if we can do Scrum, then our teams will be faster. They’ll be cheaper. They’ll be better or whatever. If that’s the only thing you’re driving for then I think this article is appealing to you. If all you care about are dollars and cents.

Clayton:  Maybe Agile isn’t for you if you’re doing that.

Roy:  Right, and that’s why I would say that you probably don’t even have the culture in your organization to support para‑programming if all you care about is the bottom line. Because there’s no way you could look at a pair versus a single person and determine that, “Oh, the pair is more expensive, but that’s OK.”

That’s not going to be your mindset. You’re going to think of them as, “This pair is more expensive,” and you’re not going to see the benefits that you get from para‑programming. So you’re just going to ignore out of hand which is who this article appeals to.

Clayton:  Actually, it’s a huge disparity between thinking of these things as just a set of processes and tips and tricks to try to make things more efficient or to make things better, rather than looking at it as a value system, where you are completely changing the way that the human beings within your organization interact.

Roy:  You’re changing the way that people will write that software.

Clayton:  Right.

Roy:  The closing point about divided work. I thought this was just another one to seem kind of ridiculous out of hand as well. I don’t think there’s anything that you could compare between para‑programming, two people sitting down writing software like a software feature. I don’t think that’s comparable to military command whatsoever other than the fact that there are two people.

The idea that you would say, “Divided work can be harmful because look at these examples of things that don’t work.” They’re not the same thing. It’s apples and oranges at that point.

Clayton:  Let’s look at it from the perspective of decision making ability, right? Where if you have two people sitting in front of a computer and they have to make a decision? They could potentially argue about it for half an hour to an hour. In the software development world, like arguing about something for half an hour to an hour is not big deal. But, I could understand in the military engagement that might be a huge problem.

Roy:  Right. [indecipherable 13:04] means software is malleable, right?

Clayton:  Right.

Roy:  You and I could sit down and para‑program and we could come up with some solution. Then, maybe we go away for the weekend, we talk to some friend and they mention something that triggers an idea. We can come back and change that. There’s nothing. You can’t change sending your tanks into battle, and you can’t just do over. There’s no undo.

Clayton:  But, it is pretty common to see, especially large groups get crippled by shared indecision. It’s like everybody wants to go in a different direction.

I can definitely see that extending all the way down to pairs as well, where two people with fundamentally different mindsets want to go in different directions. But, I think that ends up being a much large organizational problem in that probably speaks towards a lack of shared vision for the project.

Because of everybody is on the same page where their project’s headed, then the implementation details of going one direction or another, if they’re both headed in the same way, it doesn’t become as much of an argument.

Roy:  I’ve seen that on teams where pairs will have very…especially, if you get two people that are very strong willed. They will have very different ideas of how the system should be architected or whatever the case may be.

But, when the team doesn’t have trust and they don’t have collective code ownership with standards, that’s when you get people who say, “We should use this library.” Then, the other person says, “No, we should use that one,” when really it’s the team that should basically be figuring out, “When we have to solve this kind of problem, we’re going to do it this way.”

[crosstalk]

Roy:  Once you get over that problem, and you say, I think a great example that we always have with the old Integram was authentication stuff. There are 50 different ways you could do authentication and rails. We picked one and that was how we did authentication. That solved the problem of two people pairing and saying, “Well, my pet library that I think is really great is this one.”

Then, the other person saying, “No, no, no. We should do this way.” Then, it was you had two different ways in this project that were inconsistent with what the team thought was the standard, if you can get over those kinds of things. That’s how you can solve some of those problems that they might seem like problems with pairing, but I don’t think they really are.

Clayton:  That’s true. I think every single one of the items you listed really speaks towards larger organizational problems that have absolutely nothing to do with pairing. Like if these are the things, if these are reasons why you don’t want to do pairing, then maybe you shouldn’t be doing pairing yet because your organization is not ready and your organization needs some significant changes before you do.

Roy:  If you’re totally swayed by the economic argument, then you’re missing all the other benefits that you get. If that’s where you are then you’re not ready to be awesome. If I put my Derek hat on for a second, I would say, “It’s expensive and it’s difficult to be awesome and if you’re going to fall back on some excuse about how it’s too expensive with all these kind of bullshit calculators that you wrote in excel, then too bad. You don’t get a taste of the awesome.”

Clayton:  Fair enough.

Roy:  Thanks. See you next time.

Clayton:  Bye‑bye.

[music]

Announcer 1:  If there is something you’d like to hear in a future episode, get over to integramtech.com/podcast where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Announcer 2:  Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques and events in the Agile community? Sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly for free.

Announcer 1:  The Agile Weekly Podcast is brought to you by Integram Technologies and recorded in Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out integramtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

Announcer 2:  Need help with your Agile transition? Have a question and need to phone a friend? Try calling the Agile hotline. It’s free. Call 866‑244‑8656.

The post Episode #113 – High Costs and Negative Value of Pair Programming appeared first on Episode #112 – 7 Agile Best Practices that You Don’t Need to Follow http://integrumtech.com/2013/06/episode-112-7-agile-best-practices-that-you-dont-need-to-follow/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/06/episode-112-7-agile-best-practices-that-you-dont-need-to-follow/#respond Thu, 20 Jun 2013 13:00:48 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7287 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss an article that has been making the rounds in the Agile community this week: 7 …

The post Episode #112 – 7 Agile Best Practices that You Don’t Need to Follow appeared first on 7 Agile Best Practices that You Don’t Need to Follow

 

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast. I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

Clayton:  Today, we will be talking about the much talked about Seven Agile Best Practices That You Don’t Necessarily Need To Do article. If you haven’t read it, it’s on the Agile DZone. It’s called Seven Agile Best Practices That You Don’t Need To Follow by Jim Bird.

We’re going to talk a few minutes on each of these. First one is test‑driven development. That’s one that somehow became synonymous with Agile teams, that Agile teams do TDD. What do you guys think? Do you have to do TDD?

Derek:  No.

Roy:  Yeah, I’m going to say that.

Clayton:  [laughs] Next. Let’s explore a little bit why that became so pervasive. Why does everyone thing that you have to do TDD if you’re doing Agile?

Derek:  Because there is a difference between Agile and good. So it’s like if you want to be good, you have to do TDD. If you just want to be Agile, like, “Hey, you don’t need to do TDD.”

Roy:  Also, there’s a huge feedback component to Agile, right? It’s all about quick iterations and getting feedback early. I think test driven development is the programming embodiment of that. It’s the idea of asking for feedback before you even start coding and then, gaining feedback as you code towards the failing test.

Clayton:  Do you think it would be fair to say that you would have to do TDD if you were doing extreme programming?

Roy:  Yeah.

Derek:  Yes. I would say you would. I don’t remember his full arguments on this, but I think it comes down to studies say TDD is not as good. If you know what you’re doing, then TDD is good, but if you don’t know. The only time that I really say that TDD should be super optional would be if your start‑up, you’ve got a limited amount of money and you have to meet the next date and slow at TDD because you don’t know how to do it.

If you are competent with TDD, there is no reason not to do it. If you are going to be long‑term with a project, then there’s no reason not to do it.

Roy:  So part of the argument also talks about that statistically there’s an increase in complexity with TDD, oftentimes in terms of design, which I’d have to make assumptions, but I’m assuming it’s based off of probably not knowing how to do TDD properly, like abusing the crap out of mocks and spies and all of those patterns, and creating tests that are really brutally coupled to the specific implementation.

Derek:  It doubles the lines of code, so therefore, it’s got to be twice as complex.

Roy:  Right, when people, when teams get…

Clayton:  Speaking of doubling, pair programming. Do you have to have two people working, do you have to do pairing if you’re on an Agile team?

Roy:  No. I feel like you have to be doing some form of pairing, like it may not necessarily be pair programming. But like people working by themselves, that’s not a team. Like leave Agile alone. Like I feel like a bunch of people working by themselves in isolation is not a team. So I almost feel like there has to be a pairing component in terms of like pair‑planning or pair design or pair…

[crosstalk]

Clayton:  So the only way you can do that is by pairing?

Roy:  No. I suppose not. And I suppose they very specifically mean pair programming.

Derek:  Yeah, because I go to a whole lot of planning meetings that aren’t paired but I think that the people there are co‑creating solutions together.

Roy:  Sure.

Derek:  Again that’s one to me just like TDDing. If you want to be good, you probably should pair. If you want to be Agile, you don’t have to pair.

Roy:  Right. Some of the arguments are for the idea like, that some people don’t like to pair and some people will be slowed down by other people like that.

If I’m really good and Clayton sucks, [sarcastic] using a realistic example, [laughing] then what we would have is like Clayton would be slowing me down all of the time, which I think is kind of the wrong way to think of that, it’s like I’d be teaching Clayton some awesome new stuff that he doesn’t know yet… [crosstalk] …and that’s more important in the long run.

Clayton:  They hit on or he hits on some of other common arguments about introverts versus extroverts and like smashing creativity and you won’t have time to be innovative and all that kind of thing.

Roy:  Like you won’t have the opportunity to go heads down and really solve complex problems but arguably, if you’re pairing properly, you’re turning all your complex problems into simple ones and you don’t end up with those types of huge complex Rube Goldberg solutions.

Derek:  I keep saying that you know the problem with exercising for me is that it leaves less time for eating ice cream and clearly this is a problem.

Clayton:  OK the next one is emerging design and metaphor. One thing I don’t think a lot of people especially kind of the new Agile crowd I don’t think they really have embraced metaphor at all. I don’t ever hear people talking about the importance of metaphor not now at least.

Derek:  So I can’t speak without using metaphors, like I think you have to have metaphors to be Agile.

[crosstalk]

Roy:  They have to be sports metaphors.

Derek:  Not always but usually, just because sexual ones aren’t very you know reasonable to do at work. I will remember a conversation with Chet, I believe about this, and I think they kind of said that XP dropped the metaphor at some point, and I want to say that the reason they dropped it is because it’s too fucking hard to do. Which speaks volumes for the shit that’s really good is hard to do. I think that people throw away the stuff that’s hard to do first.

Clayton:  Like BDD. If you look at that, and you talk about “Let’s have ubiquitous language, and let’s have a shared language.” That’s really difficult. And there are a lot of times where people can’t even think of a way to describe some part of the system, so they just throw it away. [crosstalk] They give it up.

Roy:  Exactly. You almost put it in the box of the metaphor: “Well this doesn’t fit our metaphor, so I guess we can’t do it.”

Clayton:  Right. One thing that he talks about in the article is changing the metaphor, or having to get rid of it, or being pigeonholed by it. If the metaphor is meaningful, I think you can make it work most of the time. If you need to change it, I think you can have a good reason to change it.

Roy:  It’s interesting to pair this up with emergent design because I don’t necessarily put those two in the same box in my head. Emergent design, the idea being “I’m not going to design this entire thing up front. I’m going to be able to build on top of it as it goes on.”

Clayton:  Then that’s some of the fallacy that in Agile you never talk about design. This is, in practice, not true. I think if you go to high‑performing Agile teams, they’re talking a lot about design. They just don’t do the huge design up front stuff. But, they don’t not talk about it.

Roy:  And, it stays flexible the entire time, so nobody’s totally stuck on a particular interpretation…

Derek:  [sarcastically] How are you going to grow your architecture e‑peen if you have emergent design? Now, come on.

Clayton:  There you go.

[crosstalk]

Derek:  I want to back on this one a little bit. Look at some of the most prolific onbaoarding applications of computer history. If you look at Twitter, if you look at Facebook, if you look at some of these companies that have gone from zero users to several hundred million users in a very short period of time, all of their architecture was created using emergent design from a standpoint of they didn’t know what they didn’t know.

I believe there’s an article on this. We’ll try to see if we can get it in the show notes. Twitter had done a ton of performance testing. They had done a ton of load. They had done a ton of stuff where they could deal with literally hundreds of thousands of follows per second happening on the system. What do you know? Ashton Kutcher goes on “David Letterman” and says, “I want to be the first person to a million followers. Everybody go follow me right now.”

Total edge case in, “Yes, we support a hundred thousand users following another user, but we don’t support a hundred thousand people following the same user in a one second time frame.”

How do you deal with those things that come up? You can’t cover every edge case, and I think continuous deployment has moved us to a point where what you’re really doing is saying, “We discover by the feedback the system gets us.” And, we’re able to adapt and deploy so continuously and so quickly, that it doesn’t feel like we have architecture problems. I think this is something that the old‑school, old guard just can’t deal with. It’s like, “No, but we have to get it right the first time!”

Roy:  I kind of feel like if you don’t have some form of emergent design you are, by definition, not doing Agile.

Derek:  You’re screwed!

Roy:  Right? Because, other than the human relationship and that component of it, I feel like the ability to pivot and change your mind as you gain new information is the fundamental core.

Clayton:  What about daily stand‑ups? Roy, you just mentioned the human component. Getting together and talking to other people on the team on a daily basis. Is that something you have to do?

Derek:  Is that what they said? I don’t know the wording. To me, if they said “daily stand‑ups,” no, I don’t think daily stand‑ups are mandatory. Do I think the people on the team need to talk to each other at least one time throughout the day? Yes. I think that is necessary.

Clayton:  To really nit‑pick, I think what they’re really getting at is, “Does everyone have to stand up?”

Roy:  We didn’t. We did an entire episode on whether or not you should stand up during a stand‑up. We came to determine that yes, you should.

Derek:  I think it goes back to “Do you want to be good, or do you want to be Agile?” I think you could be totally Agile without doing any kind of formal stand‑up. I think if you want to be good, it’s just like using a white board versus using a tool. Can you do things without using white board? Sure. But, you get some benefits from the other one that you don’t.

Roy:  I’m guessing that part of this is driven through experiencing bad stand‑ups that are a waste of your time. Because just like any other meeting, you can screw this one up, and make it a total waste of everyone’s time. Where it’s just like a status report, and I go, “Yesterday, I did X, today I’m going to do Y, no blockers.” Nobody is listening to each other. You’re totally defeating the purpose.

Derek:  I see another one too with a lot of teams that are co‑located and within the zone proximity. “We sit next to each other all day long and we pair, so why do we need a stand up? We’ve got a physical board. We sit next to each other. We talk to each other every day. Everybody already knows what everybody is doing. Why the hell do we need to do a stand up every day?”

Clayton:  I think what’s funny is that most the time those people don’t actually know what is happening.

Derek:  No, they don’t. I see that too.

Clayton:  Speaking of everybody knowing everything, what about collective code ownership? Is the idea that everyone can work on any part of the system and everybody knows the system to some degree? Is that a reasonable thing? Or should you say, “It’s OK that Derek doesn’t know how to do this right.”

Derek:  Some people are too dumb to work on parts of the system.

Roy:  Right, they shouldn’t be allowed to work on parts of the system.

Derek:  People won’t say that, but that’s what they’re saying when they say that. “Not everybody is as knowledgeable, not everybody is a god like me.”

Roy:  Actually this article does say something specifically along those lines and not everybody should be allowed to modify parts of the system.

Clayton:  I think what they’re getting at is it’s not realistic that that is the case. It isn’t realistic that everybody on the team can work on any part of the system. To me that sounds like, why is your system so complex?

Derek:  What it sounds to me is why do you hire stupid fucking people? If you have people that you hired to code and you don’t let them go to certain parts of the code because they’re not competent to go to the code, why are they employed by you?

Clayton:  That’s a good point.

Roy:  Or if you don’t let them go into the code because the person that owns that code is extremely territorial over it, then why do you have that territorial person employed, and why are you letting them boss you around?

Derek:  I don’t know if you could be Agile without having collective code ownership. The first time you have to say, “Sorry, Clayton is on vacation, I can’t really deal with this problem.” By default, you are not able to respond.

Clayton:  That’s true. You couldn’t respond to that change right?

We’ve heard that user stories are a representation of a conversation. Why wouldn’t you write every requirement as a user story? Is it un‑Agile to have a requirement on the system that isn’t a user story?

Derek:  This one I think they’re pretty in line with. I think that the multiple formulas that exist out there are really good. I think they help people write good, small parts of the system. I think somebody could go write one or two sentences on a board and still get stuff done just fine, if you have the conversation. I think the actual card and the conversation are far more important than the stories themselves.

Roy:  One of the values of a user story is that it can’t give you enough information to substitute for a conversation. I can’t write a user story that tells you everything you need to know, so you have to come talk to me.

Clayton:  They talk about using a use case, or a test case, or a wire frame, or something which they are great examples of things you can add on to a user story as you have that conversation, but I don’t think it’s an and/or. If you were to say that you didn’t write everything in user stories, I could see somebody getting a little crazy with writing too many use cases, and then you go off the deep end in that regard.

Roy:  Right, and then before you know it you have a full spec outline ahead of time so that we don’t have to spend this entire time arguing with the developers and negotiating someone’s criteria.

Derek:  You get off the rails pretty quick, right? If you don’t keep it nice and short then we start assume, “Oh Roy, you’ve got 80 pages of Cucumber specs for me.” So I don’t need to actually ask anything about the system.

Roy:  It’s all here.

Derek:  Clearly you’ve thought of everything, right?

Clayton:  The last one talks about relying a product owner. The single ringable neck and having one person that is supposed to be the gateway to the customer. If most Agile shops are doing some form of Agile are probably doing Scrum and they probably have a product owner. How did all the Agile people miss the boat on this one?

Roy:  I kind of think it would be OK if there was more than one product owner. It doesn’t necessarily have to be a product owner as long as there is just one backlog. You still get into the problem of if you have this one backlog and you have two different people that are both your boss.

They’re arguing over what a specific story is supposed to be like. I can still see a ton of problems there. You have to have somebody that makes the final call. Somebody at the top of your organization has the authority to say this and not that.

Clayton:  I think there’s a distinction between being the voice, the single point of contact with a customer and the person that makes decisions. Should the only person that ever talks to customers be one person and the product owner?

Probably not, and you should probably find lots of different ways to have that interaction and get that feedback. If you had more people talking to the customer and more people making decisions, I don’t think that’s what you would want.

Derek:  This one is really odd for me in the sense of I’m starting to find that actually in some ways I believe that having a product owner is non Agile. Part of it is, I think that if a team, when I look at small startups and I see them do things with no product owner.

They really are doing things by committee. They really are doing things by unanimous decision. I think it’s because they have got strong vision, and they’re aligned. To me the need of having a product owner who is the one all that says, “I’m going to make the decisions so we can move forward.”

I think that’s almost a crutch that says that you’re not providing enough vision that the team is actually aligned behind the product, because if they were, you could get to a unanimous decision fairly quickly. You could be biased towards that action.

Roy:  That’s a really interesting point. I hadn’t thought about it like that. The reason why we always think that you need a product owner is because you have dissenting viewpoints on which way to go.

That’s because tradition decision making is made by majority vote, in which case you have a bunch of people that aren’t happy. If you’re always unanimous, then you have a team that is acting as one anyway so it’s like it’s one single [inaudible 00:16:15] .

Derek:  You probably have a much better product. To be clear, I think product ownership is very necessary is most organizations because they’re having to deal with them as a dysfunction to how they currently work. I think you could absolutely be on a highly Agile, adaptive, high performing team, and deliver great product, and not have a product owner.

Clayton:  I think we’re out of time. Thanks guys!

[music]

Announcer 1:  If there is something you would like to hear in a future episode, head over to integrum.com/podcast where you can suggest a topic or guest.

Announcer 2:  Looking for an easy way to stay up to date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the Agile community? Sign up today at Agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly, for free!

Announcer 1:  The Agile Weekly Podcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies and recorded in Gangplank Studios in Chandler Arizona. For old episodes check out integrumtech.com, or subscribe on iTunes.

Announcer 3:  Need help with your Agile transition? Have a question, and need to phone a friend? Try calling the Agile hotline. It’s free. Call (866)244‑8656

The post Episode #112 – 7 Agile Best Practices that You Don’t Need to Follow appeared first on Stair Step Burndown http://integrumtech.com/2013/06/stair-step-burndown/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/06/stair-step-burndown/#respond Thu, 20 Jun 2013 11:00:45 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7274 Problem Most burndown charts look like this: However, teams frequently don’t actually burn down this steadily. Often team members know on planning day that they …

The post Stair Step Burndown appeared first on straight-line-burndown

However, teams frequently don’t actually burn down this steadily. Often team members
know on planning day that they will be gone for half a day for a dentist appointment,
taking a three day weekend, or are going on a vacation that takes up half their
capacity for the first half of the iteration.

This causes the traditional straight line burndown chart to potentially tell the wrong story. It could give the appearance the the team is way behind, when the team actually has most of their available capacity at the end of the iteration. Or worse, the burndown chart shows that the team is on track, or even ahead, when they are actually in serious danger of not hitting their commitment because half the team will be gone on the last two days for a conference.

It is important for information radiators to communicate as much accurate information as precisely and obviously as possible. It’s all to easy to make the assumption that the team is perfectly on track, and the conversation about what will actually get done never happens. To help prevent stakeholders from being mislead, we recommend trying a stair step burndown chart.

Ingredients

  • 1 Blank burndown chart for however your iteration looks.
  • 1 Ruler
  • 1 Sharpie
  • 1 Green marker
  • 1 Red marker

Instructions

  1. Get the team’s capacity by day.
  2. Draw a horizontal line on each day of the sprint, indicating how much of the team’s capacity is left in the sprint.
  3. Label each horizontal line with the number of hours left. This makes it much easier to update the chart throughout the week.

What this does

Here is an example of a regular straight line burndown chart:

straight-line-example

Eveything looks great, right? The team fell behind at first, but is starting to catch up and is now only an hour or two behind. It would be totally reasonable to for the team to believe that they will make up those two hours and should have little problem hitting their commitment.

One thing the team has forgotten though, is that two of their team members will be gone at a conference on Thursday and Friday. The stair step burndown tells a completely different story:

stair-step-example

Now we see that the team is actually 16 hours behind, and the team only has 24 hours of capacity left in the entire sprint. This realization, while harsh, is much better to have on Wednesday, midway through the sprint, than on Friday afternoon. This way the team has the time to warn the Product Owner and figure out what needs to be removed from the sprint. The Product Owner is able to use that advance warning to plan for the following iteration, taking in to account that some of the work that was originally thought to be done this week is actually going to take up a sizable portion of next week as well.

In retrospect, this is a very minor adjustment to the existing burndown chart. There is something about burndown charts that allow you to omit tiny pieces of information and all of a sudden the same chart tells a completely different story. A burndown chart should not be a substitute for communication, but it should definitely be as obvious as possible. Anybody should be able to walk in, see it on the wall, and figure out what it is indicating, all without any Scrum or Agile experience.

Variations

You can get even more fine grained by stair stepping by half days. This can lead to some pretty interesting conversations about how morning capacity differs from that in the afternoon.

The post Stair Step Burndown appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=7255 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: Does money work? What if developers don’t realize they need to grow? Should developers choose …

The post Episode #111 – Inspiring Personal Growth in Agile Teams appeared first on Episode #111 – Inspiring Personal Growth in Agile Teams appeared first on Interruption Balloons http://integrumtech.com/2013/06/interruption-balloons/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/06/interruption-balloons/#comments Thu, 13 Jun 2013 03:50:55 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7257 Problem The team complains that they are not able to get close to commiting to their capacity because they are constantly being interrupted. Nobody in …

The post Interruption Balloons appeared first on red-balloons

What this does

By the end of the iteration, it is not uncommon to have the bullpen so polluted with red balloons that it becomes difficult to freely walk around. This highlights the devastating effect that a number of individual interruptions have on the iteration. By adding up the total number of balloons and multiplying by 15 minutes, the team can gain a pretty quick approximation of the actual time spent on all interruptions.
 
 

The post Interruption Balloons appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=7241 Problem One of the first complaints of going to Scrum is the huge amount of overhead. The effort and time it takes to plan, task, …

The post One Hour Iterations appeared first on One Hour Iterations appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=7203 Problem   It’s the end of the sprint. The team committed to half their capacity but somehow still failed to hit their sprint. During the …

The post Extreme Timeboxing appeared first on

 
It’s the end of the sprint. The team committed to half their capacity but somehow still failed to hit their sprint.

During the retrospective, the team decides that the problem lies in the quality of the planning meeting. If only we had more accurate times on our tasks, we would’ve known that this would take much longer than we thought. This also brings up the question, if there were tasks that took way longer than planned, how come nobody asked for help? Shouldn’t we be leveraging the power of teams in exactly these type of situations?

Maybe the team thinks it was due to interruptions. If we hadn’t constantly been interrupted with questions and requests from the rest of the organization, we would have actually been able to work as many hours as we said we’d be able to.

The question becomes: how do you know if either of these or other rationalizations are actually the reason the commitment was not met? Extreme Timeboxing describes a great way to measure how much time was spent on each task while providing some other, subtler benefits as well.
 

Ingredients

 

  • 1 tasked out sprint. Tasks should have time estimates on them. Tasks should be written on actual (gasp) 3 by 5 index cards.
  • 1 Black Sharpie
  • 1 Red Sharpie
  • 1 Green Sharpie

 

Instructions

 

  1. Pick a timebox. The team should decide on the timebox at the beginning of the sprint. The timebox should be small enough to provide fine grained feedback, but long enough that maintaining it doesn’t have noticeable effect on the sprint work. We prefer to use 15 minutes.
  2. Each pair grabs a task card off the wall
  3. Each sets a timer (almost all phones have them) for the length of the timebox.
  4. The pair starts working, letting the timer do its thing.
  5. When the timer goes off, whoever is not driving fills in one black box on the task card.
    If the time elapsed exceeds the amount of time estimated for the task, draw a red box instead.
  6. Reset the timer and continue with the task.
  7. When the pair is done with the task, fill in the remaining time left on the original estimate
    in green boxes on the task.
  8. Repeat until the sprint is done

 

What This Does

 

By marking the time spend on each task, the pair gets immediate feedback on which tasks went over and which went under. This makes it painfully obvious when a task goes way over the estimate because you’ll see a wall of red boxes that can be spotted from across the room.

The team will be able to measure how much time they actually spent on the tasks by adding up all red and black boxes up at the end of the sprint. It is not uncommon for a team to find that their capacity is actually far less than they thought it was.

Each time the timer goes off during the sprint, the pair is essentially asked “Did you work on this task for the last 15 minutes”. It becomes very difficult to mark a box if they know that they spent those 15 minutes talking to a manager, looking at YouTube videos,
or being distracted in some other way. You’ll generally find that teams are actually pretty good at estimating tasks, generally only deviating by one box on other side. Be wary though, because teams will generally perceive more red boxes than green boxes, even if there are exactly the same amount of each.

Red boxing presents the pair with a great opportunity to ask for help. Many teams that try this end up making a rule for themselves that the first red box means the pair is required to inform the rest of the team and ask for help. By making it something concrete, there becomes a boundary for when to ask. You no longer have the excuse of getting sucked down the rabbit hole and losing track of time. It is also no longer as much of a point of pride to avoid asking for help since the decision is taken away from you.

Lastly, by getting so much specific feedback in terms of time spent on each task, the team’s ability to estimate those tasks will start improving very quickly.
 

Variations

 
Using a centralized timer, rather than individual stop watches, gets the team on the same cadence. This way, when a pair realizes that they’re going into the red, the rest of the team is also taking a brief second to fill in a timebox and is much more open to being interrupted to be asked for help.

Instead of putting a numeric time estimate on the task card, preemptively draw outlines for each of the boxes. This way, the team is reminded to fill the boxes in, and you no longer need a green marker since you can just leave the outlines blank when the task is completed under time.

The post Extreme Timeboxing appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=7238 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Jade Meskill and David Foster discuss: What’s a senior developer? Software developer job bands Compensation based on performance Transcript …

The post Episode #110 – What’s a Senior Developer appeared first on Episode #110 – What’s a Senior Developer appeared first on Episode #109 – Revisiting Decisions http://integrumtech.com/2013/05/episode-109-revisiting-decisions/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/05/episode-109-revisiting-decisions/#respond Thu, 16 May 2013 13:00:44 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7200 Roy van de Water and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: Why teams revisit situations Disclosing what you know Decider Protocol Transcript Clayton Lengel-Zigich:  Welcome to another episode …

The post Episode #109 – Revisiting Decisions appeared first on Episode #109 – Revisiting Decisions appeared first on Episode #108 – Imperfect Situations http://integrumtech.com/2013/05/episode-108-imperfect-situations/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/05/episode-108-imperfect-situations/#respond Thu, 09 May 2013 13:00:33 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7197 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: When Facilities won’t help When Developers can’t set up their environments When continuous …

The post Episode #108 – Imperfect Situations appeared first on Episode #108 – Imperfect Situations appeared first on Episode #107 – Is Agile Faster? http://integrumtech.com/2013/04/episode-107-is-agile-faster/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/04/episode-107-is-agile-faster/#respond Fri, 26 Apr 2013 13:00:04 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7192 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and special guest Alan Dayley discuss: If agile faster What it means to be better Transcript Roy …

The post Episode #107 – Is Agile Faster? appeared first on Episode #107 – Is Agile Faster? appeared first on Episode #106 – Lean Startup http://integrumtech.com/2013/04/episode-106-lean-startup/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/04/episode-106-lean-startup/#respond Thu, 18 Apr 2013 13:00:19 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7190 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors, Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Mike Vizdos discuss: Lean Startup in the enterprise. Vanity metrics LeanPub Mike’s Childrens Book …

The post Episode #106 – Lean Startup appeared first on Episode #106 – Lean Startup appeared first on Episode #105 – Delivering News and Doing the Right Thing http://integrumtech.com/2013/04/episode-105-delivering-news-and-doing-the-right-thing-2/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/04/episode-105-delivering-news-and-doing-the-right-thing-2/#respond Thu, 11 Apr 2013 13:00:37 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7188 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water and Derek Neighbors discuss: How to deliver news How to help your team if they know they’re doing the …

The post Episode #105 – Delivering News and Doing the Right Thing appeared first on Episode #105 – Delivering News and Doing the Right Thing appeared first on Episode #104 – Executives, Rewrites and Information Radiators http://integrumtech.com/2013/04/episode-104-executives-rewrites-and-information-radiators-2/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/04/episode-104-executives-rewrites-and-information-radiators-2/#respond Thu, 04 Apr 2013 13:00:28 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7184 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Derek Neighbors discuss: Executives in Agile The Big Rewrite Ignoring information Radiators Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another …

The post Episode #104 – Executives, Rewrites and Information Radiators appeared first on Episode #104 – Executives, Rewrites and Information Radiators appeared first on Episode #103 – Let’s Define Value http://integrumtech.com/2013/03/episode-103-lets-define-value/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/03/episode-103-lets-define-value/#respond Thu, 28 Mar 2013 13:00:48 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7177 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: The emperor has no value. What is value? Different types of value Transcript …

The post Episode #103 – Let’s Define Value appeared first on Episode #103 – Let’s Define Value appeared first on Episode #102 – Agile Metrics and Organization Debt http://integrumtech.com/2013/03/episode-102-agile-metrics-and-organization-debt/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/03/episode-102-agile-metrics-and-organization-debt/#respond Thu, 21 Mar 2013 13:00:31 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7172 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: Agile Metrics Releasing Often Organizational Debt Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode …

The post Episode #102 – Agile Metrics and Organization Debt appeared first on Episode #102 – Agile Metrics and Organization Debt appeared first on Episode #101 – Working Agreements http://integrumtech.com/2013/03/episode-101-working-agreements/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/03/episode-101-working-agreements/#respond Thu, 14 Mar 2013 13:00:46 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7170 Roy van de Water, Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: Confusing Working Agreements Working Agreements as Policies Values and Principles over Working Agreements …

The post Episode #101 – Working Agreements appeared first on Episode #101 – Working Agreements appeared first on Episode #100 – Failure, Learning and Fun http://integrumtech.com/2013/03/episode-100-failure-learning-and-fun/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/03/episode-100-failure-learning-and-fun/#respond Thu, 07 Mar 2013 13:00:57 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7165 Roy van de Water and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: A Culture of Learning Fear of Failing Having too much fun? Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another …

The post Episode #100 – Failure, Learning and Fun appeared first on Episode #100 – Failure, Learning and Fun appeared first on Episode #99 – Working From Home? http://integrumtech.com/2013/02/episode-99-working-from-home/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/02/episode-99-working-from-home/#respond Thu, 28 Feb 2013 13:00:56 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7163 Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Derek Neighbors discuss: Technical Scrum Masters Team Workspaces Working from Home Transcript Jade:  Hello, and welcome …

The post Episode #99 – Working From Home? appeared first on Episode #99 – Working From Home? appeared first on Episode #98 – Storming Teams http://integrumtech.com/2013/02/episode-98-storming-teams/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/02/episode-98-storming-teams/#respond Thu, 21 Feb 2013 13:00:13 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7155 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Derek Neighbors discuss: Team Culture Alpha Developers Retrospective Safety Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the …

The post Episode #98 – Storming Teams appeared first on Episode #98 – Storming Teams appeared first on Episode #97 – Product Owners, INVEST, Continuous Delivery http://integrumtech.com/2013/02/episode-97-product-owners-invest-continuous-delivery/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/02/episode-97-product-owners-invest-continuous-delivery/#respond Thu, 14 Feb 2013 13:00:05 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7150 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Derek Neighbors discuss: Product Owner Availability Delivering Value Continuous Delivery vs Deployment Backlog Gardening Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome …

The post Episode #97 – Product Owners, INVEST, Continuous Delivery appeared first on Episode #97 – Product Owners, INVEST, Continuous Delivery appeared first on Episode #96 – A Backlog of Topics http://integrumtech.com/2013/01/episode-96-a-backlog-of-topics/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/01/episode-96-a-backlog-of-topics/#respond Thu, 31 Jan 2013 13:00:59 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7128 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Derek Neighbors discuss: Sprint Zero Working Agreements Performance Testing Backlog Gardening Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode …

The post Episode #96 – A Backlog of Topics appeared first on Episode #96 – A Backlog of Topics appeared first on Episode #95 – Moving to a Team Room http://integrumtech.com/2013/01/episode-95-moving-to-a-team-room/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/01/episode-95-moving-to-a-team-room/#respond Thu, 24 Jan 2013 13:00:10 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7119 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Isaac, Deepa and Ryan discuss: Moving from cubes to team rooms Collaboration Self-Organizing teams Update: We found a problem …

The post Episode #95 – Moving to a Team Room appeared first on Episode #95 – Moving to a Team Room appeared first on Episode #94 – Agile Design and UX http://integrumtech.com/2013/01/episode-94-agile-design-and-ux/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/01/episode-94-agile-design-and-ux/#comments Thu, 17 Jan 2013 13:00:22 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7114 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Jade Meskill and Kevin Goldman of 29th Drive discuss: Agile in Design Pen Sketching Ideation and collaboration Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another …

The post Episode #94 – Agile Design and UX appeared first on Kevin Goldman of 29th Drive discuss:

  • Agile in Design
  • Pen Sketching
  • Ideation and collaboration

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast. I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Jade Meskill:  I’m Jade Meskill.

Clayton:  Joining us today we’ve got Kevin Goldman from 29th Drive. Hi there, Kevin. Can you tell us a little bit about what 29th Drive does?

Kevin Goldman:  Sure. We design and sometimes develop software.

Clayton:  We’ve actually done a little bit of work with you in the past. We wanted to talk to you today about design, and you mentioned design a little bit of software, and the Agile framework. What’s your experience with that?

Kevin:  Jumping right into it.

Clayton:  Yes, right away. It’s a 15 minute podcast. We’ve got to get going.

Kevin:  Oh! Its 15 minutes. That’s good to keep in mind.

[laughter]

Kevin:  Yeah, I was thinking about some things we could talk about today in terms of how we use some Agile processes in our design work. I think the thing that we’ve been using most, a process that we’ve been using most lately, is sketching.

When people talk about Agile UX, oftentimes they’re talking about getting away from deliverables, from traditional deliverables based on predetermined milestone schedules in a waterfall process. What we’ve been doing more and more, is really embracing the idea of rapid ideation, and using pen sketches to replace a lot of what we used to do, around flushing out our ideas in digital form.

Clayton:  Like a Photoshop comp. kind of thing? Is that something that would maybe be the old way?

Kevin:  Yeah. Let me describe it that way. Old way might be having an idea, wire framing it, iterating on the wire frames. Then taking the wire frames into visual design, iterating on the visual design in Photoshop. Then taking those visual designs, and then throwing that over the wall to the development team, and them developing.

Now what we’re doing is ‑‑ we have an idea. We’ll do a lot of pen sketches. We’ll bring in development right away, and actually do pen sketching with them, and start talking about the idea from end to end; talking about implementation, and all these development issues early in the process with design.

Instead of moving from the pen sketches into Photoshop, or the pen sketches into digital wire frames like an omnigraffle, we’ll move right from the pen sketches into prototype. The prototype might be built in Twitter Bootstrap. It might be built if it’s IOS, a prototyping tool for IOS or it might even be prototype to nextcode.

Clayton:  Yeah one thing I’ve always, I have a background in doing what you described as the old way of the designer creates kind of stuff in Photoshop that’s very flushed out and very like final basically.

Throwing it over the wall and then slicing it all up and turning it into a website and I’ve always thought it was interesting that when you got to that low fidelity like pin sketches kind of thing where you could really sketch something out and the crumple up the piece of paper and start all over again.

That was so freeing and it made it so much easier to collaborate with the people that were editing, the traditional kind of design developer barrier like the mis‑communication that always happened, that seemed like it went away.

Kevin:  It’s so true so that idea of collaboration I think is a big part of what development teams think about when they think about agile development. And the same thing with UX so you don’t have to be an artist to pen sketch.

Any of the stakeholders in the project can sketch an idea on paper. Customers, business, stakeholders, marketing analyst, anybody can sketch on a piece of paper. And so by making that the medium it allows the design process to be a little bit more inclusive.

Clayton:  Can’t lower the very so you don’t have to be a designer or artist or something.

Kevin:  Yeah and we’ve gone so far as to work with new customers or even existing customers and encourage them to bust out the pen and get their ideas out on paper and send them to us or a lot of times we work remotely with our customers so they’re not here in town so we don’t have the ability to just sit next to the person and flush out ideas but we’ll use sketch cameras.

There’re these great little IP Vogue cameras that sit on your desk, they’re only $79 and if we’re using a Google hang out or a go to meeting it allows us to show what we’re sketching on the screen and through the go to meeting or Google hang out. So we’ll send those cameras o our customers so they can do those same things back and it creates the concept of having a white board, but doing it remotely.

Clayton:  That’s pretty neat. Have you found that your customers are embracing the idea, are they resistant to it? Do they not want to jump into what they consider your domain, the design territory?

Kevin:  Yeah, there’s a lot of, there is a. For people who aren’t designers, there’s a feeling that their sketches aren’t going to be pretty. There’re a lot of disclaimers. I’m not an artist, I’m not a designer. That’s OK. We’ve gotten some really great ideas and sketches from non‑visual people.

Jade:  What’s it been like working with the designers like the people that maybe used to do it a certain way and having to adapt into this, even like you said, using Twitter which drafted current prototype, I’ve worked with a lot of designers who were very comfortable creating things in Photoshop, but when you get more clear towards the front‑end, they’re actually writing something that actually works and you can look at, they didn’t want to do that necessarily. What’s your experience with that?

Kevin:  I can only speak from my experience in the team, the people that I’ve worked with, and all of us have some degree of understanding the front‑end code, some more than others.

In some cases, a designer of the team might be able to create an entire prototype by themselves and they’re very familiar with all the latest CSS3 and familiar enough with Java script to get some of the basic interactions working, and at other times, we just have to collaborate.

If the designer on that particular project isn’t as comfortable, then we just pair them up with one of our front‑end developers so that they can really work day‑to‑day throughout the day on this task of creating the prototype.

Jade:  What’s like transition period been for you guys in making this change? Is it something that you were able to pick up pretty quickly or has it been a few months that you’ve been learning as you go or what’s that been like?

Kevin:  It’s been a constant evolution. In some ways, I want to say going back 15 years when I started doing design work because you’re always in the process of designing the design process, if that makes any sense.

Jade:  Sure, yeah.

Kevin:  I say with pen sketching, we’ve really been getting back into it. It was really a part of my early training coming out of industrial design. There’s a culture of sketching in industrial design, and then of course, there’s whole lot of years where I used only digital tools and now with the team that we built at [indecipherable 07:47] drive, which is relatively new, we’re really looking for new ways to collaborate when we started to pen sketch more, it really gelled and it was very quick.

Clayton:  What do you think is the biggest contrast that you see between moving towards this new maybe more agile direction versus the old way that you did things, the more waterfall, lot more hand‑off, and more formality around that?

Kevin:  The contrast between them?

Clayton:  Yeah.

Kevin:  Without sounding like a bunch of hype, I think the more agile processes in pen sketching in this collaboration that we’re talking about creates better ideas quicker. It really allows you to generate a lot more ideas, so therefore find the bad ideas more quickly and invest your time into the good ideas more quickly.

Jade:  Why do you think it allows you to do that?

Kevin:  The pen sketches, no matter what, specifically looks sketchy. It’s just so fast, you can’t get bogged down in pixel pushing, even if you’re doing what we call Greybox wireframes, which are very low fidelity wireframes. If you’re in OmniGraffle you inevitably just end up spending a lot of time trying to figure out how to invert an object, you have to search in through help and menus.

If it’s a pen sketch, you’re going to just sketch that in a few seconds and be done with it.

Clayton:  You’re not as tied to the concreteness that a digital tool might give you.

Kevin:  Yeah.

Clayton:  Some of that formality of presenting it to your customer and having them review it, all that stuff tends to add overhead and really changes the interaction that you have.

Kevin:  Totally changes the interaction. With pen sketches, they never confuse the sketch with something that might be final and that happens a lot in design where if we present a wireframe, we know in the industry what a wireframe is and what to expect out of a wireframe, but sometimes a customer, they might just wonder why everything’s grey. We’ve actually heard that.

Jade:  I don’t actually like this color palate.

Kevin:  Why is every button grey or why is that font not consistent? They get caught up on those things. But a pen sketch is so far removed from the final that whole confusion or misinterpretation of what you’re trying to communicate is not an issue.

Jade:  I always try to ask like practical questions, maybe I’m a project manager or I’ve got a team that has some developers and some designers and we’re doing it the old way, what advice would you give to someone like that, who wanted to try and do something that was a little more collaborative?

Is pen sketching the first steps? You just jump into doing that or what would you suggest that person do?

Kevin:  Yeah, pen sketching is the first step. The sooner you can knock down that first hurdle of that first person drawing their first line and feel it, that they don’t have to be an artist, the better. It’s very quickly that people, I think, get over that. The other thing I would recommend is we do something called a design studio, which is an old concept that also comes out industrial design.

The idea is that you get a bunch of stakeholders, designers, developers, whoever is on the team together for a half a day. Let’s say two to six hours and you have either a whole product concept or part of a product that you’re trying to develop and you work together collaboratively to flush out the idea for that section of the product.

What we do, the way that we’ve structured a lot of the design studios is we’ll have an introduction and that’s lead by, usually it’s a lead designer on the project, who will give the context and constraints for what we’re trying to solve.

Then, we’ll do, let’s say a half hour where everybody goes away and pen sketches their ideas for how to solve that problem. Then, you come back and each person gets five minutes to present their idea to the team.

Then, you repeat that process sometimes two, three times and what happens in two or three hours, you get 40 ideas of how to solve a particular problem. Even more importantly, you get everybody on the team on the same page about what that process was. What worked, what didn’t and you get this building of ideas on top of each other. You have an idea, triggers an idea in my mind and then, we build on that.

Jade:  Agile talks a lot about continuous improvement, so I’m curious, what’s something that you think you might try in the future to improve on this process?

Kevin:  Oh, man.

[laughter]

Jade:  I didn’t mean to put you on the spot.

Kevin:  Just about everything so down to how we can communicate better in the sketches with call‑outs and interactivity and how we can communicate those ideas, more of a how we can…Sometimes, we do need to have a snapshot of what happened in that design studio, so we can refer back to it.

Often times in the design studio, there’s a lot of hand waving that goes along with the pen sketches, so we’re trying to figure out to capture that. I think there’s a lot of room for improvement there. Working remotely with customers is just how it’s done these days. I think there are just a lot of places where we can improve in our work with people remotely.

Estimating projects is always very difficult, probably on the development side as much as it is on the design side. We can definitely try to improve how we set out expectations for how we bill something, how we structure timelines in advance of actually doing the work.

That’s a big shift. One of the biggest, especially for service companies who are in‑house. If you’re basing your bids and your timelines off of waterfall deliverables, it’s very easy to say, “This milestone is this much and this much and this much. It happens on this day, this day and this day.” When you follow a more collaborative approach, it’s not as clear cut at the onset of a project.

Jade:  You have to go into more value based fees…

Kevin:  Exactly.

Jade:  …and it’s a lot more difficult to sell.

Kevin:  Exactly.

Jade:  Kevin, we really appreciate you coming down. To be fair, just so everyone knows, we asked Kevin yesterday if he could… If you’d like to record a podcast and you said, “Sure.” So we said, “Come tomorrow.” It was a little short notice, but we appreciate you making it out here.

Kevin:  Yeah, thanks for having me.

[music]

Announcer 1:  If there is something you would like to hear on a future episode, get over to integramtech.com/podcast where you can suggest a topic or a guest. Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques and events in the Agile community, sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly for free.

The Agile weekly podcast is brought to you by Integram Technologies and recorded in Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out integramtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

Announcer 2:  Need help with your Agile transition? Have a question and need to phone a friend? Try calling the Agile hotline. It’s free. Call 866‑244‑8656.

The post Episode #94 – Agile Design and UX appeared first on Episode #93 – Education and Agile with John Miller http://integrumtech.com/2013/01/episode-93-agile-education-john-miller/ http://integrumtech.com/2013/01/episode-93-agile-education-john-miller/#respond Thu, 10 Jan 2013 13:00:16 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7109 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Jade Meskill, John Miller and Roy van de Water discuss: Agile in Education Scrum in the classroom How software developers are like pre-k …

The post Episode #93 – Education and Agile with John Miller appeared first on Episode #93 – Education and Agile with John Miller appeared first on Episode #92 – Hiring For Agile Teams http://integrumtech.com/2012/12/episode-94-hiring-for-agile-teams/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/12/episode-94-hiring-for-agile-teams/#respond Thu, 13 Dec 2012 13:00:58 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7099 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Jade Meskill discuss: Disrupting Agile Teams Hiring when the product expands Forming, Storming, Norming and Performing Transcript Jade …

The post Episode #92 – Hiring For Agile Teams appeared first on Episode #92 – Hiring For Agile Teams appeared first on Episode #91 – Soul Crushing Technical Debt http://integrumtech.com/2012/12/episode-91-soul-crushing-technical-debt/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/12/episode-91-soul-crushing-technical-debt/#respond Thu, 06 Dec 2012 13:00:12 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7093 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill and Roy van de Water discuss: Staying sane in the face of massive debt Bighting it off one bite …

The post Episode #91 – Soul Crushing Technical Debt appeared first on Episode #91 – Soul Crushing Technical Debt appeared first on Episode #90 – A Thanksgiving Potluck of Topics http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-90-a-thanksgiving-potluck-of-topics/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-90-a-thanksgiving-potluck-of-topics/#respond Thu, 29 Nov 2012 13:00:41 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7090 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, and Roy van de Water discuss: One day sprints The Checkout Protocol Promiscuous Pairing Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode …

The post Episode #90 – A Thanksgiving Potluck of Topics appeared first on Episode #90 – A Thanksgiving Potluck of Topics appeared first on Episode #89 – Motivating a Team http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-89-motivating-a-team/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-89-motivating-a-team/#respond Thu, 22 Nov 2012 13:00:47 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7086 Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water, and Drew LeSueur discuss: When a team has lost its motivation Personal Alignment and Team Alignment Hard …

The post Episode #89 – Motivating a Team appeared first on Episode #89 – Motivating a Team appeared first on Episode #88 – Class Systems in an Organization http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-88-class-systems-in-an-organization/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-88-class-systems-in-an-organization/#respond Thu, 15 Nov 2012 13:00:50 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7080 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Drew LeSueur discuss: Typical class systems of organizations Cowboy Coders The real leaders Transcript Drew LeSueur:  Hi! Welcome …

The post Episode #88 – Class Systems in an Organization appeared first on Episode #88 – Class Systems in an Organization appeared first on Episode #87 – Roles of the Scrum Team http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-87-roles-of-the-scrum-team-2/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-87-roles-of-the-scrum-team-2/#respond Thu, 08 Nov 2012 13:00:46 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7078 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Drew LeSueur discuss: When a Product Owner oversteps bounds Where are the boundaries of a Scrum Master? What …

The post Episode #87 – Roles of the Scrum Team appeared first on Episode #87 – Roles of the Scrum Team appeared first on Episode #86 – Lean UX with Adrian Howard http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-86-lean-ux-with-adrian-howard/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/11/episode-86-lean-ux-with-adrian-howard/#respond Thu, 01 Nov 2012 13:00:12 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7052 Drew LeSueur, Roy van de Water, and Adrian Howard discuss: Lean UX Developers and UX designers working closely together Working Software vs Valuable Software Finding …

The post Episode #86 – Lean UX with Adrian Howard appeared first on Episode #86 – Lean UX with Adrian Howard appeared first on Episode #85 – Agile Outside Software with Raoul Encinas http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/episode-85-agile-outside-software-with-raoul-encinas/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/episode-85-agile-outside-software-with-raoul-encinas/#respond Thu, 25 Oct 2012 13:00:23 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7048 Drew LeSueur Roy van de Water and Raoul Encinas discuss: Agile in a non-software environment Working directly with the customer Trust and collaborative teams Transcript …

The post Episode #85 – Agile Outside Software with Raoul Encinas appeared first on Episode #85 – Agile Outside Software with Raoul Encinas appeared first on Episode #84 – The Agile Culture Conference http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/episode-84-the-agile-culture-conference/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/episode-84-the-agile-culture-conference/#respond Thu, 18 Oct 2012 13:00:32 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7046 Derek Neighbors and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss: Organizational Cultures Jim McCarthy’s Performace and Core Protocols Culture Hacking Transcript Derek Neighbors:  Hello, and welcome to an episode …

The post Episode #84 – The Agile Culture Conference appeared first on Episode #84 – The Agile Culture Conference appeared first on Episode #83 – Agile Manifesto with James Grenning http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/episode-83-agile-manifesto-with-james-grenning-2/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/episode-83-agile-manifesto-with-james-grenning-2/#respond Thu, 11 Oct 2012 13:00:07 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7038 Derek Neighbors and James Grenning discuss: History of The Agile Manifesto Embedded TDD Estimates Transcript Derek Neighbors.:  Hello and welcome to another episode of Agile …

The post Episode #83 – Agile Manifesto with James Grenning appeared first on Episode #83 – Agile Manifesto with James Grenning appeared first on Episode #82 – Implementing Agile with Peg Haustetter http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/episode-82-implementing-agile-with-peg-haustetter/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/episode-82-implementing-agile-with-peg-haustetter/#respond Thu, 04 Oct 2012 13:00:10 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6990 Clayton and Peg Haustetter discuss: Subset of Scrum Top-down vs. bottom-up Agile introduction Organizational Culture Agile Development: A Guide Toward Putting a Toe in Agile …

The post Episode #82 – Implementing Agile with Peg Haustetter appeared first on Agile Development: A Guide Toward Putting a Toe in Agile Waters

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast. I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew LeSueur.

Clayton:  Today, joining us, we’ve got Peg Haustetter. Peg, you wrote an article about, basically the gist of it was getting started with Agile. That’s a real popular topic with people who are interested in Agile, or listen to the podcast, and things like that that we come across a lot. What was the motivation of writing that article?

Peg Haustetter:  The company I work for is Systems Evolution. There are a few project managers that were going to clients that had not really been exposed to Agile, and [inaudible 00:46] to do, how to get started.

We developed a team, and in that team, we started putting together some slides that they could present at their customer. One thing led to another, and we decided to write an article that we published in our [indecipherable 01:05] . That article took all those slides, and all of those conference calls and meetings that we had, to try to get a little Agile primer to all of our members, and we came up with the article.

Clayton:  I noticed that you mentioned things like sprints and iterations. The stuff that you’re describing is like Scrum, although you leave some parts out. I was curious if that’s something that maybe Scrum is in your background, or if that’s maybe your preferred methodology that you like to use for projects, or if that was even intentional?

Peg:  I am a Certified Scrum Master, so those are the types of projects that I have run. We intentionally left it out because we didn’t want to really sell a flavor or a certain methodology [indecipherable 01:58] article, so that people could relate to what they’re currently doing.

Or to realize that not every company is doing something that’s purely Scrum, or purely any kind of methodology that a lot of them are mixing [indecipherable 02:17] some of their worth all on trying to do it all at the same time.

Clayton:  Is there anything that…You mentioned the waterfall, transitioning from waterfall or using that as a benchmark. In your experiences there, are most companies that you find that are trying to transition into Agile, are they doing waterfall now or do they not even have a process?

What are those hurdles, the biggest problems that you find that people face when they are trying to make that transition?

Peg:  I do find that the clients that I have been at, they’re larger companies, and so they generally do follow the waterfall. I think the biggest hurdle is trying to get the business team [indecipherable 03:05] involved. They are all about defining the project, and agreeing to the requirements, and then throwing it over the wall, and “Call me when it’s done.” [laughs]

To try to keep them engaged and daily [inaudible 03:22] challenging for the [indecipherable 03:25] to get them in a room to do demo, or let them play around with whatever we’re delivering that sprint. That’s a huge hurdle, if I can get two or three of them in the room.

I think that in the end, the team that you’re working with [indecipherable 03:42] happy with the process once they’ve realized how it’s working, but to get them initially engaged is a challenge.

Clayton:  I had overheard the conversation from a product manager and the product owner of a Scrum team the other day. The gist of the conversation was, “I really like this whole Agile thing and it’s great, but we really need to balance being Agile with getting things done.”

Peg:  [laughs]

Clayton:  I thought that was interesting. I was curious if you’ve heard anything like that, or what you’d say to that person?

Peg:  [inaudible 04:19] is that maybe they’re not [indecipherable 04:22] their sprints correctly, because the whole idea is that you are getting things done, and you’re getting them done quicker, you’re getting them done so you have eyes on them, catching any issues, [indecipherable 04:34] put in the wrong place, the wrong color, some little small thing.

People are seeing it right now, if they see that the data’s coming out the wrong way in the field, they see it, you can react quickly and correct it, and then move [indecipherable 04:53] hang around with somebody that’s doing Agile. Go to a class, try something!

Clayton:  You mentioned in the article that people like taking a hybrid approach, or maybe combining two things together. There is some talk in the Agile community of a “Scrum bond,” or something, trying to combine Scrum and Kanban together.

Have you ever seen anything like that be successful? Or are you more getting that as a way to introduce the organization to Agile, they might need to do more of a hybrid of their traditional technique, plus some more Agile concepts?

Peg:  The things that I have experienced [indecipherable 05:42] methodology, a lot of it is because their compliance departments won’t allow…They don’t really understand the documentation. They still require tons of documentation, tons of certain types of testing, depending on what the product is, and then what sector that you’re working in.

I was working in the medical [indecipherable 06:11] sector. Obviously there’s a lot of regulations, a lot of paperwork, a lot of checklists. You still have to do a lot of those types of documentation while your development team is developing in the Agile methodology, but you still have to support all of the traditional [indecipherable 06:35] .

In some of those cases, in my case specifically, the PM had to produce more documentation than my team, probably wrote in code in some of those projects. I think it depends on the organization, and its will to let go of some of that.

The regulations that drive why we do things [indecipherable 07:02] piece of software. I think it’s learning, and I think it’s learning all the way around. It’s not just for the companies, but if they’re regulated, it’s for the regulators. They have to understand. They need to look back and read all those documents again, and see if there is a more streamlined approach.

Clayton:  Do you have any opinions on starting Agile at the team level, and then growing it from the team level up to the organization level? Or do you feel that starting at the organization level and trying to get the higher‑ups thinking in more Agile mindset is better? Do you have any opinion on that, or maybe you’re still trying those things?

Peg:  I’ve had more [indecipherable 07:57] both the opposite ways. The medical device company I worked at, we were doing it at an organizational level. It came from the top down, and we happened to be the first project, but they were pushing it across the organization.

I think it was six [indecipherable 08:20] everybody was on‑board. There was lots of training. People went to all of the training, the displays, they went to [indecipherable 08:36] reviews and things like that, so they got engaged.

Currently I’m at a client that, first they were trying it more on a project‑by‑project basis, doing an evaluation to see if that project fit into that mold. That was a slow burn. Just a few people would try to do it. Now, they [indecipherable 09:05] organization.

I think that’s more successful, because when the management is on‑board with it, then everybody gets the right communications and training so that they can move forward with it.

Clayton:  One thing that we’ve found is that the organizational culture seems to play a very big role.

I was curious if you’ve also noticed that, or if you have any techniques or ways that you’ve tried to guide the organization culturally? Maybe they’re used to this waterfall, or more of hierarchical management style, and that transition to Agile can be upsetting from a cultural perspective. Is that something that you’ve noticed?

Peg:  It is something that I’ve noticed, and it is baby steps. You just have to really spend a lot of time guiding, and getting them used to so much interaction. The first couple of projects that I’ve done in Agile, the business, it was just really hard to pull them along.

IT was all for it, we were gung‑ho [indecipherable 10:19] all the meetings, and didn’t want to be involved. It is a big cultural change. You have to just keep guiding them, and showing them all the advantages of being more participatory.

Clayton:  The article seems to talk from a…Maybe it’s geared towards a project manager, or someone who has a holistic, or has a higher‑level view of the organization of the project.

If me and a couple of other developers are on a software team, and we’ve been reading a lot about it, and we want to be an empowered, self‑organizing team, is there any different advice you’d have for someone that maybe is at that level of the organization?

Peg:  [laughs] Yeah, there is. If I was writing this article, or talking with the development team, I would have taken a totally different approach. They already know the pitfalls, [laughs] they know that it would be better to have a team that plays on your strengths, and really jumps in and helps each other out, so that you’re not so stuck, spend hours [indecipherable 11:38] .

This methodology really does get everybody’s creative juices flowing, and I think developers thrive in this [indecipherable 11:57] . Somebody that you don’t really know how much they’re producing, or how quickly they can produce until they are standing up every day, and telling you everything you’re doing, and it’s contagious.

If I was writing this [indecipherable 12:14] mentally different approach.

Clayton:  If there’s one big takeaway that you’d like people to get from the article, the piece of advice that everyone wishes that they knew before they started, what’s the one big takeaway?

Peg:  I would recommend that, especially your first few Agile projects, that you would bring someone in‑house that has some experience, that can help your, if you have a PMO, depending on the size of the organization, but that can really give some guidance to the department, or the organization of the department that is [indecipherable 12:55] managed other projects.

Somebody that, if it’s a consultant, bring them in. Somebody with this real‑world experience, that’s already experienced some of the bruises along the way, so that you can have a more successful [indecipherable 03:14] and a more successful experience.

Clayton:  We’re getting close to the end of time here. Is there anything you’ve been interested in lately? A book, or a blog, or any conferences or books that you’d like to promote, and let the audience know about?

Peg:  I always took my training from Mike Cohn and reading Mountain Goat Software website, his blog. There are lots of books that he recommends, and I do find that all the books that Mike Cohn recommends do really help you in estimation or writing user stories. There’s quite a few tools that he has on his site, so I would recommend people [indecipherable 14:03] probably go to Mountain Goat Software.

Clayton:  Peg, we thank you for your time today.

Peg:  You’re welcome.

Clayton:  As always, we invite the audience to check out the Agile Weekly Facebook fan page, where you can talk about this episode and other episodes as well. I think that’s about it, so thanks again, Peg.

Peg:  Thank you.

[background music]

Man 1:  If there’s something you’d like to hear in a future episode, head over to integrumtech.com/podcast, where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Man 2:  Looking for an easy way to stay up to date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the Agile community? Sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content, delivered weekly, for free.

Man 3:  The Agile Weekly podcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies and recorded at Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out integrumtech.com, or subscribe on iTunes.

Man 4:  Need help with your Agile transition? Have a question and need to phone a friend? Try calling the Agile Hotline. It’s free. Call 866‑244‑8656.

The post Episode #82 – Implementing Agile with Peg Haustetter appeared first on Agile Open Southwest 2012 – Agile Conference http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/agile-conference-open-southwest/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/10/agile-conference-open-southwest/#respond Thu, 04 Oct 2012 02:42:35 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7055 Agile Conference Join us this Fall for the first Agile conference in Arizona. Agile Open Southwest is a regional event for agile practitioners. Perfect for …

The post Agile Open Southwest 2012 – Agile Conference appeared first on Agile Conference

Agile Conference - Agile Open Southwest

Join us this Fall for the first Agile conference in Arizona. Agile Open Southwest is a regional event for agile practitioners. Perfect for those curious about adopting agile principles.  Excellent for those that already agile practitioners.  Suited for experts training and coaching others.  Assemble and meet new people while sharing your work and thoughts. It follows the Open Space format so it will have topics relevant to those attending. Expect technical topics.  Enjoy management topics.  Quality assurance will surely be represented.

When: Friday November 16th, 2012 (8:00am – 5:00pm)
Where: Chandler Gilbert Community College (Chandler, AZ)
Cost: $75.00

Register Online Now!

This event is capped at 75 people. First come, first serve.

Interested in being a sponsor? Get more information.

(The El Toro Sponsorship includes a mechanical Bull!)

The post Agile Open Southwest 2012 – Agile Conference appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=6983 Clayton, Jade, Roy and Drew discuss: Spike and research stories Estimating stories during planning Blocked stories in a sprint Failing sprints Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome …

The post Episode #81 – Spike Stories, Estimating Before Planning and Blocked Stories appeared first on Episode #81 – Spike Stories, Estimating Before Planning and Blocked Stories appeared first on Announcing the Inaugural Agile Open Southwest http://integrumtech.com/2012/09/announcing-the-inaugural-agile-open-southwest/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/09/announcing-the-inaugural-agile-open-southwest/#respond Thu, 27 Sep 2012 03:19:31 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=7040 As members of the Phoenix Agile community, we are proud to announce the inaugural Agile Open Southwest Open Space conference. We hope that this event helps …

The post Announcing the Inaugural Agile Open Southwest appeared first on Agile Open Southwest – Friday November 16th, 2012 – http://agileopensouthwest.com

Who Should Attend?

Anyone currently working with, interested in or otherwise involved in the Agile community will benefit from the conversations and relationships generated during this event.

 

What To Expect?

As an Open Space event, the conference content will be created organically by the participants as the session convenes and throughout the day. For more information about the Open Space format, visit http://www.openspaceworld.org.

 

When is it?

Friday November 16th, 2012. Registration and breakfast starting at 8:00AM with the closing session finishing at 5:00PM

 

Where Is It?

Agile Open Southwest will take place at the Chandler-Gilbert Community College Pecos Campus (2626 East Pecos Road, Chandler, Arizona 85225-2499 – map) in Chandler, Arizona. Lodging is available nearby at the Hampton Inn & Suites GilbertHyatt Place Gilbert and the Crowne Plaza Resort Hotel San Marcos.

 

Eventbrite - Agile Open Southwest

The post Announcing the Inaugural Agile Open Southwest appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=6978 Jade Meskill, Drew LeSueur, Roy van de Water, and Declan Whelan discuss: Is Technical Excellence Still Relevant? XP Practices Pair Programming Agile Coaching Transcript Drew …

The post Episode #80 – Demanding Technical Excellence with Declan Whelan appeared first on Episode #80 – Demanding Technical Excellence with Declan Whelan appeared first on Episode #79 – The Leadership Mindset with Christopher Avery http://integrumtech.com/2012/09/episode-79-the-leadership-mindset-christopher-avery/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/09/episode-79-the-leadership-mindset-christopher-avery/#respond Thu, 13 Sep 2012 13:00:25 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6949 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Drew LeSueur, Roy van de Water, and Christopher Avery discuss: The Leadership Mindset Being a leader Taking Responsibility Situational, State, and Servant Leadership …

The post Episode #79 – The Leadership Mindset with Christopher Avery appeared first on Episode #79 – The Leadership Mindset with Christopher Avery appeared first on Episode #78 – Leanpub with Peter Armstrong http://integrumtech.com/2012/09/episode-78-leanpub-peter-armstrong/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/09/episode-78-leanpub-peter-armstrong/#respond Thu, 06 Sep 2012 13:00:54 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6936 Drew LeSueur, Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, and Peter Armstrong discuss: Leanpub Agile in the publishing world Advice for publishing books Minimum viable product …

The post Episode #78 – Leanpub with Peter Armstrong appeared first on Episode #78 – Leanpub with Peter Armstrong appeared first on Episode #76 – Managers and Developers Growing Apart with Gil Zilberfeld http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/episode-76-managers-developers-growing-apart-gil-zilberfeld/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/episode-76-managers-developers-growing-apart-gil-zilberfeld/#respond Thu, 30 Aug 2012 13:00:32 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6883 Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Gil Zilberfeld discuss: Managers and Developers communicating together Development practices have changed faster than Management practices How QA integrates with a Scrum Team …

The post Episode #76 – Managers and Developers Growing Apart with Gil Zilberfeld appeared first on Episode #76 – Managers and Developers Growing Apart with Gil Zilberfeld appeared first on Episode #75 The Learning Organization and Scrum with Derek Wade http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/episode-75-the-learning-organization-scrum-derek-wade/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/episode-75-the-learning-organization-scrum-derek-wade/#respond Thu, 23 Aug 2012 13:00:48 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6813 Drew LeSueur, Roy van de Water, and Derek Wade discuss: Distributed teams Working with teams in non-software situations Scrum as a learning framework Scrum in …

The post Episode #75 The Learning Organization and Scrum with Derek Wade appeared first on Episode #75 The Learning Organization and Scrum with Derek Wade appeared first on Episode #74 – Lean Startup with Aaron Eden http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/episode-74-lean-startup-with-aaron-eden/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/episode-74-lean-startup-with-aaron-eden/#respond Thu, 16 Aug 2012 13:00:35 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6803 Drew LeSueur, Derek Neighbors, and Roy van de Water, and Aaron Eden discuss: Lean Startup Customer Development Fear of releasing Innovation labs Lean Startup Teams …

The post Episode #74 – Lean Startup with Aaron Eden appeared first on Episode #74 – Lean Startup with Aaron Eden appeared first on Special Episode – Agile Success with Woody Zuill http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/special-episode-agile-success-with-woody-zuill/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/special-episode-agile-success-with-woody-zuill/#respond Thu, 16 Aug 2012 13:00:32 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6970 Jade Meskill, Drew LeSueur, Roy van de Water, and Woody Zuill discuss: Agile Success Questioning the Agile Manifesto 3 new Agile mantras The importance of …

The post Special Episode – Agile Success with Woody Zuill appeared first on Agile Open SoCal

Transcript

Roy van de Water:  Hello, and welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly podcast. I’m Roy van de Water.

Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew LeSueur.

Jade Meskill:  I’m Jade Meskill.

Roy:  Joining us today is today is Woody Zuill. How’s it going, Woody?

Woody Zuill:  Real good.

Roy:  You’re currently at the Agile 2012 conference, right?

Woody:  Yeah, I sure am in Grapevine, Texas. It’s really, really nice here.

Roy:  Have you seen anything totally awesome there in the last few days?

Woody:  Yeah, I’ve gone to a lot of sessions, and they’ve been great. As a matter of fact, it’s really nice to see, in person, some of the people that I’ve read books and followed for so many years. A few of them are old friends now, but some of them I’d never seen before. I think the top thing for me, so far, has been a little one hour session by Robert Martin on clean code. As you can imagine, he’s always good with that stuff.

Mary Poppendieck, who her and her husband, I guess, wrote that Lean software development book, which I’ve put to great use over the years and completely worn out several copies. Eric Meade, I just saw a session by him just a few minutes ago on decision making. It’s a lot of eye opening stuff.

Overall, I think what I’m seeing is that people are really moving forward beyond just the simple Agile ideas, and trying to figure out some bigger problems. I’m enjoying that a lot.

Roy:  We had talked to a previous guest, I think that was helping to organize the event, was telling us that there was going to be a much bigger focus on the technical side of things. Have you been seeing that a lot or is it…?

Woody:  Yeah, there’s a development stage. I think it’s called development practices stage, and I’ve gone to several of those sessions. But I haven’t been able to go to all of them. They were doing like a code retreat today, and so that’s kind of interesting. I wasn’t able to stop in on that, but those are very code and coding practices focused sessions. That’s sort of my focus. That’s where I think I bring the most value is knowing about that stuff and bringing that to my team and things like that.

Jade:  You wanted to talk about Agile success.

Woody:  Yes, Agile success.

Jade:  What does that mean for you?

Woody:  Over the years, I’ve been doing what you might now call Agile since 1998. You add up the years, and when I was first introduced to it the TMI was on. I knew nothing about it except for what I had read, but the TMI was on, what I would consider ultimately successful. They were extremely good at cranking stuff out of extremely high value.

As I watched what they did, I said, “I just want more of this.” Then I went out into the real world, and looked for projects that either people were saying they were doing agile or wanted to do agile. I very rarely found anybody being effective. They were either hoping to do agile or wanting to do agile, but they just hadn’t gotten there. I’ve been through a lot of those things.

Going to these conferences, and these things like the open agile and all the user groups, I’ve talked to a lot of people who are still trying to figure out, “How do I get this working for me?” I put together a little talk just on what I would consider the main things, which is the agile values and principles. It always seemed to surprise people that these things existed, which really bothered me.

That’s sort of where you should start, that’s what you gives you a way to judge, “Is this practice I’m doing helping me? Am I thinking in the right way to get where I want to go?” It’s kind of like something I think I learned when I was a young man, or actually a teenager, and this very, very old guy that I knew, he was in his 80s when I met him, and he was really, really genuinely good. He was good to everybody, he treated everybody nicely.

Then I knew some other old people who were pretty crabby all the time. I started noticing they either leaned towards being crabby or leaned towards being good. Not too many in the middle, who were sort of half‑crabby/half‑good. It dawned on me that you kind of gravitate toward what you allow yourself to be, and so I’ve held that through my life. I want to always lean towards the good if possibly can, so, when I’m old people can say, “You know, he’s a nice old man.”

That’s my goal in life. That’s sort of what the agile success talk was about, if we lean toward the agile principles, then whatever we decide to do for practices are going to hopefully be agile. If they’re not, we’re going to hopefully, more than anything else, adopt that idea of retrospectives or reinventing ourselves continuously. If you really adopt at least that one principle, you’ll hopefully get better as long as you do it in a somewhat consistent manner.

Jade:  What were people’s reactions to that proposition?

Woody:  What happened is the people that were trying to do agile, but hadn’t even caught on to the idea that values and principles are what should be guiding us, although that seems fundamental to me. Once I started doing math talk then people come up and say, “We’re already trying to do all these, but we’re having these other problems.” I ended up, eventually anyways, adding some of my own principles and values. That sort of an important thing is there is the agile values and principles were kind of locked down quite a while ago. We might…

Roy:  That doesn’t sound very agile.

Woody:  Exactly. We got to be ready also to sort of adapt. We’re the inventors. We’re the innovators. No less soul than anyone else. We have to take responsibility for our own process where we are headed. I kind of gave myself what I would consider three new maxims.

I had to come up with something, because they already were using values, and they’re using principles. I figured I will use some other terms for the moment anyways I’m calling a maxims. But one of them is this. It’s in the doing of the work that we discovered the work we must do.

If we trick ourselves into thinking we can figure out what we are going to do before we actually do the work, we’re always going to fail. That to me is a critical maxim, and that is my focus every day as we do the work. We are going to discover the things we didn’t or couldn’t figure out before we started doing the work.

Jade:  I really like that. Do you have a good story where that maxim came true for you?

Woody:  Sure. I’ve got tons of them, so don’t get me started. A good example is in a very simple little project I was working on, there was a couple of features that we wanted to do, and they’ve written out exactly what they wanted. I should change it what I just said.

Their requirements for this project were dozens of pages. That’s none of my rules. I don’t like to call things projects. We’re doing development let’s say we’re doing software development not software projects. Projects is like making a deck or making a model airplane. All the instructions are there, and you got all the parts, put it together. See, now I’m going on and on. But here is the thing, they put together these huge documents, and the team kind of got blocked on actually getting any work done.

They got to the point where they were making no progress, and they were starting to break the already working project that was in production. They weren’t keeping very good control of their source code, so they were really getting into a mess.

What we did is we just sliced off ‑‑ I like the term sliced off ‑‑ a little bit of function that will give them some value today. If they could have it today they could be making more money with this little built functionality. I said, “Well, let’s make a little prototype of that.” That’s another thing. You always have to call things a prototype because nobody understands that we’re working on a real project little bit at a time. But if we make a prototype, that makes sense.

We made a little prototype. They took a look at it. They said, “We want to change this, and we like to change that.” We have written a little bit of functionality based on their nice instruction in their requirements document. It should have been correct, but this proved to them, I think, real quickly, without of saying anything that those document really weren’t the final say on what this was supposed to be. It was in the making of this little feature, it wasn’t much.

I can’t tell you what it was. It’s kind of a proprietary thing, but this little feature that they start discovering what they really wanted to do. But bottom line of that story is after we got about the first five or six really top features all the rest to that thick document went away. They didn’t even ask for even ask for any more it. They switched to another chunk of functionality they wanted to work on. That’s the real value of agile. Maximizing the amount of work that we don’t do, that’s really a wonderful saying. There we go. You want another maxim or…?

Drew:  Yeah.

Roy:  Let’s go to the next one.

Woody:  The next one, I think, what I’ve been seeing a lot is projects, and I hate to use that term, but these are projects where they want the promise of agile. The big part of that is responding to change, but you can’t really do that unless you really have easy to read codes that easy to maintain and easy to grow. My next thing is embracing the change is impossible if your code is not easy to read, easy to maintain, easy to grow and easy to change.

I learned that stuff from my little brother, who is also a programmer. Everything else is secondary. If you don’t get that in there, you’re not going to be able to do agile. It’s got to be easy. Because, you know, when somebody comes in and says, “Wait, wait, we’ve got to change this thing.” Have you ever heard this one, where they say, “Well, you should have told me that in the first place, because now we can’t really change it without pushing the deadlines out.” We don’t ever want to have to use that excuse. Does that make sense?

Jade:  Yeah, that’s great.

Woody:  I always ask that. Does that make sense? It’s probably kind of a faulty thing to ask, because if you didn’t understand, I couldn’t tell.

The third maxim is really a simple thing. Remember, this is the advanced part of the course. This is not the basics, this is really advanced for people who are really trying to do this, and this is the maxim. Question everything. The main thing I question is the things that I think are the most true. Whenever I catch myself going, “No, this is the way things is,” that’s the thing I start questioning.

Why did I allow myself to get that rigid about something? But I question everything, like we were saying earlier, even the agile manifesto. Not that I need to change it. I just want to make sure I’m on track with it. If something doesn’t bring value I want to discover that. Maybe I can’t discover it, but I can keep questioning.

Someday, if somebody brings to me something I am doing wrong, I want to hear it, I want to evaluate it, and I want to change, if it turns out I am doing something wrong. I want to deliver as much valuable software as quickly as possible in a very sustainable manner. Not all projects are that way, or not all companies are that way. I don’t like to call these things projects, because I want to see them going on forever. Let’s keep adding value to it, as long as there is value that can be added. I probably used up our whole time already.

Jade:  We’ve got four minutes.

Drew:  The question everything, I like that one. It seems to go right in line with respond to change and also respect and adapt.

Woody:  Oh, yeah. That’s the inspect and adapt right there. I just did it in different words so I could copyright it.

Drew:  That’s good though. Back to your 12 page featured document story that you told us you know, that was something that you could have questioned right from the beginning.

Woody:  Yeah. I would myself question it, but a lot of times when you get in an environment where this is the way they do business, you have to find a story that they can understand. They can’t understand the agile story often. This is the thing, Agile, although it really seems obvious to me, for whatever reason doesn’t seem obvious to a lot of other people.

What seems obvious is, “Hey, let’s make our plan and follow our plan, and we’ll get it done.” Everybody is excited about that, they think it makes sense. But I like more, from Napoleon’s rules of war or whatever he called them, the engage and see. Let’s get in there. We’ll get to wherever we’ve got to be. Let’s start a battle, and then let’s see what the enemy does. Then we can decide what we need to do.

But until we do that, you know, they’re ready to trick us with something. We don’t know what’s coming down the road. We want them to show their hand before we show ours. This isn’t really a war, but I like to engage, and then see what we get. That’s in the doing of the work.

Jade:  That’s awesome.

Roy:  I believe that you are working very closely with the group that’s organizing the Agile Open SoCal that’s coming up, right?

Woody:  Yeah. That’s a great little conference at UC Irvine, that’s coming up I think that’s September 13th or 14th, that’s coming up pretty soon. You guys were at that last year, I remember.

Roy:  Drew and I were planning to be there as well.

Drew:  Yeah, it was a whole lot of fun. That was my first open space format, and I loved it.

Woody:  Yes, that’s a good point. The first one you go to is always the best, the rest of them are pretty disappointing. I’m kidding. I think I’ve been to 10 or 12 of them now, and the very first one I went to was the scrum alliance, scrum gathering thing, and Diana Larson was the facilitator, and it just floored me at how wonderful it was.

Jade:  Yeah, she’s great.

Woody:  She’s great. The whole event was great. Then this one, I got a chance to get involved with it about three years ago, and last year I was the main host or whatever, and I jumped right on board to do it again this year. It’s a wonderful event at a very nice little venue. It’s very inexpensive right now. Through the end of August, there’s the early bird registration so you can save a little money, but it’s cheap anyway, it’s $250. Right now it’s $150 if this thing broadcasts before then. People can take advantage of that. It’s well worth going to.

It’s also small enough to really get to know everybody that’s there. I think that’s a wonderful advantage to these nice little conferences. This one here, the Agile 2012, it’s really great, but I’m just overwhelmed by the number of people. It’s huge. I don’t know how many people are here, but at least 1500 or something.

Jade:  It’s a very different kind of conference.

Woody:  For a small town guy like me, I get pretty scared.

Roy:  It sounds awesome. I’m looking forward to being there, and hanging out with you.

Woody:  This has been great guys. Anything else you want to cover?

Roy:  No, that’s it, thanks for joining us.

Woody:  I’m looking forward to hearing this and your broadcast. I guess you go out every week.

Jade:  Yep.

Woody:  Excellent. That’s why you’re called agile weekly.

Jade:  That’s right.

[laughter]

Woody:  Very cool. Thank you, guys. Thanks a lot.

[music]

Announcer:  If there is something you would like to hear in a future episode head over to integrumtech.com/podcasts, where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Looking for an easy way to stay up to date on the latest news, techniques and events in the agile community? Sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best agile content, delivered weekly for free!

The agile weekly podcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies, and recorded in Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out integrumtech.com, or subscribe on iTunes.

The post Special Episode – Agile Success with Woody Zuill appeared first on Agile Lean Coffee http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/agile-lean-coffee/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/agile-lean-coffee/#respond Fri, 10 Aug 2012 17:32:13 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6952 User Groups are a great way to meet new people and learn new things about topics you enjoy.  Phoenix Scrum User Group (PHXSUG) has been …

The post Agile Lean Coffee appeared first on Phoenix Scrum User Group (PHXSUG) has been expanding, offerring a North Phoenix meeting in addition to its south meeting (in Gilbert).  Along with the great evening offerings, there will now be a morning event in a different format.  We will use the Lean Coffee format that encourages discussion of many topics in a rapid-fire and focused way.

Do you want to be better at what you do? Are you using Agile or Lean and hungry for deeper conversation? Need your questions answered or just want to talk about how you can get better or change your organization for the better? Join us for Agile Lean Coffee. We will be using a Lean Coffee format to collect ideas and have rapid fire discussion.

When: Thursday August 30th, 2012 @ 7:00am

Where: Paradise Bakery (101 and Ray Road)

More Informationhttps://www.facebook.com/events/351342351612145/

The post Agile Lean Coffee appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=6817 Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Steven Bristol discuss: Less Everything Lean startup Lean mentality at Less Everything Agile and Lean in big corporations Transcript Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to …

The post Episode #73 – Less Everything with Steven Bristol appeared first on Episode #73 – Less Everything with Steven Bristol appeared first on An Agile Teams Lessons Learned from Startup Weekend http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/an-agile-teams-lessons-learned-startup-weekend/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/08/an-agile-teams-lessons-learned-startup-weekend/#comments Thu, 02 Aug 2012 14:21:59 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6923 This weekend the Integrum team decided to participate in Chandler Startup Weekend. Startup Weekends are weekend-long, hands-on experiences where entrepreneurs and aspiring entrepreneurs can find …

The post An Agile Teams Lessons Learned from Startup Weekend appeared first on Chandler Startup Weekend. Startup Weekends are weekend-long, hands-on experiences where entrepreneurs and aspiring entrepreneurs can find out if startup ideas are viable. Teams focus on customer development, validating their ideas, practicing LEAN Startup Methodologies and building a minimal viable product.

As a team we decided it would be a fun way to spend some time together and challenge our abilities. We told ourselves that we would either join a pitched idea and work as the development team or we would play with an idea of our own and deliver the product. Either way we wanted something that could be done within the short time we had together while leaving no pressure to continue past the weekend. We also knew we were slightly handicapped because we would NOT be working on Sunday.

The Wednesday before Startup Weekend we spent a fifteen minute time box on brainstorming some ideas. Here is the list we came up with:

  • * Meme Siri – Voice generated meme creation.
  • People Near Me – Find people near you and engage them in conversation (specifically replace campaign door knocking)
  • Hosted Curation – Move AgileWeekly platform to be multi topic
  • Media Timeline – Show how media portrays events over time
  • Two Face Opinions – Show how public figures contradict themselves
  • Craigslist Car Scraper – Low cost car buying tool
  • Lunch Decider App – Mobile app to decide where to go to lunch using core protocols

Friday night we showed up ready to jump right in to something. We got some dinner from Pittsburgh Willy‘s and then started listening to pitches. As the pitches were winding down we decided to keep it just our team because we would not be around on Sunday and to go with the Craigslist Car Scraper. At this point it was about 8pm and we found a room and got started.

We started out by doing a quick Agile Lift Off. This process took us about 30 minutes.

Vision: Allow vehicle buyers with less than $5,000 an efficient way to locate a new vehicle.
Values: Fun experience, Less BS, Less time on Craigslist, Best deals right away
Working Agreements:

  • * rotate pairs every hour
  • * ok to checkout
  • * hourly checkins
  • * deploy every hour
  • * no stories greater than 1 hour

We then did a quick story workshop in about 30 minutes to generate a backlog of stories.  After creating the backlog we sorted it and started planning. It quickly became apparent that at no stories larger than 1 hour, that 1 hour sprints probably made sense. When breaking down tasks we made our smallest time box 6 minutes or 0.1 hours. Most tasks were either .1 or .2. We setup two clocks, one to measure iteration time (1 hour) and one to notify of time box (6 minute).

At the end of every sprint we would do a Core Protocol Checkin and then do a quick retrospective. After the retrospective we would take a break and play some NFL Blitz. Then right back into another planning (generally about 10 minutes).

We worked from 8pm – Midnight (4 hours) on Friday and 8am – 8pm on Saturday (12 hours) for a total of 16 hours including time for breaks, meals, etc. We had 3 sprints on Friday night and I believe 6 sprints on Saturday for a total of 9 hours of keyboard time.

This is what we produced http://hooptie.co

HooptieCo

What we learned:

  • * we can still practice what we preach
  • * working agreements are important
  • * breaks and having fun increase sustainable pace
  • * things that look really big get small really quick when you break them down
  • * if you have an eye for simplest solution you can complete more than you think
  • * getting user feedback early is important and better than arguing to decide what to do
  • * sometimes good user feedback shouldn’t be implemented right away in favor of shipping
  • * that deploying after every commit is insanely powerful
  • * pairing is still an effective way to develop code even under pressure
  • * having a plan is still worth it even if you are only doing an hours worth of work
  • * iterations are powerful, the smaller the more powerful

The post An Agile Teams Lessons Learned from Startup Weekend appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=6775 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Drew LeSueur, and Esther Derby discuss: Role of Managers Working with vs managing Hierarchical Management Model vs. Flat model Bringing managements’ …

The post Episode #72 – How Management Changes with Agile with Esther Derby appeared first on Episode #72 – How Management Changes with Agile with Esther Derby appeared first on Episode #71 – Managing Traditional Culture with Tom Mellor http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/episode-71-managing-traditional-culture-with-tom-mellor/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/episode-71-managing-traditional-culture-with-tom-mellor/#respond Thu, 26 Jul 2012 13:00:31 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6769 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, and Tom Mellor discuss: How to work with management that has traditional culture Working with vs changing …

The post Episode #71 – Managing Traditional Culture with Tom Mellor appeared first on Episode #71 – Managing Traditional Culture with Tom Mellor appeared first on Agile 2012 Special Episode with Mitch Lacey http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/agile-2012-special-episode-mitch-lacey/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/agile-2012-special-episode-mitch-lacey/#respond Fri, 20 Jul 2012 13:00:58 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6891 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Drew LeSueur, and Mitch Lacey discuss: Agile 2012 Technical development tracks Iterative Development Gaining buy-in from developers Transcript Jade …

The post Agile 2012 Special Episode with Mitch Lacey appeared first on Agile 2012 Special Episode with Mitch Lacey appeared first on Episode #70 – XP Practices with Arlo Belshee http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/episode-70-xp-practices-with-arlo-belshee/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/episode-70-xp-practices-with-arlo-belshee/#respond Thu, 19 Jul 2012 13:00:44 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6801 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors and Drew LeSueur chat with Arlo Belshee about: Scrum vs. eXtreme Programming Learning practices All About Engineering Most important XP practices …

The post Episode #70 – XP Practices with Arlo Belshee appeared first on Episode #70 – XP Practices with Arlo Belshee appeared first on Episode #69 – Cognitive Bias in Estimation with Jim Benson http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/episode-69-cognitive-bias-in-estimation-with-jim-benson/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/episode-69-cognitive-bias-in-estimation-with-jim-benson/#respond Thu, 12 Jul 2012 13:00:37 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6797 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Drew LeSueur chat with Jim Benson about: Cognitive Bias Estimation versus estimates Estimation accuracy PlanningPoker(tm) Group think Meaningful estimates Story points interpreted as …

The post Episode #69 – Cognitive Bias in Estimation with Jim Benson appeared first on @ourfounder and learn more about his company Modus Cooperandi, Inc.

 

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast. I’m Clayton.

Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew.

Clayton:  With us today, we’ve got Jim Benson. I might know him better on Twitter as ourfounder. We wanted to talk today about the cognitive bias and estimation. Jim, I see that you’ve written an eBook or Kindle book about plans and cognitive biases, under just biases in general and plans. Could you give us an overview of what it was that prompted you to write that book?

Jim Benson:  Sure. My career actually started in Psychology and as I worked my way through being an urban planner where I built really, really large things, like subway systems and freeways. Later, when I came to software development, it was incredibly obvious to me that people just couldn’t estimate their way out of a paper bag.

Most of the breakdowns in projects regardless of what they were or who they were for, generally centered around problems with the estimates.

I started to look into reasons why that was and I started finding clues in psychology. The psychology of how we approach problems, how we gather information, how we make decisions, all of those combine to really muck‑up our estimates.

Clayton:  OK. You know one thing, I don’t know if you are a part of this camp, but a popular mindset nowadays seems to be that estimates are wasteful. No one ever gets them right, so why bother doing them? Where do you stand on that?

Jim:  Eisenhower said that planning was important and that estimates for it and plans were useless. I believe that the same thing is true, that estimation is indispensable and that estimates are useless.

Going through the exercise of estimating is actually rather important. When you change it to an active word instead of a physical object, going from an estimate to estimating, then estimating becomes something that you do constantly throughout the project and that’s much more helpful.

Clayton:  That is an interesting way to think about it. Obviously there’s a lot of teams that, probably experienced the idea, they do some estimates and that gets held against them or something like that. But I agree that there is something important about that mental exercise.

Now, in terms of some of the biases or some of the more psychology things you hinted at, what are some examples there that you could give us about some things that some agile teams might face?

Jim:  I’ll just start to cherry‑pick and I’ll come to the big one, maybe third.

The first one is something called the “availability heuristic.” When you look back on things that have happened and we pick out exemplars of either our fears or our hopes, and we then start to make decisions based on those exemplars. The worst part of this is an exemplar can be status quo.

What we found is that the error in estimates follow almost a perfect Pareto curve, or almost a perfect power curve. We start to feel that we’re very good at estimates because we actually do get them right, about right, or excusably right, about 80 percent of the time. The other 20 percent of the time, we perceive that we are dead wrong, so we say “If I could just get that last 20 percent right, everything would be fine.”

But it’s actually a natural power curve, it’s a natural law, especially in software development that we’re always going to fall prey to because there’s too much variation in our work for us to estimate accurately, a 100 percent of the time.

Clayton:  Take scrum as a methodology that puts a lot of emphasis on predictability and timeboxes. Usually in most of the training literature there’s a lot of emphasis on the estimates, specifically Planning Poker.

On a scrum team, do you think they just need to find some way to overcome some of those biases and problems, and just deal with it? Or should they find creative ways to avoid those issues, or creative ways to do estimates differently?

Jim:  I’ll start this by saying it is dangerous to ask me about Planning Poker, and then I will try my best to state this as distinctly as I possibly can. Planning Poker itself was devised to get around groupthink and other cognitive biases to play teams.

The theory behind it was, if you got people together and they in silence and at least cognitively separated from each other came out with like an opening bid for what the number of story points were for a given story, or a given task, or given feature, or whatever you are estimating against. That will overcome the bias. What happens in teams almost uniformly is that as they do planning poker over time, the teams’ estimates become more uniform.

People see that as a good thing because they see that the team becoming more accurate. But what’s actually happening is that the team is learning how everybody else learns. There’s a heuristic that is being developed within the team that says, when we as a team sees this, we do these things. The individuals stop acting like individuals and they start acting like a team and our time planning poker becomes less and less useful because the individual is sublimated to the will of the group.

A lot of people will argue with me about that because it’s a hard thing for you to swallow as an individual because you don’t feel like you’re doing that. But the actions of the coalescing of the estimates of the teams are very good indications that that indeed is what is happening.

Clayton:  Is that something that, if you go back to the a typical or particular size scrum team, if they are coalescing on those estimates, does it really matter if the estimates are kind of…if they can come full circle with the group think thing…if they are using their velocity, maybe their estimates are all close to each other because they are all kind of learning maybe subconsciously however on those estimates.

But does that really matter in the overall schema of things or is that something that they should avoid?

Jim:  It doesn’t matter because they are still going to be wrong 28 percent of the time, not because they’re wrong, so I want to make this clear that the people doing planning poker are not wrong. The estimates that they are doing for at least…say you have a three‑point story and you have six of them and four of them are right. Let’s say the three‑point story takes three hours to complete.

They do 3,3,3,3, and that’s fine, and the next one is 7 and the next one is 11. That is a valid distribution on our Pareto scale. All three of those different time signatures or time stamps are all valid for that three‑point story.

The problem is our commitment, the sprint commitment, does not take that into account. One of those three is going to end up taking 11 hours. It’s going to make people blow their sprint commitment and people are going to feel bad about that and then they’re going to wonder why and they’re going to try to fix it the next time but it’s not really valid to fix, because statistically that was a valid distribution.

Clayton:  I would question that a little bit, Jim. You’re absolutely right if you look at probability theory you roll a dice, a three‑six‑sided dice or a six‑six‑sided dice and the number of times you’re going to get a distribution curve that’s just like what you’re talking about. But if the team were to do a commitment driven approach to planning I would argue that they would know that one three‑point story was 11 hours and one three‑point story was 7 hours before they actually made the commitment.

Jim:  And that’s awesome. That’s completely awesome and I’m happy with that. The thing is that right now, this conversation we’re having is about a hypothetical team that is operating at a hypothetical level self‑awareness and most teams A, aren’t that self aware and, B, don’t have the luxury to backpedal when they find out that there is variation in their system.

Clayton:  Yeah, I think that the real problem is that we’ve propagated for far too long on this community that yesterday’s weather is a good way when using story points to predict tomorrow and then actually ask teams to make commitments against yesterday’s weather.

And as any weathermen would tell you that they’re not probably willing to bet their jobs on yesterday’s weather and I don’t think that sprint teams should be doing that either and so how do we start educating people that if you’re going to take the time to estimate and if you’re going to take the time to use velocity, that you use the proper techniques to actually make it meaningful.

I would almost argue, to most teams, it is not even worth them taking the time to estimate, because they’re not doing release planning. They’re estimating for, I guess, just to make their boss feel they’re doing as much work as they say they can do, but it’s not being used for anything meaningful, so it almost defeats the purpose.

Jim:  Yes, I would agree with that. I do want to make it clear that my dislike of the measure of story points doesn’t really have too much to do with agile or the active estimating. It has to do with creating a system that doesn’t translate well from one part of the organization to another.

Story points end up being integers. Those integers are communicated to people who try and interpret them, and they’re going to interpret them incorrectly, because, for the team, it’s a relative measure of what ideally would be bizarreness. That’s a 13‑point story, because it’s really quite bizarre.

But other people are going to uniformly interpret those as either money or time. That’s very dangerous, and it leads to a lot of unnecessary conversations and unnecessary meaning. I actually think that the active estimation is awesome, but the creating an artifact that can be so easily misinterpreted is dangerous.

Clayton:  Is it really dangerous, or is it just being used improperly? One of the things that I would argue is that, I think, the reason why teams should probably use points if they’re going to estimate is because they are integers, and they can be used for things. The problem is the people used them incorrectly for a time.

If I try, as you stated earlier, say, how many hours is three points equal to, that is very, very dangerous, because three points, by itself, is going to be very highly variable. However, if I’ve got 100 three‑point stories in my backlog or in my release plan, I can probably get some normalized numbers out of there.

If I say, “Hey, for the last X number of sprints, we’ve been doing roughly X number of story points,” while still an estimate, I can predict the future to a degree ‑‑ several weeks or even a month or so out ‑‑ to be able to say, “I should be able to get roughly somewhere in the neighborhood of this.”

I think people get in trouble when they make them absolutes, when they don’t have the discussions around it, and then they take those numbers to be, “Well, you said you could do 30 story points, so I took 30 story points times 10 iterations, and, by God, you’d better give me 300 story points.” That’s dangerous.

Jim:  Exactly.

Drew:  You talk about the state of estimating. I’m wondering, what does that look like? If it’s not story points, what does that look like? Also, how did you apply that with the bigger projects like subway systems, or whatever, that you did?

Jim:  I will answer that by skipping forward to [inaudible 13:28] , because, if we’re having a cognitive bias conversation, I should probably say something about cognitive bias. The one I’ll talk about really quickly here is the planning policy. The planning policy is exemplified by something called Hofstadter’s Law.

Hofstadter’s Law states that, when given a task, people will uniformly underestimate that task, even when they are aware of Hofstadter’s Law.

[laughter]

Jim:  The planning policy basically says that, that we, as individuals, are really lousy at estimating, we’re extremely lousy when estimating for other people, we’re unbelievably lousy when estimating for ourselves, and we’re just super incredibly terrible at it when estimating for ourselves with witnesses.

When you get into a situation where you’re estimating, we have a lot of natural tendencies to underestimate the thing that we’re estimating. This has been tested by psychologists, social scientists, and behavioral economists around the world. It’s been shown to be a cross‑cultural, universal human condition.

Part of the reason for that, I believe, is that we don’t understand the role of variation in our work, so we don’t understand that Pareto distribution all along a three‑point story. Therefore, when we promise things to people, we promise them like, “Every time I do this task, it will take me three hours.”

In software development, we do not have that luxury. Our work is way too variable. What I replace that with is either cycle time or lead time with some sort of visual control. It might be a Kanban and it might be something else, but, if you have a system that can measure when you start working on a task, or a feature, or a user story, and, to the point that you finish it, that’s it ‑‑ cycle time.

It doesn’t care what excuse you have about why it took longer than you thought it would. What it will do is will say, “That task was a three‑hour task that I got interrupted four times, so it took me 12 hours.” I’ve got bad news for you. For deliverable standpoint, it was a 12‑hour task.

Replacing story points with actual statistical measure of what is completed and how long it takes to complete that thing is extremely powerful. When we do that, we get an added benefit. We used to have to say, “Well, this is a two‑point story,” “This is a three‑point story,” “This is an eight‑point story,” and so forth.

Now, we can say, “That story is too big,” or, “This story, I can do. I don’t care if it’s going to take me an hour, if it’s difficult, or I don’t care if this can take me 13 hours,” because, over the course of the project, the distribution of those stories from small to large is going to be relatively stable, is going to be relatively like it was in the last project.

We’ve been finding that that distribution is uniform or fairly uniform between projects, and, when we start to distinguish between things like a three‑ or a five‑point story, we run into something that’s called distinction bias, where human beings love to figure out what the difference of nearly identical things are.

When I’m doing this before a crowd, I can hold up two green pens, and people instantly, everybody in the room who’s looking at me, are trying to figure out what the differences are between the two things that I’m holding in my hand, and they’re both the same green marker pens.

So using a statistical measure that is impartial to our excuses and immune from a couple of these biases ‑‑ not all of them, but a couple ‑‑ helps us build more predictable models.

Clayton:  The one thing that I could say that could be a potential downside to that is it requires you actually do the work.

If you’re trying to say, “Here’s a project that we might want to tackle, and we’re not sure how feasible it is. Developers, could you give me some ballpark so that I know am I looking at something that might be 6 weeks or something that’s 60 weeks. I don’t have to be precise on it, but I need a rough ballpark to know if it’s something I want to go, grab funding for.”

How do you do that in the cycle time model?

Jim:  There’s two things, if you’re starting and you don’t have a cycle time, then you do a traditional estimate. If you’re starting and you do have cycle time, then you use your cycle time.

You can only start from where you are and the fact that you don’t have data yet doesn’t mean that you can’t collect that data. I’m particularly well known for hating metrics. I don’t like to use that many of them. Basically the only numeric metric that I use are the two that we’re talking about, and the reason for that is that most metrics are lagging indicators.

Right now, the question that you’re asking me is, “If I get this metric, that’s all well and good, but is it best going to be a real‑time indicator and more likely is going to be a lagging indicator.”

If you’re starting a big project, everybody is going to need to get around and they’re going to need to figure out what the level of effort assumed is for that project. After you have this information and perhaps before if you could run some spikes, you can start to figure out what that cycle time is and then you can say the things like, “I believe that the project you’re giving me or we agree that the project that you’re giving me is made up of these 50 initial user stories.”

You’re now buying an option from this team on 50 user stories. We agree to deliver 40 or 50 user stories. Between now and the completion of the project, which we anticipate given our current cycle time is going to be this date. We will do 50 user stories for you, and frankly, we don’t care what they are.

As we move through the project, we’re really not worried about what the specific user stories that are coming up are because we as software development professionals know that over the course of the project 80 percent of the features change anyway.

They’re basically buying a block of work as opposed to a product and assuming that their product will be able to be done within that block of work.

Clayton:  I think we’ve definitely stepped into a very interesting conversation, but unfortunately, we’ve run out of time here. If people listening wanted to find out more about you or if there’s any books you think they should read or anything like that they should check out, where would they do that and what kind of suggestions would you have for them?

Jim:  OK. The self‑serving parts are my name is Jim Benson, and I’m at ourfounder on Twitter, and I’m ourfounder on just about everything else that has ever been put on the Web.

We currently have three books out at Modus Press, one is “ScrumBan” by Corey Ladas and other is “Personal Kanban” by me and Tonianne DeMaria Barry and the third, which is specifically about these cognitive biases is called “Why Plans Fail,” and that’s just an eBook, it’s a little $2.99 eBook.

The Personal Kanban website, which is personalkanban.com has tons of blog posts and free information. My personal blog is ourfounder.com, and my company is Modus Cooperandi, which I’m not going to spell for you, but that’s what it’s called.

Clayton:  We’ll use Google Suggest, how about that?

Jim:  Yes.

Clayton:  We also like to invite the listeners to check out the Agile weekly Facebook page where you can continue the conversations for these different podcasts and one that we have.

We wanted to say thanks for joining us today, Jim. We really appreciate your conversation.

Jim:  Thank you guys. This is fun.

[music]

Announcer:  If there’s something you’d like to hear in our future episode, head over to integrumtech.com/podcast, where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the Agile community, sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly for free.

The Agile weekly podcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies and recorded at Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For all the episodes, check out integrumtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

The post Episode #69 – Cognitive Bias in Estimation with Jim Benson appeared first on Episode #67 – Design Thinking with Jeff Patton http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/episode-67-design-thinking-with-jeff-patton/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/07/episode-67-design-thinking-with-jeff-patton/#respond Thu, 05 Jul 2012 13:00:11 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6795 Drew LeSueur sits down with Jeff Patton to discuss: Design Thinking Ideation Iteration and re-work Potentially shippable product Lean Startup Split Testing Transcript Drew LeSueur: …

The post Episode #67 – Design Thinking with Jeff Patton appeared first on Episode #67 – Design Thinking with Jeff Patton appeared first on Episode #66 – Deloitte Digital Agile with Alex Sloley http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/deloittes-digital-agile-alex-sloley/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/deloittes-digital-agile-alex-sloley/#respond Thu, 28 Jun 2012 13:00:30 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6758 Drew LeSueur and Alex Sloley discuss: What is Deloitte’s Digital Agile? Alex’s Agile vs. traditional Agile Agile in a consulting environment Forecasting and estimating Overview …

The post Episode #66 – Deloitte Digital Agile with Alex Sloley appeared first on Episode #66 – Deloitte Digital Agile with Alex Sloley appeared first on Episode #65 – New Team Members with Mark Levison http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/episode-65-new-team-members-mark-levison/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/episode-65-new-team-members-mark-levison/#respond Thu, 21 Jun 2012 13:00:42 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6756 Drew LeSueur, Roy van de Water and Mark Levison, a Certified Scrum Trainer in Canada discuss adding new members to scrum teams: ScrumMaster Tales Storming, Forming, …

The post Episode #65 – New Team Members with Mark Levison appeared first on Certified Scrum Trainer in Canada discuss adding new members to scrum teams:

  • ScrumMaster Tales
  • Storming, Forming, Norming, Performing
  • Disrupting teams with new members
  • Team hazing rituals and on boarding new members
  • Dealing with crises in Scrum
  • Avoiding conflict in Scrum?
  • Working agreements
  • Part-time Scrum Master
  • Neutral Scrum Masters

Transcript

Drew LeSueur:  Hi and welcome to another episode of the Agile weekly podcast. I’m Drew LeSueur.

Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

Drew:  With us we have Mark Levison. Mark, tell us a little bit about yourself.

Mark Levison:  I’m one of Canada’s two certified Scrum trainers. I’m based in a part of Canada called Ottawa where it’s already dark outside, even though the rest of you are still looking at sunlight. I have been in the Agile business one way or another for about 12 years now. I do a lot of writing on a blog, and these days I’m spending a lot of time writing about a Scrum Master named John, and all the problems I throw him as he and his team try to win their way through the Agile world.

Drew:  The article that we read that caught our interest was “Scrum Master Tales ‑ New People on the Team” and you talk about John and he’s struggling with a new person who’s on a team. Can you talk a little bit about that?

Mark:  Like any organization, John’s team grows and at the critical moment they decide they need a bit more senior technical help. They hire in a character named Kirby, and Kirby has over 20 years experience developing software. He thinks he’s seen and done it all.

It turns out that Kirby is very, very loosely modeled on me. Kirby strolls into the team and starts throwing his elbows around, he’s extremely knowledgeable and very skilled, but he’s not very human‑skilled.

He’s thinking a lot about what’s wrong with their code and very little about their personal needs and understanding how they came to that position.

Roy:  I agree. One thing I liked about this article is we through around the concept of forming, norming, storming, and performing as phases of a team. You mentioned that when some person gets added onto the team, that process starts all over again.

Roy:  For the entire team, not just for that individual right?

Mark:  Yes. The way I illustrate this when I’m running a CSM course, I have a group of people sitting at a table, and by the time we’ve talked about this in the course they’ve already formed a fairly tight team. They’re often sitting a lot closer together.

I simply walk over as the instructor, pull up an empty chair, and jam myself in the middle of the table and start pushing people to one side. Of course, what happens is ‑‑ I don’t do it too rudely ‑‑ but that ripples around the table. People start to realize, that even though they weren’t sitting next to me, when moved in next to one of their colleagues, their position on the team got affected.

My claim is that you’ll have the same outcome when you introduce a new person to a technical team. Even the people who hop away, wind up finding their role changed as the new person comes in.

Roy:  What’s the fastest way to on‑board somebody if you’ve got a new person coming in? How do you just rush through the forming, norming, and storming stages and get to performing as quickly as possible? Is there a quick path or is that something that needs to take its time?

Mark:  I wish there was. It’s funny. It comes up in nearly every one of my courses and with nearly everybody. I have a little test at the end ‑‑ not the scrum lines test ‑‑ but my own personal test to make sure we understand what people have really understood.

In every course, I can guarantee you at least two people will answer the question about conflict ‑‑ to which the answer is conflict is natural and cannot be avoided. They will answer that conflict can be avoided with skillful scrum mastering.

Roy:  Ooh…

Mark:  Sadly, no. I’ve not found any skills yet which allow us to avoid conflict. There’s no better way to deal with it than to simply allow it to happen and to get through it.

Roy:  I’ve been on a few teams that wanted to jump the idea of conflict through a form of hazing, where they wanted to have a gauntlet for new team members to run through. What kind of impact would something like that have on the team?

Mark:  Wow! That does not sound like a great idea.

[laughter]

Mark:  My first thought is it puts the new person in position of weakness and possibly fear, depending upon how bad your hazing rituals are. I went to a university where the hazing rituals were fairly unpleasant. It puts the existing people in a position of power. If anybody really wants to think about just how dangerous that can be and how far it can go, they should read some of the original prisoner experiments from the mid ’60s.

I can’t remember the author’s name.

Roy:  Were those ones in response to the Nuremberg Trials?

Mark:  I’m thinking of one called “Prisons We Choose to Live In”, I think. It’s a series of psychological experiments where people were recruited. Some people were made guards and other people were made prisoners and very quickly, evil and not good behavior started to evolve.

The gist of is that sounds really quite dangerous. That sounds like it sets up power relationships which are not very good.

Roy:  Sure.

Mark:  I’ve not encountered that before. I’d have to go give that a lot more thought.

Roy:  Luckily, the team that I was on, or one of the team members that were pushing for that, ended up rejecting it. We didn’t actually go through with it.

I agree with you, it would have been a dangerous idea. I think it stems from the idea that a team seems to form quickest when they have to rally together around some kind of crisis, right?

When there’s a need for the team to form or, even if there’s ‑‑ in lack of a crisis ‑‑ a strong vision. That might have been the driving force behind it.

Mark:  A crisis is exactly what it takes for team formation. Luckily, in Scrum, we usually get the crisis fairly quickly. It’s one of the joys of Scrum, I might point out.

In my course, I simulate this. I actually use Scrum to run my course, so I have a burn‑down, I have a back‑log. The course is a product back‑log, there isn’t printed agenda.

We have our first crisis at the end of sprint one, when it becomes clear we cannot achieve all of the material that we’ve set out. Then, we have to do some radical reprioritization.

That usually has them desirable effect of throwing the team into crisis, in the sense of a real Scrum team ‑‑ maybe not on my CSM course. I don’t need to create artificial crises. They usually take care of themselves quite nicely.

Roy:  That’s a good point.

Mark:  Honestly, I’ve never seen a team that didn’t, after the first few sprints, quite naturally start trending into storming. My favorite analogy is, “If you interrupt me and I’m in the IDE, your interruption had better be damn good. Actually, it better be a serious reason.”

If on the other hand, I’m browsing cnn.com, “Hey, any old interruption is good”! That’s the beginnings of storming there. I’ll yell at you if it’s not ‑‑ I won’t really ‑‑ I might pretend to yell at you if it’s not a very good interruption and I’m in the IDE, and I’m doing something I think is valuable. I might be more open to it when it’s just cnn.com.

Roy:  Earlier, you mentioned about people entering that scope of Scrum Mastering that will allow them to avoid conflict. I’ve seen that in the past where there are individuals that are so against the idea of conflict that they’ll do anything to prevent it from happening, even when they wouldn’t even be involved.

For example, Scrum Master just hates conflict so much that they will try to prevent it. You had mentioned that it doesn’t really seem possible to avoid the conflict, but is it healthy to even try?

Mark:  In fact it’s even worse. If you try you’ll probably set the team back. I try it all too often myself and what I find happening is…I can’t remember, I think, it’s Kirby and Markman…I’m pretty sure are in conflict.

Let’s say we go to Kirby, “Kirby, would you please stay clear of Markman’s tasks for, at least, the next two weeks”? “Mark, would you please stay clear of Kirby for the next two weeks”?

I haven’t really resolved the problem. All I’ve done is taken two warring parties and told them to back off. A much better solution to this problem requires getting them to talk. I might take them individually out for coffee just so you can hear each of their sides.

[jokingly] A great Scrum Master spends 20 to 30 bucks a month on coffee or tea, if that’s your preferred beverage.

Roy:  I like that.

Mark:  Take them out each individually for coffee, hear their respective sides and then, if this is an on‑going issue and it isn’t just the first time, maybe bring them together and see if they can create working agreements, but the point is you don’t ever actually do anything on their behalf.

You simply help them come to the conclusions that they need to come to.

Roy:  In your article, you mention a lot about that ‑‑ where it’s very important for the Scrum Master not to take a side, to remain unbiased. That’s got to be hard for a lot of people. Can you elaborate a little more on that? How is that possible?

Mark:  It’s hard for a number of reasons. A lot of organizations have part‑time Scrum Masters, who is usually a Developer. At the moment, we have Kirby come in. Kirby is going to see John as the Scrum Master/Developer in that case, and he’s going to assume John is primarily friends with all of the existing people.

Instead of seeing John as someone who is playing the role of neutrality and balance, he sees John as another friend of those developers who aren’t churning out very good code ‑‑ someone else to do battle with.

There is no great solution except that you have to win people over a little bit at a time, and you have to be seen as being neutral. You have to make it clear that there are no sides ‑‑ that your job is the care and feeding of the entire team, and not just any one individual. That can be really difficult.

Frankly, I suspect that will be just as much a problem in the Kanbanny world as it is in the Scrummy world.

Roy:  We just published or are about to publish a podcast in which Derek talks about most of these problems that we’re seeing in teams having nothing to do with the process.

The process just seems to highlight them, and almost exacerbate them. The point of the process seems to be that we need to highlight these problems, so that we can attack them.

Scrums aren’t going to solve your problems anymore than Kanban, or any other processes. The important part is to cycle as often as possible, get some feedback and get better.

Mark:  Exactly. I shock people in my course on a regular basis by making the rather bold statement, “Scrum has never solved a single problem.” Scrum merely helps you see what problems you have already.

People are shocked. They think they’d spend a lot of money to get their problems solved, and they’re very surprised when I explain that no problem will be solved.

Roy:  I like also in your article, you talk about if the team had been more involved in the hiring process from the beginning, it would avoid some of these problems, or maybe avoid bringing a member on who wasn’t a great fit.

I’ve been in a setting where we did do that, and it was great. The whole team got to pair with the potential hire and they got to decide as a team, “Is this a good fit for us”? How about you? Can you share an experience?

Mark:  I have seen a few examples of that, but sadly I never got the chance to do that when I was employed working for real companies before I moved into the consulting world.

My favorite example of that recently goes one further. The folk at Menlo Innovations in Detroit go one further ‑‑ they get the candidates to pair with each other, the thinking being, “If you can make the person you’re supposedly competing for job with look good, you will make every one of your peers look good.”

Roy:  That is an awesome idea.

Mark:  Yes, I’m looking for someone who’d like to have me run that as an experiment with them. [jokingly] By the way, please don’t take the forgoing as legal advice in the United States of America.

[laughter]

Roy:  That sounds like a really neat idea to try. I can’t imagine as an interviewee though getting paired up with another interviewee that I’m competing with and trying to make them look good like that. That’s going to be tough, but I really like the idea of trying to see what comes out of that.

Mark:  I suspect if I tell too many people about it, the secret will get out and maybe the secret sauce will be lost.

[laughter]

Roy:  That’s true. Thanks a lot for joining us on the Agile Weekly podcast. For those of you listening, feel free to participate in the conversation at facebook.com/agileweekly. Mark, did you have any last words, anything to share with the listeners?

Mark:  Don’t stress. When you see your team going through forming and storming, don’t stress over it. Let it happen ‑‑ it’s going to happen at the pace it happens. There’s nothing you can do except watch, and think of yourself as a sheepdog and not a leader.

Roy:  If you get a chance, Mark’s blog can be found in the description of this podcast. All right, thank you very much. Thank you Mark.

[background music]

Mark:  Fantastic guys. Thank you. Good night.

The post Episode #65 – New Team Members with Mark Levison appeared first on Special Episode: Interview with the Mathsters http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/special-episode-interview-with-the-mathsters/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/special-episode-interview-with-the-mathsters/#respond Tue, 19 Jun 2012 16:00:04 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6784 Clayton Lengel-Zigich sits down with a team using scrum outside of software to organize and complete their work. The “Mathsters” are a relatively new team …

The post Special Episode: Interview with the Mathsters appeared first on Special Episode: Interview with the Mathsters appeared first on Episode #64 – The Myth of 100% Utilization with Pawel Brodzinski http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/episode-64-myth-of-100-utilization-pawel-brodzinski/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/episode-64-myth-of-100-utilization-pawel-brodzinski/#respond Thu, 14 Jun 2012 13:00:33 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6754 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors and Pawel Brodzinski discuss his blog post titled “The Myth of 100% Utilization“: What is the 100% utilization myth? Kanban and …

The post Episode #64 – The Myth of 100% Utilization with Pawel Brodzinski appeared first on The Myth of 100% Utilization“:

  • What is the 100% utilization myth?
  • Kanban and WIP limits
  • Slack time
  • What’s a good amount of slack?
  • Experimentation with slack and utilization
  • What does a team do with slack time?
  • Should slack time move the team/work forward?

You can find Pawel on twitter @pawelbrodzinski and on his blog Software Project Management.

 

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast. I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich…

Derek Neighbors:  I am Derek Neighbors…

Pavel Brodzinski:  And I am Pavel Brodzinski.

Clayton:  Welcome, Pavel. We’ve found an article that you wrote, it’s entitled “The Myth of 100 Percent Utilization”. I was curious if you could explain a little bit about the motivations for writing this one and kind of what you mean in terms of what is the myth of 100 percent utilization. If you could just introduce the topic a little bit, that would be great.

Pavel:  The motivation to write the piece was that what I see over and over again in different organizations is that the organizations or managers are trying to optimize the way people work, the way companies work in a way that everyone has something to do all the time. We basically are trying to utilize people for the whole time. We aim for 100 percent utilization.

If you learn a bit more about the subject, you start thinking it is not the best way of organizing work. By implementing Kanban, we implement WIP limits, work in progress limits. If WIP limits are set correct, it usually means that people will have some idol time, which is called slack time. It actually is a mechanism that the team makes the organization improved.

My main motivation was sharing the idea and spreading the word. What I tried to do was to explain why thinking of utilization in the first place is the wrong idea to have.

Clayton:  Is there a good level of slack time or amount of slack time, that you think on average a team should spend with no assigned task, so to speak? Is that going to vary from team to team and situation to situation?

Pavel:  When I think about utilization in terms of different contexts, for example, traffic on a highway. There is, I don’t remember the numbers, but something around, I believe, 70 percent, which is the optimum, the point where most cars are going through the highway.

However, I would say that in terms of teams, it’s not that simple. You can say that teams should have around 20 or 30 percent of slack time. What I believe in is experimenting. You should try to tweak WIP limits, tweak the way you organize work in your team, and measure what the optimal way of working is, in your case.

In terms of knowledge work, we deal with high variability of tasks we work on. It’s not that one car passes through the highway in pretty much the same time as another, as our tasks differ. It can be said that there is some kind of ideal number. I believe every team needs to find their own sweet spot. It will be floating, by the way, it’s not something that is set for a longer time.

Clayton:  In terms of the time that…let’s say that a team has some slack time. What do they do with that time? Is that time that they burn down technical debt, fix defects, or experiment with new things…If I’m a manager and I’m willing to accept that the team should have some slack time to do other things, this will not be a hundred percent utilized. What are they doing with that time? Are they doing nothing, what exactly would that look like?

Pavel:  It would depend on policies you have in your team. Because you can have some guidelines, what kind of tasks people should choose first, during slack time, but…most teams I know have freedom, in terms of they use their slack time.

In an ideal world, by the way this is something I teach in Kanban, the first task to be taken, would be either swarming on tasks that are already now a bottleneck. Let’s consider the situation that we have, say, too many developers and too few testers or quality engineers. We have this bottleneck in testing. Basically, after some time one of our developers would have this slack time. In an ideal world, he would either take one task and test it or maybe swarm with one of the quality engineers, to deal with the other task faster.

However, we don’t live in an ideal world. Most of the time, when a developer faces the opportunity to test [sarcastically] , he will do anything to avoid using this opportunity.

[crosstalk, laughter]

Clayton:  Yes. Right.

Pavel:  In the long run, that’s even better, because usually they would spend time working on things that optimize the whole process, for example, automating some testing. Because this is fun, this is still development, and yet it helps quality engineers to shorten the time they spend on their regular tasks.

This is the story of one of my teams that are actually working on this kind of tasks, automating tests, improving code quality, simplifying configuration. We were able to remove this bottleneck in testing because we improved the way we build the code, the way we build up. Developers had fun, working during their slack time, and still we improved the whole process, the whole end to end process. I would say that it’s pretty safe to leave much freedom to team members to choose what they’re doing during slack time.

Derek:  I follow that you’ve been bantering back and forth on this a few months back where, maybe it’s optional task stuff, maybe it’s important task, maybe it’s my inability, from the English language perspective, but I’m feeling a very strong disconnect to the logic. What I’m hearing is that people should not be a hundred percent utilized, yet they should have slack time. In the slack time they should be doing things that propel the company, the sprint, or the team forward. To me, that’s a total disconnect.

If we say, “You should be doing something for the company a hundred percent of the time that you’re at work,” and then we go, “Oh, no. We don’t really believe that, what we really believe is that you should only plan 80 percent of your work, but the other 20 percent that’s not planned, you should still be doing something that moves the team forward.” I’m having a disconnect there, in the sense of…I guess I’m more of a believer that in creative work you need to allow your brain time to process things.

If you’re doing, I don’t want to say slack time because I just think it’s a horrible terminology, a horrible expression, because it has so many meanings within the English language that are bad, [?] got baggage with it. May be the Pomodoro method’s an easier way to articulate it. You’re doing some volume of work, whether it be 60, 80, 90 percent, some planned form of work, and then the remainder is really more of a state of play, where you allow your mind to process…whether it be play video game, table tennis, or take a walk around the campus, whatever.

I was thinking that the concept of not being a hundred percent utilized is that we’re not being fully utilized, that there’re some cycles outside…so maybe, if you could help clarify some of that…it would help me.

Pavel:  The first perspective is that we look at a hundred percent utilization from the perspective of building new theories of doing our regular work. When we introduce WIP limits, we try to avoid starting too many things at once before finishing some of them. This is the first thing.

However, you aren’t actually forced to do this improvement work during slack time. You can perfectly do nothing. You can take a walk. You can take a break and do nothing in terms of building any value, and it would still result in better effectiveness of the team as a whole.

However, what I find typical is that people actually do find time to think, do find time to have a break and play foosball or whatever. They don’t have problems like this. They still are starting too much, too many concurrent tasks. They still build those huge, huge queues in the process which make all the work of the whole team ineffective.

I don’t really see introducing WIP limits, introducing slack time as a way of building this spare time to think because from what I witness in many organizations is that people, whenever they need, they actually take this time to think, to take a break, to refresh themselves but still do have problems with effectiveness in this other area. This is my view on this subject.

Derek:  I don’t think there’s any easy answer because I think that we can all agree that you end up with queuing problems if you have a hundred percent working on feature mentality and don’t have any slack to deal with the world around you.

I think we can probably all agree that creative people need some time to process things. It’s just a matter of what we call it and how it’s planned for and how it’s probably communicated to managers or people paying the bills in a way that that they can understand that they don’t feel like people not working on whatever, to them, feels like the most pressing thing, right?

Pavel:  Yeah, exactly.

Clayton:  Let’s say for instance a scrum team, and they’re using a commitment‑driven approach or capacity planning where they say, “We have a hundred hours of available capacity for this sprint.” They pull in stories. They pull them in, and they task them out and everything, and they try and build up until they get to the hundred hours.

Let’s say they’ve been doing that for a while where they try to pull in as many tasks as they can, I think, that they can commit based on their capacity. Would you recommend that they lower their capacity a little bit so that they do have some of that slack time? Do you think that would be beneficial to that team?

Pavel:  I would definitely try this kind of experiment because what you end up when you try to pull as much as possible, you end up doing features, doing tasks ‑‑ those regular tasks ‑‑ all the time. Basically, what you don’t have time for is this kind of improvement work.

When you’re thinking about a classic scrum team…In sprints, we limit our work in progress in pretty different way than we do in Kanban. We don’t try to limit the number of tasks which are on this stage or the other stage, but we just have time boxing which is just the other idea of how we can limit work in progress because we can only have that many features that’s queued into our sprints and not anything more.

I would definitely advise trying to introduce some time for improvement. Maybe to commit to one feature less or one story less and see what happens. If nothing changes, in scrum it’s not a problem to pull one more story out at a later time during sprint. We usually have this bunch of stories that might be in sprint, but we don’t commit to them, right?

Clayton:  Right. I think we’re actually about out of time here, but if listeners want to find you maybe a blog or on Twitter or if there’s anything you’ve been interested lately and a community that you’d like to share with the audience, if you can just let them know where they could check you out and see some more of your articles.

Pavel:  A basic, basic place where people can find me is the blog which is blog.brodzinski.com, B‑R‑O‑D‑Z‑I‑N‑S‑K‑I. My Twitter handle is PavelBrodzinski, which is my first name and surname.

Clayton:  We’ll put those in the show notes for you.

Pavel:  Yeah, but basically if you Google my surname, all of the results somehow connects with me as that name isn’t that popular, I guess.

Clayton:  [laughs] That’s a good one to have.

Pavel:  Yeah, that’s true.

Man 2:  Well, thanks a lot for joining us today. We really appreciate it, and we look forward having you on again.

Pavel:  Thanks for having me.

[music]

Announcer:  If there’s something you’d like to hear in the future episode, head over to Integrumtech.com/podcast where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Looking for an easy way to stay up to date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the agile community? Sign up today at Agileweekly.com. It’s the best agile content delivered weekly for free.

The Agile Weekly Podcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies and recorded at Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out Integrumtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

The post Episode #64 – The Myth of 100% Utilization with Pawel Brodzinski appeared first on Episode #63 – Managing Your Job Search with Johanna Rothman http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/episode-63-with-johanna-rothman/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/06/episode-63-with-johanna-rothman/#comments Thu, 07 Jun 2012 14:00:20 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6744 Derek Neighbors, Drew LeSueur and Roy van de Water are joined by Johanna Rothman to discuss Johanna’s upcoming book: Manage Your Job Search Using personal …

The post Episode #63 – Managing Your Job Search with Johanna Rothman appeared first on Manage Your Job Search

  • Using personal Kanban to manage the job search
  • Breaking down tasks into small, manageable pieces
  • Collect feedback in small iterations and pivot
  • How do you hold yourself accountable?

Transcript

Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly podcast. I’m Derek Neighbors.

Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew LeSueur.

Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

Johanna Rothman:  I’m Johanna Rothman. Thanks guys, for having me.

Derek:  Oh, thank you. Johanna, I know that you’re working on a new book that is about how to maybe go about using some agile practices to change your outlook on getting hired. Why don’t you tell us a little about the work you’re doing?

Johanna:  I have a new book in beta called “Manage Your Job Search” with a totally ridiculous subtitle, which is, right now, “Reduce your overwhelm, focus your search, and get your next job.” I’m going to change the subtitle. But I think the title is “Manage Your Job Search.”

It’s on Leanpub, which is the way I’m writing my next couple of books. It’s Leanpub/get your next job, and I have a new version of the hiring book also on Leanpub right now. As soon as I have the title for that and a cover, I’m going to hit the publish button for that, too.

The idea with “Manage Your job Search” is, if you use Personal Kanban and work in one week Editor Relations you actually can stay focused and work on your task in really small chunks and figure out “How do I’ll do a little experiment, and get my next job”?

One of the problems with a job search is you say, “I have to write a resume,” but writing a resume can take you a week, and you have to say, “No no no, I can do the first draft of the resume. I can get it reviewed by a few people,” And maybe you can say, “Well I don’t know. Should I be a Product Owner? Should I be an Agile Project Manager”?

I actually am one of the few people that says, “Yes, we do need Agile Project Managers, not everyone can be a Scrum Master.” Because, if you read my stuff on geographically distributed teams, I actually think you need Agile Project Managers. I don’t think you can just do everything with Scrum Masters. I think there is a role for people such as Agile Project Managers.

You don’t know what you might want to be, and you might want to be one thing in this company, and one thing in another organization. You might want different kinds of resumes for different kinds of organizations. You can’t just say, “Write the resume to end all resumes.” You might want to have a focused resume for this kind of company and a focused resume for that kind of company.

You have to figure out what you want to do for this week [laughs] and what you want to do next week. And maybe based on the interviewing that you do, or the phone screens that you do, or even the talking to people that you do. That you want to experiment, this is the idea behind the Lean start‑up.

You do a little something, get a little feedback, and pivot. If you’ve used Personal Kanban, you can do this. The idea behind “Manage Your Job Search,” which I do think is the [laughs] main title of the book. Although the subtitle, no, no, no, we’re not going to keep the subtitle. But I’m going to keep the main title of the book.

That’s the book I’m working on in beta. I was so hung up on trying to say, “Should I publish? Should I get feedback? How do I get feedback? It’s on LeanPub.” I don’t have a developmental editor guiding me. And I finally said, “I know how I can do this. I can do a beta book”!

I have 53 people who are reading this book and using it. Some of them have given me feedback ‑ not all of them, of course ‑‑ which is what happens with a beta book. But a couple of them have given me feedback. The ones who have given me feedback say, “When they do this, when they actually use Kanban, it really works.” What a surprise.

Derek:  What kind of response are you getting from people when you tell them that they might want to use a Agile practice like Kanban to do something like a job search? Do you get kind of crazy looks that you might use what people think of as a manufacturing process or a software development process as a way to look for your next career or your next path in your career?

Johanna:  The technical people who already know about this say it’s a sort of dope‑slap on their heads, “Oh yeah! That’s a good idea.” And the non‑technical people…I’m working with a couple of people whose parents I know, and their kids are just graduating from college. Their kids ‑‑ they know me as Johanna, the friend of their parents.

They say, “What is this with the stickies? Why does Johanna want me to do this”? And I say, “Just trust me. Just try this.” They say, “You know, I’ve looked at your office, Johanna, and you have stickies all over the place.” And I say, “Yes. That’s because it works and I get all the stuff done.”

They say, “Why do I have to use stickies? I don’t know about this business.” I say, “Well, it’s pretty cheap as a way to organize your to‑dos.” And they say, “Well, OK.” Then they try it and say, “Well, this is a weird thing, but I’m getting stuff done.”

They don’t know that it’s from manufacturing because a lot of these people have BAs in Philosophy. I mean, they are liberal arts majors, who don’t know anything about manufacturing, and they are taught to be critical thinkers.

Derek:  How are you incorporating some of the concepts from feedback?

I loved how you started off with, that it’s really a hypothesis, that you’re trying to prove that hypothesis. If I go in and say, “I really want this job,” and I look at the particular employer, I think that they’re really wanting to potentially hire for this.

Maybe I’m going to change my title a little bit to be more appealing, and I’m going to do these things. I get a call back, I go through the screening process, and ultimately I end up not getting the job. How are you trying to incorporate feedback back into that process?

Roy:  Especially when a lot of employers have a very hard time with giving you honest criticism about why they didn’t hire you, or aren’t very timely at all about it. If you’re trying to improve on one‑week sprints, and it takes some three weeks to get back to you, how do you deal with that?

Johanna:  A lot of it is if you’re looking for a job and have enough leads, which is a piece of the job‑finding puzzle. If you only have one lead, then you’re just holding on by your fingernails to that one lead. That’s one of the reasons you have to have really small tasks, and really small to‑dos so that you are not hanging on by your fingertips to that one thing.

You have to be looking for multiple jobs, at all times. That’s one of the things that I’m really hoping that people get from this book because if you’re only looking in one place, you’re not going to find a job. You have to be looking in multiple places.

I have a whole thing on how to use LinkedIn and how to use Twitter because you have to be expanding your network. I have a session at the AYE conference about how to be a social butterfly, for people who are not social butterflies.

I met Derek at, what was it, a Better Software Conference a number of years ago?

Derek:  Yes. I think so. Do you sometimes say that you want to be more of a social butterfly? Johanna, are you encouraging people to potentially do some of this, well before they’re actually looking for a job?

Maybe, in a current career are there some practices that you can pull through that position you, should you decide to change careers or decide to change employers that maybe you’ve already done some of the groundwork, or is it something that really only applies when you’re in the thick of trying to find new work?

Johanna:  I started writing this book, before I realized I was writing this book, when I was coaching a bunch of my management coachees…I do a lot of management and executive coaching. What I was realizing is, a lot of my manager colleagues had not been building their networks. I was coaching all these managers and some executives, who had a 150 people in their LinkedIn networks.

I said, “This is crazy. You, guys, need to expand your networks because how are you going to hire people”? I was looking at this from the hiring perspective.

When I was redoing the hiring book, I was saying to people, “Part of what you need to do ‑‑ especially if you’re hiring for an agile team ‑‑ is you need to be building your LinkedIn network so you can look at the people in your groups and look at the people that you have a relationship with so you have a shot of knowing who are the passive candidates.

If you don’t have a good personal network, how are you going to reach out to people who might be really good people for you to hire? And that’s assuming you don’t want to relocation and assuming you just want people who are good people.

I cannot tell you the number of people in my local network in the Boston area who every so often send me an email saying, “Do you know of a good project manager? Do you know of a good tester? Do you know of a good developer”? I have these serendipitous emails from someone who says, “I’m just starting to look around and if you know of anyone looking for somebody” and I happen to be able to put them together. Not because I’m trying recruiting as a second career because I don’t want to.

But got this email and then I get this other email and I can say, “I know this person, I haven’t worked with him or her and I know this manager I haven’t worked with him or her but based on my little relationship with both of you, I think you guys might have something in common.”

Derek:  Yeah I see that a lot in the work that we’re doing with Gangplank, especially is that…you said serendipity and I think people do not take nearly enough advantage of serendipity. But one thing serendipity requires is that people signal. I heard you say two things, somebody signaled that they were looking for a particular type of person to hire and somebody else signaled that they were looking for a particular type of work.

Because both of those people were signaling, you were able to basically cross those signals and then probably put them into touch and maybe good things happen. Maybe good things didn’t but there was an opportunity to potentially have there and maybe something like Personal Kanban for looking for next job.

One of the things it does, it forces you to look at things at a granular level that allows you to signal in multiple ways which just increases the opportunity for good things to happen. So it’s just a really interesting approach.

The last question I really have is, one of the things that is difficult with any kind of process is discipline. When you’re in the self‑mode, I’m not on a team, an agile team, I can have other people help enable me to accountability but in a Personal Kanban or personal agile space of some kind, how are you coaching people to be disciplined in the work they are doing?

Johanna:  I have people start and end their week on a Tuesday or a Wednesday, that’s the first thing. I don’t know if you’ve read “Manage It!” Or any of my project management stuff that says, “Don’t ever start or end a week on a Monday.”

I wrote an article a long time ago called “What’s Wrong with Wednesdays”? And in “Manage It!” I actually say unless there’s a really good reason, never start your week on a Monday and iteration on a Monday either. Because that just begs for people to slide into the weekend then you don’t really know when your iterations start.

I strongly suggest that people start their week on a Wednesday. I say to them, “You have to take time off. You absolutely not work on your job search at some point during the week. You have to take time off from it. And I don’t know which days you’re not going to work on your job search but some of those days you’re not going to. Because it’s a job like any other job. You cannot work on it seven days a week, that’s craziness.”

Then I have retrospective, I tell them to count up their tasks. I tell them to make sure that their to‑dos are small chunks. I explain that they should try and make their to‑dos a couple hours in duration. I explain that this is how I work actually. None of my to‑dos in my work are longer than a couple of hours. This is literally how I work.

I do a chunk of work in the morning, I do a couple of chunks in the afternoon. This is how I keep the ball rolling in my work. This is how I get books written, this is how I write articles. I explain all of that in this book because this is how I keep the flow of work going.

I explain that in the book and then I say that count up all the tasks you got done and it doesn’t matter how many you got done. It’s just a number. That’s how you can predict which you might be able to get done. And I say it’s just a number, it doesn’t matter what the number is.

For those of you who are…I don’t actually say the word anal, but for those of you who are worried that it’s not a normalized number, it’s not a normalized number, don’t worry about it, live with it and use that number to predict what you might be able to get done next week.

If you always have really small chunks it doesn’t matter but you’ll be able to do approximately this number next week. And then I walk them through three different kinds of retrospectives. I offer them three different kinds of retrospectives and tell them to mix it up.

Derek:  You’re creating an independent one‑person agile team, that’s awesome. What…

[crosstalk]

Roy:  …be beneficial in that type of case if you have somebody you can trust like a spouse or a good friend to help hold you accountable to that type of stuff. I know that, personally, I don’t have the willpower to keep myself to an iteration like that. I’d probably have to have some kind of external force holding me accountable. Is that something you’ve seen have good success or does it not really make a difference?

Johanna:  I don’t know. I mean, this is what I do. Am I so weird that I’m the only one that does this? Maybe. When the book is actually out, I was going to offer some webinars based on the book and see what happens. Maybe I should offer webinars before the book is out of beta.

[crosstalk]

Derek:  That sounds like the lean thing to do to me.

Johanna:  Yeah. I’m having knee surgery this summer. Maybe that’s what I’ll do when I can’t travel. I actually thought for sure that people would maintain focus but you guys are giving me feedback, that maybe people are not able to maintain focus.

Maybe that’s a question I’ll ask in this version of the beta and maybe people will give me feedback that they’re having trouble maintaining their focus and see if they are or not. And maybe that’s something I’ll offer as another offering. Are you having trouble maintaining the focus of the Kanban?

Derek:  Sounds great. I think we’re at the end of our time box. Is there anything that you want to promote or share with us before we head out?

Johanna:  Go see if this is interesting for the book. I will have a new version of the hiring book with a lot more about cultural fit, also on Leanpub. Look for “Agile Program Management” at some point this summer. Probably also I will first release it in beta. That’s my next writing project.

Derek:  You’re looking to do that on Leanpub as well?

Johanna:  Also on Leanpub, yes.

Derek:  All right, so it sounds like [inaudible 18:23] it on Leanpub. Lots of good stuff coming out. Thank you so much for your time and thank you for participating.

Johanna:  Well thank you so much for asking. I really enjoyed it.

[music]

Announcer:  Is there something you’d like to hear in a future episode? Head over to integrumtech.com/podcast where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques and events in the Agile community? Sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content, delivered weekly, for free.

The “Agile Weekly” podcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies, and recorded at Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes check out integrumtech.com, or subscribe on iTunes.

Would you like to chat about this topic a bit more? Check out the “Agile Weekly” Facebook fan page, where you can discuss this episode with the hosts and other listeners.

The post Episode #63 – Managing Your Job Search with Johanna Rothman appeared first on Episode #62 – But are they Working Hard? http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-62-but-are-they-working-hard/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-62-but-are-they-working-hard/#respond Thu, 31 May 2012 16:00:53 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6736 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Drew LeSueur and Derek Neighbors discuss an article by Esther Derby entitled But Are They Working Hard? How can …

The post Episode #62 – But are they Working Hard? appeared first on But Are They Working Hard?

  • How can you tell if a senior developers is acting in a way that befits their title?
  • Should we reward the hardest worker for working hardest?
  • What makes a senior developer better than other developers?
  • Should we ever care if the developers are working hard?

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast. I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew LeSueur.

Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

Clayton:  Today, we’re going to talk about an article that we found from Esther Derby. It’s titled, “But are they working hard?”

It’s a story about some managers in an organization that’s adopting Agile and they’re wondering to themselves, “OK, everything seems like it’s going well, but there’s this guy over here and he’s got that “senior” word in front of his title. He’s a senior developer. I’m wondering, is that guy really doing senior level work? His team is this cross‑functional thing. Everyone’s doing a bunch of stuff all together.”

How do I know that this guy is really pulling his weight?

Drew:  Why do you care?

Clayton:  As the host of the podcast, I’m not sure.

Roy:  Maybe you care because you’re paying him a lot more than everyone else.

Drew:  That’s a good example.

Clayton:  Maybe I’m paying this guy more or he’s got more seniority or he’s my buddy and when special assignments come up, in the past, I’ve always picked him. But now, I’m just kind of wondering, is he kind of just goofing off now because he doesn’t really have to work as hard?

I don’t know.

Drew:  Is that a legitimate concern of mine?

Roy:  I think that’s true. I didn’t think about like that, but yeah, if this guy is not pulling his weight, then maybe you can cut his pay, right?

Derek:  I think the other way we see this manifest is, you know, good people have to be pushed really hard. If I can’t tell if that individual is really working hard or not, how do I know to whip him harder?

In the old school management style, if somebody is not working, you whip them and you continue to whip them until they are performing to their “stretch goal”. But if you don’t know if the person is being stretched or not, how do you know to whip them?

Can a team only reach its maximum potential if every individual on the team is reaching their individual maximum potential and are putting in the maximum amount of effort?

Drew:  I think, that’s what Management 1.0 believes.

Derek:  How do measure effort, too? If you’re talking about laying bricks or shoveling something, yeah, sure you can be maxed out and shovel as fast as your physical body can shovel.

But if you’re on something that’s creative like software or something else, how do you physically think harder or think faster? How do you judge that even?

Drew:  I think it goes back to the “work smarter not harder”.

Derek:  Right.

Drew:  So if you go to your snow shovel example, if I give you a tablespoon and I go ask you to shovel snow and you are putting every ounce of your body into it and working so hard that there is no question that you are ready to be on the brink of death you are shoveling snow so hard.

Then I turn around and give you a two foot by one foot snow shovel and you are working half as hard but you’re getting twice as much snow shoveled, should I be pissed that you are not working hard enough?

Derek:  Let’s say, I am on a senior development product team and I see that this team is not going to hit their commitment. Let’s say, it’s a longer term commitment. They’re missing their release.

I could see that in an organization, especially one that even has the concept of senior developers like me, right?

Roy:  You’re not that old.

Derek:  Well, I am a senior developer.

Drew:  Do you get the discount at Denny’s?

Derek:  Yeah, the over 65’s discount? I think, I might still qualify for the student discount. I could see what I would so as a senior developer is not help my team out.

Let them fail so it look’s like shit is going to hit the fan and I am not helping them. I knew from the beginning that they weren’t going to make it without my help.

Then what I do, is at the last moment, when it looks like all is lost, I work my ass off for two days straight. I just kick ass and, now, I’m the star. I mean, that’s how I got the senior title in the first place.

Why wouldn’t I keep doing that?

Clayton:  I was going to ask, what is it about the senior developer that makes them the senior developer? I think, in this example in the article, a lot of it comes down to you have been there longer or, maybe, you have exhibited some hero coding specialties where you burned the midnight oil a few times. Then, all of a sudden, you are loved by the manager.

What is it really? I think that’s the question. Why is this person the senior developer and how do I really know that they are the senior developer, especially if they’re working in this environment where everyone is supposed to be equal?

Derek:  I think this is kind of a mind set shift that management has not gone through. Today, the mindset is the person that works the hardest is the leader, right?

If you come in early and you stay late, you write more code and you’re more knowledgeable about the code, then, clearly, you are the code leader. You’re the senior developer.

That becomes what they look for, so who is going to burn the most midnight oil for me? When that person steps up they will become the leader. I think that on Agile teams, specifically, or self organizing teams, it really is all about continuous learning. It’s about learning how to adapt to situations and learning new things.

I think, the concept of leadership fundamentally changes. It’s not the person who works the hardest. It’s the person who gets the most out of the people or makes the people around them the best.

That’s who the real leader is on an Agile team, it’s the person that people say, “This person makes me better at what I do.”

Drew:  Is it really the person who works the hardest or is it perhaps the person who sacrifices the most because I think we’ve seen even internally where we have issues with team members that have a martyr complex and they seem to rise to the position of leader because they earn respect through sacrifice.

Derek:  I definitely think, that’s just a form of working harder, right?

Drew:  Sure.

Derek:  I think, when you say, “Woe is me. Look at what I had to give up to get this.” That largely becomes a, “Wow, you know that person’s really taken one for the team. They’re really working out,” you know what I mean?

I don’t want to say those are interchangeable pieces, but yeah, I definitely would say that sacrifice, commitment, working hard, you name it, like all of the kind of Management 1.0 or 2.0 concepts.

“I don’t have to crack the whip hard on that guy. I know he’s going to work hard. I know he’s going to sacrifice for me.”

Roy:  Some of the things that were mentioned in the article, that senior level things “are like pairing and mentoring”, code kata, examining the team’s practices, looking for ways to improve, those are all things I think that speak to Derek’s point of helping the people that are around you improve.

I think, the real sticky situation that comes up a lot especially in an organization that’s transforming itself, from an HR perspective, if you have people on the payroll or that they’re in this position in the pecking order as a senior person, but these attributes aren’t things that only they can do.

They might be doing something like this in some aspect of the team for some period of time and then someone else might get jazzed up about it and they start doing it. You have this floating role in leadership position where everybody can be some leader in some aspect and now that senior thing kind of disappears, right?

Derek:  Right, I think you start to have senior people with different things. It kind of becomes who’s initiating that particular thing and that person might rise to the leader of the team or the senior person on the team for that particular type of thing.

Whether it’d be a technology or whether it be a process or whether it’d be whatever, the teams start to say like, “So‑and‑so is kind of our go to person. They’re the champion for whatever that is.”

They’re the database champion or they’re the Java script champion or they’re the Agile champion or they’re the Kanban champion or they’re the training or teacher champion.

Drew:  What if the entire team is kind of slacking off?

I remember we were reading about the article and briefly talking about it. It mentions the concept of something called social loafing. I think, Derek, your eyes lit up when that was mentioned. I’m not really familiar with it. Can you explain what it is?

Derek:  I’m not too familiar with it. I talked about it a bit this last week with a number of other coaches. I think, the term goes something to the fact of this concept of when you get in groups, people start to defer responsibility and it becomes somebody else will pick up that slack.

There’s this loafing around concept the more social something gets. I think, there were some studies done by some people doing a tug‑of‑war type of thing that if you measured people’s exertion of force when it’s one person’s tug of war against another person, they give a much higher effort than when it’s 10 people tugging war against 10 other people.

I think, there’s some kind of concepts out there around. Can that be contagious as well, where you start to see one person kind of loafing? Does that start to get contagious within a group? I think, that this is something that managers fear.

Drew:  Is it something that we can prevent? It seems to me like if we are being accountable to our effort and somehow broadcasting that to our team members, we can hold each other accountable.

Is that something we even want to do or is maybe that measuring something we want to do not that we ensure that everybody is spending maximum effort? But if we notice that everybody is spending maximum effort, it means we’re doing something wrong and we need to change the way that we’re doing something.

Derek:  Yeah. I think maybe the way that I look at it is if you’re looking at the tug of war sample, maybe I’m not pulling my absolute hardest, but if my team starts to lose, I do pull harder. If you’re setting clear vision for people and you’re putting goals out there for them to hit, can you put motivations out there?

I’m not talking about more money, more whatever. But can you put some intrinsic motivations out there that get them to want to pull harder because you’re challenging them? I think that, to me, human beings have an innate desire to learn and grow.

I think, sometimes people get a beat out of them or they got out of touch with it. But I think ultimately, if you’re challenging people to go deeper and harder than they’re used to, they tend to engage more.

When I’ve sees social loafing, it’s usually when the team or the organization is not providing much of a challenge for somebody. They go like, “Well, I don’t have to pull that hard because we’re OK,” with regards to the power of the pull.

Drew:  I don’t know if this is where the metaphor is breaking down, but it seems to me like, if the goal is to win in tug of war, then it sounds to me that the minimum amount of effort required in order to win is the best strategy and the most sustainable strategy for a team to take. Is that true in all cases?

Derek:  I think that sounds fairly true to me.

Clayton:  One of the examples that she mentions in the article, the question she asked is, “Let’s say, we’ve got a few teams, and we’ve got them formed. They got a foundation. They start going. They’re producing software, delivering results, and things are going well. As a manager, do you care if they’re giving a hundred percent of the work all the time?”

I think that’s the core question. Are they working hard? Is that even a valid question? Should I even be worrying about that if they’re still producing results? Am I just measuring the results? Am I only measuring effort?

Then you get back to that concept that Derek has mentioned of, “Do I get mad at Drew for exerting less physical effort to shovel that snow because he’s got a better tool for the job?” Am I supposed to be mad at him about that? But if he’s delivering results, I don’t care if he’s working half as hard because it’s still working, right?

Derek:  You’re right. I think, that teams should get to the point where they’re only exerting as much effort as it takes to basically pull past the goal. But the second thing, I would clarify, is that if you win, you should constantly be looking for better competition.

If I’m playing tug‑of‑war and if everybody on the team only has to give 10 percent to beat an opponent, we should be looking for a tougher opponent next time, until we get to the point where we are having to put more and more effort into making that victory.

If we get to the challenge where we can’t win, then we need to start looking at, “What do we need to do? Do we need to go lift some weights so that we don’t have to pull as hard to win the next time?” I think that that’s, to me, the whole concept of a healthy team.

Challenge yourself just enough that you’re in a sustainable effort level because I think a hundred percent effort all the time is not sustainable, so whatever that level is. It’s probably different for everybody on the team.

Get them to that point. See what victories you can have. Then challenge yourself, “What do we need to do independently and as a team to grow so that we can go against harder and harder competition while still being sustainable?”

Drew:  It is still a smell if the team is exerting almost no effort and not because you aren’t getting any results you want, but because it might be reasonable to be concerned that your team is going to lose motivation if they continue to have to put almost no effort into their job on a daily basis.

Derek:  Absolutely.

Clayton:  I guess as a manager, if I am committed to the idea that I don’t really care if my team’s working hard so much as I hope they’re delivering results and improving, like you’re mentioning Derek, should I be responsible for trying to find or uncover ways that they could be improving? Or should I just focus on enabling them and giving them some culture or some guidelines for that kind of continuous improvement mentality?

Roy:  The same as inside the team, I think, as I mentioned in this bullet points, the leader or the senior person, as Derek said, is the person who is going to spread his knowledge or empower or enable the rest of the people on the team. I think, maybe, somebody outside looking in can do the same thing.

They’re a senior, or whatever, for whatever reason. Hopefully, it’s because of one of the bullet points on this list. How can they use their mentoring skills, or their coaching skills, or whatever skills they have, to empower the team to be better? Because we can all be better. You just have to balance that sustainability versus effort.

Drew:  So do you need to be a senior developer in order to practice the things on this list?

Roy:  I don’t think so. A senior developer, no.

Drew:  Do we even have a need for senior developers or that title?

Derek:  Probably not. Maybe hitting your question a little too, Clayton, I think, that it is valid for leadership or managers to understand how hard a team is challenging themselves. Not necessarily working hard, but are they going up against tough opponents or not?

I think, if they’re going up against opponents that are complete softballs, I think, that it’s OK for management to say, “I think, we should be trying to solve harder problems, or basically push harder.” But that’s not necessarily work harder. The team needs a tougher challenge.

In the same way that, I think, if they’re being over challenged, the management needs to be able to pull back and say, “Hey, we need some potentially easier opponents to go against.”

To me, the difference is you’re measuring or you’re looking at the team not the individual, and let the team decide what to do with the individuals. If it’s, “Hey, this is too hard,” let the team figure out who needs to improve on the team and how they’re going to improve.

Don’t dictate that to them. Don’t say, “Well, if Roy would just work harder, then we would be able to beat this guy.”

Clayton:  One last question, I’ll ask around, and you can give me a yes or no answer. If you were on an Agile team as a senior developer, do you think it would be meaningful for the progress and improvement of the team for you to publicly rescind or give up your senior developer title?

Roy:  That sounds cool.

Drew:  Yes, without being a martyr.

Clayton:  OK.

Derek:  It doesn’t really matter.

Clayton:  I’m no longer a senior developer. I’m a developer committed to the team.

Derek:  I don’t think that matters.

Roy:  I feel your pain.

Clayton:  Just symbolic, OK. Derek?

Derek:  In principle, I absolutely love it. I actually saw a team the other day where somebody pretty much did that and said, “We’re all developers here. There is no better or no worse.” Because somebody was talking about a better developer or worse developer, and their response was pretty much like, “We’re all developers here. There’s not better and worse.”

This was somebody who’s seen as the senior person. But I don’t know if that necessarily change things either. While, I think, it’s noble and the right thing to do, I’m not sure that it necessarily helps.

Drew:  Do I lose my paycheck when I give up? Because I want to keep that.

Clayton:  All right. If you are a senior developer and you would like to come yell at us, we invite you to the Agile Weekly Facebook fan page at facebook.com/agileweekly. You can give us an earful about why we’re wrong about your senior developer title. Or if you’d like to just join the conversation in any other aspect, we’d love to have you, too. Thanks!

[music]

Announcer 1:  If there’s something you’d like to hear in the future episode, head over to integramtech.com/podcast where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Announcer 2:  Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the Agile community? Sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly for free.

Announcer 1:  The Agile Weekly Podcast is brought to you by Integram Technologies and recorded at Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out integramtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

The post Episode #62 – But are they Working Hard? appeared first on Episode #61 – Is the Process the Problem? http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-61-is-the-process-the-problem/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-61-is-the-process-the-problem/#respond Thu, 24 May 2012 16:00:09 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6730 Drew LeSueur, Derek Neighbors, Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Roy van de Water discuss an article by Jamie Flinchbaugh entitled Don’t just change the process if people …

The post Episode #61 – Is the Process the Problem? appeared first on Don’t just change the process if people aren’t following the existing one.

  • Is the process really the issue?
  • Process only highlights culture problems, it doesn’t solve them
  • How do you know when it really is time to change the process?
  • A short feedback cycle is important to evaluate the problems that are being highlighted.

Transcript

Drew LeSueur:  Hi. Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast. I’m Drew LeSueur.

Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Roy van de Water:  And I’m Roy van de Water.

Drew:  Today we’re going to be talking about an article by Jamie Flinchbaugh titled “Don’t just change the process if people aren’t following the existing one.” The article talks about how people focus on the process and following it to the tee, as opposed to questioning whether that’s a correct process. What are you guys’ thoughts?

Roy:  I don’t know. It sounds like it could be very easy to abuse. It sounds like an invitation for scrumbutts, or any other process butts, “Well, it’s a problem with the process.” I guess this is, actually, saying don’t change the process. Actually, I like that. I guess maybe it’s not a scrum‑but right. It’s saying, just because it doesn’t work for you, maybe it’s not the processes fault. I completely turned around right there. [laughs]

Derek:  What I see a lot of times are people get so hung up on their process as the problem. I think what he might be saying is, if you’ve got a process, and people aren’t following it well, what makes you think they’re going to follow some new process? Even if they are following the process, is how do you know the process is really the problem? Meaning, if you’ve got deep culture issues, or you’ve got leadership problems, or you’ve got visioning problems, process does not solve those.

All process does, especially if you’re talking Scrum or Agile, Kanban, all it does is highlight problems. It doesn’t actually solve them. If you just say, “Here’s process A,” and we run through it, and it highlights all these problems, and we go, “Hmm, yeah, let’s not do anything about these problems, let’s just switch to another process, and maybe if we have to have that process those problems won’t exist.” Then that process highlights the same exact problems, at some point you have to deal with the problems.

Drew:  Derek, how often have you found that it actually is the process that is the problem within a company? Has that ever happened to you? Or is that something that happens generally speaking and this is an exception where it is?

Derek:  I’ve never seen the process be a solution. I have seen a lack of process, or no process, make it so that a company or a team does not know what the problem is. I think sometimes you have to jump into a process to help highlight what the problems are. But, ultimately, the process never solves the problems, it just highlights them.

If you’ve already got a process that’s highlighted a bunch of the problems for you, I wouldn’t advocate going and switching to another process. I would deal with the problems that your current process is highlighting. If you have no clue what problems you need to tackle, then maybe you need some process to help highlight the problems for you.

Clayton:  Yeah, I think that one example that comes to mind is you might find a team that is doing Scrum, and they never have enough time for planning. Like, every time they say, “Scrum, the process says we have to do this thing called a planning meeting,” and it has these certain things we have to do, and there’s this artifact or whatever that falls out of it. But we just can’t just do it.

Either the work we’re doing is too complex and we don’t have the time to break down all the work that we’re doing in this planning meeting, or there’s just not that much time in a day. They told us we have to do this two week sprint thing, so we can’t spend two days. That’s too big of a percentage of our Sprint just doing planning and thing that’s one of those situations that Derek’s getting into is, “OK, well, maybe there is a problem. Why does it take so long to plan?” Or maybe that’s not even a problem. Maybe that’s OK. But I think that’s the kind of thing that people will dive in and say. “This process is broken, it doesn’t work!”

Roy:  Does that mean that maybe processes like Scrum, and like some of the other ones out there are really just a way to normalize your team, so that you can talk in the same language as all the other teams? For example, having the issue of not being able to spend the time for planning, you might be able to go to another team that is practicing Scrum, and say, “Hey, we’re having this problem, and because you guys are using the same terminology, and you are trying to implement the same process, maybe all it is, is a framework to make it easier to communicate your problems to other teams, so that they are able to help you out.”

Clayton:  Yeah, that probably would make it easier, but I don’t think that’s really the goal so much as the teams have probably going to all have some different kinds of problems. They are all going to be exposed in some different way. I think it’s kind of, you get to that fork in the road, where either you decide to, “OK, well, here’s this problem we have. We’re going to resolve it somehow.”

I think what the gist of article is, “We have this process problem. It must mean that we’re not doing something about the process right so let’s stop doing this and find a new process.” That’s the real issue. A lot of times, the stuff that something like Scrum or any agile methodology will uncover are difficult things that you would rather not have to solve. It’s a lot easier to blame it on the process, do some new thing, “Here, look, look, a pony.” You get some new thing in there, and you can kind of start the cycle over again.

Drew:  We have some processes out there that I feel like most of us consider negative processes. I think, in most circumstances, for example, waterfall is pretty much frowned upon in the agile community. There probably is a time and a place for it, but how do you make that determination?

I suggest if the entire agile community shuns it, then we can’t consider it a valid process. It might be the process that is a problem. How do we know that it is my process that is a problem, or how do I know it is my team that is a problem? Do you know what I mean?

Derek:  I think a process lets you know what challenges you face within a team or an organization. I think the reason that waterfall has been universally shunned over or shown to be not so effective is it’s feedback cycle is way too short. It does have the ability to tell you that things are wrong, and to deal with them. However, the time frames that that are in are generally in months or years as opposed to days or weeks.

I think when I look at why most agile processes do fairly well is because they’re very iterative, which means they’ve got much, much smaller feedback loops. I would almost argue that a lot of teams I see doing scrum are really doing mini‑waterfall.

Their teams are still very siloed. They’re doing two or four‑week sprints. In whole, they have iteration zero, and they have a hardening sprint. They have all these smells, but they are getting feedback in a much tighter loop than if they said, “Hey, we’re going to do this 12‑month project, and we’re not really going to do a postmortem until month 12.”

Clayton:  Just to clarify, I think you meant to say that they have a longer feedback cycle?

Derek:  Yes, longer feedback cycle. I’m sorry.

Drew:  When people have resistance to part of the process ‑‑ like, “Oh, we can’t spend all this time planning” or “This standup is just getting in our way. Why don’t I just get my work done?” ‑‑ part of a lot of agile processes are ceremonies that may be uncomfortable for people who are trying them to start.

What are ways you guys think to overcome those type of awkwardness of starting a new ceremony that, by their culture, they’ve never done before?

Roy:  I think a lot of it is providing value in those ceremonies. I see way too many organizations institute a standup or a planning meeting. They are pretty much dog and pony shows in the sense of, they are there only because some scrum book or some scrum master or some coach told the team they need to do that, but the teams get no inherent value out of them.

I think the key is getting the information out in the ceremony, dealing with it, reflecting on it, and improving the ceremony every time. Otherwise, what’s the point? There’s been several times I’ve told teams, “Why do you even bother having a stand up, because what you’re doing is not valuable to yourselves or anyone around you?”

Clayton:  Going back to the article about, “Don’t just change the process,” when do you guys think it’s OK to change a process? How far does it matter to team maturity?

Or if you get to try it for a certain period of time, how would you know now is the right time to change things and do something different even just as an experiment? How would you know how far to go with that? If you keep that for a longer period of time, is it OK to change process? How would you know that?

Drew:  One example that I have ‑‑ it’s just maybe a change of not necessarily a process but a practice ‑‑ is we were trying to get our stories smaller. We had a problem of having stories that were too big. I remember during planning once, we argued forever or discussed for a long time, “Should the stories be broken up or not?” At that point, we decided, “OK. Let’s just put it into this sprint. Let’s not talk about it more. We can move on and figure out if it was too big or not.”

But I think sometimes, because of a time constraint, you can just move on, and, maybe, just skip some of those things that, maybe, you know you should do, but as a team, you don’t have consensus.

Derek:  I think it’s all about data. I would ask, “Why did the team think they needed to break the story down to a smaller story?” What behavior or what symptom or what data made you think, “Hey, we should potentially break this down”?

Drew:  In that experience, I think it was more of just people saying, “Hey, we should break this story” or people saying, “Big stories are bad, and smaller stories are good.” That was all the data that we were going off of.

Later on, we actually learned that ourselves when we learn that, “Hey, it’s getting near the end of the sprint, and we have no story signed off. How can we fix that problem?”

Derek:  To me, it’s all about data. If you say, “Hey the problem is the data that’s coming up is that we’re not getting stories into pending until the end of the sprint, we should change something.” Once you change something, you should then be able to measure, “Once we did that change did the problem of not getting stories into pending until the end of the sprint go away?”

If the answer’s yes, then that was probably a good process change, or a potentially good process change. If the answer’s no, then you say, “Hey, that’s not had anything to do with it, let’s either go back to what we were doing before or let’s find what the real problem is.”

Roy:  It sounds like in that type of situation you’d want to be very careful to make only one change so that you know which change caused your measurable effect. Doing a process swap, like you had asked when is it appropriate. It sounds like doing a whole process swap is very difficult, because sure you can measure whether or not there was a successful change, but you don’t know which aspects of your new process made that change.

Chances are, if it did improve, then your ideal process as a team lies somewhere between the old process and the new process. In some cases, not all cases, obviously.

I kind of feel like instead of approaching a new process, what I would do is try to get the existing process working, so that you know that you are following all of the ceremonies. Deal with those problems that arise. If you still are noticing problems within the organization, or within the team, I would start pulling in one aspect at a time of the other process and trying them out. Trying to see if, just swap it in place, and see if that works for your team or not. I can’t really think of too many cases in which different best practices from multiple processes are mutually exclusive.

Clayton:  I was going to say, what if the different aspects that you might be pulling in are conflicting?

Roy:  Since you’re only pulling in one aspect my assumption, and it could be a wrong assumption, is that it should really only affect one aspect of your existing process. I still feel like that’s a one change that you’re making.

Derek:  Maybe the way I would say it is if your current process is not highlighting problems for you, by all means, change your process. If your current process is highlighting problems for you, until you’ve dealt with those problems, changing your process will not help you.

Roy:  If you think you kick ass, you’re using the wrong process and you need to switch immediately.

Derek:  Maybe.

Roy:  I wasn’t being totally facetious. Let’s face it, no team is perfect. Everybody needs some proof. If your process is telling you that you are perfect, something’s wrong.

Clayton:  Yeah, I guess that’s a matter of does your process support something like continuous improvement, and those kind of things, right?

Derek:  Correct.

Clayton:  I guess I have one last question. If I’m in a situation where maybe I’m part of a team, and all of a sudden some ‑‑ let’s say scrum ‑‑ scrum‑thing gets dumped on me, and I’m told now you do this process.

We used to do this thing over here, that’s the old and busted, now we’re going to do the new hotness. Do it. Is that kind of culture, and that kind of thing even conducive to having that process be successful in the first place, or is that the kind of culture where people are going to blame the process for problems?

Roy:  That’s a good point. When something like that is mandated from on high it makes it very difficult. I think we’ve had some good arguments in the past about the power of self‑organizing teams, and I think if you start organizing the team for them, it’s going to be difficult to get buy‑in.

Derek:  I mean, I think it’s the difference between self‑direction and self‑organization. I think that you can still have a large amount of self‑organization and be put in a container. You could be put on a team and say, “Hey you have to ship product x.” Technically, that’s not self‑direction, but you can be pretty self‑organizing within that.

I would say that, if you’ve got leadership, or you’ve got somebody who understands self‑organization, who really wants the team to quickly adopt, or quickly accelerate through a new process that is highly self‑organizing, I think you’d probably want to go through some form of a process, where you start to talk about the old process, or lack of a process, and say, “Hey, doesn’t it bother anybody else that we can’t do A, or we can’t do B, or that this is a problem, like our quality sucks, or we don’t have predictability,” or these kind of things.

Start with isn’t this a problem. If the team starts to identify it’s a problem, then you can kind of say, “Well, what if we use this thing,” whatever the process is to try to help solve some of those problems. Then, now it’s kind of the team is kind of pulling it along. It’s not you will use this. It’s rather, “Hey, here are the problems we’re trying to solve. Does anybody know how to solve them?” I’ve heard these particular processes might be good for it. Now you’re kind of letting them be part of that process of choosing the process.

Roy:  The best part is they might actually have better ideas than ones you’re already aware of to deal with some of those issues. They may be able to point out that what you think are the issues are not the real issues.

Drew:  They can adopt the changes, as you talked about, Derek, if they show the problems or if they share with the problems, then they can choose some change that they can make to solve those problems, and make it more of a gradual thing.

Roy:  It’s their victory if they succeed.

Derek:  I think it falls in line with, if we’re talking at least scrum. It falls in line with you can tell the team this is the story that needs to be done, but you’re not telling them how to implement that story. In the same way, you can say, these are the problems I need as a product owner, or these are the problems I need as a CEO, but you’re not telling them this is the process you have to use to give me that information or to fix those problems.

Drew:  Thank you. That concludes our episode. We’d love for you guys to join the conversation at facebook.com/agileweekly. Thanks a lot.

Clayton:  Thank you.

Derek:  Bye‑bye.

[music]

Announcer:  Is there something you’d like to hear in a future episode? Head over to integrum.com/podcast where you can suggest a topic or a guest.

Looking for a way to stay up to date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the agile community? Sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best agile content delivered weekly, for free.

The Agile Weekly podcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies, and recorded at Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out integrumtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

The post Episode #61 – Is the Process the Problem? appeared first on Episode #60 – 10 Destructive Team Behaviors with Deb Spicer http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-60-destructive-team-behaviors-with-deb-spicer/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-60-destructive-team-behaviors-with-deb-spicer/#respond Thu, 17 May 2012 16:00:11 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6719 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Deb Spicer discuss 10 Destructive Behaviors That Can Bring Down a Team’s Success: 10 behaviors observed over 25 …

The post Episode #60 – 10 Destructive Team Behaviors with Deb Spicer appeared first on Deb Spicer discuss 10 Destructive Behaviors That Can Bring Down a Team’s Success:

  • 10 behaviors observed over 25 years
  • Deb’s book, Power Teams VIP
  • Why is lip service so prevalent?
  • How can a manager keep good team members while helping everyone improve?
  • Dealing with culture and millennials
  • What’s the worst behavior for the team?
  • How to improve bad behaviors
  • Are some people just not right for the team?

Transcript

Clayton:  Welcome to another episode of the Agile Weekly Podcast. I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Roy:  I’m Roy van de Water.

Clayton:  Joining us today, we have Deb Spicer. You can say hi, Deb.

Deb:  Hi. How are you?

Clayton:  Good. We actually found an article you had written. The title is “10 Destructive Behaviors That Can Bring Down a Team’s Success” and that’s we wanted to talk to you about. A lot of the work that we do involves working with teams and taking teams from maybe being some dysfunctional team and trying to get them toward high performing and those things. We were really interested in that topic.

First off, I was just curious. Where was it you came up with this list of 10 ideas? Is that something you’ve observed or a list you’ve compiled with people in the industry? Where’d you come up with that?

Deb:  Actually, I came up with it after 25 years of working in global matrix teams or organizations and it is part of the book that I wrote, “Power Teams.” We can talk about that later, but actually I wrote the whole book about high‑performing teams, what makes them high performing and also when you do have destructive behaviors, how do you deal with that.

Clayton:  We’re look at a few of the behaviors that were identified on that list and we had some questions about some of those.

The first one that jumped out at us was the one about lip service. We feel like whenever we identify this where there’s somebody that is in the organization that’s like this, it seems like everybody know that that person is full of it but nobody seems to say anything about it. Why do you think that is?

Deb:  It’s very common. There are a couple of reasons that people behave that way. One is in all these behaviors, people behave the way that they do because leading to this point, it has worked for them in some form or another. When you have someone that promises everything but doesn’t really deliver on that, then it’s likely that that person has gotten away without being accountable for the things that they claim.

By instilling some accountability for that person by breaking it down, holding their feet to the fire, that helps change that behavior and it just shows them, “hey, it’s a new day and you can say whatever you want but the rewards will come from the delivery, not from the words.”

Clayton:  Another thing we were wondering about is…we’re trying, whenever we have guests on the show, to take a viewpoint of maybe one of the listeners…so, if I’m a manager listening to this podcast and I think, “OK. I’ve identified these 10 behaviors, and I understand they’re wrong.

If I want to make my team better and promote the good things, how do I keep my team intact, because if people get better, aren’t they just going to leave and get a better job, or something”?

Deb:  That’s a great question. In fact, when teams come together and achieve for something being themselves, they tend to stay, because that is a reward that is so rarely seen in organizations. It’s like when you get in the trenches with a group of people, but yet you achieve, you come out, you succeed, and you’re rewarded. Those teams tend to be the ones that stay together in a very tight cluster, move on, and take on even bigger challenges and bigger jobs together.

They’ve gelled, they trust each other, they know how to deal with conflict, they feel safe to just push back on each other, and challenge each other’s ideas. Always on the other side of that, something bigger and better comes out of it, so, in fact, organizations don’t have to worry.

The organizations that promote that kind of team cohesiveness, with many different teams in the organizations, are the ones who have the most innovation, are the strongest, and tend to be the leaders in the forefront of whatever dynamic is happening in the marketplace.

Clayton:  One thing that you’ve mentioned also is the idea about the old culture. There’re some people who maybe have been there for a long time and have a way of doing things. Something that we’ve been seeing a lot…it looks like a lot of chatter is, especially in the software industry where you have people that are the new Millennial Generation. These 20‑somethings maybe out of college…

Roy:  I guess me.

Clayton:  Yes. That might describe Roy, actually.

How do you integrate that? They got these old culture people that have a certain way of doing things, and then you got these Millennials. Would you have any insight on treating this kind of generational gap?

Deb:  I can, and in fact that chapter in my book talks about a computer company that was number two in the marketplace. Overtime, the focus was on one of the divisions in the company that was not performing, and that was to the detriment of what were the high‑performing divisions.

There was enough complacency to go around that really brought the company down and it slipped down to number three. Important in dealing with this is to just shake that culture up. How do you do that?

First of all, as the leader, what you do is you start setting very tight timelines on deliverables. You start speeding things up. You start the focus on what those measurable outcomes are going to be.

You add things like higher level team reports so that those people that are complacent on a team, psychologically they know they better step up or they risk looking bad in front of the higher management folks. You keep the pressure, you set the deliverables, you set the timelines short, you know, “By Thursday this is what is due.”

You hold people’s feet to the fire and what you see happening then is it’s not the leader holding people accountable, it’s the rest of the team that starts holding them accountable. That style supports the new millennial styles of work that haven’t been built in to some of the older cultures. Then the pressure starts coming from within the team and not just a top‑down kind of pressure.

Clayton:  Just to clarify, you’re suggesting applying these pressures to the entire team, right? Not to individuals or is it…

Deb:  Correct.

Clayton:  …or is it doing it to the individual?

Deb:  No. In fact, that’s a good point because whenever we talk about these behaviors, that is what we’re talking about. The people themselves are not bad people, it’s just that they have gotten used to using behaviors that don’t necessarily fit with the kind of culture organizations need today when those organizations want to succeed.

We address the behavior by putting things in place that will shake it up. That’s a particular one, you haven’t mentioned the piranha factor, but that’s actually one of the hardest ones to deal with for this reason. It doesn’t matter as a leader how charismatic you are, it doesn’t matter how great of a negotiator you are or a communicator. This behavior is very difficult.

Just close your eyes for a minute and think about this scene. You’re in Brazil, you’re on a bridge looking over the river down into the water, and you take a piece of raw meat and you throw it down into the water. What happens?

All of a sudden, you see backs of fish. It starts looking like a washing machine is just churning up the water and you see tails and fins and pieces of scales and stuff floating in the water. What that is, it’s the piranhas. They’re coming after that raw piece of meat.

In the piranha mentality, it doesn’t matter…what people don’t understand is they are eating each other to get to that prize. It doesn’t matter who’s in the way. They just go after them and they’ll take them out to get the prize. Picture that in a team setting. The same destructive things happen. The piranha personality can leave a whole team in shreds. It doesn’t matter who they take out because for whatever their motivation or agenda is, they’re going to take out anybody who gets in their way.

That’s an important one that if you inherit that person who has that personality or if you’re taking over a new team and you see that coercive, manipulative, sabotaging, demeaning kind of personality, what you have is a piranha, what I call the piranha factor. One of the most difficult and destructive team behaviors is that and it’s manifested by deliberate manipulation, deliberate coercion.

They will sabotage individuals and the team as a whole for whatever their personal gain is. That behavior of all of them needs to be dealt with immediately and it needs to be dealt with very firmly.

How do you do that? One of the ways is that, while you’re in the team setting, you still handle everyone very professionally, because the other team leaders, who are very aware, just like the ingrained old culture, everybody sees it. Everybody knows.

But it’s your leadership that’s important in this scenario, to not that person out, if you will, in front of everyone. It’s you address it professionally, firmly…

Deb:  Then what you do is, besides talking to that particular person outside of that team setting, what you want to do is find a way to remove them from their comfort zone.

What that means is, and what I’ve used in the past is, I then moved the entire team outside of the role that they bring to that team. IT, example, if you’re an IT programmer, then I might move you to the finance role, so you have to put on the thinking cap as if you were the finance person for that organization. If you’re a quality assurance person on the IT team, I might move you to the market role.

As the piranha is the director of IT programming, like I said, I wouldn’t move that person to a finance role. Everybody figuratively moves outside of their own comfort zone, so what you get is the information, experience, enthusiasm that people bring to their regular job, plus you’re making them stretch themselves into what if I were the finance person, how would I deal with this team challenge or this team initiative that we need to solve.

Roy:  I guess the moving people around works but what if you have somebody on your team that is irredeemable, or he doesn’t seem to be willing to take on any of the positive traits that your team requires, and they just keep exhibiting his negative ones? Do you find that that even happens? Is nobody irredeemable? Or, if somebody is irredeemable, how do you deal with that?

Deb:  The easy way is to [laughs] remove them from the team, if you can. In my circumstance, that I write about in the book, it was people higher up than me required that this person stay on, because they found that person brought something in a niche way that was important.

Because this initiative was at such a high level, and the outcome of this initiative was so critical to changing some of the direction for the company, the other team members, who were also decision makers, actually took on the role policing this person, and it didn’t have to be me to get them in the right vein. They did it themselves.

But there are some people who, no matter what, will make sure that they don’t have any personal loyalty that they will not allow the team to collaborate, they’ll keep blinders on, they’ll stay single‑focused, and, at the end of the day, they have to be removed, or else it destroys your entire team.

Roy:  One last question for you here. Let’s say that I’m just a member of the team, and I come across this article, or maybe I listen to this podcast, and I’m witnessing some of these behaviors on my team.

What can I do? What to do for a step for me? Maybe I’m not ready to stick my neck out and make a big deal out of it, but I want to make some change.

Deb:  Very good question. The most important thing that you can do is be an example. You heard of the 80/20 role in business and in sales. There’s a different role. It’s called the 10/80/10 role.

What happens is 10 percent of any team, of an organization, of a homeowners association, whatever dynamic that you have, 10 percent of the people will be wonderful cheerleaders, they’ll buy in immediately, they’ll rah‑rah, they’ll be supportive.

On the opposite end of the spectrum, you have 10 percent, no matter what, that will serve their destructive behaviors. They’re against things because that’s just who they are. If everybody else wants it, they don’t want it. Then there’s this 80 percent in the middle, we call them the mushy middle.

This is in politics, this is in lobbying, in can be in churches. 80 percent of the people are the followers. They’re going to look, they’re going to watch, they’re going to observe, and then, eventually, they’re going to choose aside the 10 percent positive, the 10 percent negative.

You, as a person who wants to see the success of this, modeling successful behavior will start to bring more and more of that 80 percent over to that dynamic. You’ll see more and more people come to that. What, ultimately, does that do? It marginalizes and makes the 10 percent who are negative very insignificant.

Even as a younger manager, new in your growth professionally, you can still model the behaviors as if you’re at a higher level, and you’ll find that more and more of the mushy middle will start to also model those behaviors, again making the negative, stubborn, procrastinating type of people, or the outright saboteurs, be very insignificant, because they won’t be able to sway the team.

Clayton:  It’s a good answer. I’m a big fan of modeling good behavior, so that’s a great way to think about it. We’re about out of time here, but you’ve mentioned a book. I was curious if there is anything else relating to the book or anything like that you’d like to share with the listeners.

Deb:  Sure. Actually, the book is called “Power Teams: The New SQUARE ROOT MODEL That Changes Everything!” It’s on Amazon, by Deb Spicer. If you’d like to look up on my website, it’s quantumlevelsuccess.com. Also, I do have some additional materials. I have a quick reference guide that goes with the book that I give for free. I have some chapters that are available for free.

If you have any questions that are bothering you with any of your team members, and you’d just like to drop me a line, I’m very happy. I talk through ID as an issues with people all the time. It’s no charge. I really enjoy hearing the good and successful team stories as well as the challenges, and I think talking through those makes us all stronger, so I encourage you. It’s [email protected]. Please reach out. I’d love to hear from you.

Clayton:  Great. That sounds great. We really appreciate you taking the time to speak with us today, and we loved having you.

Deb:  Thank you, and thank you for inviting me, to your success, to your team success. I wish you the best. Take care.

Clayton:  Thanks.

[music]

Clayton:  If there’s something you’d like to hear in a future episode, get over to integrumtech.com/podcast, where you can suggest a topic or a guest. Looking for an easy way to stay up to date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the agile community? Sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best agile content delivered weekly for free!

The Agile Weekly podcast is brought to you by Intergrum Technologies, and recorded at Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For old episodes, check out Integrumtech.com, or subscribe on iTunes.

The post Episode #60 – 10 Destructive Team Behaviors with Deb Spicer appeared first on Episode #59 – Running a Transparent Consultancy with Chris Sims http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-59-running-a-transparent-consultancy-with-chris-sims/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-59-running-a-transparent-consultancy-with-chris-sims/#comments Thu, 10 May 2012 15:00:52 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6674 Roy van de Water, Drew LeSueur and Chris Sims discuss: Transparency in compensation Using Scrum to run a Scrum consultancy Elements of Scrum and Scrum: A Breathtakingly …

The post Episode #59 – Running a Transparent Consultancy with Chris Sims appeared first on Episode #59 – Running a Transparent Consultancy with Chris Sims appeared first on Episode #58 – Personal Kanban with Gerry Kirk http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-58-personal-kanban-with-gerry-kirk/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/05/episode-58-personal-kanban-with-gerry-kirk/#respond Thu, 03 May 2012 17:00:13 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6670 Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, and Gerry Kirk discuss: Kanban in your personal life Kanban in work life as a one-man team Personal …

The post Episode #58 – Personal Kanban with Gerry Kirk appeared first on Episode #58 – Personal Kanban with Gerry Kirk appeared first on Episode #57 – Performance Reviews with Kane Mar http://integrumtech.com/2012/04/episode-57-performance-reviews-with-kane-mar/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/04/episode-57-performance-reviews-with-kane-mar/#respond Thu, 26 Apr 2012 15:00:32 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6667 Roy van de Water,  Derek Neighbors, and Kane Mar Discuss: Star teams over star individuals Need for individual performance reviews? Team decisions Individual and team compensation, now and …

The post Episode #57 – Performance Reviews with Kane Mar appeared first on Episode #57 – Performance Reviews with Kane Mar appeared first on Episode #56 – Strengths with Scott Dunn http://integrumtech.com/2012/04/episode-56-strengths-with-scott-dunn/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/04/episode-56-strengths-with-scott-dunn/#respond Thu, 19 Apr 2012 17:00:17 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6606 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Scott Dunn discuss: StrengthsFinder 2.0 Playing to your Strengths Introducing Strengths to your team Strengths and self-organizing teams …

The post Episode #56 – Strengths with Scott Dunn appeared first on Episode #56 – Strengths with Scott Dunn appeared first on Episode #55 – Lean Startup Principles and Agile http://integrumtech.com/2012/04/episode-55-lean-startup-principles-and-agile/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/04/episode-55-lean-startup-principles-and-agile/#respond Thu, 12 Apr 2012 12:00:51 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6613 Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, David Bland discuss Lean Startup principles in Agile: Lots of companies dealing with unknowns Product teams Release …

The post Episode #55 – Lean Startup Principles and Agile appeared first on David Bland discuss Lean Startup principles in Agile:

  • Lots of companies dealing with unknowns
  • Product teams
  • Release early, release often
  • Validate, Experiment, Iterate
  • Culture preventing engagement?
  • Executives communicate with teams
  • How to get the “C” level to change
  • Eric Ries “Lean Startup” / Steve Blank
  • Is it a panacea?
  • Radical culture problems abound
  • Confusion about what lean startup means
  • Risk adverse culture problems when you have golden egg to protect?
  • Alignment across enterprise
  • Cross functional teams
  • How do you maintain it?
  • Give freedom, be creative
  • Innovation team (I’m a special snowflake)
  • Executive support mandatory

The post Episode #55 – Lean Startup Principles and Agile appeared first on Episode #54 – Defects in the Sprint, with Mike Vizdos http://integrumtech.com/2012/04/episode-54-defects-in-the-sprint-with-mike-vizdos/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/04/episode-54-defects-in-the-sprint-with-mike-vizdos/#respond Thu, 05 Apr 2012 12:00:59 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6604 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Mike Vizdos discuss: Do we estimate defects? How do I get “credit” for doing defects? What counts as …

The post Episode #54 – Defects in the Sprint, with Mike Vizdos appeared first on Episode #54 – Defects in the Sprint, with Mike Vizdos appeared first on Episode #53 – Managers in Agile with Jurgen Appelo http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-53-managers-in-agile-with-jurgen-appelo/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-53-managers-in-agile-with-jurgen-appelo/#respond Thu, 29 Mar 2012 18:00:53 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6502 Roy van de Water and special guest Jurgen Appelo, author of Management 3.0, discuss: Managers in Agile Environments to enable innovation Experimentation in Agile Self-organizing …

The post Episode #53 – Managers in Agile with Jurgen Appelo appeared first on Jurgen Appelo, author of Management 3.0, discuss:

  • Managers in Agile
  • Environments to enable innovation
  • Experimentation in Agile
  • Self-organizing teams
  • How to help organizations change
  • Stoos

Transcript

Roy:  Welcome to another episode of the Scrumcast. My name is Roy van de Water and joining today is Jurgen Appelo. Could you please introduce yourself a little bit Jurgen?

Jurgen Appelo:  Yeah. Sure. My name is Jurgen Appelo and I am the writer of a book called “Management 3.0.” I am also the author of a blog called noop.nl and I am interested in the role of the manager in agile organizations, organizations working with scrum or any of the other agile methods.

Roy:  Cool. I’ve been scanning through “Management 3.0” and I talked to Jade quite a bit who has read the whole thing. What was your motivation to write that book?

Jurgen:  My original motivation was to write a book about complexity science and Agile…

Jurgen:  …developments because I like the science that explains why Agile works. I read lots of books about systems theory and thought. With people at conferences, I’ve noticed that their main problems were with management and leadership because Agile and Scrum don’t really define what the role is of managers.

People just see managers as impediments to be put on the impediment back‑log or something. Managers have to support the teams in order to make Agile really work. When I got that feedback, I thought, “OK, let’s focus my book on that topic because I happen to be a manager for 15 years.” I knew something about the role of the manager in Agile organizations.

That’s what I, then, decided to focus on.

Roy:  What do you feel has been the reaction from the managers that have read your book?

Jurgen:  So far, so good. Interestingly enough, most of the people who read my book are not necessarily managers themselves, but interested in the role of the managers or how to help them.

Also, in my courses for example, based on the book, I think about 20 percent of them are middle managers. The other 80 percent are formed by Scrum Masters, product owners, team leaders, sometimes entrepreneurs, sometimes a product manager. A very diverse bunch of people, but they all struggle with the management position.

Either they are themselves managers or they want to help managers in order to get them aligned with what Agile expects from them.

Roy:  Many people are saying that they value innovation, but they don’t really allow the environmental conditions for it to thrive to exist. What can we, as Agile coaches, do to help that?

Jurgen:  That’s a difficult, difficult question. One thing that seems to lack in Agile methods is experimentation. Basically, I learned from system’s science that there are three forms for systems to survive in changing environments. Scrum teams are, also, systems that are trying to survive in a changing environment. Those three approaches are anticipation, adaptation and experimentation.

In Scrum, we do a little bit of anticipation because we try to look at the next sprint and predict what the customer wants. At least, that’s what the product owner does. We do a lot of adaptation because we show the results to the product owner. Then, they respond, the back‑log changes and new priorities and things off that.

But what about experimentation? There is no real guidance on exploring things, just for the sake of trying things out. I explain that sometimes jokingly, “I ordered a chai tea latte from Starbucks a few weeks ago, just to see what it was and I hated it. It was terrible, so I threw it away.” This was neither anticipation nor adaptation. It was exploration, just trying things out for the sake of trying.

We seem to be lacking that in Agile organizations. That is what innovation needs actually. We need a bit of time and space for experiments.

Roy:  From reading your book, I feel that you value self‑organization a lot and getting the team to feel like they have the authority to perform this type of experimentation. I’ve heard managers in the past ask the somewhat ironic question, “How do I make my team be self‑organizing?”

What is the right way to ask that question? How do I allow my team to self organize or encourage them to self organize? Have you found a good way to get them to really feel comfortable, to take the authority, to make decisions and experiment?

Jurgen:  Yeah, because usually managers trouble a bit with delegating stuff to self‑organizing teams because they see as it as a black or white thing. Either I make a decision as a manager or the teams make the decisions as self‑organizing teams. They see it as just two actions. But, actually there are more options in between. There are shades of gray.

In my book, I list several levels of delegation. The second level, for example, is trying to convince a team, but you still make a decision as a manager.

The third level is a step further where you first ask the teams, “What is it that you would do if you were allowed to make that decision? Just give me your input.” Let them, still I will decide.

Step‑by‑step you could go into the direction of delegation without doing a full‑blown sweep from level one to level seven because that for some managers feels dangerous and it is dangerous with some teams. You need a more gradual approach.

I try to help them with that. I explain it sometimes as trying to find what is the speed limit. Trying to drive your car as fast as possible, but you don’t want to drive too fast because that will end up in chaos. It’s the same with self‑organizing teams. I’ve seen it myself. Inexperienced and immature are allowed to make any kind of decision, things will blow up. There is too much freedom. You have to constrain it a little bit.

Roy:  What would you say to a manager that’s resisting allowing their team to self‑organize, perhaps somebody more of the traditional management role where they’ve always been taught that if they’re not in control, then everything is going to go wrong?

Jurgen:  That’s a well‑known problem. It’s a good question. I can only tell from my own experience that I have noticed quite the opposite. When I introduced Scrum in the Agile organization, things were going better. Things were not blowing up around us as much as they used to before.

We have self‑organizing teams. I was able delegate to them. The performance went up. This did not diminish my role as a manager. On the contrary, it elevated me in the eyes of many, including my own CEO, because I was the one who came up with it. I was the one who said, “We have to do this.”

The result was that I expanded my span of control from 20 people to 30 people and then, in the end, to 100 people because it made us more scalable and I could manage more teams. I would deny that it makes managers feel powerless.

On the contrary, if you do it well, it could make you more powerful. It’s a bit cliche, but it is win/win. You gain from it as a manager because better performing teams reflect on you as a manager because they are your teams. My CEO didn’t want to let go of me anymore after such good decisions.

Roy:  Got you. You talked a little bit about introducing Scrum into organizations and starting to form these teams. You just came out with a new protocol of how to change the world. How does that fit into trying to introduce organizational change?

Jurgen:  The question that I get most often is, “How do I get other people to change their behavior?” Or any form of that question like, “How do I convince team members that they should develop themselves some more?” Or, “How do I convince my customers that they should accept Scrum and its changing back‑log and things like that?”

It’s always the same thing that Agile and Agile coaches struggle with it is convincing other people that they have to change. I have basic change management. I have researched that. I have borrowed lots of ideas from many good books and I turned it into a little handbook called, “How to Change the World”.

It is an ambitious title, but it’s only 80 or 90 pages. It sort of gives an overview from my perspective as a complexed thinker on how you should approach a social system, which an organization is.

It is a social system, and you have to poke it with ideas and experiments, and see what works and what doesn’t and do iteratively and get feedback and basically, you have to be agile as a change agent as well because you never know how the system is going to respond, how the organization is going to respond to your ideas, but just to try things out and also understand that you have to work on not only the rational level, but the emotional level as well because some people are aware of a need for change, but they have to be fed the medicine with lots of sugar.

You have to address the people’s intrinsic desires as well and not only the rational part.

Roy:  In the book too, you talk a little bit about how management is often times really slow to change. Why do you think that is?

Jurgen:  It’s for many reasons. I’m quite sure some of them will fear their jobs because they see it not unreasonably as a danger for their position because I do think that, in some organizations, there are too many managers. The middle management layer is simply too fat.

It can be thinner, but it doesn’t mean that we need no managers. I’m quite sure that for some this is the reason to resist and while for others it is simply not knowing what to do and willing to work with self‑organizing teams, but fearing that things go out of control. These managers would have a positive inclination towards Agile, but they simply don’t know how to handle it in a safe way.

There are many different ways, many different reasons I think for managers to be cautious or resisting. We have to figure it out on a person by person basis.

Roy:  What would be your best change success story where you’ve gone in somewhere and introduced a good change?

Jurgen:  That would be my own organization because I’m not an Agile coach. I can only talk from my own experience as a manager. I’ve been working in my last organization for 7 years as CIO. There I introduced Scrum and it was a success in terms of the people who were working there, both the team members, top management, and customers.

Of course, there were plenty of problems that we had to solve, but that’s what Scrum does. It doesn’t solve the problems itself. It just makes them more visible. We could start working on them, but everyone agreed that we made a good step in the right direction, that’s my personal experience. Of course, I hear plenty of stories from others, but they’re not my own.

Roy:  Recently you’ve been involved and helped organize something called the Stutz network. Could you please tell us a little bit about that?

Jurgen:  Yeah, sure. I was in contact with Steve Denning, another author who wrote Radical Management, Franz Roosli, who was part of the Beyond Budgeting Movement, Peter Stevens who was an Agile coach, and the four of us thought wouldn’t it be great to get people together, who are all trying to address the management problem and I’m just one of many.

We started inviting people, and this became the Stutz event, the STOLZ, it is actually pronounced in German. In Switzerland, we had 21 people together to discuss things and we tried to figure out how can we accelerate change in the world and it is a very difficult topic.

But we were very much inspired by each other and it seems that there’s plenty of spinoff activity now with Stutz satellites and Fearless Change, Fearless Hamburg, Fearless et cetera, lots of cities where events are being scheduled, and we’re already talking about some follow up events that have not been announced or scheduled yet, but at least we want to go on because it is a topic that many people are concerned about, and we’re all trying to figure out how can we help to accelerate change in the world.

My another book How to Change the World is my own small contribution, but many people have their own contributions as well and we want to align them and make it dance together, that would be useful I think.

Roy:  Do you have anything that you’d like to promote or current things that you’re working on that you’d like to talk about?

Jurgen:  Well, there’re lots of things that I’m working on. I’ve already started writing the next book, which is sort of a real follow up to Management 3.0 in terms of very practical stuff to do.

I aim for things you can try the next Monday morning when you get back to your work. That level of practical pragmatic stuff because my first book had lot of theory in it and I thought it was important to have a solid foundation, but now people are asking for more examples of practical things that are happening in other organizations and that they could try out.

I’m collecting those. I talk with people at conferences. I have my own idea of what I call roving coffee. I have coffee with people in various places in the world.

Wherever I’m traveling, I invite people to have coffee with me and I ask them what are practices that are working for you, I want to hear their stories so anyone who wants to share a story with me, they can do that over email or have coffee with me, I’m collecting them, and hopefully that turns into a very interesting new book that might be out by the end of the year or next year or something.

Roy:  Awesome. That sounds great. I’m looking forward to it. All right, well, thank you for joining us.

Jurgen:  Thank you for inviting me.

[music]

Announcer:  Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the Agile Community, sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly for free. This Scrumcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies and recorded at Gangplank Studios in Chandler, Arizona. For all the episodes, check out integrumtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

The post Episode #53 – Managers in Agile with Jurgen Appelo appeared first on Episode #52 – Lean Principles in Healthcare http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-52-lean-principles-in-healthcare/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-52-lean-principles-in-healthcare/#comments Thu, 22 Mar 2012 18:00:22 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6498 Derek Neighbors, Clayton Lengel-Zigich and special guest Mark Graban, author of Lean Hospitals, discuss: Agile outside of software Lean in healthcare Lean as management principles Lean …

The post Episode #52 – Lean Principles in Healthcare appeared first on Mark Graban, author of Lean Hospitals, discuss:

  • Agile outside of software
  • Lean in healthcare
  • Lean as management principles
  • Lean is not cost cutting
  • Risk and quality in Lean
  • Bad processes and lean improvements
  • Improving flow

Transcript

Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another episode of the “Scrumcast”. I’m Derek Neighbors.

Corey Haines:  And I’m Corey Haines.

Derek:  Corey, I wanted to talk a little bit…You’re pretty well known in the community, at least in the software developer side, also a little bit in Agile and the XP side. I find your story extremely fascinating on a number of levels.

One of the things that always intrigued me is that you started programming relatively young for the average programmer, I would say. I’m curious a little bit about how you got started, and I think people can find some of that online.

What would you tell parents who had kids that were interested in computers or programming? What would you tell them to encourage them to let their kids get into this kind of craft?

Corey:  I think nowadays, like I got in by cheating at video games. We had all the source codes so we could go in and change the source to let us get past points that we couldn’t get past. Nowadays it’s a little bit more difficult to do that, with all the games are huge and compiled.

Now with the physical computing stuff that’s so pervasive and so easy to get into, like with the Raspberry Pi stuff that’s coming out and Arduinos, really grabbing the attention of the kids via physically doing stuff.

I’ve done a little bit of work with teaching kids. I taught a class last summer and we used Scratch for programming. It was just amazing to see kids pick it up. It’s a graphical programming environment so there’s a lot less of the frustration of syntax errors, things like that. I’d say get into, bring those sorts of things. There a lot programs going on now around that are sort of centered around teaching kids to program.

Derek:  Absolutely, we run one here at our work space, so absolutely.

Corey:  That’s neat.

Derek:  What would you tell your younger self if you could go back in time to that 10‑year‑old Corey Haines, what would you tell yourself?

Corey:  Don’t go into Microsoft technologies. Simply because of the fact that when I started spreading my eyes out a little bit and started looking beyond the .NET space and, even before that, the VB space, that’s when I really found this amazing community of learning and the community of not just one language but most people out there that I meet are some form of polyglots.

The open‑source community is very supportive. I got into VB, C#, doing a lot about it in the corporate environment for longer than I wish I had. It was about 2004 when I started looking outward mostly through the XP community. And I wish that I had started sooner.

Derek:  I think that segues really well. You talked about being in the corporate community, and certainly, how you came on my radar was when you took your yearlong tour where you said, “You know what, I’m really kind of tired of this corporate thing, and I’m really interested in really becoming a master at what I do and really broadening my horizons and working with different people.”

As part of that, you took a yearlong tour so to speak to go work with a wide variety of people, a wide variety of projects, technologies, you name it. What inspired you to do that?

Corey:  In 2008, I actually left my last corporate job, joined a startup for about seven months, got fired from that startup because it just was not a cultural fit for me. Then a friend of mine and a good mentor of mine, J.B. Rainsberger, he and I for quite a few years had been talking about how great it would be to do something like Paul Erdős who was a mathematician that would basically just go everywhere and do math with people.

We always have that idea of, “Man, would it be great to have the opportunity to just go program with people? No overhead. No expectations. Just go program, go code with them. See what they’re doing. Learn from them. Teach them.”

When I got fired, I had some money saved up and was just like, “Now is the time to do it.” There’s so much out there to learn. There’re so many people out there to learn from and teach. I set up a three‑week trip.

Then it snowballed into that. It was originally only intended to be about three weeks. But during those three weeks, it started to snowball, and I started setting my eyes outward a little bit and realized that there was a whole range of people out there, that I could go code with.

It was always anywhere from a day to five days. So there was…I would come in, the only rule was, I was doing it for room and boards. I needed a place to stay and I needed food and I was pairing with somebody the whole time. And that was sort of the only rule that went with it.

Derek:  What was the best part about that experience?

Corey:  There were a lot of really great parts. One of the big things that came out it that I had started with this idea and actually came to fruition was. I had a much, much, better sense sort of where I was, level‑wise.

I had good understanding. I’d worked with people, who’ve been programming longer than I’d been alive. I worked with people who’ve been programming for a few years. It really gave me an opportunity to reflect on just where I stood as a developer. I was about, 11 years into my professional career, may be 12 years in.

We often times get caught up in our own community and we have a sense of where we are relative to the other people in our community. But by going out and just working with as many people as I could, I got a better sense of that.

I learned something in one place and then the next day, I would be teaching it to the next people. That sort of helped me, really solidify a lot of my understanding of the, a lot of the core fundamental techniques, that I use when I program.

Derek:  I think that’s a huge, a huge deficit that this occupation has, is, it’s really hard to have a measuring stick where you are. Sometimes, if you think you are really great at something, may be you kind of pull back and you stop engaging, you stop learning.

One of the things that kind of excites me is, what if we get to a point where, companies start to put programmers out on loan, so to speak. What if it was a corporate culture to allow a little bit more polygraph behavior and allow developers to kind of meander between different corporations to help get some of that litmus test where they are at?

Corey:  Actually in 2010 and 2011, there was a group of companies that were doing just that. There is a group of seven consulting companies, like Relevance and Optiva and Ethlite and a few others around the world. They started swapping employees for a week here, two weeks there.

Derek:  That’s great.

Corey:  Yeah. It was really neat to see.

Derek:  I suspect there is a ton of great experiences. What were some of the bad experiences? What was the worst part about being on the road and working with different pairs, different technologies, different thing, every week or every five days?

Corey:  A lot of it was, this is kind of a weird answer, that the worst part was the fact that it was just so utterly exhausting. I look back and I’ve thought about it a lot and there weren’t a lot of moments where I was like, “Man, this kind of sucks” or “This is difficult.”

It was a wonderful experience, I was going around, I meet people, I pull my car into somebody’s house that I had never met before, just come in, sleep on their couch and then code with them all day. But it was incredibly exhausting and probably about the first five or six months, I was doing short, several weeks, may be month long trips. Then I spent the summer of 2009, 3 weeks or 3 months, continually on the road and drove 6,900 miles, went from Cleveland to Miami to Prince Edward Island back to Cleveland.

It really was incredibly exhausting, but that exhaustion was exhilarating because I was learning so much and I was meeting people and seeing things and so I think it was really just that exhaustion was the major negative part.

Derek:  It is part of this kind of journey of learning, so to speak, we’ve really seen the software craftsmanship movements start to bubble up and the metaphor of going from apprentice to journeyman to master. I know that you’re a big part of the craftsmanship movement. Why do you identify with that, and why does that metaphor strike a chord for you in relationship to software development?

Corey:  Well, I really like the craftsmanship movement, the craftsmanship community because it covers the gambit of how do we bring people in to software. How do we train them through the years? Along the way, how do we interact with our customers? How do we take pride and how do we treat our code? All of these things, specifically with the apprenticeship to journeyman and beyond.

I have a hard time bringing the master term in mostly because…The only place that I use it is when there’s somebody that I personally look up to and learn from as opposed to an external, “This person is considered a master.”

I have much more focus on the idea of apprenticeship, of coming into a trade and learning somebody else’s way. I look at it as, apprenticeship is when you are studying under somebody and learning the way that they develop software. You find somebody who is an effective, proven software developer, and you learn their methodology and their techniques and their practices.

Then there’s a point where you got those practices down, and you can sit there on your own and really take the effective atom. When you have that, it’s important, I think, to go out, cast your eyes out, look at the people around, find somebody and say, “Hey, they’re doing something completely different than I am” or “They develop software differently. They don’t use some of the practices that I use, but they’re being effective.”

Go look and learn from them as well. You’ll bring stuff to share with them. You’ll be able to learn somebody else’s style. When you do that, you then start to merge those two styles in yourself, and you start to learn, and you start to reflect over those techniques. That is something that I think really could further our understanding of software development that I really like to happen.

Derek:  Absolutely. There’s a few folks in the agile community that are critical perhaps of the craftsmanship movement and really struggling with tying the concepts of software development as an art form opposed to more of a scientific form.

The biggest criticism that is universal between the detractors seem to be that when we move to the metaphor of craftsmanship, the fear is that we’re turning all of the focus into the actual act of the creation of the product opposed to the deliverable of the product or the output or the effects that the product has on whoever you’re building it for.

Some of the examples are ‑‑ if you’re more worried about the stylistic making of the table so to speak in which it would be used, you’re not focused then on how it would necessarily be used in the real world. So maybe you can answer some of those detractors.

Corey:  I understand where that is coming from and where those fears are coming from. There are people who have written [indecipherable 14:18] . I have a tremendous amount of respect for and had a great conversation with them about this last fall.

The thing is that being in the software development community and being in the agile community and in the craftsmanship community, we spend most of our time developing software. The things we talked about tend to be around developing software and the screencast that we do tend to be about developing software.

But there’s a very important part of the Craftsmanship Manifesto, which is the Productive Partnerships, which is really about the way that we deal with our client, the way that we partner with them to deliver software to them that is fit for use. It’s exactly what they need. No more, no less.

A lot of the craftsmanship thoughts came out of a reaction towards just the general level of horrible code that’s out there. So a lot of the emphasis that we put is on learning some of these techniques. There’s no more question about whether or not automated unit test provide value the majority of the time, and that TDD is a valuable, value‑providing method for doing design of your system.

Is it always a hundred percent of the time the thing you should do? I was talking to Fred George…He had given a great talk at SCNA where he said that if it’s faster to rewrite your system, then you don’t need to do TDD. Well, that makes sense. If it’s fast, if you’re writing a script or if you’re writing just something that’s very quick to put out there, maybe you don’t do it.

But the majority of people aren’t at that point. The majority of developers out there were not to the point where we have the experience necessary to make those decisions. I very much tell people, “Always write tests.” It’s better to overwrite them and then to reflect on the problems that that caused than to have no test at all and not do any sort of test‑first development and suffer the consequences of that.

We’ve all been through those projects, and we know that doesn’t work. We have a set of practices that ‑‑ discussion’s over ‑‑ they do work. It’s just a matter of knowing how to apply them, and you learn how to apply them by practicing them.

We talk a lot about this. If you go to the conferences that we’ve had, if you talk to the people that are involved in the community, and you go look at some of the companies that consider themselves craftsmanship companies, like say 8th Light here in Chicago, their focus entirely is on satisfying what the client needs. It’s not about polishing it. It’s not about gold plating it.

They have a very active, incredibly successful apprenticeship program. They do [indecipherable 18:00] with their people. They do all of the things that we talk about that people say we’re overly focused on, but you can’t get better if you don’t practice. The state of the software industry is atrocious right now, where doing things and making mistakes that we should not be making on our day‑to‑day jobs, so that’s a long one to [indecipherable 18:25] , so I hope the kind of…

Derek:  It’s great. When you get to the core of it, I think the community is addressing the symptom that we see on a regular basis, which is really bad code and really bad practices. You have to get through that to get to the good stuff.

Corey:  Yeah.

Derek:  Speaking of community, you do a ton of community work with Coderetreats and Code and Coffee. You’ve got a number of projects out there whether it’d be your CodeCast or How I Got Started Programming series, I definitely think people should check out and get engaged.

Do you have anything new that you’re working on that you want to share with people?

Corey:  I just last December started a nonprofit sort of centered around the Coderetreat stuff. We had this Global Day of Coderetreat last December where we had 94 cities, all doing Coderetreat on the same day. They were Skype calling back and forth, and it was just this wonderful day of bringing basically the whole globe together on a single day.

Out of that, I brought out a nonprofit called the Coderetreat Community Contribution Fund, which right now it’s operating as nonprofit. We’re under 501(c)(3) review, but the goal of that is to be sort of an umbrella organization for doing fund raising to support kids programming events as well as a small amount of the funds will go towards supporting adult practice oriented workshops of the Coderetreat nature, don’t have to be Coderetreat but just sort of practice oriented.

I’ve been working a lot on that lately, just sort of how do you fundraise. I just did a Coderetreat in January that raised $400 and turned that around and sponsored, in San Francisco, there’s an organization called Black Girls Code, which is focused on teaching underserved girls to program.

They’re doing a six week course on the national stem challenge for writing video games and stuff. We took the $400 we had and we paid for snacks and drinks and stuff for them.

The big thing that I’m really excited about now is that is sort of figuring out how to help these programs out there like KidsRuby, Hackety Hack, Black Girls Code, Code Now, and use some of the excitement that we built up around Coderetreat as a way of raising money to support that where we’re going to be doing Global Day of Coderetreat again this year in December, and the plan is for about 200 cities around the world to do it. My stretch goal is to have a Skype call with a space station.

Derek:  There you go.

Corey:  I figured if you’re going to have a stretch goal, it should stretch to outer space.

Derek:  I’ll say if you’re listening to this, next year you need to participate in the Global Coderetreat. We’ve done it here at Gangplank a few times. We definitely participated last year in the global initiative, and it’s well worth everybody who participates time.

Corey, thank you so much for joining us today. I love the work you’re doing. I love what you’re doing to pay it forward, and you’re really a model for other developers out there to care about the code and really care about the community. Again, thank you for stopping by.

Corey:  Well, I appreciate it, Derek.

Derek:  Thank you.

Corey:  Thanks a lot.

[music]

Announcer:  Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the Agile Community, sign up today at agileweekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly for free. The Scrumcast is brought to you by Integrum Technologies, and recorded at Gangplank studios in Chandler, Arizona. For all the episodes, check out integrumtech.com or subscribe on iTunes.

The post Episode #52 – Lean Principles in Healthcare appeared first on Episode #51 – Software Journeyman Corey Haines http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-51-corey-haines/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-51-corey-haines/#respond Thu, 15 Mar 2012 18:00:26 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6490 Derek Neighbors and Corey Haines discuss: Getting kids interested in programming The Microsoft stack Traveling pair programmer Meandering programmers Software Craftsmanship TDD and experience Global …

The post Episode #51 – Software Journeyman Corey Haines appeared first on Episode #51 – Software Journeyman Corey Haines appeared first on Episode #50 – Potentially Shippable Software http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-50-potentially-shippable-software/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-50-potentially-shippable-software/#respond Thu, 08 Mar 2012 17:30:33 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6461 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Jade Meskill talk about potentially shippable software. * Impossible!? * How do you define what is potentially shippable? …

The post Episode #50 – Potentially Shippable Software appeared first on Episode #50 – Potentially Shippable Software appeared first on Episode #49 – Topic Smorgasbord http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-49-topic-smorgasbord/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/03/scrumcast-49-topic-smorgasbord/#respond Thu, 01 Mar 2012 17:30:00 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6455 Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water, Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Jade Meskill discuss a variety of topics. What do you do when someone clearly doesn’t fit …

The post Episode #49 – Topic Smorgasbord appeared first on Episode #49 – Topic Smorgasbord appeared first on Episode #48 – Missing the Deadline http://integrumtech.com/2012/02/scrumcast-48-missing-the-deadline/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/02/scrumcast-48-missing-the-deadline/#comments Thu, 23 Feb 2012 17:30:35 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6447 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Jade Meskill discuss a ‘hypothetical’ scenario in which a Scrum team has a deadline approaching and it looks …

The post Episode #48 – Missing the Deadline appeared first on Episode #48 – Missing the Deadline appeared first on Episode #47 – Can Teaching Kids to Program Help You Be a Better Coach? http://integrumtech.com/2012/02/scrumcast-47-can-teaching-kids-to-program-help-you-be-a-better-coach/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/02/scrumcast-47-can-teaching-kids-to-program-help-you-be-a-better-coach/#respond Thu, 16 Feb 2012 17:30:29 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6380 Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water and  Llewellyn Falco discuss teaching kids to program: Obtaining feedback Encouraging continuous learning Feedback vs praise Just jump in …

The post Episode #47 – Can Teaching Kids to Program Help You Be a Better Coach? appeared first on Mindset by Carol Dweck

First Lego League

Teaching Kids to Program

Lost in Space

 

Transcript

Derek Neighbors:  Hello! Welcome to another episode of the scrum‑cast, I’m Derek Neighbors.

Ray Van Norter:  I’m Ray Van Norter.

Luann Falco:  I’m Luann Falco.

Derek:  So Luann, you’ve got a site called teachingkidsprogramming.org and I know you guys are doing a ton of work with different teaching styles to get kids adapted and wrapped up into programming, obviously programming is a moderately complex task.

So for a young mind I’m sure that you have got to take a couple of different approaches.

I’m just wondering if you guys have learned anything that you could maybe take into the coaching or to the agile world or to the adult world about learning styles that you have seen and how you might apply those to teams that we are working with today?

Ray:  Absolutely. In fact, I find that both. We take a lot from Agile into when we teach. I teach both kids and adults, and in both cases I’m taking techniques from Agile there. Then I find that in the same way as every time you do a retrospective, that you realize, hey, there’s something else you can do, it transfers back and it creates a neat cycle.

But the first thing that we’ve seen is just this importance of feedback. In the same way as it’s really important to get your code [laughs] in front of a customer, it’s important to make sure that you are getting constant feedback. Not just as to what the kid is doing, but the kid is getting constant feedback or the student is getting constant feedback.

Derek:  Absolutely. I noticed that in one of the models that I’ve seen it really talks about how you give feedback can be monumental to fostering additional learning. So one of the theories currently out there is, if you ask somebody to do something and you give them feedback, and the feedback is like, “No, that’s wrong” or “Yes, that’s right,” that you actually discourage them from wanting to learn.

Where if you reward them for the effort placed in, regardless of whether the answer was right or wrong, you say, “That’s a really great job. You did a really good job of trying to solve that problem, but it’s wrong. This is how you solve it,” that you actually encourage continual learning. I know you are really interested in some of the mindset kind of concepts, and I think the author of that book talks a little bit about that as well.

Are you seeing patterns about how you give feedback or how feedback is applied dictates how much a participant will dive in or not, dive in in the future?

Ray:  It sounds a little bit the everybody‑gets‑a‑trophy.

Derek:  I don’t think it’s really everybody‑gets‑a‑trophy. It’s not saying it’s not OK to tell somebody that they’re wrong or that they’re right. It’s that when you say that all that matters is the answer, that’s where the problem is. If you say the process of getting to the answer, I’m going to reward you for the effort of trying whether you tried or failed, that encourages people to go ahead and expend the effort the next time.

If you have a right answer and I say, “Yup, that’s absolutely right” and I don’t reward you for the effort you put in to get the answer, you’ll actually still be discouraged from wanting to put the effort in in the future to get the answer.

Luann:  There are actually two things that are at play here that a lot of times get lumped together. One is feedback, and the other is praise. I think sometimes we consider them to be the same thing. Even if you did horrible, there’s a difference between saying, “Hey, you really suck at this, and you’re never going to be any good at it. You’re just bad” versus “You did bad at this, and you need to work harder at it. You’ll be better, but you have to try harder.”

One part is the feedback. “Did you do good or bad?” The everyone‑gets‑a‑trophy idea that says everyone is good regardless of what they did, and that’s not useful. In fact, that actually is removing a layer of feedback that’s important to the kids but the idea of then also how you praise.

Separating just the answer and the praise is a very important thing because it really is, and time and time again, the amount you work, the amount you practice. These things are really what determines where you end up.

Ray:  I think it’s important to keep the two separated as well because in the past we’ve talked about the crap‑filled Oreo, right? Where it’s like the copout on how to give bad feedback is you give them a compliment like, “Hey, you’re doing a really good job.” Then you throw in something about the performance or something bad and be like, “But I notice you’ve been struggling in interacting with others.”

Then you follow it up with another compliment like, “But you’re doing a really good job, so keep it up.” Then the person walks away from the interaction not knowing whether they were rebuked or complimented or really where they stand.

Luann:  Yeah.

Derek:  One thing that I know is really in working with kids I think more often than not for most kids, not all kids, they still have a pretty strong belief that they can learn new things or tackle new things. They seem to not quite give up as much. I know that in working with adults, a lot of times if you encounter an adult that doesn’t know how to program, they say, “Well, I’m just not good with electronics. I could never do that.”

Whereas a kid, you put it in front of them. So are you able to take anything you’re learning with working with the kids and that can‑do attitude of…So are you able to take anything you’re learning with working with the kids in that can‑do attitude of, “I’m willing to give it a try. Even if I’ve never really played with a computer before, I’ll try this programming thing” and take that back to teams who maybe say, “Well, we’ve tried that” or “We can’t do that” or “It’s not possible to do that”?

How do you get them to start to change maybe their mindset a little bit to be a little bit more like a child in being able to try new things?

Luann:  That’s actually really important. It’s weird to think about, but as a kid your life is so topsy‑turvy. Everything is changing. Your interests are changing. The people you’re around are changing. Each year you have a new grade, and your grades get bigger. You’re in smaller classes when you’re in kindergarten, but when you’re in high school the school is just massive.

In your world, you’re constantly in this state of flux. But what’s surprising is when you get to like 35 or so, all of a sudden you can do the same thing day in and day out and the same people. Your world becomes very much more controlled and smaller. You’re just not in the same kind of, “Hey, let’s go try something.”

To take just a very extreme example of that, think about in college when you head out to college in your dorm, you literally share a room with just some random stranger. That seems like an OK thing to do. But now the idea that, “Hey, I’m just going to randomly…” having a roommate, that’s a push. But a roommate usually means two rooms in the same house as opposed to the same room.

We have gotten ourselves into a much more controlled place, and that really cuts down on the experimentation. Kids are naturally in a better spot for that. What that means is you can just quicker do the thing that you need to do, which is crucial, which is get them doing something because for any kind of learning to occur, first you need some sort of experience.

Derek:  I was going to say I think that’s something that definitely you can take back to teams. I think teams will debate things to death a lot of times when they don’t know. Even if it’s implementing a feature that maybe they’re not sure of the best technical way, they’ll want to beat that to death. “Let’s talk about it.”

Whereas if sometimes you’re going to say, “Let’s jump in and do it,” put out a spike, put out a tracer bullet, do something to just actually get into the doing side of things, how quickly they can come back to that childlike state. Whereas if you let them stay in that corporate state, it’s really easy to come up with a million reasons why “We can’t do that” or “We can’t try that” or “This isn’t viable” or “I don’t feel comfortable with that.”

Where if you just push them off the ledge, they go, “Hey, that was fun. I want to do the ride again.”

Luann:  One of my favorite quotes from Agile is “Don’t spend 15 minutes talking about something you can do in 10.”

Derek:  Right.

Man:  Derek and I both volunteered with the First Lego League last year…

Luann:  Ah, fantastic.

Man:  …helping out. I guess if you don’t know what First Lego League is, it’s a program where you have teams of…I think it’s 8 to 14‑year‑olds. Is that right?

Derek:  Yeah, 9 to 14.

Man:  9 to 14, who work together as a team to build a robot to perform a set of tasks that’s standardized across all the teams. Then they show up in a competition and compete against each other, and then they also have to build a research project around that.

Luann:  This whole thing was actually implemented by the guy who did the Segway, and it’s a fantastic competition. If you have kids, I highly recommend it.

Man:  One of the things that we noticed when we were working with the kids is we’d try to implement Scrum with them and at the very least start it out with having retrospectives with them every single time. We only met once a week, so we would have a retrospective every single day that they got together, so once a week.

One of the things we noticed is, first off, they were a lot more open with their feelings and exactly what was bothering them than most of the adult teams that we’ve worked with.

Luann:  [laughs]

Man:  The other thing is that we ran into the exact same problems with kids as we ran into with adults.

Luann:  Yeah, to a large extent people are people.

Derek:  It’s amazing seeing the engineering camp challenges be almost identical between grown [laughs] teams and teams of 9 to 14‑year‑olds because at the end of the day most team problems are people problems. People don’t change a whole lot in their core behaviors from the time they’re nine to the time they’re 99 in most cases without a concentrated effort to try to improve.

That definitely was a learning experience for us. We thought we needed a video series on, “This is you on Scrum when you were nine.”

Luann:  [laughs] You also pointed out a really interesting part that I’ve seen emerge as part of a pattern of teaching, where you get them doing something and then you have that retrospective. Sometimes the retrospective is just so that they can see the patterns, that you need to do something two or three times before there is a pattern to detect.

You need to get them engaged, and then you need to retrospect over it to see the pattern. Then, of course, as a teacher I think the job is to guide them to see patterns they haven’t noticed or explain patterns that they haven’t noticed once they’ve had a chance to have done it before.

Derek:  Absolutely. Probably the best example of that was this last year when we decided to put all of the challenges up on the board that they could potentially complete. We asked them to go estimate them from a 1 to a 10 how difficult they thought that those were and to do them as a team. So basically do planning poker.

We didn’t explain what planning poker was. We didn’t explain anything about it other than just from a 1 to 10, how hard do you think it was? In about three minutes you had seven kids basically doing planning poker and pretty much being within one step of agreement of each other on almost every single challenge. I don’t think we’ve ever seen an adult team do that.

I think as adults, what the problem is, we have no ability to believe in something anymore, so we have to question every little thing like, “Why are we using points instead of hours?” “I don’t feel comfortable about this.” Whereas a kid, they’ve never estimated anything really before. So to them it’s like saying, “How many pennies do you think are there in a jar?”

They’ve got no problem throwing out some random number. If they’re wrong, they’re wrong. If they’re right, they’re right. Whereas in the corporate world, well, if I tell you that’s a three and then you’re going to calculate my velocity, then you’re going to give me a raise based on whether my velocity’s too high or too low, I’ve got all this baggage that makes me want to not actually give you an estimate.

Luann:  And not engage.

Derek:  Right.

Luann:  This is the thing. You’ve got to engage first, and that’s why the first few iterations, of anytime I get a team together and we start iterating, are not indicative of how that team will perform. It’s after three or four sprints that some sort of stabilization occurs and jellied.

Derek:  Yeah, absolutely. So what are some other things you’re seeing out there that have your interest right now?

Luann:  So talked about feedback, but I’ve found that if I get students to collaborate or pair, I think pairing is a very intense form of collaboration. It’s definitely not the only form, but it’s one that serves us very well, that they get a much better feedback cycle going. The environment for learning, there’s less control that’s inherent when two people work together. The control is already shaken.

They’re more willing to just try stuff, and they are constantly giving feedback. One person’s seeing something, but the other person doesn’t see it. You just get this much better environment for learning, and I’m actually surprised. When you walk into a classroom, it’s a very quiet place normally, and I think that actually really hurts learning quite a lot.

I see it in companies, too, where people don’t want to talk to each other. They just want to go into their own cubicle and work. While that might be good if you already know how to do something, I think it’s really bad for learning.

Derek:  It’s funny that you say that. I think a lot of that’s modeled from the top. We’ve been doing a ton of work recently with school districts, principals within school districts, and superintendents of schools. We’ve got one school that we’re really partnering with on a regular basis, and we’re doing a lot of coaching and training of their staff on ways to be more agile in the classroom and be more twenty‑first‑century minded.

After just a number of sessions, leading a number of sessions with their staff with their principal with them, their principal released. I’ll put it in the show notes. He wrote a diatribe that he said that after coming in our workspace and being here for a fair amount of time, that he thinks it’s almost criminal that he has an office at the school.

He says, “When I go in there and I sit and I’m doing my email and I’m being productive, the thing that I’m really doing is I’m shutting out all my students and all of my staff from being able to have access to me and for me to really be effective.” So he’s actually looking to get rid of his office and start to work out of classrooms of the students so that he’s more available to his staff and to his students on a regular basis so that he’s there.

I think that the important part from my aspect is talk about the power of leadership saying, “I think it’s important to be collaborative. I think it’s important that I’m making myself available and I’m doing that.” He even stated, “I’ve had open‑door policies ever since I’ve been an administrator both literally and physically. But people don’t come in and interrupt me because the fact that I’m in my office makes them think I’m not accessible.”

Ray:  Then he talks about, too, how he feels like he’s chained to his office and conjectures to imagine what students must feel being forced to sit in the same desk, shut up, and just pay attention the entire day but not be able to contribute to their own education.

Luann:  Which is horrible because again, once you start engaging and you start looking at it, that’s joyful. Learning in general is a joyful activity. Just to go into this idea of feedback and collaboration. Another concept that we’re seeing a lot, which is layering, which is you don’t learn everything at once. You build. You layer learning on learning. That’s how you gain skill.

One of the places that I think is doing this better than any other area in the world right now is video games. If you look at a lot of video games, there are a lot less instructions. The tutorial is becoming the game, and you’re getting amazing feedback in these nice little layerings. Through that and interaction you’re learning pieces of the game.

There are some really nice examples out there right now. Portal springs to mind, a really good one. Also, there’s a game called Limbo. Both of them are teaching you something with a very interesting model of instruction.

Derek:  Absolutely. So we’re at our time. Any final words or parting thoughts before we head off?

Luann:  The first is go and teach your kids to program because it’s really on you to do it. There are a lot of neat resources out there. I know you guys run great stuff out there. Chandler, if you’re online, we have more structured courseware at TeachingKidsProgramming.org. Even if you do no courseware, just sit down with your kids and program with them, it’ll open whole new doors and worlds for them.

Derek:  Absolutely. Thanks for joining us, Luann, and we’ll see you in a later episode.

Luann:  Thanks.

Derek:  OK.

Man:  Looking for an easy way to stay up‑to‑date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the Agile community? Sign up today at AgileWeekly.com. It’s the best Agile content delivered weekly for free.

The post Episode #47 – Can Teaching Kids to Program Help You Be a Better Coach? appeared first on Episode #46 – Corporate Cultures http://integrumtech.com/2012/02/scrumcast-46-corporate-cultures/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/02/scrumcast-46-corporate-cultures/#respond Thu, 09 Feb 2012 17:30:11 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6377 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Perry Reinert and Alan Dayley discuss corporate cultures: Inertia against change Leadership matters Self-Organization It’s okay to fail People …

The post Episode #46 – Corporate Cultures appeared first on Episode #46 – Corporate Cultures appeared first on Episode #45 – Digital Boards and Physical Boards http://integrumtech.com/2012/02/scrumcast-45-digital-boards-and-physical-boards/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/02/scrumcast-45-digital-boards-and-physical-boards/#respond Thu, 02 Feb 2012 17:30:34 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6374 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill and Roy van de Water discuss the pros and cons of physical and digital boards: Benefits of physical vs …

The post Episode #45 – Digital Boards and Physical Boards appeared first on Pragmatic Thinking and Learning by Andy Hunt

Forget Why You Walked Into the Room?

 

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the ScrumCast. I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Jade Meskill:  I’m Jade Meskill.

Roy van de Water:  I’m still Roy van de Water.

Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

Jade:  So like Still Water…

[laughter]

Jade:  …is like because you’re European…What you?

Roy:  We’ll mix up the verbs and other things.

Clayton:  Quite, you’re so European, you don’t even know, to get the things up.

Today we’re going to be talking about Digital Boards and Physical Boards. Let’s say that I’ve got a digital tool and has my Scrum board in it. And I’ve a physical collocated team, is that going to be problem or can never just look at a computer screen.

Derek:  Certainly, everybody could. The question is what are the benefits of a Physical Board versus Digital Board. Andy Hunt’s “Pragmatic Thinking and Learning” is a great book that talks about some of the brain science behind physically writing things down versus typing them into a computer, or versus seeing them on a computer.

It cements something different in your memory. I like to equate this to when I see great schoolchildren or even college students, being asked to memorize vocabulary words or terminology. Usually the teacher requests that they write them down, write them in a sentence, write the definition down. Then they memorize from there. They don’t just give them a printed sheet and say, “Go read the printed sheet and memorize it.”

It’s because something in our brain is wired differently when we actually do the act of writing things out. When you’re forced to write out the story or write out the sprint items or the tasks, I think that something wired different in your brain happens. The second thing is, nobody goes to their computer to look at all that stuff.

When there’s big visible charts all over the walls, it’s much easier for somebody not involved directly in the project, or somebody on the outside, to ask questions. They’re not going to go look at the chart in some digital tool eight things deep, find something out, and then send an email, or not very often. Usually it’s too late. If they’re getting to the point where they know something is that wrong and they’re looking at the tool, it’s probably too late to help.

Jade:  If you are physically collocated team, it’s much more difficult to hide from a physical board that has a presence in the room that you’re in, where it’s very easy to minimize a window and just essentially ignore everything that’s going on inside of the software system.

Roy:  We’ve even seen examples where we would send emails of our burndown chart for example to everybody within the company or post a picture of it in the chat program we use, and still nobody really commented on it or noticed it even though it was being hand‑delivered to you saying look at me, it still didn’t really have the same effect as to something you occupy every day.

Jade:  I saw a really interesting study that really talked about the brain and how when you move from room to room, that the doorway actually creates some physical barrier inside of your mind and that when you walk into a new room, it basically forgets everything about the old room.

I started thinking, “Does that apply to windows in our applications”? Like when you minimized that window, does your mind like basically shift gears into, “Well, now I’m doing something new and I’m in a new room. I can disregard all the other stuff.”

Clayton:  What are some of the other benefits that you would get if you were a physical team having a physical board? Does that help promote collaboration or communication? What are some things you would get from that?

Jade:  I think it’s a lot like having a face‑to‑face to conversation. There’re a lot of things that are communicated without words, and by placing it up in a physical dimension, you can tell so much more out of glance than looking at your screen which can only convey so much information and so much detail, just due to its limited size.

You can get away with a whole lot more. You can have a lot of more informal statistics or data that becomes very difficult for a computer to calculate. If I want to write something up on the board, I can just do it. I don’t need a special place to put it or if I want to post something new that we’ve never tried before, I don’t need a code to let me do that. I can do it with a piece of paper.

Derek:  Some of it goes towards…if you’re really trying to be agile, you want to be locked into some best practice? That starts to…

Jade:  Or at least a practice. [laughs]

Derek:  Yes, that starts to cramp. A good example on build now on what Jade said is, “The nice thing about blank index card is it’s a blank index card,” so anything your mind can imagine to do with and index card, from shredding it up to adding new elements to doing anything, is possible. Whether you want to use pushpins with different colors to meant different thing, if you want to use different colors with a type of marker, the sky is the limit.

So if you want to try something, a great example I’ve seen our teams do in the past on occasion is, “Hey, we really want to enforce time boxing. We want to see how we’re performing against tasks, because a lot of people are questioning that. It’s as easy as drawing, if we think this is going to be a hour long task drawing one square for each one of the tasks, and then filling it in as it’s getting completed.” That would be really difficult to do in a tool that didn’t have that functionality already built into it.

The nice thing is, you can experiment with that. If that works really well, great. Maybe you keep doing it. If it doesn’t work well, or you get the data that you need to make the decision, I think in a lot of the cases I’ve seen a team think, “Oh, well the problem is our tasking is really, really horrible. It’s taking us way longer than we think to do the task.”

When they do something like that, they realize it’s not that the tasks that we are putting out there are taking too long it’s that we’re doing really crappy planning. We are not putting out half of the tasks that actually need to be done to complete the work. We put task A is going to be half an hour, and task B is going to be half an hour. We find that it really only took half an hour to do each one of those tasks.

But we totally glossed over the fact that there were tasks C, D, E, F, G, H that we just totally didn’t even talk about in planning. In reality, we need to fix our planning, not fix the estimates of our tasking. It allows you to play with things in a lot more easy format without having to fight against the…you never hear, “Well the index cards don’t do that.”

Jade:  [laughs]

Roy:  Right.

Clayton:  To play devil’s advocate a bit, I’ll ask, “Doesn’t it take a really long to update your physical board”?

Right:  Right. Everybody…

Clayton:  Yes, it does. Is that what you are saying?

Jade:  Doesn’t it take a really long time to update your digital board?

Roy:  Every Agile team at some point, it seems like, gets into the, “OK. We need to start replacing the physical tools with digital tools.” I feel like they always have four big reasons for doing that. The first as I say, it’s way too much overhead to update a real board; which I think is kind of bullshit, because it doesn’t take any less work in my opinion, than filling out a digital tool. And it gets you a lot of value.

Another reason why they oftentimes want to go with digital as opposed to a physical board is because they say they want to save paper, which I think is just bullshit altogether.

[laughter]

Derek:  You’re European, so it makes sense.

Roy:  The third reason is because they are a distributed team, which I think is the only reason that I can come up with that has any validity at all. The fourth reason ‑‑ I forget at the moment, but I’ll jump in a second with it.

Clayton:  Oh, I have another one. I would use a physical board, but I need to keep track of everything we’ve done, because what if I need to look at it again later? If I have a digital tool, it will save it all for me.

Roy:  Yeah. So, you’re never going to need that data.

Clayton:  Yeah, but I really, really do.

Roy:  No, but you really won’t.

Jade:  When you need it, you can write it down on the index.

Derek:  I think a lot of this goes back to…

[crosstalk]

Jade:  You can save all the cards.

Derek:  …a lot of teams still have project manager mentality. The idea is, “I need to track tasks and I need to track who is doing the tasks. I need to track the actual hours against the tasks. I need to track all this data because at some point I need to hold somebody accountable.” The truth is, if your team is doing that, you’ve got way bigger problems than for using a physical board, or using a digital board.

That’s because you don’t trust your team, and you don’t believe the team’s going to do the best decisions. The teams that want that information so that they can actually improve don’t have a problem collecting that data. I know that we’ve thrown together spreadsheets on several teams where it’s like, “Let’s collect the data for two weeks and find out what’s really going on.”

Then make an adjustment and collect another two weeks. But very rarely you need to collect that data long term. I think that it’s one of the classic be careful what you measure. If you’re concerned about measuring the number of hours of tasks, and who is doing what, well that’s what you’re going to get. You’re going to get people that try to game the system, so that they don’t look like dumb asses for the number of tasks.

If you’re actually trying to deliver software of value, make that be what matters.

[crosstalk]

Jade:  Measure lines of code.

Derek:  Make that be what gets measured.

[laughter]

Derek:  Function points are my personal favorite. Some of that goes back to…that’s more of a management thing usually, than a team thing.

Or if it’s a team thing, it’s because somebody is definitely afraid that they’re kicking ass, and that they’re not getting credit for kicking ass, which I also think is an entirely big smell. That you’re not a team player if you’re only worried for getting credit for the work that you’re doing, and you’re not actually worried about delivering the best product and making it the best.

Jade:  That or you know that Clayton’s doing a terrible job and you just want to expose it. That’s how you’re trying to come up with that.

Roy:  Leaving your paper trail so you can fire him.

Clayton:  Let’s say I’m a development manager, and my team comes to me. I have this Scrum team or whatever. They come to me and they say, “We’re using this digital tool now, but we’ve all talked about it. We listen to the really awesome podcasts. And we decided that we want to have a physical board.”

Roy:  Is there a podcast out there that talks about this?

[laughter]

Jade:  Yeah, we’ll send you the URL later.

Clayton:  Is that something the team can decide? Should I let the team do that? Or should I just jump out the window and give up? Those are the two choices.

Jade:  If I was a development manager…

[laughter]

Roy:  What’s the title again?

Derek:  If it’s got the word “manager” or “management” in it, you should just jump out of the window now. And yes, I’m kidding to all those people that are managers.

Jade:  Should we let the team do it? I think if you truly believe in self‑organization, then, yeah, you should let the team do it because that’s their work.

I think you have a reasonable expectation to get the information that you need to do your job to report to the people above you and stakeholders and all that stuff, so that information should be delivered to you however you need it.

But when it comes to the team performing their own work and managing their own work, that is the team’s realm of responsibility, and they should be fully able to do it however they would like whether that’s a digital or a physical tool. I don’t think it’s management’s role to dictate that solution.

Clayton:  What are some instances…You hinted at Roy, but what are some instances where maybe we would want to use some digital tool? Maybe we want a physical board, but we think we need a digital one.

Roy:  The one that I brought up was a distributed team. That one I would say, “Why distributed”? But if you really have to be distributed, then you have to have some way of keeping track of everything, and I haven’t found a better way than a digital tool, but as soon as I do, I’m jumping off the…

Jade:  [laughs] Teleportation.

Derek:  I think anytime you got a lot of cash to burn and you want a bunch of licensing fees is a good time to…

Jade:  Yeah, if you really like that tool vendor [laughs] .

[laughter]

Jade:  I think a distributed team is definitely a situation where a physical board does not work. We’ve tried it many times being distributed ourselves to try to manage a physical board, and at some point, it completely falls apart.

Roy:  It was a physical implementation of a digital tool because it would be, one person would maintain a physical board and take a picture of it and send it to everybody else.

Jade:  Which was just insanity. It was…

[crosstalk]

Roy:  …writing an intelligible digital tool that you couldn’t update immediately.

Jade:  Yeah, it wasn’t providing value.

Derek:  Another valid reason for it ‑‑ and I would say that this should be a short‑term reason only ‑‑ is if you are in probably a larger company whereby you are a pilot or one of the few teams in an agile organization and you still have reporting structures that are requiring some of the data that you might need digitally.

Now in those instances, I would really recommend to go ahead and let people use a physical board and then actually key the information that you need for whatever roll up reporting you need for your manager. But I would say that in that case, it would be worth double keying that information to allow the team the benefits of a physical board.

But I could see somebody saying, “It’s just not worth a waste of doing it in paper and keying it in.” I’d say, “I don’t think you understand the benefits well enough,” but if you really believe that, I think that that is another reason. If you have to report some of the upstream until you can convince them otherwise, that might be a reason why you would see that.

Roy:  Another reason too in that exact same situation ‑‑ why you would want to double key the information? ‑‑ is nothing starts conversation as well as a board. I can’t tell you how many times I’ve been sitting around here at Gangplank and then somebody comes up and asked me, “What’s the deal with all these cards”? Even people that normally wouldn’t ask questions of anybody else.

Jade:  We’ve seen that in client’s sides too. The CEO or some executive VP walks by and says, “Oh, what’s going on? What do these charts mean”? And you can start to have a real conversation.

Derek:  Absolutely. One of my favorite stories along this line is, we implemented cards, and I was sitting more where the executives were not necessarily where the team was, so the team had decided to put the board in that hallway, which I thought was bad for the team, but I thought it was good because it got a lot of management highlight.

I had one of the members that wasn’t on our team ‑‑ she’s not part of the development at all ‑‑ walk by, and she’d called me “card man.” We joked and laughed. She said, “Even though I’m teasing you, I’m serious. I really liked it.” She showed me cards that were for…The output of the software directly affected her department. It was the tool they used.

She said, “Right here, it says this, but it’s missing one. Do you know when they’re going to do that”? I said, “Well, they chose to not do that this sprint.” She said, “Well, why not”? She actually got really upset like, “That’s the most important thing, and it’s not even on there.”

She was able to go back to that development manager and say, “Hey, how come your team didn’t do this”? They gotten to a lengthy discussion, and it brought out all sorts of things about the inefficiency of the particular tool. She would have never done that if they were using a spreadsheet or some tool because she wouldn’t have ever known that it even existed.

That it’s those serendipitous moments that we don’t even really talked about very much that sometimes provide the most amount of value by having things out in the open and able for feedback from anybody.

Jade:  What do you do if you’re a distributed team?

Roy:  Cry [laughs] .

Clayton:  Also jump out of the window is an option.

Jade:  Jump out the window. Yeah, OK. So I’ve cried. I’ve jumped out the window. And they brought me back from the dead for this project [laughs] . What do you do to try to get the advantages of a physical board and a distributed world?

Roy:  One thing that I’ve tried in the past is to use an online spreadsheet tool, like Google Spreadsheets, because it gives you a lot of flexibility while still maintaining somewhat a structure.

Although, I found that that works great for two weeks, and then it starts to get really disorganized as we try to make the same types of adaptation that look perfectly organized on the index card, but it starts to look very messy on a spreadsheet.

Derek:  For me the problem is that you’ve got a much bigger problem than your board once you get distributed. I think that not being within proximity of other people is a much larger problem when you’re distributed than whether it’s physical or digital boards.

I’d say the first thing I would do is try to do everything humanly possible to simulate being collocated even though you’re distributed, whether that be Skype, whether it be pair programming, whether it be some kind of online instant messenger app, anything that promotes a lot of communication that is asynchronous and can simulate real being in a physical presence to someone.

I would really stress that that’s probably the most important. Once you have that, I think then you can start to add ways to say, “Hey, maybe every so often, we’re going to post the current burn down, or we’re going to do something, or maybe we’d add another stand up or something.”

I think there’s ways you can start to say, “How do we incorporate what we’re putting in a digital tool into the conversation”? But most distributed teams just don’t even have the conversation, which is, I think, absolutely critical to have.

Clayton:  To wrap up, can we go around and get one thing that you think will make the most of your physical board, something that will make it better than it could be on its own?

Jade:  Colors.

Derek:  For me, the biggest one is big, visible charts.

Jade:  I should say “meaningful colors,” not just random rainbow.

Roy:  What I’ve seen help a lot was Derek’s example, where you show your time box by indicating the black boxes for you’re still using your time box. For every 15 minute increment, you draw a square. As you exceed your time box, you start drawing red ones. It becomes very easy to see.

At an overview, you can see an entire board. You can see where sections are red and where sections are green. It becomes very easy to see which stories cause the most problems throughout that week, and which ones went a lot faster than expected.

Clayton:  For me, I would say updating the board in real time and collapsing things. You collapse all your tasks that you’ve completed down so that over time, as you’re passing by, in your subconscious you can look at the board. It looks different. It starts looking smaller, and it looks like things are going away.

Derek:  I think that’s a really powerful one.

Jade:  That’s good.

Clayton:  Thanks guys.

Announcer:  Looking for an easy way to stay up to date with the latest news, techniques, and events in the Agile community? Sign up today at AgileWeekly.com. It’s the best agile content, delivered weekly, for free.

The post Episode #45 – Digital Boards and Physical Boards appeared first on Episode #44 – Story Sizes, Named Sprints and Partial Credit http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-44-story-sizes-named-sprints-and-partial-credit/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-44-story-sizes-named-sprints-and-partial-credit/#respond Thu, 26 Jan 2012 17:30:03 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6367 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Drew LeSueur and Roy van de Water discuss story sizes, naming your sprints and partial credit:  20, 40, 100 story point …

The post Episode #44 – Story Sizes, Named Sprints and Partial Credit appeared first on Episode #44 – Story Sizes, Named Sprints and Partial Credit appeared first on Special Episode – 2012 Predictions http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-special-episode-2012-predictions/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-special-episode-2012-predictions/#comments Tue, 24 Jan 2012 17:30:24 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6384 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors, Alan Dayley, Perry Reinert and Jade Meskill discuss their predictions for 2012: Last years reflections Early adopters dig deeper …

The post Special Episode – 2012 Predictions appeared first on Special Episode – 2012 Predictions appeared first on Episode #43 – Taking to the Twitters http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-43-taking-to-the-twitters/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-43-taking-to-the-twitters/#respond Thu, 19 Jan 2012 12:00:59 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6325 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Derek Neighbors take to the twitters to find controversial topics to talk about. Kanban, Agile, Scrum are among …

The post Episode #43 – Taking to the Twitters appeared first on Episode #43 – Taking to the Twitters appeared first on Episode #42 – Shared commitments with Howard Sublett http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-42-shared-commitments-with-howard-sublett/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-42-shared-commitments-with-howard-sublett/#respond Thu, 12 Jan 2012 12:00:57 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6320 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Chris Coneybeer and Roy van de Water talk to special guest Howard Sublett from Big Visible to talk about shared resources, multitasking and …

The post Episode #42 – Shared commitments with Howard Sublett appeared first on Episode #42 – Shared commitments with Howard Sublett appeared first on Episode #41 – Working with Proxy Users with Alan Dayley http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-41-working-with-proxy-users-with-alan-daley/ http://integrumtech.com/2012/01/scrumcast-41-working-with-proxy-users-with-alan-daley/#respond Thu, 05 Jan 2012 12:00:21 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6318 Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water, Drew LeSueur are joined by Alan Dayley to discuss working with proxy users. How can we encourage customers …

The post Episode #41 – Working with Proxy Users with Alan Dayley appeared first on Episode #41 – Working with Proxy Users with Alan Dayley appeared first on Episode #40 – Management Inbreeding with Darrin Ladd http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/scrumcast-40-management-inbreeding-with-darrin-ladd/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/scrumcast-40-management-inbreeding-with-darrin-ladd/#respond Thu, 29 Dec 2011 12:00:00 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6034 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water and Chris Coneybeer are joined by special guest Darrin Ladd from Big Visible to discuss management inbreeding. Managers promote …

The post Episode #40 – Management Inbreeding with Darrin Ladd appeared first on Episode #40 – Management Inbreeding with Darrin Ladd appeared first on Episode #39 – What is the Right Iteration Length http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/scrumcast-39-what-is-the-right-iteration-length/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/scrumcast-39-what-is-the-right-iteration-length/#respond Thu, 22 Dec 2011 12:00:03 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6031 Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors, Chris Coneybeer and Roy van de Water discuss an article by Todd Landry titled “What is the Right Iteration Length” Is …

The post Episode #39 – What is the Right Iteration Length appeared first on “What is the Right Iteration Length”

  • Is it better to have a shorter iteration and close the feedback loop
  • Is it better to have a longer iteration to decrease the overhead of the Scrum Ceremonies?
  • Sprint Review seems to be the only ceremony not proportionally decreased with sprint length
  • Retrospectives do not have to occur every week, or perhaps have an extended retro every other sprint
  • The cost of deploying is sometimes an argument for longer sprints
  • Deployments and releases should be unhinged from sprints
  • The team agrees that shorter sprints are generally better

Transcript

Jade Meskill:  Hi. Welcome to another episode of the Scrumcast. I’m Jade Meskill.

Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

Chris Conagher:  I’m Chris Conagher.

Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

Chris:  I was reading an article this morning by Todd Landry, called “What is the right duration length?” He was bringing up some experiences that he had in trying to discover what the correct duration length is. He says that when they first started forming an agile team, they were new to the concept. They figured they’d do one week iterations. They’d have a really quick feedback loop and be able to adjust as quickly as possible.

He says they did that for a little bit. They felt that the overhead of all of the scrum ceremonies for one iteration, got out of hand, so they increased it to two week iterations. He felt that that worked a lot better for him. He says around the holidays they started an iteration where they said, “Well, we can’t really do a real iteration, so we’re going to start now, and we’re going to end when the last person leaves the building.”

It ended up being about a four week iteration, and he says that that was a complete nightmare.

Roy:  Yeah, it sounds that way. I was about to unleash on that one, but…

[laughter]

Roy:  At Integrum we have done a lot of one‑week sprints, and you guys have all been a part of those one‑week sprints. What do you think, what was the positives from doing one‑week sprint?

Chris:  I think some of the positives were that the ceremonies were very targeted. We had to learn how to keep them under control. I think that’s something the teams go through is that they don’t do a good job of making sure they keep those ceremonies under control, and that’s why they get so much overhead from them.

Derek:  Yeah, I tend to agree. The number one thing that I hear from people is that the overhead on one week sprints is too high. The only ceremony that I believe has that amount of overhead is, really, the sprint review including the retrospective. The main reason that I say that is planning should be a rough estimate of a percentage of time in your sprint.

If you’re doing a four‑week sprint, you might spend an entire day. If you’re doing a two‑week sprint, you might spend a half‑day. If you’re doing a one‑week sprint, maybe you’re doing two hours. I think that what happens is a lot of teams doing one‑week sprint spend a whole day planning, and that’s where they feel the overhead is. I think they’re just being inefficient in how they plan. I, actually, think it’s poor planning that hurts one‑week sprints, not that there’s too much overhead.

We’ve played with this on and off. On the retrospective side of the fence, say, we’ll only do the retrospective every other week, or do a light version of the retrospective, where we at least catalog real quickly some high level frustrations, but don’t dig too deep. Then, on the opposite week, dig a little bit deeper, and spend a little bit more time during that.

From a demo perspective, which is really the other element of it, you should be demoing your work pretty much as you complete it. You shouldn’t be building up a whole lot of sprint demo time to begin with, so…

Roy:  I think there’s a lot of teams that don’t follow that particular piece of advice, where they’re demoing constantly.

Jade:  But even if they’re not demoing constantly, if they are only demoing one week’s worth of stuff, then their demo shouldn’t take the same length of time.

Derek:  I think another thing that kills people too is there’s this really bad stigmatism that you have to deploy when you have an end of a sprint. A lot of teams, deploying is very painful, and so that eats up a lot of time. It’s actually getting things deployed so that they can actually demo. It’s why I find, when there’s a poor build environment that, generally speaking, teams are less likely to want to do one week sprints, because the deployment for demoing takes up half a sprint.

Roy:  I always tell people that they need to unhinge deployment and releases from their sprints.

Jade:  However, I kind of feel like, if you’re doing the deployment every two sprints, then that kind of builds up a cadence. It does almost feel like it would make sense to…

Roy:  I think it’s nice, and it’s good if you can get there. But I don’t think they should be solely dependent on each other.

Jade:  I think in an ideal situation, you’re deploying as often as you’re demoing, which is daily, and you don’t have to worry about it.

Roy:  I think that’s a pretty highly evolved product or organization that can live in that continuous deployment world.

Derek:  I guess where I get really concerned is, I’m even OK, as much as I might bag on it, on a 30 day sprint, or a four week sprint, as long as a team understands that that’s a segment of where they’re at, not where they should be going.

I get concerned when somebody starts with a one week sprint and then pulls back to a two week sprint, and says, “For us, just a two week sprint works better.” Because what they’re really not acknowledging is all the problems that are keeping them from being able to do a one week sprint. I see teams do one week sprints all the time, really, really effectively, which means it’s doable.

If it’s not doable for your team, there’s probably other symptoms that are happening. Either you’ve got poor deployment practices. You have bad product ownership. You have poor planning meetings. A myriad of different things can be coming up that are preventing it from it.

Sometimes when people kind of roll back to this less‑than‑ideal state, if they don’t do it with a, “We’re only doing this for right now until we can get better at the other things,” then I think that that’s dangerous.

Jade:  I think that there’s some huge downsides, too, to doing one‑week sprints. I’m sorry. Downsides to not doing a one‑week sprint, specifically when it comes to regards to research tasks. If I’m doing commitment during planning and during my planning meeting, I find out that I don’t have enough information and I need to write research tasks.

If have a one‑week sprint, then it’s relatively low‑cost. I spend one‑week doing the research. In the following week, I can immediately do that task. If I have a four‑week sprint, that means I do the research task. That even means it’s four weeks until I do the research task. Then I don’t commit to getting it done until four weeks after that.

It’s going to be eight‑weeks until that story gets done. Or I do the research task immediately, but then it would be four weeks before I, actually, address the story. Then it’s four‑weeks between research tasks.

Derek:  But, if it takes you nine weeks to deploy, that’s all OK.

[laughter]

Chris:  Something that we’re talking about is that some of these teams that we hear when they’re doing one‑week and then they go to two‑week, how many times do we hear it’s right in the very beginning? You’re talking about retrospecting, realizing, “What do we need to change,” where they’re getting used to this, so it’s probably talking them longer than it would.

Are they really retrospecting, going, “Are we getting better at this? Can we stay at one week?” I have some questions in regards of what did the team think of and why did they go to two weeks?

Derek:  Too much overhead.

Roy:  I think it’s reduces that pressure like Derek’s saying. Doing a one‑week sprint requires a lot of discipline, and a lot of willingness to introspect and really pay attention to yourself. When you see people getting really uncomfortable with that, it’s because they’re trying to get a little bit more of a buffer to feel a little bit safer.

I think that’s OK in the early adoption phase. But like Derek said, if you just get stuck in that rut because, “Well, that’s just what we do,” I think that’s a bad place to be. You should really be trying to challenge yourself, but I think that’s reserved for teams that are a little bit more mature.

Jade:  With longer sprint‑sizes, you’re increasing the risk in a self‑organizing team. Because when a self‑organizing team comes up into retrospect, and comes up with an idea and they try it, in a one‑week sprint, they can cancel out that new thing to try within one week. But if you have a four‑week sprint, you’re stuck with that for four weeks. That can be devastating to the company.

Roy:  You could also do retrospectives disconnected from your sprint.

Chris:  That’s true.

Derek:  I think, as an industry, most people are doing two‑week sprints. I don’t know many people that are really on a 30‑day or four‑week cycle, but one thing I’ll say that I noticed with almost every team I encounter. The teams that like two weeks sprints only can pull in two or three stories, generally, per sprint. When they task out to do their commitments, it’s usually in terms of days.

I don’t mean ideal days. I mean, “Well, I’m going to work on this task today. Tomorrow, I’m going to work on that task.” When I see teams that are OK with one week sprints, and actually prefer one week sprints, I usually seeing them pulling in three or four stories, at least per sprint. They’re pulling in tasks down to a 15 minute, nothing bigger than hour or two.

I think that that gives them a lot more fine grain control over, are they ahead or behind schedule. It really helps to pick up pace. That’s not to say that people doing one‑week sprints complete more stories. That’s not the goal of bringing in more stories.

But, they have a habit of decomposing things to a smaller level which gets them a better accuracy from a standpoint of when something’s going wrong, they know that’s it’s going wrong a lot sooner. It’s not because they’re in a one week sprint. It’s because they’re not having to wait until the end of the day to figure out, “Oh, I’m kind of behind schedule.” They know that by lunchtime of the first day.

“I’m an hour behind. Or the team’s three hours behind.” It allows kind of those course corrections to happen within an hour of a sprint opposed at the end of a week, or at the end of two weeks.

Jade:  I think that we all agree that it seems like the shorter the sprint length or, at least in our case, we feel that a one‑week sprint provides the greatest ability to react to change to minimize the risk and offers a lot more advantages. Oftentimes, a desire to go for longer term sprints are a result of other pains on the team. Or other malfunctions within the team that cause them to shy away from that.

Roy:  I think you need to take the rest of the organization into account as well. I see a lot of challenges, sometimes, for development teams that are willing, and able, to go to one week sprints, but there’s some impediment at the organizational level that’s preventing them from doing that. I think…

Jade:  Product Managers.

Roy:  [laughs] . I wasn’t going to name names, but I think that does factor into that as well. It’s important for teams to be cognizant of that. Also, I think, try to work towards solving that. What’s wrong, or what’s happening inside the organization that’s preventing the other part of the team, the product donor, from being as responsive as the development team.

Derek:  It’s not just product donors, design too.

Roy:  That’s a whole other Podcast.

[laughter]

Jade:  I think that’s it. Thank you for joining us.

Chris:  See you next time.

[music]

Mark Graban:  Hi, this is Mark Graban, from leanblog.org. I am looking forward to being a future guest, on Scrumcast. You can also listen to my Podcast, if you go to leanpodcast.org. I cover “lean” from a pretty broad perspective, including manufacturing, healthcare, startups, and software. You can listen to Podcasts that I’ve done with Eric Ries, with Brant Cooper, and Patrick Vlaskovits, on customer development.

You can find all of these on iTunes, if you search for leanblog, or go to leanpodcast.org.

The post Episode #39 – What is the Right Iteration Length appeared first on Special Episode : User Story Class Interview with Rose Hess-Nunn http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/user-story-class-interview-with-rose-hess-nunn/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/user-story-class-interview-with-rose-hess-nunn/#respond Fri, 16 Dec 2011 16:00:43 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6125 In this video we talk with Rose Hess-Nunn about what brought her to the User Story Class and some of the challenges she faces.

The post Special Episode : User Story Class Interview with Rose Hess-Nunn appeared first on Special Episode : User Story Class Interview with Rose Hess-Nunn appeared first on Agile Portfolio Management Game http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/agile-portfolio-management-game/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/agile-portfolio-management-game/#respond Fri, 16 Dec 2011 04:46:24 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6180 From Integrum’s Chief Revolutionary Officer: Lately I have been doing a lot of work with organizations on Portfolio Management. I needed to create a fun …

The post Agile Portfolio Management Game appeared first on Chief Revolutionary Officer:

Lately I have been doing a lot of work with organizations on Portfolio Management. I needed to create a fun game to give an introduction to the challenges of an Agile Portfolio without being overwhelming.

In April 2011, I attended the Agile Game Incubator at Agile 2011 and utilized the PLAID technique that Mike and Don taught us. This framework was extremely helpful for focusing me on my objectives and building a solid game. If you haven’t checked out tastycupcakes.org and used some of the amazing games, you must.

My goal was to create something meaningful, yet playful, that had a team building element included. I created some fun personas to the game to let people role play and laugh a lot. I’ve used this game successfully with clients and also with my fellow coaches at the Scrum Coaches Retreat 2011.

Here is an introduction to the game that I created and you can find a link to download the facilitator’s kit at the bottom of this post. If you have any improvements or suggestions, please comment.

Problem

The management team of Zebco, Inc. has too many projects, too few resources. This game teaches teams how to prioritize the people and resources they have available and try to maximize their effectiveness.

Some randomness is introduced by the dice roll. This helps simulate reality when unexpected things happen and makes the game more fun.

This game is sized for a team of 3-7 people. For larger groups, split them into smaller teams of 3-7 people and provide them with extra copies of all materials.

Lead Objectives

  • Learn how delicate the balance of projects can be
  • Learn how to manage limited resources
  • Learn to deal with conflict
Downloads

The post Agile Portfolio Management Game appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=6177 Last week Derek Neighbors and I had the privilege of attending the first Scrum Coaching Retreat in Boulder, CO. During the course of the intense …

The post Scrum Coaching Retreat 2011 Wiki appeared first on Scrum Coaching Retreat in Boulder, CO. During the course of the intense two-day deep-dive, the need arose for a wiki to capture all of the amazing ideas. Within minutes of creating the wiki, the information began flowing in. By the end of the retreat, more than seventy coaches from around the world had shared their wisdom for everyone else to benefit, and continue the conversation.

Please contribute your thoughts and ideas at the new Scrum Coach Retreat Wiki.

The post Scrum Coaching Retreat 2011 Wiki appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=6028 Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water and Chris Coneybeer are joined in studio by Perry Reinert from InfusionSoft and discuss communities in Scrum. The Scrum …

The post Episode #38 – Communities in Scrum with Perry Reinert appeared first on Episode #38 – Communities in Scrum with Perry Reinert appeared first on Special Episode : User Story Class Interview with Sandra Bufford http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/user-story-class-interview-with-sandra-bufford/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/user-story-class-interview-with-sandra-bufford/#respond Thu, 15 Dec 2011 02:44:03 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6132 In this video we talk with Sandra Bufford about what got her interested in attending the User Story Class.

The post Special Episode : User Story Class Interview with Sandra Bufford appeared first on Special Episode : User Story Class Interview with Sandra Bufford appeared first on Episode #37 – Software Craftsmanship with Adam Sroka http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/scrumcast-37-software-craftsmanship-with-adam-sroka/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/scrumcast-37-software-craftsmanship-with-adam-sroka/#respond Thu, 08 Dec 2011 12:00:14 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5988 Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Roy van de Water are joined by Adam Sroka from Industrial Logic to discuss software craftsmanship. Resources for software craftsmanship have increased …

The post Episode #37 – Software Craftsmanship with Adam Sroka appeared first on Episode #37 – Software Craftsmanship with Adam Sroka appeared first on Special Episode : Doug Hall Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Oct 2011 http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/doug-hall-phoenix-scrum-users-group-oct-2011/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/doug-hall-phoenix-scrum-users-group-oct-2011/#respond Thu, 01 Dec 2011 17:00:32 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6006 Alan Dayley interviews Doug Hall after the October 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Special Episode : Doug Hall Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Oct 2011 appeared first on Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Special Episode : Doug Hall Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Oct 2011 appeared first on Episode #36 – Liftoff, with Ainsley Nies http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/scrumcast-36-liftoff-with-ainsley-nies/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/12/scrumcast-36-liftoff-with-ainsley-nies/#respond Thu, 01 Dec 2011 12:00:05 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5986 Ainsley Nies joins Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors and Roy van de Water in discussing the book “Liftoff: Launching Agile Teams & Projects”, which Ainsley co-authored …

The post Episode #36 – Liftoff, with Ainsley Nies appeared first on Episode #36 – Liftoff, with Ainsley Nies appeared first on Roy van de Water Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Oct 2011 http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/roy-van-de-water-phoenix-scrum-users-group-oct-2011/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/roy-van-de-water-phoenix-scrum-users-group-oct-2011/#respond Thu, 24 Nov 2011 16:45:50 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6010 Alan Dayley interviews Roy van de Water after the October 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Roy van de Water Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Oct 2011 appeared first on Roy van de Water after the October 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Roy van de Water Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Oct 2011 appeared first on Episode #35 – Technical Excellence in Scrum http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/scrumcast-35-technical-excellence-in-scrum/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/scrumcast-35-technical-excellence-in-scrum/#respond Thu, 24 Nov 2011 12:00:09 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5983 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water and Derek Neighbors talk about a blog post entitled “Technical Excellence in Scrum” by Dave Rooney. Jeff Sutherland suggested that Agile …

The post Episode #35 – Technical Excellence in Scrum appeared first on Episode #35 – Technical Excellence in Scrum appeared first on Changing the Interview Process to Favor Team Dynamics Instead of Individual Skill http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/changing-the-interview-process-to-favor-team-dynamics-instead-of-individual-skill/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/changing-the-interview-process-to-favor-team-dynamics-instead-of-individual-skill/#respond Tue, 22 Nov 2011 21:26:29 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=6019 Transitioning teams to Agile is never easy and requires a vast amount of change. Usually, the focus is on the team itself, but at some …

The post Changing the Interview Process to Favor Team Dynamics Instead of Individual Skill appeared first on

However, one area where there isn’t a lot of discussion happening is around “building” Agile teams from a Human Resource perspective. Many Human Resource departments are very strict on interview processes and find it difficult to adapt to the effective ways to hire people for a self-organizing team. On such teams more importance is put to how someone reacts within the team than on their individual skill set. This is much more difficult to interview for and requires some non standard approaches to get a view of a persons compatability to the companies values, culture and the existing team.

Some resources on this topic can be found at:

Articles
We’re Hiring” by Lisa Crispin
Improving Our Interview Process” by Lisa Crispin
Hiring for a Collaborative Team” by Esther Derby
Scrum Masters and Agile Coaches, More than a Title” by Esther Derby

Blogs
Hiring Technical People Blog by Johanna Rothman

Books
Agile Hiring by Sean Landis
Hiring the Best Knowledge Workers by Johanna Rothman

Tell us about your story getting hiring practices changed in your journey towards an Agile Organization!

The post Changing the Interview Process to Favor Team Dynamics Instead of Individual Skill appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5980 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors, and Drew Lesueur discuss creating a sense of urgency around the work that needs to be done. Displaying …

The post Episode #34 – A Sense of Urgency appeared first on Episode #34 – A Sense of Urgency appeared first on Episode #33 – Agile Tweet Controversy http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/scrumcast-33-agile-tweet-controversy/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/scrumcast-33-agile-tweet-controversy/#respond Thu, 10 Nov 2011 12:00:24 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5880 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Drew LeSueur and Roy van de Water discuss controversial tweets. @PMOObserver: “Always deliver what you commit to. No more; no less.” …

The post Episode #33 – Agile Tweet Controversy appeared first on PMOObserver: “Always deliver what you commit to. No more; no less.”
@elizabethraley: “Scrum Rule: No Additional Requirements Can Be Added to a Sprint!”
@scrumology: “Comparing velocity between teams: Not everything that can be counted counts, and not everything th…”
@rslawrence: “In case you missed it over the weekend: ‘Why Longer Sprints Probably Won’t Help'”
@rramirez4444: “What are the TWO best qualities of a good Scrum Master? #agile #scrum (non-SM respondants given more weight on this one..)”
@alechardy: “Purpose of sprint review is to inspect and adapt. Demo during review is to prompt inspect and adapt conversation.”

The post Episode #33 – Agile Tweet Controversy appeared first on Episode #32 – Usage of Agile Tools http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/scrumcast-32-usage-of-agile-tools/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/11/scrumcast-32-usage-of-agile-tools/#respond Thu, 03 Nov 2011 12:00:38 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5865 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Drew LeSueur discuss the use of agile tools and what their place is in a philosophy …

The post Episode #32 – Usage of Agile Tools appeared first on Episode #32 – Usage of Agile Tools appeared first on Episode #31 – White Elephant Estimating http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/scrumcast-31-white-elephant-estimating/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/scrumcast-31-white-elephant-estimating/#comments Thu, 27 Oct 2011 12:00:12 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5863 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighors and Drew LeSueur talk about White Elephant estimating, a new way to generate estimates for stories to instead …

The post Episode #31 – White Elephant Estimating appeared first on White Elephant estimating, a new way to generate estimates for stories to instead of the same-old planning poker.

The post Episode #31 – White Elephant Estimating appeared first on Episode #30 – Leadership and Finding Them On Your Team http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/scrumcast-30-leadership-and-finding-them-on-your-team/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/scrumcast-30-leadership-and-finding-them-on-your-team/#respond Thu, 20 Oct 2011 12:00:58 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5861 Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Drew LeSueur and Chris Coneybeer talk about leadership and how you might identify leaders within your team. A leader …

The post Episode #30 – Leadership and Finding Them On Your Team appeared first on Episode #30 – Leadership and Finding Them On Your Team appeared first on Special Episode : Keith Denham Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/keith-denham-phoenix-scrum-users-group-sept-2011/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/keith-denham-phoenix-scrum-users-group-sept-2011/#respond Mon, 17 Oct 2011 18:00:57 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5847 Alan Dayley interviews Keith Denham after the September 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Special Episode : Keith Denham Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 appeared first on Keith Denham after the September 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Special Episode : Keith Denham Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 appeared first on Episode #29 – “How Rigid is Scrum” http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/scrumcast-29-how-rigid-is-scrum/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/scrumcast-29-how-rigid-is-scrum/#respond Thu, 13 Oct 2011 12:00:31 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5868 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Drew LeSueur, Chris Coneybeer and Jade Meskil discuss an article on InfoQ, “How Rigid is Scrum“. Rigid up front …

The post Episode #29 – “How Rigid is Scrum” appeared first on InfoQ, “How Rigid is Scrum“.

  • Rigid up front
  • Flexible with experience
  • Inspect and Adapt
  • Breaking rules is usually to avoid a deeper issue
  • Learn through imitiation, then improvise
  • Set in stone Scrum is not ideal
  • The uncomfortable parts of Scrum will expose issues
  • Culture can stand in the way of Scrum adoption

Transcript

Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  Welcome to another episode of the Scrum Cast. I am Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

Roy van de Water:  I am Roy van de Water.

Drew LeSueur:  I am Drew LeSueur.

Chris Coneybeer:  I am Chris Coneybeer.

Jade Meskill:  I am Jade Meskill.

Clayton:  Last week, I had sent out an article to the team that I’ve found on InfoQ. The title was “How Rigid is Scrum?” And, kind of, It’s a collection on different quotes and some observations that people have made about the flexibility or a lack thereof of the Scrum framework.

Just to get going, what’s everyone’s opinion? Is Scrum flexible or inflexible framework?

Drew:  This is Drew. I would say that it’s flexible. Because, it’s overall very simple. It’s got a couple of artifacts, a couple of ceremonies and just your basic structure. In between that, there’s a whole lot of room for movement, for change, for inspecting, and adapting. Because of the overall simplicity, you can explain the general idea to somebody, in maybe, 10 minutes, or so. There’s a lot of room for change.

Roy:  I think that Scrum should initially be rigid, and become more flexible over time. It is a good starting off point, you get yourself to that point, and then start adapting, and figuring out whatever works best for you. That produces the best results.

That means doing things that Scrum allows for. Sticking to Scrum by the book, you still have a lot of flexibility to do your own thing. Even breaking some of the rules of Scrum. As long as everybody is on board with what is going on, and you try one, or two things at a time, so you minimize overall risk, and are able to measure the impact. I don’t see anything wrong with that.

Chris:  This is Chris. I agree with Roy, and I think that that’s specifically, what Scrum was built for. That it’s built to be rigid. At first, not rigid, but it’s built to be something that you can follow, and you can learn from, and then adapt, and change. I don’t think it’s rigid overall, no.

Clayton:  It’s funny that you mention, the idea of, Roy, of maybe it being inflexible, or rigid upfront, in doing Scrum. One of the detractors in the article mentions that, it sends alarm bells, when a team says that they are going to do Scrum by the book. Another point in the article mentions that, some teams seem to Scrum by the book, and they make it very rigid from the start. They’re afraid of doing it wrong, and they just want to make sure that they are doing the right thing. Do you think that that’s a mistake?

Roy:  I don’t think that that’s a mistake, and I think I brought it up in a previous Scrumcast. Which, is that a lot of times when you’re first gaining experience with Scrum you want to break some of the rules of Scrum because it’s easier. What I said before that you can feel free if you know what you’re doing, and the entire teams on board, and all of that, and you’re measuring the changes, and you’re breaking the rules of Scrum. I don’t mean that you’re doing that to find something that’s easier. I mean to find something that’s better. That gets more business value, and that produces a more reliable result.

I think a lot of times people will take a particular rule, like let’s say one product owner, and they’ll say, “Well, that doesn’t work for us, because we have a whole bunch of different people. Let’s just set up a whole bunch of product owners, and we’re just going to go ahead and break their rule. Because that doesn’t work for us.” That ends up causing problems down the road, and really what they’re avoiding is they’re avoiding a really difficult conversation where they start having to make decisions. Instead they just cater to everybody at once, and that ends of not benefiting the entire team in the long run.

Clayton:  This came up at Agile 2011 in somebody’s talk that I was in, and they made a great reference to Pablo Picasso. They brought up some of his very early works, and they’re very traditional paintings that you would really expect from a normal painter. What he said is that Picasso had to learn the fundamentals and the basics of painting, and how to paint, and how to replicate exactly what he was seeing, before he was able, to then throw out all the rules. Break all the rules, and come up with amazing innovative paintings that he was able to create later. I thought that was a really good way of putting it.

Chris:  This Chris, I just want to add to that, and the fact that I’m working with a team off site right now. I think that some of the problems I had when I first got with this team, really come from where they took Scrum, and they wanted a process because they were so used to having processes and waterfall before. That they treated that process as if it was inflexible. It wasn’t’ that Scrum wasn’t inflexible. It was the way that they treated it because it was their culture, and that was the way that they were used to doing things. I think if people are going in, and they’re being well coached, and they understand that this is so that you can learn and make decisions later, and then you make changes based upon what really works for your team instead of just when it hurts. That it can be a great platform for you to start building upon.

Clayton:  That brings to another point that someone made to the rigidity of Scrum. Is they mentioned that they didn’t really like the stand‑up meeting, because they felt that the 15‑minute time box, and the idea that each person was going to say their piece and move on, didn’t really let spontaneous knowledge sharing occur. It was hard to have a 15‑minute time box because the team would be going in a certain direction that they thought was a productive direction, and they were having a good conversation and then the stand‑up had to be over.

Is that a misapplication of the stand‑up rules? Or is that the purpose of the stand‑up, to keep that stuff short and maybe not everyone benefits from that or not everyone agrees that they were going on the right path?

Roy:  I think that’s a good example, where the stand‑up rule should have applied. It makes actually a lot of sense, because there were certain members of the team having a great discussion that they felt was really productive. What you don’t know is, either two or three or four or however many members of the team felt that this was wasting their time, because it touched something that they had nothing to do with.

So, I think that the 15‑minute stand‑up would have allowed it to come up, so everybody who’s interested, is aware of it, or everybody who feels like they’ve something to contribute is allowed to become part of that spontaneous interaction. Then, push it towards offline, so you stick to your 15‑minute time box, and immediately after stand‑up, continue the discussion. Only with the people that want to be part of it, and feel that they’re able to contribute.

Drew:  Yes. For example, today with our team we had a spontaneous…you could call it a meeting, but it was more like a team conversation, where we even pulled in more stakeholders and it was spontaneous. Just because the scrum framework doesn’t prescribe any spontaneous meetings per se, it doesn’t mean you can’t do them.

Clayton asked if that was a misapplication. Let’s say if there was a legit purpose for extending a morning meeting longer that didn’t follow within a stand‑up, you can call that just another meeting, I would say.

I do agree with your point, Roy, that if something is uncomfortable to have a rigid stand‑up, it doesn’t mean you shouldn’t do it. Try to do the uncomfortable parts of Scrum because it might expose issues. You really have a great point there, probably two or three of those people aren’t getting anything out of that extended stand‑up.

Clayton:  Is there a chance that some people might confuse, regardless of the agile methodology, having a rigid system or the system being inflexible with something that’s maybe exposing a bad behavior that they currently have on the team? Something that they’re used to doing, that maybe they shouldn’t be doing, but it feels wrong not to do it, and so they inappropriately apply that as an inflexibility of the methodology.

Roy:  Got you. Like for example the multiple products or anything like, “Oh, well, Scrum is all the fuss because it requires only one product owner, and that’s just not possible,” something like that.

Clayton:  What are some examples of where, maybe people, for this particular instance, are used to having long morning meetings that one or two people think are very productive, but everyone else in the team thinks are not. It would seem that the 15‑minute time box is restrictive.

Roy:  Or, another example could be, “Our development cycle’s too long, there’s no way you could have a four week spread like that, that’s never going to be able to happen. That’s a limitation of Scrum that doesn’t fit our eight‑week cycle model.”

Jade:  I was thinking back to where we first started adopting Scrum inside Integrum, and so many things that we said were impossible are the things that we do every day. I think it was because it made us uncomfortable and was not part of our culture that we wanted to resist those foreign elements coming in to how we do business. Once we got over that and started to pay attention to the benefits that the constraints were giving us, that’s when it became much easier to accept those limitations, embrace them, and actually use them to make us better.

Clayton:  So, it’s good that you bring up the idea of the concept of constraints. I think where the article drives towards, eventually, is that there are certain sets of constraints that every application, every agile methodology is going to have, whether it’s Scrum or whatever. You’re going to have these constraints and maybe you just need to make the choice that, if you can’t live within those constraints, then maybe this isn’t the right framework for you. Do you think it is appropriate to say that if you can’t live within these constraints of Scrum, don’t do Scrum at all? Or is it OK to, maybe, do parts of Scrum?

Jade:  Yeah, I think there’s great parts of Scrum that are really great that’s practices. No matter what it is that you’re doing. No matter how what you want to apply the framework. So, I certainly think that you can pick and choose certain practices from Scrum, but I don’t think that you’ll get the full benefit. You won’t see the maximum effectiveness without embracing the whole thing.

Chris:  I agree with you. It think that there’s so much that practice is built upon the other practices to help bring the teams together and to help everything work better and to achieve that efficiency. People that cut and chop it up, they never realize that. Then, it gets even harder for them to understand why some of the points that they’re trying to stay with, why they’re painful.

Clayton:  Yeah, so, I guess to wrap up. What are some ways that if you’re on a team and maybe you’re trying to adopt scrum and you’re feeling like it is inflexible…Where do you reach out or how can you be sure that it’s the framework that you’re running into versus something that’s inherent to your team? That’s baked in. Maybe a bad practice that you already have.

How do you know which is which? How do you approach that problem?

Drew:  I think that’s something that’s very difficult to discover. Especially if you have very little experience with it, I don’t think that you’re going to be able that determination without getting some kind of mentor or bringing in somebody that has more experience or…

Even if it’s just an outside person that’s not so closely attached to the problem, is able to make that determination a lot better than you so far, especially if you’re just starting with it.

Roy:  Also, I think…

[Cross talk]

Drew:  Go ahead.

Roy:  Also, I think that…how do I determine if this is just not right for me or if I’m doing it wrong or what…the cool thing about Scrum 2 is the inspecting adapter, the iterations. So, how about for one iteration or whatever you want to call it, you hardcore try this principle of Scrum that you don’t think applies to your team?

Maybe you have to do it for more than one iteration, but at least for one and inspect and adapt. There’s always obviously going to be the first uncomfortable part about it. But, try it out. I think that’s a huge thing. Even if you don’t think it applies. A lot of people say it works. Try it out and see what the results are.

Jade:  I think that’s good. Going back to what Roy said, I think it is challenging to see from the inside your own problems.

I do think it can be done, but you have to be almost psychopathically dedicated to looking at yourself and introspecting and really digging deep all the time and pushing the limits, all the time of what it is that you’re doing to see where the core problems lie and what’s really going on.

So, I think you can benefit from a third party because they’re not weighed down by all that baggage, but it’s certainly possible to overcome yourself and your own challenges with a lot of hard work.

Clayton:  All right. Thanks, guys. That brings us to next time.

The post Episode #29 – “How Rigid is Scrum” appeared first on Special Episode : Larry Apke Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/larry-apke-phoenix-scrum-users-group-sept-2011/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/larry-apke-phoenix-scrum-users-group-sept-2011/#respond Mon, 10 Oct 2011 18:00:11 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5845 Alan Dayley interviews Larry Apke after the September 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Special Episode : Larry Apke Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 appeared first on Larry Apke after the September 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Special Episode : Larry Apke Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 appeared first on Special Episode : Alix Holmes – Integrating User Experience Design with Agile Process http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/alix-holmes-integrating-user-experience-design-with-agile-process/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/alix-holmes-integrating-user-experience-design-with-agile-process/#respond Tue, 04 Oct 2011 15:00:22 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5723 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the …

The post Special Episode : Alix Holmes – Integrating User Experience Design with Agile Process appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Alix Holmes about her Open Space on integrating user experience design with agile processes.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Alix Holmes – Integrating User Experience Design with Agile Process appeared first on Special Episode : Greg Kirk Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/greg-kirk-phoenix-scrum-users-group-sept-2011/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/greg-kirk-phoenix-scrum-users-group-sept-2011/#respond Mon, 03 Oct 2011 18:00:43 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5841 Alan Dayley interviews Greg Kirk after the September 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Special Episode : Greg Kirk Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 appeared first on Greg Kirk after the September 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Special Episode : Greg Kirk Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 appeared first on Special Episode : Chris Scripca – Game Programming for Fun and Keeping Thousands of People Happy http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/chris-scripca-game-programming-for-fun-and-keeping-thousands-of-people-happy/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/10/chris-scripca-game-programming-for-fun-and-keeping-thousands-of-people-happy/#respond Mon, 03 Oct 2011 15:00:09 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5721 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the …

The post Special Episode : Chris Scripca – Game Programming for Fun and Keeping Thousands of People Happy appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Chris Scripca about his Open Space on Game Programming for Fun and Keeping Thousands of People Happy.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Chris Scripca – Game Programming for Fun and Keeping Thousands of People Happy appeared first on Special Episode : Ainsley Nies – Agile Chartering http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/ainsley-nies-agile-chartering/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/ainsley-nies-agile-chartering/#respond Fri, 30 Sep 2011 15:00:37 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5719 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the …

The post Special Episode : Ainsley Nies – Agile Chartering appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Ainsley Nies about her Open Space on “Agile Chartering“.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Ainsley Nies – Agile Chartering appeared first on Special Episode : Scott Dunn – Strengths Based Team and Personal Growth http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/scott-dunn-strengths-based-team-and-personal-growth/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/scott-dunn-strengths-based-team-and-personal-growth/#respond Thu, 29 Sep 2011 15:00:31 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5717 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the …

The post Special Episode : Scott Dunn – Strengths Based Team and Personal Growth appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Scott Dunn about his Open Space on Strengths Based Team and Personal Growth.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Scott Dunn – Strengths Based Team and Personal Growth appeared first on Special Episode : Jason Kerney – Using Creative Processes to Drive Development http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/jason-kerney-about-using-creative-processes-to-drive-development/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/jason-kerney-about-using-creative-processes-to-drive-development/#respond Wed, 28 Sep 2011 15:00:12 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5715 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the …

The post Special Episode : Jason Kerney – Using Creative Processes to Drive Development appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Jason Kerney about their Open Space on using creative processes to drive development.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Jason Kerney – Using Creative Processes to Drive Development appeared first on Special Episode : Julie Smith – Reluctant Team Members and Participants on Agile Teams http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/julie-smith-about-reluctant-team-members-reluctant-team-members-and-participants-on-agile-teams/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/julie-smith-about-reluctant-team-members-reluctant-team-members-and-participants-on-agile-teams/#respond Tue, 27 Sep 2011 15:00:17 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5712 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the …

The post Special Episode : Julie Smith – Reluctant Team Members and Participants on Agile Teams appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Julie Smith about her Open Space on reluctant team members and participants on agile teams.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Julie Smith – Reluctant Team Members and Participants on Agile Teams appeared first on Bernadette Wellman Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/bernadette-wellman-phoenix-scrum-users-group-sept-2011/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/bernadette-wellman-phoenix-scrum-users-group-sept-2011/#comments Mon, 26 Sep 2011 18:00:49 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5838 Alan Dayley interviews Bernadette Wellman after the September 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Bernadette Wellman Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 appeared first on Bernadette Wellman after the September 2011 Phoenix Scrum User’s Group.

The post Bernadette Wellman Phoenix Scrum User’s Group Sept 2011 appeared first on Special Episode : Marsha Garczewski – Getting Started with SCRUM http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/marsha-garczewski-getting-started-with-scrum/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/marsha-garczewski-getting-started-with-scrum/#respond Mon, 26 Sep 2011 15:00:17 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5708 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the …

The post Special Episode : Marsha Garczewski – Getting Started with SCRUM appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Marsha Garczewski about her Open Space on “Getting Started with SCRUM“.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Marsha Garczewski – Getting Started with SCRUM appeared first on Special Episode : Woody Zuill – Intro to Agile http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/woody-zuill-intro-to-agile/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/woody-zuill-intro-to-agile/#respond Fri, 23 Sep 2011 15:00:23 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5704 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the …

The post Special Episode : Woody Zuill – Intro to Agile appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Woody Zuill about his Open Space session titled “Intro to Agile“.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Woody Zuill – Intro to Agile appeared first on Special Episode : Darrin Ladd – How Can I Help My Teams Continue to Improve? http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/darrin-ladd-how-can-i-help-my-teams-continue-to-improve/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/darrin-ladd-how-can-i-help-my-teams-continue-to-improve/#respond Thu, 22 Sep 2011 15:30:19 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5696 The Integrum team traveled to Irvine, California to attend the Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we …

The post Special Episode : Darrin Ladd – How Can I Help My Teams Continue to Improve? appeared first on Agile Open Southern California on September 15th and 16th of 2011. During the event we had the chance to be able to interview some of the attendees and talk to them about the Open Space that they had just facilitated. Open Space Technology conferences are great events where the attendees get to create and completely control the content of the “conference”.

Enjoy this video as we talk to Darrin Ladd about his Open Space on How Can I Help My Teams Continue to Improve?.

For more information on this event or their sister event Agile Open Northern California check out the site at www.agileopencalifornia.com.

The post Special Episode : Darrin Ladd – How Can I Help My Teams Continue to Improve? appeared first on Special Episode : Integrum Invades Irvine http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/integrum-invades-irvine/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/integrum-invades-irvine/#respond Thu, 22 Sep 2011 02:05:10 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5697 The Integrum crew decided to head to Agile Open California South this year as a way to spend some time together. We took the opportunity …

The post Special Episode : Integrum Invades Irvine appeared first on Special Episode : Integrum Invades Irvine appeared first on Episode #28 – SCRUM. Where Do You Start? http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/scrumcast-28-scrum-where-do-you-start/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/scrumcast-28-scrum-where-do-you-start/#respond Thu, 08 Sep 2011 12:00:11 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5646 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors, Drew LeSueur and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss where might be a good place to start for a team …

The post Episode #28 – SCRUM. Where Do You Start? appeared first on Scrum Primer

  • Roles and Ceremonies
  • What is necessary to improve
  • Strict SCRUM
  • Without experience it’s difficult to know
  • It’s not about experts, it’s about learning
  • SCRUM in 10 minutes
  • It’s not a panacea
  • User Stories Applied, Agile Estimating and Planning, Succeeding with Agile
  • Don’t get discouraged, focus on improving
  • Transcript

    Jade Meskill:  Hello and welcome to another episode of “The Scrumcast”. I’m Jade Meskill.

    Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

    Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew LeSueur.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  And I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Jade:  This week I had somebody ask me…they had just formed a new team, they’re building a new product, and they heard about the Scrum thing, and they really want to implement it. Their question to me was, “Where do we start?” Let’s talk a little bit about starting Scrum from ground zero.

    I’ve heard of Scrum. I think it’s cool, I think it’s the way to go, but I don’t know anything about it. What do I do?

    Drew:  I think it make sense to start with retrospectives. I think we’ve talked in the past that with Agile…

    Jade:  What’s a retrospective?

    Drew:  We start with weekly meetings, in which we review the last week, and think of how we can do things better.

    Jade:  Why every week?

    Drew:  Why not every week?

    [laughter]

    Jade:  Who runs this meeting?

    Drew:  Whoever is in charge of the new team.

    Jade:  Who is in charge of the new team?

    Drew:  I don’t know. I assume there’s somebody in charge. [indecipherable 1:14] asked here the question.

    Jade:  Who’s the team?

    Clayton:  I think one of the first things you can do is identify the roles. Who’s a product owner, who’s…

    Jade:  What’s a product owner?

    [crosstalk]

    Drew:  This is the E‑Course.

    Clayton:  I’m talking from ground zero. I’ve heard of Scrum. Where do I begin?

    Drew:  That’s a problem. You have a lot of roles that need to be identified…

    Clayton:  Where do I find Information about this?

    Drew:  You are not going to be able to afford to go to a Scrum training class, if you’re a start‑up trying to figure this out for the first time.

    Clayton:  OK. So?

    Derek:  There’s the Scrum Primer. It’s a two‑page document, very simple basic, what is Scrum, what are the roles, the ceremonies, the artifacts. That’s where I would start.

    Clayton:  Awesome.

    Derek:  Have everybody read that.

    Clayton:  That’s what I told them to do.

    You’d start with the Primer and just learn the basic elements of what makes up a Scrum team, and what are the ceremonies involved.

    Clayton:  I guess when I think about it I question, “Do we really want to be advocating Scrum to people, just because they’ve heard that Scrum is this cool new thing? How do we know that Scrum is or isn’t viable for their organization”?

    I can think of at least one organization we’ve dealt with at one point, and we asked, “What’s your goal of doing Scrum and Agile”? The answer was, “I don’t know. That’s the project, we have to implement Scrum”.

    Roy:  It was to implement the Agile.

    Clayton:  Right. I guess what I mean by that is, are there things that you could take to an organization or suggest an organization that could get them to start thinking about some of the principles behind Scrum, before they necessarily jumped in and said, “We’re ditching whatever we’re currently doing and going full board into Scrum, doing absolutely everything Scrum‑based.” When we say just go look at the primer, somebody looks at that and thinks, “In order to do Scrum I have to do everything on here,” which is true.

    But the question is, do you have to do Scrum in order to improve your team? Could you do just a retrospective and improve your team? Could you do just a stand‑up and improve your team? Could you do just a planning meeting and improve your team? At some point you would have to do more, but I’ve seen a lot of teams that they don’t even talk to each other. Just talking to each other would be an improvement to their team.

    Roy:  I think those are really good points, but let’s just imagine that you don’t have hours and hours to coach and counsel them on what it is that they need to do. They’ve expressed an interest in going this particular direction, and it’s easy to say, from your perspective that, “Yes, maybe you don’t need all these pieces,” but they are not going to know that.

    Unless they have someone that’s experienced working with them and helping them along, they’re not going to have that context to understand that, “Hey, we just really need to start by doing stand‑ups.” You’re not going to have that insight into what their team makeup is, and they’re not going to be able to share that with you, in passing.

    Clayton:  My recommendation would be, “If you have decided to go Scrum, as your Agile framework, then you follow it strictly. Don’t take just pieces out of it, because, if you don’t have the experience to know which pieces, why they exist, and what impact they have, then you probably have not the experience to make that decision.

    I think human nature will tend to avoid the difficult things, and there are some parts of Scrum, some of the ceremonies, that specifically expose those difficult things. It almost seems it’s those ceremonies that produce the problems, when really they’re uncovering the problems.

    If you don’t have the experience to see that, “Oh, it’s actually an underlying problem, we need to solve this,” your natural reaction may be to shy away from doing that particular, “OK, we won’t deal with having just one product owner, because that just doesn’t work for us. We’re going to avoid that because that’s…” when really that’s a huge problem for your team and maybe you should be addressing the problem, not what exposed it.

    Derek:  Yeah, I agree, but that’s different between saying, if you’re going to do the ceremony, follow the strict guidelines of the ceremony versus saying, do the ceremony or don’t do the ceremony.

    I guess where I’ll play devil’s advocate is, I’ve seen teams do virtually every step of the Scrum and not do Scrumbut, and still completely fuck it up, meaning just because you have a planning meeting and you say, what we did yesterday, what we’re doing tomorrow, and any impediments, you can still totally screw that up.

    I was in a planning meeting today and it was, we said what we did, said what we’re going to do, and then we said, here’s the impediment, and passed the token to the next person, and nobody talked about actually removing the impediment.

    Jade:  That’s the Scrum master’s job.

    Derek:  Yeah.

    Jade:  [laughs]

    Derek:  I’ll also go against a little bit of what you said, Roy. I think that different teams are at different levels, so when you say, do everything for Scrum if you’re going to do Scrum, don’t pick and choose which ones that you want…I don’t know if that’s what you said…

    Roy:  Sure, I think I’m more saying that, if you’re in [indecipherable 6:33] , if you’re in the position where you don’t know anything about Scrum, and nobody on your team knows anything about Scrum, but you know you want to do it, I would say you’re in no position to pick and choose what works best for you. I’d say that’s a very dangerous choice to be making.

    Drew:  I would agree with that.

    Derek:  I’d also say that, maybe you want to experiment with one feature, and you can gain value…it’s true, like you said, at the beginning. Start with retrospectives. You can gain value over just one aspect or one ceremony or one artifact of Scrum as you transition into it.

    Roy:  That’s true.

    Derek:  It depends on what level the team’s at, and maybe how committed they are.

    Roy:  I could definitely see that, doing one thing, adding one thing at a time and measuring what effect it has. I think that would get you a really good understanding of what that particular thing actually does.

    Clayton:  I think to me, we put way too much emphasis on experts. I think that the whole premise of Agile or Scrum, if you look at it from an inspect and adapt method, is that there is no prescribed, real formula. It’s really all about saying, what are we doing? Is it working? How could we make it better?

    Certainly, experience helps accelerate that, and to me, that’s the difference. If you’re not willing to invest in training, if you’re not willing to invest in doing a ton of reading, if you’re not willing to invest in hiring a company to come in and do coaching or hiring in somebody experienced to put them on your team, you’re going to have to go through some learning phase.

    It doesn’t matter if you read every Agile book out there. At the end of the day, when you go to apply it to your team, you’re going to run into things and you’re going to make wrong choices. I see experts every day make wrong choices, and that’s OK. The thing is, how can you iterate over those choices as quickly as humanly possible to speed up an improvement.

    I think when you’ve got more of an expert eye towards things, you can make that change happen quicker, just because you’ve seen the patterns before. But I think that we need to stop trying to circumvent learning in organizations.

    Drew:  I feel like some of the stuff that you’re saying there, in terms of what the principles are and everything, are some kind of based on nuance or your experience. I think if you’re the average person that says, “OK, I’ve heard about Scrum, and I want to implement Scrum at my company,” they’re going to go on the Internet and they’re going to watch some videos and read some things and they’re going to say, “I have to do these 15 things, this list, and I have to follow this order. I think that’s what they’re going to do.

    They’re not going to immediately jump to, “OK, I just need to inspect and adapt.” I don’t think anyone out there that’s selling Scrum…I think most of the stuff out there for Scrum is really promoting Scrum for a commercial reason. “Here’s how you do Scrum, and I know it’s very confusing, so come and talk to me.”

    Because of that, no one’s saying, “Hey, you can get started with Scrum by doing this simple thing. Just inspect and adapt and just do a couple things and see what works and learn from that.” No one’s really talking about the nuance of it. It seems almost impossible, if you are not really part of that culture or part of that community, to understand that that was the case, and understand there’s a different way of doing it.

    Jade:  Going off what you’re saying there, could you…and the situation that I’m faced with…could you come in and do Scrum in 10 minutes? What would that look like? You have 10 minutes to explain Scrum to a team that wants to implement it. Go.

    Drew:  It seems like, if you had 10 minutes, you’re going to focus on more of the principle stuff, and then it’s not going to look like Scrum necessarily. I wonder, if you were to do that, then would you begin some kind of mixed messages? Then, where do you go from there?

    Because, if you go seek out the next step, or, “OK, we’ve been doing this for a few weeks now. What do we do now? Now I’m going to look for Scrum stuff, and it’s not the same thing I have learned already.”

    Clayton:  Yeah. I think some of it is we highlight Scrum as this panacea or this magic pill that, if you just do it, all your problems go away. I think that, if someone were to come directly to me, what I would probably tell them is, “Hey, here are some resources, here’s the primer, you might want to read my koans, user stories applied, [indecipherable 10:59] menu planning.

    You might want to read a couple of different books that help you accelerate your learning. But, ultimately, it’s really, really simple, but it’s really, really hard. Don’t get discouraged. Just make sure that, every week, you’re improving. As long as you’re on the journey towards improving, don’t worry about whether your implementation of Scrum is perfect.”

    I think maybe that’s the chicken’s way out, but I think that the problem that we do is we do this [indecipherable 11:30] . I think the community has this thing that, once you know Scrum, then you have to do exactly Scrum. You’re not allowed to do in Scrumbut, and, if you have any problems and you’re failing, it’s because you’re not doing the exact prescribed elements of Scrum.

    If you would just do those, you would stop failing. I think that’s bullshit. Human beings are involved, and, even if you follow the process to a T, you are going to have failure sometimes. I think every human being is different, so every team is composed of multiple humans. You’re going to have a unique problem on every single team that no Scrum guide can solve for you.

    Roy:  That’s definitely true, but I think the beginner’s approach, often, is the think that every problem you run into is your own unique problem, and it’s very difficult to get away from that. Without experience, it’s impossible, really, to see that this isn’t a unique problem. This is actually the problem that the ceremony or whatever was directly designed to address, and it’s exposing the problem.

    That’s my concern. I think it’s important that you inspect and adapt. It’s also important that you start out with some kind of framework. If we’re going to go with Scrum, just going over a set of principles, like Agile in general, then it seems to me that you’re interested in having a starting‑off point.

    You inspect and adapt, but you start off with something that you can inspect and adapt, so you don’t have the blank page problem, where you sit in front of that and you don’t know what to try first. At least, Scrum gives you something there, but it’s difficult to make a [indecipherable 13:03] to say, “This is working for us” or “This isn’t.”

    Drew:  Yeah. I would imagine that it’s pretty easy to say…the person that came and talked to Jade says they want to do Scrum. Jade points them in the right direction. They start doing Scrum, and they get to a point where there are some psychological issue with people on the team, and that’s a totally separate thing that is not necessarily discussed in the primer.

    I think, unless they are willing to go above and beyond, maybe they’ll go do some more reading and say, “This is a deeper issue.” Then that’s how you get into doing Scrumbut, where it’s like, “We had this problem on our team which I didn’t read anything in the book that says anything about this, so we’ll change it a little bit.”

    We’re still doing Scrum, and then you get to the point where it’s like you’re not doing Scrum at all. You’re doing this weird bastardization of it.

    Jade:  So it doesn’t matter?

    Drew:  What?

    Jade:  If, let’s just say, I end up going down that road. I learned the very basic principles of Scrum, and now I’m changing it to fit our situation, but maybe it’s not the “right way.” Does it matter?

    Drew:  I guess it doesn’t matter in the sense that you would be doing maybe just as bad, and you’d be doing it in some other way.

    Derek:  I think it doesn’t matter, the one thing being that you cannot accept stagnation. You cannot be willing to accept that you refuse to improve. Because I think I’ve seen that before, where people come up with their own derivative of Scrum, and they say, “This is our Scrum,” or, “This is our process,” or “our method” and then they start making changes, they start looking at anything that has changed around them, and they just stick with the exact same thing.

    Clayton:  I think that is the problem. What we tell people right now is, “Go read this primer, and, if you implement Scrum, all your problems are solved.” So what they’ll do is they’ll go implement Scrum, and they’ll find little things here. Maybe I can have one product owner, so I have to, or maybe Scrum doesn’t really address velocity, hours, or something else, so we roll our own based on some anecdotal evidence.

    Then, when somebody comes in and says, “We’re frustrated. We’re still not delivering on time. We stopped using Scrum, because Scrum doesn’t work for us.” Then you talk to them, and you say, “What you’re doing is not really Scrum, and you’ve got these other problems,” but what happens is people stop inspecting and adapting.

    What they’ll do is they’ll say, “I implemented Scrum. It didn’t work for me, whatever part. I made this change, and that didn’t work either. Therefore, I’m going to just stop trying and go back to just whatever we were doing before that didn’t work either, because this Agile stuff just doesn’t work.”

    I think the crime that we’re committing is we’re not telling people that making the first deviation is actually OK. But, when that deviation doesn’t work, you should be asking why didn’t that deviation work and trying something else. Maybe you’ll get two, three, or four deviations before you finally go “Ah! Light bulb moment! Now I understand the strict version is this. Maybe I need to back and try that based on what I’ve learned.”

    I think we teach people that it’s not OK to make changes to Scrum, which isn’t novice. I think it is dangerous to do that. I really do. I’d recommend to try to implement a fairly strict version of Scrum before you make any changes. But, if you start to make changes, don’t give up if those changes don’t work. Keep making changes until you find what works for you.

    Derek:  Right. I think, even if you implement the ideal version of Scrum, and if feels like it’s working good, still keep making changes, because it could be better.

    Jade:  Still inspect and adapt. Maybe not necessarily make changes.

    Derek:  That’s true. No. Actually, I want to take that back. That’s not true. I would say, even if you are happy with your results, still make changes, because, what if it could be better, and you are just on the other side of the hill and there’s an oasis on the other side. I would say, even if you feel everything is going great, still make changes and still take risks.

    Jade:  Any last parting thoughts for new teams looking to implement Scrum or explore Scrum for the first time?

    Roy:  Yeah. I like what Derek said about you’ve got to understand the underlying principles. I also like what you said, Jade, about if you had 10 minutes to describe it, what would you say? I think we can combine the both. Nobody is going to learn everything in one go around.

    The principle of inspect and adapt is huge, but, if had 10 minutes to describe it to a team, I would talk about the basic principles: weekly iterations, a deliverable product after each iteration, teach them the Scrum primer, and then have them continue to learn and grow, and don’t reject it if it doesn’t work the first time around or if it exposes issues the first time around. That’s what Scrum’s all about.

    Clayton:  I think the thing that kind of uncovered this conversation for me is I don’t think it’s realistic to say “How do I implement Scrum?” Then I’m going to tell you what to do, and then you’re going to go on Scrum. I’m going to tell you what to do now, and then we’re going to have to keep you talking about it. It’s going to have to be an ongoing relationship, and ongoing thing. As you go through the motions of implementing Scrum, and you get the growing pains and everything. You’re going to need someone to talk to, and discuss what’s happening. I think the only way you can say “How can I implement Scrum?”, is to have an ongoing conversation.

    Drew:  I think one thing I would add too, is to try to get the entire team to be open and honest about their feelings regarding their teammates. Especially regarding how they are feeling about the current process. I think it’s going to be impossible to successfully implement a, or maybe at the very least extremely difficult to implement a successful version of Scrum. Unless you get buy‑in from the team. If you have an entire team of people that are against you, I think that that’s fighting an uphill battle, and at the very least you should know about it going into that.

    I do think that you should promote the honesty. Just because they don’t agree with you it doesn’t make them wrong. It’s better to know how they feel than it is for them to hide it for fear of pissing you off.

    Jade:  Thank you for listening to the Scrumcast. We’ll catch you next time.

    The post Episode #28 – SCRUM. Where Do You Start? appeared first on Episode #27 – Standups http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/scrumcast-27-standups/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/09/scrumcast-27-standups/#comments Thu, 01 Sep 2011 12:00:56 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5641 Drew LeSueur, Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water discuss standups in agile environments. why people don’t want to do standups what if they go longer …

    The post Episode #27 – Standups appeared first on core protocols

  • avoid status meeting mentality
  • take things off line
  • how are you exposed
  • dealing with people that are late
  • sit or stand?
  • talking token
  • Transcript

    Drew LeSueur:  Welcome to another episode of “ScrumCast.” I’m Drew LeSueur.

    Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

    Drew:  Today we are going to talk about stand‑ups, why we do them, why people sometimes don’t want to do them, and why they’re important.

    Roy, we were talking earlier, and we talked about a team who didn’t want to do a stand‑up. Why do you think that is? What are some of the reasons teams don’t want to do stand‑up?

    Roy:  The most common reason that I’ve heard for not doing a stand‑up is, “We feel like it would be wasting our time. We want to spend these 15 minutes doing development work. We don’t have time for this bullshit stand‑up, where we’re just going to stand there, and talk about nothing that matters. We could be coding.”

    Derek:  I definitely think that some of it is people don’t believe that they’re really going to be 15 minute meetings. They’ve never been to a meeting that’s probably taken less than an hour before. The thought of doing five meetings, each an hour, you’re looking at five hours worth of meetings per week. If you’re only there for 40 hours, that’s a pretty huge commitment. Sometimes it’s fear of is this really only going to be 15 minutes? And if it’s only 15 minutes, can it provide any value at all?

    Drew:  That’s a good one. Another one might be, we’re all in the same room, if you know they are in the same room, and if we need to talk to each other we’ll just say it. That might be another reason why they don’t think they…they can just talk to each other, they don’t need anything extra and special or ceremonial to discuss.

    Roy:  That’s referred to as the water cooler effect. You know we’ll see each other at the water cooler later so why have a personal conversation now?

    Derek:  I’m on an engagement now. It’s kind of interesting, one of the teams did not really want to do a stand‑up. We kind of had a scrum of scrums type of stand‑up. Each one of the managers had started to on their own bring the concept of the stand‑up back to their individual teams before we even brought it up as something they might consider doing, except for one group.

    The one group was told, “Hey, everyone else is doing this, this is working really well, you should try it.” They were a little reticent to do that for a number of reasons. It was interesting. They ended up having their first stand‑up, and everybody on their team went around and gave. They’re checked in and did their stand‑up portion. At the end the manager said, “I’m amazed that none of you guys said anything at all about this massive thing. We’ve got this huge thing coming up [laughs] in like five days, and none of you guys said anything at all about it.” They’re like, “Oh, yeah. That’s right.”

    Here is something that the team thinks is clearly on the front of the manager’s mind that, “This is a big deal, and we’ve got to get it done. I’m not thinking about much else.” Yet everybody else on the team was like, “Oh, yeah. I totally forgot. That is happening in three days.” Like, duh. That’s just proof positive that one of the hardest things about communication is understanding that you don’t really know what the other person is thinking.

    Here’s a manager who thought that everybody on his team had this on the front of their mind, and in reality it wasn’t even on their mind at all. Just by having something that simple is awareness that, “Holy crap. Nobody on my team is thinking about this. I better get them to start thinking about it.”

    Roy:  I do think though that while stand‑ups are great for that type of interaction and getting everybody on the same page, I’ve been part of a lot of stand‑ups that feel like they drag on forever and that probably exceed the 15 minute time block and more. People are taking up such a long period of time to express whatever their concerns are for the day that I just completely am not able to pay attention. I’m trying with every bone in my body to pay attention, but I just can’t do it.

    Derek:  Yeah, and even if they don’t exceed the 15 minutes, they can still drag on too long. Roy, you’re good at doing this. If a side conversation starts happening during stand‑up, you’ll say, “OK, why don’t we take this offline?” That way the two parties or the two developers involved can have a deeper conversation if needed, but it doesn’t have to affect everybody else and the rest of the stand‑up.

    Roy:  Yeah, I definitely think that there are a couple of key things. Either a Scrum master or somebody on the team needs to be really good about respecting time boxes. That is the most powerful element of a stand‑up, keeping it time‑boxed because it really teaches the team about respect and about respect of a time box in a very safe manner.

    A couple of things that I’ll do is absolutely, if somebody’s getting a little wordy, take it offline. Or feel free to say, “What are you getting at?” We’ve had on our own teams some people that get a little diarrhea in the mouth when it comes to turning it into more of a status update and wishy‑washy. It’s OK to say, “Well, is there anything blocking you?” If the answer’s no, go, “OK, great. You’ve lost everybody.”

    The other thing that I’ll do if I start to see things going is to tell people, “It’s OK, we’re going to start the stand‑up at the same time whether everybody’s here or not. We’re pretty much starting it, and when the 15 minutes is up, if you’ve got something that you need to be doing and you feel like your time is being wasted, feel free to go ahead and basically check out.”

    Obviously, here, we like to use core protocols. Feel free to check out and show people that your time is being disrespected. When you start to do that and you start to be honest with each other, it starts to be like, OK, maybe I need to not be so verbose during this.

    Derek:  In line with the core protocols a bit, when you’re doing stand‑up to have a very rigid structure for what everybody’s supposed to say. Like, whether it is three quick phrases or one to two quick phrases that say whether you’re happy, mad or sad about something. Or if you use the standard stand‑up thing, which is like, “This is what I did yesterday, this is what I’m doing today, and these are where my blockages are,” That’s very important, too.

    If you get into the stand‑up where everybody is kind of free form speaking, that’s when you get into where people are kind of like, first off, people feel like they have to say something, so everybody says something. Then they also just drag on and on because they’re trying to remember if they’re forgetting anything important.

    With the format, you’re like, OK, that can itinerize very quickly. These are the things that are going to be blocking me. Let me get those out, because those are realistically, in my opinion, the most important, because those are the other things that the team can help me on, then also the things that I worked on yesterday and today and then should be done with it and move on.

    Roy:  Yeah, I definitely think a lot of people try to make them status meetings. In a status meeting, if you’re not talking a lot, it means you must not have done much yesterday. I find that certain personalities really try to be verbose because they’re trying to make it sound like they’ve done a ton of work, when in reality, what they’re talking about, nobody really cares about.

    Another thing that we’ve played around with a little bit here, too, is, once you start to get a high performing team, what did you do yesterday and what are you doing today really are not that important.

    It’s really about what impediments are standing in my way. Where do I need help. One of the ones we’ve tried to start to bring in, not so successfully, but it’s going down the road. That’s, what do I feel exposed on? Where am I scared? Where am I feeling inadequate at?

    In a high performing team, those types of questions become much more important, because they’re really talking about, how do I get better? How do I remove the roadblocks? How do I not feel afraid?

    Derek:  Also, the attitude of stand‑up where everybody has to speak, with core protocols is great, because you go around the circle very quickly. But if you’re doing just a quick what I did yesterday and all of that and you’re really just concerned about impediments, it’s not necessary for everybody to speak.

    I’ve seen a ton of times where people are working in pairs, so two individuals did pretty much the exact same thing in a given day. When they’re listing off what they did yesterday, they both repeat almost verbatim what the other person said. That’s not necessary. We could have cut the entire stand‑up in half if everybody’s paired up.

    Roy:  Yeah, that’s one of the reasons I don’t really like the whole status kind of piece so much. Especially on the slightly larger teams, you might be working in code based pieces that are different enough, that if you’re really trying to give any kind of level of detail about what you did, the other people are checking out because it’s irrelevant.

    Derek:  Like when Kony starts to list down acronyms for startup projects.

    Roy:  Yeah, if you’ve got your ADO, right, exactly. It becomes really easy to kind of check out. Whereas, if you keep it at a much higher level, it gives people insight to say, like, “Oh, I’ve worked with PDF before, generating PDFs before. If you need help, let me know. I know a lot about that.” Or Rest our API or Soap or whatever. If you keep it at that high level, it’s meaningful. The minute you start to drop into, like, implementation, it’s probably better to be offline if you really need to talk about that stuff.

    Derek:  I liked one thing you said about saying how you feel exposed. That’s a great way of bringing out some lurking problems and bringing them to the forefront, because there are a lot of things, as we develop, as we do things where, hey, I feel a little bit exposed. In the future, I can foresee an issue here. Even if it might not be an immediate impediment or an immediate roadblock, you can still feel exposed on some lurking issue. That’s a great place to bring it out, in stand‑up.

    Roy:  Yeah, some of the other things with stand‑ups, too, even once you’re doing them, it’s hard to do them well. It’s hard to get everybody to show up at the same time and not be late. I remember here at Integrum we probably had three years worth of fighting to figure out what the right stand‑up time was. To figure out, do you punish people that are late? Do you not punish people that are late?

    Derek:  Do you lock them out of the room?

    Roy:  How do you do that?

    [crosstalk]

    Roy:  Not until in the last three or four months have we really gotten to the point where stand‑ups flow really well. There are not people pissed off that somebody is not there because people are only not there if they’ve got a good reason to not be there, that they’re efficient and effective.

    It’s a lot like para‑programming. It’s something that’s really, really easy to start doing. “Hey, we’re pairing. We’ve got two people sitting in front in the same pairing station. Hey, we’re doing stand‑ups. Everybody meets for 15 minutes.”

    Doing them well and effectively and getting the most out of them is very, very difficult.

    Derek:  This is one, I’ve seen quite a bit with people that are first starting out doing stand‑ups. “Stand‑ups, do you really need to stand‑up for it?”

    I always tell them, “If you want the meeting to be 15 minutes or less, I highly suggest it.”

    Drew:  There is saying, “Even if you do your stand‑up, sitting down.” I’ve always stood up for it. I’ve never found a need to sit down for it.

    Derek:  The best part is when you ask them, “Well, why don’t you want to stand‑up.” The response you get, “Because it’s uncomfortable.”

    That’s the entire point of the stand‑up, everybody in that meeting wants it to be over with as quickly as possible. If you’re at a meeting in a board room with comfy leather seats and donuts, everybody’s going to take that time away from work and just relax and be happy that they’re away from the daily grind for a little bit.

    Whereas, if everybody is standing up, it’s uncomfortable, but it’s a necessary uncomfortableness that everybody tries to get it over with.

    Roy:  It’s hilarious that you bring that up. In a recent engagement, this happened just the other day, is I instituted a talking token or a token to pass around for stand‑ups at an organization.

    All of the groups that are doing stand‑ups are using stand‑up tokens. We usually use a marker or something, whatever is close by.

    They pass it around and one of the teams that was not doing stand‑ups and was kind of allergic to them, when they did their first stand‑up, their manager started off by telling them that, “Hey, the stand‑up thing, I know it seems really stupid and it feels dumb, and passing this token around is really childish, but I thought the same thing when I was in my first stand‑up. Give it a chance because it has really improved communication amongst the team I’m doing it with. It would really help our team do it.”

    It was funny to hear somebody who was visibly uncomfortable during stand‑ups, but when he tells his team, really articulates that this feels really childish, this feels really stupid, but give it a chance because there is something kind of magic to it. That is some of the key to a lot of the Agile, not ceremonies, but some of the ceremonies as well as a lot of the activities or the thoughts or the principles are they take us back to that more childish state where you’re almost uncomfortable doing them, so you get duped into paying offense “Tom Sawyer” style.

    All of sudden, you’re like, “Hey, what a minute. I just got tricked into giving away vital information that I didn’t really want to give away.” There is some magic to that. It’s OK to feel uncomfortable.

    If you’re just starting out, it is absolutely, positively, normal for stand‑ups to feel uncomfortable…

    Roy:  Oh, I know.

    Derek:  …when you start doing them.

    Roy:  For my, at least, first two or three of mine, I had this crazy way to put hands where I’m standing up. Then, the waiting for everybody else to speak, it felt really awkward, but it’s something that you get used to.

    Drew:  That’s it for today. See you next time.

    The post Episode #27 – Standups appeared first on Episode #26 – Reviewing the New Edition of the SCRUM Guide http://integrumtech.com/2011/08/scrumcast-26-reviewing-the-new-edition-of-the-scrum-guide/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/08/scrumcast-26-reviewing-the-new-edition-of-the-scrum-guide/#respond Thu, 25 Aug 2011 12:00:44 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5644 Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Drew LeSueur talk about new changes to the SCRUM Guide. “The Development Team” Commitment …

    The post Episode #26 – Reviewing the New Edition of the SCRUM Guide appeared first on SCRUM Guide.

    • “The Development Team”
    • Commitment vs Forecast
    • Burn down charts
    • Release planning not necessary
    • Sprint backlog items bye bye
    • Ordered vs prioritized

    Transcript

    Jade Meskill:  Hello and welcome to another episode of ScrumCast. I’m Jade Meskill.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

    Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew LeSueur.

    Jade:  Today we want to talk about the new addition of the Scrum guide that came out from Scrum.org. There’s been a lot of controversial changes that have been made. Some tweaking to the language, a few different things and we’re just going to go down the Scrum update bullet point by bullet point. Share some of our feelings and opinions.

    To kick it off, let’s talk about the first change that they talked about here. The team of people performing the work of creating an increment, is the development team regardless of the work performed by individual team members, they are known as developers. What do you think about this?

    Roy:  I like it. I can tell by the way you are looking at me that you don’t like it Jade.

    [laughter]

    Jade:  I’m just moderating here. [laughs]

    Roy:  I like the essential idea of it because I’ve seen with multiple scrum teams that when they go in they run across the concept…we even came across with this at Integrum last week where we said, “What if only one guy is able to perform this specific task”?

    We have all these people who are able to work but there’s one thing like, “That’s Jade’s job. Jade’s the only one who can handle that.” I think that’s a big problem. I think that is what they’re trying to address here, is that everybody should be cross‑functional, everybody should be able to perform any of the work inside of this sprint.

    Clayton:  I think some of the hangup comes from as a developer, like software engineer, you think of the word developer meaning someone who writes software. I think if you take a step outside of that you could say the word developer really means someone who’s developing something that gets to potential shipable software. I guess I’m OK with this one. I don’t think there’s too much wrong with it.

    Derek:  I think that one of the problems you have is on a lot of teams you might have Q&A, and database administrator, an architect. Everybody identifies themselves differently, and so in other language if it’s said the programmers there would be people who say, “I’m not included in the team because I’m a Q&A person, I’m not a programmer.”

    By switching it to developer I think they’re using a little bit softer language. I think you could even argue that it allows for scrum outside of software. So from a project management framework perspective, a developer could be anybody creating something. If I’m developing something, whether it be a courseware, or a piece of art, or whatever, I’m a developer. I think that they are softening the language for the some ability to go outside of the network.

    Drew:  Yeah, I agree as well, I think the core idea of this change is to unite the team, and let’s give them the same name.

    Jade:  All right, let’s move on. The next bullet point ‑‑ Development teams do not commit to completing the work planned during the sprint planning meeting. The development team creates a forecast of work it believes will done, but that forecast will change as more becomes known throughout the sprint.

    Roy:  That sounds like the exact opposite of a locked‑in sprint. The idea’s always been ‑‑ we lock in the time, the development team gets to establish the scope. If, now we get half‑way through the week and I don’t think I’m going to be able to make it. In traditional Scrum, that would be a huge deal and you would have to have an early sprint termination, and you’d have to replan or restart your sprint, and that should be a painful process because that should happen very rarely.

    Derek:  To me, this is the pussification of Scrum.

    Jade:  That’s the exact word I used before we started.

    Derek:  Straight up ‑‑ it went from, this is a contract whereby you commit to the work ‑‑ you get to decide how much work you commit to, you commit to it, and the other side of the contract is that you do not have to accept change that comes in as part of that contract.

    In fact, at one time, my understanding is that the right way to abnormally terminate a sprint because of change, was to physically throw yourself on the floor and scream bloody murder like a young toddler until you got your way that the change went away or that management was sufficiently known that bad things were happening between the contract ‑‑ between the team, the development team and the product owner.

    And now we’re using language that says, “Well, you know, the team just kind of says that they would like to get this stuff done, but if the world changes, and stuff happens and we’re not really making a commitment.”

    Roy:  I think, too, the guy that coined that way of doing an abnormal sprint termination is Kent Schwaber, one of the guys who signed the…

    Derek:  That’s correct. I think what they are trying to do is remove absolutism or pragmatism, and I think by softening the language they’re going to do the exact opposite of that. So they went from something where it’s very hard ‑‑ you terminate the sprint in this way, and you’re a total asshole about it ‑‑ even if it’s the right thing to do.

    To now, “We don’t want to ever say you ever really make a commitment because that’s sometimes not the right thing to do,” and I think that really it’s a middle ground where you should be making a commitment.

    The commitment should be something that you really honor. But, if there is valid reason to change, to terminate, or to do that, or there is some ability to negotiate, I think you should be able to do that. I think, by going to the wishy‑washy language, they really don’t help anybody. You’re going to have teams who say, “I don’t have to commit to anything. What are you talking about”? If I can only do a 5, even though I told you I could do a 50, that’s Scrum.

    Clayton:  Yeah. I think that the second part of this, where it talks about how more we’ll become known during the sprint, I think that’s just another way of saying “negotiation.” I think we do that now already, where, if something comes up, you can negotiate that. Maybe it’s a big deal, maybe it’s not.

    I think the change from commitment to forecasting, what’s been interesting for me is, if following all this on Twitter, there’s been a lot of people that have said things like, “I think ‘commitment’ is a great word, because I want the development team to feel the weight of the world on their shoulders, like they feel like, ‘Hey, this is a really big deal.'”

    Then, other people are saying, “Gees, the weight of the world, and I want to make the development team feel like they have to do it.” Those are all very negative words. I agree with you that’s a pussification.

    Derek:  Scrum pussies.

    Clayton:  Right. It’s like, “Let’s be very gentle and let’s be very cautious of not making people feel bad,” that kind of thing. I agree that there’s a lot to said be for the feelings, the emotions, and the words that we use, but, at the same time, I don’t think that the “commitment” stuff is negative, necessarily. I don’t think that has to be a negative thing. I think that can be viewed as a positive thing.

    Roy:  I think that too. As far as the negative emotions of saying, “You have to get this done,” “Well, yeah, I committed to it. I said that I would get this done,” and whether you see that as negative or not, it shouldn’t be a negative thing. If I said I can get this done, then there shouldn’t be anything negative about me getting it done. That should be a positive thing.

    Derek:  I’m pretty trying to go back to my wife and say that I’m not really happy that we’re married and I made a commitment. I would like to forecast that we will be together for the next six to seven years…

    [laughter]

    Derek:  …and we can renegotiate another six to seven years…

    Jade:  …as more information becomes available.

    Derek:  …if we get more information.

    [laughter]

    Clayton:  I will say that, since I read the actual longer‑winded update about “order” versus “prioritize,” which we’re going to get to in a second, I will say I will withhold judgment on this one until we get the full explanation, but my gut feeling is that it’s what we’ve been talking about.

    Roy:  My other thing is one of the things that Derek mentioned when he was talking about the pussification of Scrum, where the idea of the commitment is that I say I’m going to get this done and commit to absolutely getting this done and locking the sprint. That’s my part of the deal.

    The other part of the deal is that I won’t get interrupted with any requests. That’s not really a sacrifice, but, if I don’t make that promise that I’m going to get something done, and if I don’t give something from myself, then why should the other people, why should stakeholders or product owners respect the fact that I have a locked‑in sprint? If I can change my mind halfway through, why can’t they?

    Drew:  Also, I think, with the word “commitment,” right, Clayton, you talked about how people might feel bad if they don’t get it done, or it’s the downer term. But still, I think, obviously, there are going to be times where you don’t reach your commitment, through whatever reason.

    But the fact that it is a commitment and they set it as a commitment, and then you didn’t hit it, that brings up a conversation: What causes you to not hit your commitment? And that brings up, maybe, an underlying issue: If you just say it’s a forecast, and, “Oh, we didn’t hit it. Oh, it’s OK, because it was a forecast, anyway,” then, maybe, the underlying issue of the real problem, “Why you didn’t hit your forecast or commitment”? It’s not going to be brought up.

    Roy:  Right. We’re almost getting into the wishy‑washy territory of having the commitment be the same thing as estimates, where you’re like, “OK. Well, we didn’t do this in twice the amount of time as the other tasks, so our estimates are wrong. Well, who cares about estimates”?

    In this case, they’re forecasts, but a forecast should be commitments, and they should be accurate. If they are wrong, we should do something about it.

    Derek:  Yeah. I think it is they’re trying to soften the language to change the emotional tone. On that level, I don’t have a huge problem with it, but I also think that it does fundamentally change the contract or the original intent. This really changes it more to, “Ah, we’re estimating what we can get done this week,” opposed to, “We’re going to get this done.”

    To me, one of the biggest things that I see people interested in adopting Scrum for is they want predictability in work, so that they can understand, as a sales team or as a CEO, how can I determine what the future of this company looks like based on the work that can be committed to. If it really becomes a super loosey‑goosey, forecasty type of thing, the predictability goes way, way down, because nobody trusts a forecast, especially when it’s really seen as a forecast.

    Maybe over time, if you hit your forecast considerably and do that, then maybe it is something that people feel can be predictable. But I don’t know. I’m a little torn over this. I think they’re going a little bit too wishy‑washy for my liking.

    Jade:  Let’s keep moving down. Scrum does not mandate a burndown chart to monitor progress. Scrum requires only that remaining work for a sprint is summed and known on a daily basis. Trending toward completing the work of the sprint is maintained throughout the sprint.

    Roy:  OK. If you don’t want a burndown chart, you want to represent it using something else, whatever. That doesn’t bother me. I think it’s a good idea to have a burndown chart, but I don’t think that particular format needs to be the case. I like that it says how much work is left. It needs to be known every single day. That makes sense.

    Clayton:  I think they clarified this in some of the other documents where they wrote about the documentation. They say that they’ve tried to remove some of the tips and best practices, and they’re going to put those out as a separate document, so I think this is thinking that out.

    Jade:  So they’re just going to move to best practices.

    Clayton:  Right.

    Derek:  I think this is a case where they so specifically said everything that happens in a burndown chart that it almost makes it say, “Really, you have to do a burndown chart unless you can come up with a better way to achieve all the exact same objectives of a burndown chart,” which, to me, is a good way, I don’t think they’ve softened what they’re asking for. They’re just being more open to different ways to do it that they may not know today.

    Jade:  Let’s keep moving quickly through here. Release planning is a valuable thing to do when using Scrum, but isn’t required by Scrum itself.

    Clayton:  I think it falls in the same category.

    Jade:  The sprint backlog is the product backlog items selected for the sprint, plus a plan for delivering them. There is no longer a required concept of spring backlog items, although that technique can make a great plan. A self‑organizing development team always has a plan.

    Derek:  I think one of the clarifications here is that sprint backlog items is generally what I think a lot of teams call tasking. When you dig your stories from the backlog into the sprint backlog, the sprint backlog items are not the stories that you’ve selected from the backlog, moved into the sprint backlog, they’re actually the tasks for those stories, is my understanding of their original concept of a sprint backlog item.

    In this case, I think they’re saying, “It’s not necessary that you task out all of the details of the stories to do the work, but a good team has a plan for how they’re going to do the work.” I take that very similar to the burndown effect, where they’re saying, “You still have to have this element if you’re doing a good job, but we’re not going to say the tasking is necessarily the way that you do that.”

    Jade:  All right. Finally, the product backlog is ordered instead of prioritized, providing flexibility to the product owner to optimize value in his or her unique circumstances.

    Clayton:  When I read this one, I had the same reaction as the forecasting commitment. At first glance, it’s just semantics, where it’s like, if you were really taking to the letter of the law, and you were saying, “I have to prioritize these, and, to me, priority means the most important ones at the top and the least ones at the bottom, and there’s no other way I can do it,” I guess, if you really took it that way, and you’re really being pedantic about it, then yes, that’s what you would think.

    But I feel like you would be able to exercise some flexibility and say, “There’s some other ways.” This is more important, and I think they get into that with the blog post that they posted today about order, not prioritize, where they actually go into the details about this. I think they do a good job explaining why it really is just…they’re opening up the different ways that you could prioritize.

    Priority is not maybe the best way to do it, and there are lots of different ways to order a good backlog. You don’t necessarily have to order by ROI all the time. There’s some things that would be more valuable than others at different times, and there are a lot of different relationships that certain backlog items have.

    You have to look at them all together. I think the document they’ve put out since then has really explained what they mean by this, so I think it makes more sense. If this helps people to understand the intent or the meaning behind what it means to order or prioritize a backlog, I think it’s a good thing.

    Roy:  I agree. I’ve seen situations in the past where a product owner would go through, they’ll take 20 backlog items to go through, and 5 of them are priority one, 3 of them are priority two, and so on. Then they don’t think of it in terms of which one gets done first.

    They’re like, “This one is really important. This one is more important than all of these other ones, but these are all about equally important,” and, when we get into sprint planning, that makes things very difficult, because, then, when we start the week, they don’t know which ones to pull in.

    If you spend the time thinking about ahead of time, and the article that you mentioned talks about doing a bubble sort, where you take each story, you compare it to the one above and the one below, and say, “Is this one more important than this one”? Or, “Should this one be done first, or should the other one be done first”?

    If you go through and order the entire backlog that way, I think you’ll get a lot more value out of that than just assigning a priority number to each one.

    Derek:  Pussification of Scrum again.

    [laughter]

    Derek:  I think the problem is you’ve had 15 years or 10 years of, basically, poor definition of the word “priority” to product owners, probably from Scrum Masters or the development team, so everybody thinks of priority is low/medium/high, important/not important, critical…those are the words we think of when we think of priority.

    I don’t think that’s the definition of priority. I think priority can be one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, and, when somebody says, “One through five were all the same to me,” I can call bullshit. Do you want to be in fifth place or do you want to be in first place? Those are not the same things.

    You need to learn what is really number one, what is really number two, what is really number three, what is really number four…

    Roy:  I think that’s the order addresses. That’s less ambiguous than prioritize, because prioritize can mean different things to different people, but order is always the order that they are on the backlog.

    Derek:  I agree, but I also think it pulls out and also makes things a little bit less of a language do. Order doesn’t have nearly the urgency to being ordered. If you say, “Can you order those”? Yeah, you can order them, but is there an urgency to having them ordered?

    Where a priority gives to me the thing that is on the top of the order is more important than the thing on the bottom of the order. If I order something, I can reverse‑order something, and the most important thing then be on the bottom or top. When I call something a priority, I expect the thing on the top to be the most important.

    I think where they’ve gotten this muddy language is they’re like, “It’s by business value, or by this, and there are different ways you can prioritize, so we need to…” No. That’s not the fucking problem. I think that you can definitely prioritize by different things, and you can do that on a case‑by‑case basis.

    You can come in and you can prioritize one week based on business value, and, another week, you can base on customer demand, whatever. You’ve got the ability at the end of each increment to move this however you want. The problem is that they don’t want to talk about the real problem with the language, and that is that telling product owners that they may have to make hard decisions. You have to know, “Is this story more important than this story”?

    I think that most teams get away with letting product owners go, “Well, this block of things are all the same to me.” I don’t think calling it ordered is going to make that problem go away at all. I think it’s just going to compound it.

    Roy:  I think there’s a problem too even with they’re using the word “important.” I think Drew and I have had discussions on this in the past. Let’s say you have two items. One is pretty important, and I’ve got another one that’s about half as important, but it takes a fifth of the time to complete.

    When I’m talking about “important,” I mean it’s going to earn me a dollar value. The other one is going to earn me half the dollar value, but it’s also going to take one fifth of development time.

    Derek:  That’s why the product owner gets the big bucks. He has to make that decision to say which one is the one that needs to be done first: the one that takes longer but makes me more money, or the one that I can get done quicker and doesn’t make me as much money?

    Roy:  Or which ones I have are higher priority. I think “priority,” in this case, is a loaded word. That’s why I like the idea of doing it from order, like, “This one is first over the other one.”

    Derek:  How is calling it “priority” over “order” any different?

    Roy:  Because, even in the way that you described ‑‑ you said, “This one is more important than the other one” ‑‑ it’s not more important. It’s half as important. But it gets me money faster.

    Derek:  How is it not more important? If I want it done first, it’s more important.

    Roy:  I don’t think that’s necessarily the case.

    Jade:  Priority doesn’t mean importance either.

    Drew:  Right. People attach maybe money value with importance. “This makes me twice as money. It’s going to be more important. It’s going to be more priority.” But that’s not necessarily the case.

    Clayton:  Yeah. The problem I have is I think a lot of the reasons they give for why they switch order is they talk about how there’s so much complexity about, to quote this article, knowledge of evolving market windows, market conditions, engineering dependencies, knowledge of business.

    There are all these things that go into it. I feel like, if you’re the kind of person that really understands those things, where you could make use of this concept, the actual paradigm difference in ordering and priority, if you actually understand all those things, I don’t think you get hung up on the word “priority.”

    I don’t think you say, “I have all this knowledge, I’m a very intelligent person, and I understand all the nuances, but the word says, ‘priority,’ so I have to do it by priority.” I don’t see that happening, so it seems almost meaningless at that point.

    Roy:  But with the beginners, just people first coming into it, I think they do get hung up on the word “priority,” and I think that “ordering” would set them on the right path quicker than using the word “priority.”

    Clayton:  But I think the point they’re making is that you can order a lot of different ways. I think you can prioritize a lot of different ways. In the product owner training that I attended, there were lots of different ways to prioritize. It wasn’t that you just prioritize by one…

    Roy:  It wasn’t just alphabetical.

    Clayton:  It wasn’t just you prioritize by ROI. There are lots of different ways to prioritize. I think, if you understand that and you realize it’s not just by what’s most important or just ROI, then it’s meaningless at that point.

    Roy:  But I think it’s harder to get people to actually understand that and internalize that.

    Clayton:  Yeah. Had they called this “order” originally, and then now they’re changing to “priority,” I guess we would be just having this exact same conversation.

    Derek:  Here’s my problem with it: it’s the definition of why they’re making the change. If they said, “We’re going from ‘priority’ to ‘order’ because we feel “priority” is a loaded word that confuses new product owners,” I would be totally supportive. That’s not what they’re saying.

    They’re saying, “We changed from ‘priority’ to ‘order’ because you can’t prioritize things by different things.” That’s [bleep] . I’m sorry. I’m sorry, flubber. You’re a [bleep]. Now, if you want to say that you changed it because the language is confusing, I absolutely buy that. “Priority” is absolutely a loaded word. But that’s not what they’re saying. I disagree with their reason for the change.

    [laughter]

    Jade:  All right. Hold on that wonderful note. Let’s wrap this thing up. Let’s take the next 30 seconds or so and just talk about what are your feelings overall with this change, what are you most afraid of. 10 seconds each, tell me what’s you’ve got.

    Clayton:  All right. I think it’ll generate a lot of discussion on social networks, podcasts, and things like that, and, in six months, it’ll be totally forgotten.

    Roy:  I think that generating the discussion is a good thing to bring visibility to the Scrum and agile. The only element on this that I’m really concerned about is the term “forecast” instead of “commitment.” The rest, I’m either impartial or I actually prefer.

    Derek:  I love the fact that they’re actually making change for a framework that’s all about, and “Inspect and Adapt” has not changed much for 10 years, so I cannot give you credit for having the balls to make change.

    [laughter]

    Derek:  The thing that concerns me the most is the comment that says that we have worked “closely with the community,” and they name two people that they’ve worked within the community. I’m sorry, this community is now tens or hundreds of thousands of people. The way you approached change is probably not the best.

    Drew:  Yeah. The only thing that I’m really fearful of is the “commitment” versus “forecast” change. I think that “commitment” is a good, solid word, and I would like to hear people use that.

    Jade:  All right. Thanks a lot with that. We will wrap up this ScrumCast. Thanks for listening.

    The post Episode #26 – Reviewing the New Edition of the SCRUM Guide appeared first on Rails 3 respond_to Default http://integrumtech.com/2011/08/rails-3-respond_to-default/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/08/rails-3-respond_to-default/#respond Tue, 23 Aug 2011 16:01:26 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5636 This morning Derek and I were using the new respond_to and respond_with in a Rails 3 application. We noticed that when a user clicked on …

    The post Rails 3 respond_to Default appeared first on using the new respond_to and respond_with in a Rails 3 application. We noticed that when a user clicked on a link in Outlook a new Internet Explorer window would open with a prompt to download a file instead of rendering the page as we expected.

    In our rails log we found that the request was being processed as:

    Processing by FooController#index as

    We would have expected to see:

    Processing by FooController#index as HTML

    At the top of our controller we saw that our respond_to was defined as:

    respond_to :json, :html

    We found that when the request type was missing, the first option was being used. In our case this was JSON. When we changed the respond_to call to list :html first the page was rendered as HTML like we expected.

    Moral of the story, order matters.

    The post Rails 3 respond_to Default appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5569 Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors, Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Drew LeSueur, Chris Coneybeer and Jade Meskill discuss John Hagel’s article on “The Trust Paradox“. Patrick Leonici’s …

    The post Episode #25 – The Trust Paradox appeared first on The Trust Paradox“.

    • Patrick Leonici’s Five Dysfunctions of Team
    • Trust is important
    • Way we try to build trust is backwards
    • Perfection not the way to trust
    • Mike Cohn’s pair programming story (as recounted over a few beers)
    • Availability to express vulnerability
    • Never let them see you sweat?
    • Expose strength, show weakness.
    • Vulnerability unlocks creativity and bonds the team
    • Climbing corporate ladder encourages for self preservation
    • Lead by example.. Be transparent to others..
    • People believe success is in their ability instead of increasing the ability of those around them.
    • Management needs to model open behavior and reward authentic behavior
    • Team members be a beacon of humanity for your peers

    Transcript

    Roy van de Water:  Hello, and welcome to another ScrumCast. I’m Roy van de Water.

    Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew LeSueur.

    Chris Coneybeer:  I’m Chris Coneybeer.

    Jade Meskill:  I’m Jade Meskill.

    Roy:  A few weeks ago, Derek posted an article by John Hagel on the Trust Paradox. Derek, do you want to explain why you presented that to all of us?

    Derek:  Absolutely. When we deal with teams and we talk about teams quite a bit. If you look at Patrick Lencioni’s “Five Dysfunctions of a Team,” trust is one of the pillars or the key elements to building a team. We see all the time people talking, “Yeah, yeah we need trust,” and even “Oh! Yeah, yeah our team’s got real high level of trust.”

    Then you see all sorts of behaviors that are entirely counter intuitive to how people who trust each other will really behave. I think the article really did a good job of talking about that everybody acknowledges that trust is important for team building. The way that most teams go about trying to build trust with each other, is the exact opposite way in which you would build trust.

    He kind of comes up with the term, it’s kind of paradox, that the things that people are doing that they think are building trust within their team mates, are actually destroying trust in a much more rapid pace. I thought it was relevant to say, “I think that the biggest part of software development with Scrum, is building team and how teams interact.” Trust is probably one of the biggest values that we have to deal with in being successful or what we do.

    Roy:  What are the values that people feel builds trust, and how do they conflict with what actually builds trust?

    Chris:  In reading the article I thought one of the things that was pretty interesting is we talk about teams nowadays, and the fact that too many times people think they have to be perfect. People think that you can’t have flaws. You can’t have issues, and when you are trying to put on this perfect face all the time, and you’re trying to act like all your skills are perfect. You don’t want to show you have deficiencies with the team.

    That is one of the points that is counterproductive to trust, because you’re hiding something. If you want to trust somebody you can’t just have trust and parts of relationship. You have to have trust in the relationship as a whole, and that’s for the positives and negatives. Look at any relationships that you have, be it a marriage, be it a team, somebody you pick up on the street, whatever. If you want to build trust with them, you have to do on at all levels of that relationship.

    Derek:  I think one of the best stories I heard about this, we were talking at one of the scrum gatherings about peer programming. Mike Conen mentioned that he was one of the first people to start with one of the peer programming, and the story of how we got there was kind of funny. That was, “I had been working with one of the big five consulting firms,” or I can’t remember the exact place he was working.

    He took an assignment that was all code and C, and he said I really have never had really coded in C before, “But I had kind of done some C in school. I figured I could probably fake my way through it, and learn over it. I really wanted to do that particular work.” He said, “I flew out there, and got in there, and was really nervous that I was going to be ousted that they would realize I didn’t know C.”

    “The next day another guy that was joining the team from the company came and flew in. We started talking about the work and push came to shove and I felt vulnerable for a minute. I went ahead and I told them, ‘I just want to be totally honest with you, I really don’t know C, but I’m a bright guy and I really think I can get up to speed. I kind of fluffed a little bit my experience on this but I’m sure you guide me, and you’ll never know the difference.’ The other guy said ‘Oh, shit I did the same fucking thing, we’re screwed.'” They said, “How about this, every time were working on code we’re working on the exact same piece of code, so that if we completely fuck this up they have to fire us both. They won’t know who to fire, because we’re both doing the same thing.” He said, “I’m sure we invented peer programming because of that.”

    I think that you know why it’s a funny story. I think it’s a perfect evidence of how when you actually build trust, and are vulnerable, which I think is one of the key components of trust, to be able to say, “Hey, I just want to let you know I’m not really confident in this, but I’m willing to make up deficiencies, and work my best to get the best out of this,” and somebody else is able to make the same thing.

    They came up with a solution that ultimately was better for everybody. Meaning the project was entirely successful they both really got up to speed with C, best of all outcomes. Whereas if both of them were to hold up and try to lay blame, “Oh, well, he doesn’t know what he’s doing,” or whatever, the project would have failed. It just would have been disaster across the board. I think too often teams there’s no availability to express vulnerability that actually allows for good solutions to happen, and good bonding to happen.

    Jade:  By saying that, you’re going against tons of management advice, and personal growth advice. You’re supposed to never let them see you sweat, and always project confidence, and be the big alpha dog. What you’re telling me now is I’ve got to be this wussy guy, who lets everybody know and cries whenever something goes wrong, right?

    Derek:  I pretty much carry a binky and a blanket wherever I go.

    Jade:  Oh, OK.

    Roy:  I thought I’d seen you with that. I was wondering what that was for.

    Drew:  One of the things I thought that was interesting in the article where they talk about the kind of thing you were talking about, Jade, was built on how corporations treated branding for so long. It was, you only show your strength and you hide your weaknesses and act like they don’t exist. That’s how people treated their personal brands.

    You look at any resume, most people look at resumes, and if they look at their own resume they think, “Oh, this is all great stuff,” and they read someone else’s resume and they’re like, “Man, this guy is so full of BS.”

    I think what Derek’s getting at is the idea that we need to be able to expose our strengths, and by exposing our strengths and acknowledging where we have deficiencies, like what Chris was saying, that’s the new way to be confident, and project confidence and do the right thing, and make progress.

    Jade:  What you’re saying is when somebody asks me what my greatest weakness is in an interview I shouldn’t say that I work too hard.

    Drew:  Yeah, I interview at companies where people ask stupid interview questions.

    Roy:  I feel like, intellectually, there are at least a few people out there who know that but don’t act on it because it’s very difficult. It seems to go against human nature. Why do you think that is?

    Chris:  I think part of it is, one, it’s against human nature, but also, take a look at the training we had. Take a look at the way that we’ve been raised in a lot of corporations. We’re on an engagement right now where I’m seeing patterns that I used to work and live in. I worked and lived in this non‑trust culture, and now I have a level of trust with my team and my family here to be able to say that…

    Jade:  There’s the crying again.

    Chris:  …to be able to say that. I can stand in front of you guys now and say, “I suck at this,” and somebody will be willing to help stand me up. I can ask stupid questions and people are willing to help me, because we realize that we’re building on one another, but also, you don’t turn around and go, what a dumbass for that.

    Where before, in the corporate world, you were treated like that. I think that goes back to, how are we teaching people? What is excelling? What is making you different than somebody else? Sometimes that’s all about finding your secret project, and working on it, and hiding it from everybody instead of making sure that you’re doing something as a team and learning together.

    We’re seeing where we have silos right now and some of the information on our current engagement, and there are trust issues at the very bottom of that. I think that if these people were able to trust and open up a little bit more instead of worrying about somebody else looking at them and going, “You suck at this,” they have so much knowledge that they could bring together, they could move together. They could move forward so much faster.

    Derek:  Yeah, I think a lot of this, too, is fear‑driven, fear‑driven and peer‑culture driven. What I mean that is, I believe it’s Ken Robinson talks a little bit about this. If you take a five‑year‑old into a crowd of people, and you tell them to dance or to perform, they’ll do so, no problem. If everybody in the room starts cracking up, they’ll probably get even more crazy with whatever they’re doing, because they’re getting a reaction.

    If you take a 35‑year‑old person, and put them in a room of strangers and say dance, they’re like, “No way.” Even if they did, if somebody criticized it, they would stop immediately and totally shut down, because of response.

    I think we have the same self‑preservation mode, this mechanism that says, I don’t want to be vulnerable, because if I’m vulnerable to my peers, and my peers react in a negative way, I have no other way to deal with it, and so my way to deal with it is to shelter it or camouflage the weakness, so that I’m not attacked in that area.

    I think from Robinson’s perspective, a lot of that’s the heart of where creativity is. When you’re in a mode where you’re able to say, I’m going to try things that people might laugh at me for, is when you have the highest propensity to do the most magnificent things. When you’re operating in a mode that, “I don’t want to do anything that anybody could possibly laugh at or criticize at,” you’re actually shutting down. You’re limiting yourself severely.

    I think that teams and organizations fall into that trap, where they’re so concerned about looking bad to each other, or being laughed at that they, basically, strike out all ability to do any kind of innovation, or do any kind of really gel at that next level. I think it completely impacts the way they’re able to interact and be vulnerable with one another.

    Clayton:  I agree with that. When that is the status quo when you’re working with a team like that or organization like that, it’s a perfectly rational thing to have that behavior.

    If my performance review, my pay raises, how I’m viewed on this team, and my advancement in this corporation are determined by my strengths and weaknesses compared to people at the same level. It’s perfectly reasonable to say, “OK, I’m going to hide all my weaknesses. I’m going to have my secret project, and try and make everyone else look bad.”

    That’s a very rational thing to do.

    Roy:  If you’re in that type of situation where you have a culture of people that are throwing each other under the bus, and trying to make themselves look better. Drew, if you were working in an environment where everybody was throwing each other under the bus, what would be the best way to approach that, and try to rectify that type of culture?

    Drew:  Showing an example of openness would probably be the best way to do it. Be the one where if you make a mistake, “Hey, it was my fault. I did this. Can you help me figure this out?” and pull in another teammate or something.

    Jade:  Then you’re fired, and no problem.

    Drew:  Maybe I’m wrong on that, but I think people will see that. If everybody’s throwing each other under the bus at a corporation, people are going to notice. Higher ups are going to know that, “OK, they’re always just blaming each other.”

    They’ll probably take a dose of transparency with happiness, and they’ll probably embrace that, and enjoy that. It’ll be refreshing to them. That’s probably how I’d do it.

    Chris:  Hope the guy throwing you under the bus is your manager.

    Jade:  One of the mistakes a lot of people make is they believe that their success is hinging on their ability to perform some skill to the best of its ability, not realizing that what’s more important, especially to management, is your ability to make everyone around you better.

    If you can rise to the top as leading that type of a change, people respect you much more for that than your ability to be the best .net developer out there, when it comes to this particular niche technology, “I’m so awesome, and I can code anything.”

    In a team situation, it’s really more about what you’re contributing to the team. If you can make everyone on your team at that same level, then that’s way more impressive, way more valuable. That’s going to build a lot of trust by investing back into the people around you.

    Derek:  There’s two segments to it. The first segment is, if I’m a CEO or a manger that’s trying to get a team to have trust, you’re spot on, Drew, that there’s really two ways to do that. One is, to model it. Be open and transparent, and really model that to the team, and look at how you’re incentivizing the team.

    Whether that be through their performance appraisal, whether that be through how you articulate and express that you’re happy with them. Make sure that you’re reinforcing behaviors of vulnerability, transparency, and authenticity, and not performance.

    You’re putting more reward towards people modeling a value system of trust than you are whether they’re succeeding or not. As a team member who wants to create a more trust‑filled team where you aren’t getting management support, I would say the same thing. It’s really about modeling.

    I would also say, one of the things that Hagel talked about in his article that is totally relevant is, for 30 or 40 years, brands got away with being absolutely inauthentic in masking what they were horrible at, and highlighting what they were great at. Everybody believed that.

    We’ve come to a point now that, once you spill 100 million gallons of oil into the ocean, it doesn’t matter what you do to try to PR that up, people know that that PR is bullshit.

    Anybody who’s been the workforce for any amount of time, any amount of time being twelve months or more, knows that there’s so much bullshit in teams that they know when people are glossing, when people are highlighting the right things, and pushing the bad stuff under the table.

    It’s such a breath of fresh air when a team member comes in, and is authentic, helpful, and vulnerable that it becomes really hard to ignore that. You earn the respect of management and of your peers so much quicker, because you stand out so much more than everybody else around you. It’s almost contagious.

    That’s the hopeful message in this because, right now, most teams are fundamentally broken. It only takes one person within a team to start modeling this for it to become contagious, and start to infect the team and organizations involved with the team.

    Roy:  That’s it for today’s ScrumCast. Thanks for joining us.

    The post Episode #25 – The Trust Paradox appeared first on Episode #23 – Agile Principles Seen Through Paintball http://integrumtech.com/2011/08/scrumcast-23-agile-principles-seen-through-paintball/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/08/scrumcast-23-agile-principles-seen-through-paintball/#respond Thu, 04 Aug 2011 12:00:16 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5566 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Jade Meskill talk about an experience playing paintball as a team and how it relates to …

    The post Episode #23 – Agile Principles Seen Through Paintball appeared first on Episode #23 – Agile Principles Seen Through Paintball appeared first on What Can Paintball Teach Us About Team Work? http://integrumtech.com/2011/07/what-can-paintball-teach-us-about-team-work/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/07/what-can-paintball-teach-us-about-team-work/#respond Mon, 25 Jul 2011 16:38:46 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5520 Last month Integrum decided to do some team building and have some fun. Our minister of fun, Roy van de Water, set up a game …

    The post What Can Paintball Teach Us About Team Work? appeared first on

    We showed up to pack of pre-teens with custom, top of the line gear. We could smell our asses being slaughtered before we even took the field. With that, guns were loaded and the six of us were put up against the six of them. Game 1 was completely chaotic. We were doing our best to not get hit and just squeezing the trigger whenever something moved. Somehow, we ended up winning with two of our guys left standing. It was ugly and we were out of breath.

    We switched sides of the field and a funny thing happened. We had a retrospective on the match without even realizing it. We decided for game 2 that we would pair. We quickly grabbed a buddy and the whistle blew. We ended up losing. We headed off the field for our first break. We all admitted that though we were pairing, we were not a team, but rather three individual pairs. Before taking the field for game 3, we decided to keep pairing but added some general strategy on how we could be more of a unit. We won, leaving two guys on the field. For the first time we no longer felt panicked and rushed.

    Before starting game 4, we made major adjustments and defined the goal for each of the pairs to be considered success. Not only was movement of each route defined and the roles to navigate it, but they were done in 20-yard increments. We were much more paced and won, leaving 3 members on the field. This time during break, we reloaded and started talking about how we were becoming more of a team and the opponent was starting to fall a part, becoming less of team.

    Heading back in for Game 5, we had heated discussion on how to agressively challenge the target. Each pair defined its own objective and coordinated it back with the team. Most notably, each pair was verbally talking the entire time while advancing on the target. The target was taken and 4 members were left standing on the field. At this point we were dying to improve. We could feel that our team work was making us not only tough to beat, but tough to get a kill against.

    Before heading into Game 6 we did an assessment of the other teams technique and tactics. We reviewed that our cover fire had been weak because of a poor choice of angles and bad initial first steps. Each pair set a new objective. At this point we had full trust in each other to cover and communicate. This trust allowed us to be beyond aggressive. We grabbed the target, taking each of their team members out at a 10′ range. All of our team members were still standing untouched. Complete and utter dominance.

    So what changed between game 1 and game 6? We became a highly functioning self-organizing team that trusted each other.

    How did we get there?
    Mini retrospectives between each game.
    Finding weaknesses to improve and focusing on fixing them.
    Iterating towards a better outcome even when successful.

    What did we learn?
    Trust within a team allows them to tackle problems more aggressively because they are less afraid of what happens if they fail.
    Decisive victories when up against tough challenges strengthens a team.

    Ultimately excellence is hard work. Teams willing to not settle for winning but seeking decisive victory make adjustments and build one another up to achieve it.

    The best part was at lunch afterwards. The entire team was so chatty in line, having a great time and joking so much that the owner of the restaurant asked if we had been friends a long time because they hadn’t seen a group of people get along so well in so long.

    The post What Can Paintball Teach Us About Team Work? appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5514 Integrum co-founder and self-proclaimed Pragmatic Idealist, Derek Neighbors, has been accepted to speak at Agile 2011 in Salt Lake City next month. The presentation, ‘There …

    The post Agile 2011 Presentation – ‘There is No Spoon’ appeared first on Agile 2011 in Salt Lake City next month.

    The presentation, ‘There is No Spoon: When Agile Becomes One with the World of Work’, is part of the New Horizons & New Voices stage and is scheduled for August 10th at 11:00am.

    Derek’s talk addresses the failure of many to apply the principles outlined in the Agile Manifesto to entire organizations, seeing the values as applicable only to software and customers. His presentation will encourage attendees to see Agile as it applies to entire communities, systems and society, collaborating towards a common purpose.

    The post Agile 2011 Presentation – ‘There is No Spoon’ appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5510 Chris Coneybeer, Roy vandeWater, Derek Neighbors and Drew LeSueur discuss reasons why enterprises seem so hungry for documentation artifacts. Accountability Requirements Cover your ass Avoiding …

    The post Episode #22 – Why Enterprises Crave Documentation Artifacts appeared first on Episode #22 – Why Enterprises Crave Documentation Artifacts appeared first on Episode #21 – Is It Responsible to Not Test? http://integrumtech.com/2011/07/scrumcast-21-is-it-responsible-to-not-test/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/07/scrumcast-21-is-it-responsible-to-not-test/#respond Thu, 07 Jul 2011 12:00:11 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5506 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill, Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Chris Coneybeer have a conversation on when if ever it is responsible to not test. Obie Blog Post …

    The post Episode #21 – Is It Responsible to Not Test? appeared first on Episode #21 – Is It Responsible to Not Test? appeared first on Episode #20 – What’s Most Valuable in Agile? http://integrumtech.com/2011/06/scrumcast-20-whats-most-valuable-in-agile/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/06/scrumcast-20-whats-most-valuable-in-agile/#respond Thu, 30 Jun 2011 12:00:36 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5503 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Drew LeSueur, Roy van de Water, Chris Coneybeer talk about which practice in agile has the most initial value. Retrospectives Pairing Continuous Integration …

    The post Episode #20 – What’s Most Valuable in Agile? appeared first on Episode #20 – What’s Most Valuable in Agile? appeared first on Episode #19 – Vision http://integrumtech.com/2011/06/scrumcast-19-vision/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/06/scrumcast-19-vision/#respond Thu, 23 Jun 2011 12:00:56 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5500 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Drew LeSueur talk about what vision means to the team. There’s always money in the banana …

    The post Episode #19 – Vision appeared first on Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Derek Neighbors and Drew LeSueur talk about what vision means to the team.

    • There’s always money in the banana stand
    • Linked to purpose
    • Why it’s so important
    • Shared vision unifies the team
    • Decision making is easier with vision
    • Vision plus implementation is magic
    • Cost of misalignment

    The post Episode #19 – Vision appeared first on Episode #18 – Cost of Interruptions http://integrumtech.com/2011/06/scrumcast-18-cost-of-interruptions/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/06/scrumcast-18-cost-of-interruptions/#respond Thu, 16 Jun 2011 12:05:53 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5497 Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Chris Coneybeer and Derek Neighbors talk about the cost of interruptions to teams and organizations. What is an interruption? …

    The post Episode #18 – Cost of Interruptions appeared first on Jade Meskill, Roy van de Water, Chris Coneybeer and Derek Neighbors talk about the cost of interruptions to teams and organizations.

    • What is an interruption?
    • Culture of interruptions
    • How does it effect prioritization?
    • Planning impossibilities
    • It has to be on fire to get done
    • It kills teams
    • Poor decision making
    • It’s contagious
    • Loss of innovation
    • Balloons for everyone
    • Solutions

    Integrum

    The post Episode #18 – Cost of Interruptions appeared first on SQL Server, Rails 3, Ruby 1.9, oh my! http://integrumtech.com/2011/06/sql-server-rails-3-ruby-1-9-oh-my/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/06/sql-server-rails-3-ruby-1-9-oh-my/#comments Thu, 02 Jun 2011 23:43:23 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5491 If you are trying to connect to a SQL Server database using Rails 3, ActiveRecord, and Ruby 1.9.2 and you are ready to stab yourself …

    The post SQL Server, Rails 3, Ruby 1.9, oh my! appeared first on TinyTDS and make all your worries disappear. Trust us, it’s for the best.

    The post SQL Server, Rails 3, Ruby 1.9, oh my! appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5479 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water, Michael Vizdos and Jade Meskill talk about the cost of change when implementing Agile in an organization. Individual, Team, Organization …

    The post Episode #17 – The Cost of Change appeared first on Clayton Lengel-ZigichDerek NeighborsRoy van de Water, Michael Vizdos and Jade Meskill talk about the cost of change when implementing Agile in an organization.

    • Individual, Team, Organization
    • Human Resource priorities
    • Rate of change
    • Performance reviews
    • Emotional response
    • Personnel turnover
    • Conflict
    • Champions

    Transcript

    Clayton:  Welcome to another episode of the Scrumcast. I am Clayton [?]

    Ray Van Norter:  I’m Ray Van Norter.

    Jade Meskill:  Jade Meskill.

    Derek Neighbors:  I’m Derek Neighbors.

    [laughter]

    Mike Finnister:  I am Mike Finnister.

    Jade Meskill:  We have Derek and Mike on Skype with us.

    Clayton:  Today we are going to be talking about the cost of change, when I hear that I think of certain things and I am sure you guys think of other things. I am just curious Derek, from your perspective what is the general definition of that so we can get started.

    Derek:  Change or the cost of it?

    Clayton:  What do you mean when you say the cost of change? Who are you talking about and who is involved?

    Derek:  When I am thinking of this, I think of it both on an individual level, I’m thinking at a team level and an organization level, so I think that a lot of times developers or managers might say, “Hey I really want my team to do Scrum because we’re going to get all these benefits,” and they don’t think about the ramifications that’d happen when they do that. A number of things change whether you implement para‑programming, whether you have a wide open work‑space.

    I remember one of the first things to change at Integrum when we really started going full bore is, we went away from personal desks and went to paring station, and just the ramifications of people not having somewhere to put some their personal things, and some of their emotional baggage that came out of that that we had to deal with, was certainly something we never even considered as being one of the byproducts or the problems with that.

    Derek:  What happens to HR when you have totally cross‑functional teams and they’re completely dependent on a job title to determine how to pay somebody or to determine how much square footage they get as an employee. I’m a CEO and now I’ve got an actual team that’s doing an implementation that is starting to expose problems with maybe the way I incentivize my sales people, is actually damaging the organization and now I have to think about how I compensate sales people to be different so that they can be a better part of the whole organization. To me it’s what are those elements of change and what can one really start to expect and how you cope with that.

    Clayton:  Mike is someone whose maybe experienced some more of this stuff in a large organization. Kind of like what Derek was talking about, where you maybe have a group of people that are cross‑functional and it’s hard, murky water to determine pay scales and bonus programs and those kind of things. What are some patterns you’ve seen, or some things where people get it wrong?

    Mike:  A lot of times they don’t involve HR right away. Remember HR in a lot of large enterprise organizations have very different priorities than this little scrum team. Maybe that’s starting to take hold.

    You really have to start to get on their radar early, and often, and understand that any kind of changes are going to be maybe years away. Being able to get HR on board is especially important. Especially when you’re talking about the matrixed organizations where you have scrum teams working in large waterfall projects.

    Clayton:  You mentioned getting HR involved. There are a lot of times where I think a lot of companies have slow moving HR departments. Or just in general there’s some red tape and bureaucracy. How does that contrast with the way that we think of Agile and the way we think of making change, and implementing things quickly and iterating and those things when the typical life cycle of doing almost anything is usually much longer than, say, a sprint?

    Mike:  Part of that involves really, again, getting people on board. Normally when I start teams in large organizations I’ll let them know that they’re probably going to take a hit on their performance evaluations. Like, one in the first year. Because now they’re not being specialized working as cross functional team members, and all of a sudden as a tester, let’s say as a role, they’re being compared to other testers within the functional organization.

    With the traditional, “Do you play well with other teams, do you have your nice power point presentations, do you do your executive exposure, do you play nice with others, do you have work on 20 projects at once?” You don’t rank that high against other testers that you’re being evaluated against. So being open and honest about this is really important.

    Clayton:  Jade and Derek, as far as the Integrum we have maybe more feedback than a lot of organizations from the management to the employee level just because we’re so flat, but when you have a traditional organization that wants to do performance reviews like Mike mentioned, and they have a very set way of doing those things and mentioning that stuff, I think one of maybe the benefits of Agile you could get into is you could say there’s extra feedback. You know where you are a lot of the time and those kind of things. What’s the reconciliation between those? The traditional personnel review and that kind of constant feedback and being part of a team, not necessarily an individual anymore?

    Derek:  So I think there’s a multiple problem. So one is, is the content of the actual performance review relevant anymore? Meaning usually HR has a fairly good amount of weight that they’re allowed to put into how you structure your performance review, and it’s fairly standard to‑the‑book type of format. When you start to talk about being on an Agile team, it’s really more about values, principles, and goals and a lot less about individual duties and what your job is specifically. So a lot of times you don’t have an actual performance review that matches what you’re doing.

    Two other problems I really see with the performance reviews are that they incentivize the individual instead of incentivize the team, which is obviously fairly contradictory to Agile methodologies where it’s really about the team instead of the individual. Then lastly is I think a lot of things that go along with performance evaluations deal with ranking employees and pitting this person against that person. They actually create mistrust within a team.

    Derek:  So the best I would do if I’m in a situation would be to try to hold reviews or have the discussions that are much more honest, much more true, outside of the performance review and then fill out whatever performance review is necessary to turn into HR to placate them and congruently be trying to get HR to change their practice so that they’re more in line with being an Agile organization as opposed to being the dinosaur organization.

    Clayton:  I agree with what you’re saying, Derek, but I also think that we do need to have some mechanism of dealing with the individual as well. There are a lot of ramifications that a poorly performing or a bad fit can have on the whole team. So creating those mechanisms that can deal with the individual behavior and I think tailoring the reviews and the feedback to the very specific individual person at that level is good as long as you are also dealing with, like you said, more of the team context as well.

    I think somewhere is a balance between those two aspects. You can’t completely forsake the individual for the team or vice versa.

    Derek:  So I think to me where the problem comes in is that most performance reviews are structured towards the skill that you do, and I think that’s a bad way to do it. So if you’re monitoring me for how good of a software developer I am and it has to do with the amount of code I’m producing or the number of commits and, I don’t want to say necessary metrics but, things related specifically to code, I don’t know if that’s a good representation of whether I’m a good individual for this team.

    I think it’s Tom Lister. One of the things that they did when they looked at a number of teams in writing their book “PeopleWare” is they asked, “Who do you want to be on your team, and why did you want that person to be on your team?” In almost every organization there was at least one person that was on every single successful project and that, when asked, they were deemed one of the most valuable people on each one of those projects.

    Derek:  But when they asked the people why, nobody could put their finger on it. I think what starts to happen is if you have a review that is simply a skill set, are you good binary at this task, yes or no?

    Sometimes, you rule out the best people because the best people that make teams successful, are key people that make teams successful, are the people that enable other people to do their best work. I think that, yes, you do need to take things at an individual level and review somebody individually.

    But, I think, we need to get to the point where we’re evaluating people individually on how they adhere to the team’s values and how they adhere to the team’s principles, not to specific skills or tasks. Meaning that most people that want somebody off the team do not want somebody off the team because they think they do a bad job. They want them off the team because they think they are a bad fit for the team.

    Jade:  I agree.

    Roy:  Because, when they are fit for the team, they’ll figure out ways to help that person become confident in the area that they need to be.

    Jade:  I totally agree. I guess I was going under the assumption that you were measuring and judging the individual on the proper things. I think that’s a good point to point that out specifically.

    Clayton:  Roy is someone who has been helping another team kind of adopt some of these Agile principles and things. What are some of the things that you’ve experienced in terms of the cost of changing, people that have been affected and what’s kind of happening there?

    Roy:  What I’ve been kind of seeing is more of the social costs of change or the emotional costs of change is that when you’re restructuring and trying to adopt the Agile process, there are times when you’re going to have to have conversations in which two people are going to go into the conversation and either one person is going to have to change their way of doing things completely or one of the two has to leave.

    I think that’s a very difficult conversation to go into and that’s a significant cost of change that I don’t think a lot of people necessarily think about when they are going in to doing an adoption like this. They are going in to it thinking it’s going to be great, but then, there’s going to be heads bumping and people are going to have to make a decision on if they want to adapt or leave the company or whatever they want to do.

    Mike:  We actually do find that there is, and I’m not sure where this statistic came from, between 15 and 25 percent turnover when you start to actually implement any kind of change like Scrum.

    Clayton:  Is that because Scrum doesn’t leave a lot of room to avoid the fierce conversations that need to be had?

    Mike:  Yeah, you’ve got to have those difficult conversations and some people do not want to do that. It is a significant cost of change.

    Clayton:  That’s not even on an individual employee level or the developer level, there are managers that don’t want to deal with that either or that get totally freaked out by having to deal with this conflict.

    Mike:  Absolutely.

    Clayton:  That’s something I hear, “Oh, we’re fighting all the time. It’s horrible. We used to get along. Why is all this happening?” It’s really that you weren’t really getting along, but everything was so shallow and surface level, that there was really no room for conflict. Now that you’re digging in and really trying to work together and get better, that’s where you’re starting to uncover a lot of this conflict.

    Mike:  Yeah, like when they’re going through that whole Bruce Tuckman model of forming, storming, norming and performing.

    Clayton:  Yep.

    Mike:  A lot of times, organizations are stuck in storming and it’s just normal.

    Mike:  Yeah.

    Jade:  They shy away from the storming and they don’t just push through to get to the norming part of it.

    Clayton:  I think a lot of times, they don’t even realize that they are in the storming.

    Mike:  Exactly.

    Clayton:  One thing, Jade, that you’ve mentioned before is that, you kind of gave an anecdote about, the company wanted to adopt some Agile principle, but they couldn’t get their risk management software to work with the new way of doing things. I would imagine that there are a lot of companies out there, big and small, that have invested a significant amount of time and money and resources into getting some third party tools or processes or anything like that.

    How do we deal with, when we say, “Well, we’re going to get this new process. This new Agile process,” and that makes, maybe it invalidates or makes this other thing you’ve already spent a bunch of time and money on not effective or useless?

    Is that something that you think would be a total barrier? A no go?

    Jade:  I think that’s pretty scary for a lot of people, not even just in the software and the tools, but there might be entire departments that need to completely change. So if you have the QA department and the PMO and risk assessment and all of these people that are in these gigantic silos and now, you’re telling me that they all need to be cross‑functional and I need to completely change the structure of our organization to deal with that. That’s a terrifying thing to deal with. Especially, to not know what the outcome of that will be.

    Mike:  On of the ways to really help get around this is to make sure you have some executive fire cover that is able to say, “OK, you know what, it’s a sunk cost. Let’s just do it and move on.” Because, you can’t really have that at like, especially the large companies, the director levels that are really competing against each other versus the vice presidents who have more of the strategic look. You need somebody high enough to go and say, “Let’s do it,” and make the call.

    Clayton:  In your experience, Mike, how often are you seeing that happen where somebody is bold enough to really give the teams enough runway and enough cover to at least attempt a successful change or implementation of Agile?

    Mike:  Very few. A lot of is really that at the highest level, they don’t really buy into it. So that could be a whole other conversation.

    Clayton:  That’s a good segue into the next podcast. I say thanks to everyone. I’m going to stop now.

    Jade:  Thank you.

    Mike:  Thank you.

    Clayton:  Thank you.

    The post Episode #17 – The Cost of Change appeared first on Episode #16 – Multiple vs Single Product Owner http://integrumtech.com/2011/05/scrumcast-16-multiple-vs-single-product-owner/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/05/scrumcast-16-multiple-vs-single-product-owner/#respond Thu, 26 May 2011 12:00:55 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5476 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Roy vandeWater and Drew LeSueur talk about the role of Product Owners. Is it necessary (to have a single product owner) Problems with …

    The post Episode #16 – Multiple vs Single Product Owner appeared first on Clayton Lengel-ZigichDerek NeighborsRoy vandeWater and Drew LeSueur talk about the role of Product Owners.

    • Is it necessary (to have a single product owner)
    • Problems with multiple product owners
    • Priorities
    • Who determines done
    • Proxy product owners
    • Accountability issues
    • Delegation of authority
    • Dealing with multiple products and a single development team

     Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another episode of “The Scrumcast.” I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Roy van de Water:  I’m Roy van de Water.

    Drew LeSueur:  I’m Drew LeSueur.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  And I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Derek:  What you are talking about today guys?

    Roy:  We are talking about the benefit and also the necessity of having a single product owner.

    Derek:  Is a single product owner really necessary?

    Roy:  I supposed it isn’t really necessary, but I certainly think it helps things a ton. A lot of times when you have multiple product owners on the scene, you get a lot of conflict of interest. You have one guy, who thinks his entire priority queue is the most important thing in the world and another guy, who thinks his priority queue is most important thing in the world.

    And you have to have somebody that ends up reconciling those two queues. Often times that ends up falling to the developer which really shouldn’t be his responsibility.

    Derek:  So is the number one reason that multiple product owners is a problem is one of priority? Meaning that four product owners, all four think their thing is the most important thing. They all have a number one thing in determining which one of the four number ones is really number one is the problem? Or are there other problems with having multiple product owners?

    Roy:  I think there’s a lot of other problems with it. I find that in my recent experience this has been the specific symptom that’s hurt me the most, but another huge issue to it is you don’t know who to go to for a particular issue. If something comes up, who do you talk to? Do you start tagging every story with one product owner or the other, and who decides when a certain piece of functionality is done?

    Derek:  Have you guys had any instance where a proxy product owner has been deemed for sub‑product owners? So maybe there are four product owners, and everybody agrees that that’s unilaterally a bad idea. So neutral product owners put in place to prioritize or speak on the behalf of the four other product owners. Have you seen that? If so, have you seen it work or what are some of the problems with it?

    Drew:  I think one of the problems with that is if you’re not talking to the source, then you don’t really get the same power or authority that the source will give you. So if I’m talking to a proxy, he might not understand it the same way that the actual real product owner understands it.

    So I’ve seen that, and I’ve seen it where when we are talking to the source, everything’s a whole lot clearer. You feel like you can really have the communication that’s needed to figure out what you need to do.

    Clayton:  When you think of the roles that are required for the product owner on the scrum team, when there’s a proxy product owner or more than one product owner, it gets really easy to skirt the responsibility that they have. So, maybe, the development team needs the product owner to do some interfacing with some stakeholders and prioritize the backlog, or do some backlog grooming, or whatever.

    But when there’s a proxy, it’s easy for them to say, “Well, I would love to do that for you, but I need to go talk to these three people and I can’t really do it.” Or if you have more than one product owner, then it’s like, “Well, that can be Joe’s job, I have more important things to do.” So, the responsibilities of the product owner get wishy‑washy, and some of that gets avoided.

    Roy:  I think, too, one to the defined responsibilities, for both product owners and scrum masters is to protect the development team from the stakeholders and all the people outside of the scrum team. I think that when you start making the stakeholders the product owners themselves, technically they’re not outside the scrum team. Now you’re having all of this outside interaction coming in and interfering with the development team as well.

    Derek:  Do you think that one of the problems, I’m trying to think, what are some of the reasons why we end up with multiple product owners? Is it because stakeholders are unwilling to let somebody represent them?

    Let’s start with that one. In the case where maybe there’s three stakeholders to a product, and none of the three are willing to give up control of determining priority or making sure the direction of the product is going their way. What are some ways that you could effectively potentially use either a proxy or get one of the three to speak on behalf of the others?

    Clayton:  I think if you have a strong product owner, even if they are a proxy, they can still treat the other people as stakeholders, do all the interfacing and prioritization that they need to do, and helping the team define done. They can still do all those things.

    In my experience I’ve seen, maybe the flipside of what you’re asking, Derek, it’s not so much that the three people don’t want to give up the responsibility. It’s more often than not, where the proxy person doesn’t really want to take all that responsibility on, because they don’t want to stick their neck out and be the single wringable neck, so to speak.

    They don’t want to take that responsibility and then be accountable to those three people. They would rather say, “Oh, sure. I’ll be the product owner.” And then, when push comes to shove they can say, “Well, I’d love to help you out, but I need to go talk to these guys.” And I don’t think they want to be accountable to the organization.

    Derek:  So could we say a certain smell when you’re using a proxy to try to eliminate multiple product owners is when they constantly defer back to, “Well, I’ve got to go talk to some group of stakeholders or even a single stakeholder. I don’t feel that I’ve got the authority to make that decision”?

    Drew:  Right, I think that’s definitely a smell when you recognize that the product owner needs to have equal parts authority, time, and knowledge about your project. If he’s got to refer to a bunch of other people, then he’s severely lacking in the authority, which doesn’t place him in an ideal position to be a product owner.

    Clayton:  Right. Especially if it’s over every single story. Having to do that, that’s a definite smell.

    Derek:  Now, let me maybe posit a slightly different scenario that I’ve seen in a number of companies, and maybe we can talk about what are some ways to handle this.

    Maybe I’ve got a development team of five or six developers, and our company has eight different products. They’re all fairly mature products. So the six developers are responsible for all eight products. But each one of those products has a different product manager.

    It doesn’t make a whole lot of sense to…Each product manager is willing to take responsibility and be a product owner for their product. But how would you go about dealing with creating a unified backlog so to speak between eight products where you didn’t have to interface with all eight product owners? What are some ways you could go around that?

    Clayton:  I think, in general, when you have a bunch of product owners and you want to delegate the responsibility of the product owner and bring it down into one person, it’s generally easier to go up because responsibilities tend to converge when you go up, and also authority tends to be higher when you go up and sometimes knowledge as well.

    In that example, we have a bunch of different project managers. I would say, “Who’s the person in charge of all of them?” Is there a C level officer who can be the product owner? Although, a lot of times an issue you run into in that situation is that that person doesn’t have the time to prioritize the backlog and do the other responsibilities.

    Derek:  Say that there was a product manager that was over all eight products. Then there was a product owner defined for each one of the particular products or a project manager or whatever you want to call it.

    If that product manager was willing to say, “I’ll prioritize the queue for you. I’ll make sure that I’ll be responsible for the queue.” They’re probably still not the best person to probably be in the planning meeting because they don’t know all the specifics about the stories.

    I guess what I’m saying is how would you go about a situation where you had multiple subject matter experts or product owners? Even if you didn’t have an issue of prioritization but you had one of specialization, what would be some potential recommendations that you could do to combat that?

    Roy:  To me, the prioritization in that scenario sounds like the biggest problem, but if we are saying that the prioritization thing is taken care of by the overall, overarching project…

    The post Episode #16 – Multiple vs Single Product Owner appeared first on Episode #15 – Estimates http://integrumtech.com/2011/05/scrumcast-15-estimates/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/05/scrumcast-15-estimates/#respond Thu, 19 May 2011 12:00:46 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5473 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water and Jade Meskill talk about estimates. Padding Precision vs. accuracy Hard conversations Assurances How to get better …

    The post Episode #15 – Estimates appeared first on Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors, Roy van de Water and Jade Meskill talk about estimates.

    • Padding
    • Precision vs. accuracy
    • Hard conversations
    • Assurances
    • How to get better at estimates
    • Hours vs points
    • Story estimates vs estimated velocity

    Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another episode of the ScrumCast. I am Derek Neighbors.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I am Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Roy van de Water:  I am Roy van de Water.

    Jade Meskill:  I am Jade Meskill. Today I wanted to talk about estimates.

    Derek:  How long do you think it’ll take to talk about estimates?

    Jade:  It depends.

    Clayton:  Have you ever done this before?

    Jade:  I thought the answer was, “It depends” [laughs] . Seriously, we want to talk about what are the challenges with estimates for your teams, for yourself? What are some of the things that we struggle with? To kick it off, let’s start with padding estimates. How do we feel about that?

    Derek:  Pad them, definitely. All the time. As much as you can. As much as they’ll let you.

    [laughter]

    Derek:  Unless I’m paying for the work, then padding’s not allowed.

    Clayton:  Padding is something that is ultimately unnecessary inside of an agile framework. For scrum, for instance, if I say I’m going to do this many points this week. I commit to something for this iteration, and then my estimates are wrong, and I get half of it done or whatever. Assuming that everything else went right, then, it’s just instant feedback where I can say, “OK. Now, I know I can only commit to…” It helps you modify things. Ultimately, it’s a moot point.

    Jade:  Why do you think it’s so prevalent that there’s certified scrum trainers out there teaching people to pad their estimates? Why do you think that they feel that’s necessary?

    Derek:  It’s because they don’t understand the point of an estimate. What I mean by that is still today, even in a lot of scrum implementations I see we’re really talking about wanting to be precise, instead of wanting to be accurate. There’s this big, “Our estimates have to be perfect, because we’re telling somebody that this is the estimate. When we tell them that this is the estimate, then they’re going to go allocate a certain amount of budget.”

    When we tell them what that budget is and what that time is, they also expect to get every single feature that we told them as part of that estimate. As Clayton says ‑‑ when we go in and we get an iteration or two, we realize that maybe our velocity is not 20 it’s 15, we have a choice to make. We either have to spend more money, or we have to reduce the scope, or negotiate what it means to be done on the scope that we’ve already defined.

    People do not like to have those conversations, because it requires being personable. It requires all parties coming to the table and having a discussion between people. I think as practitioners we like to hide behind tools, we like to hide behind code. We like to hide behind every technology known to man, short of having real conversation.

    I think that product owners and business owners have a very similar problem. Because they don’t understand technology, they say, “You told me X, therefore X had to be true, just make it work. Work twice as hard, or work twice as fast, or do whatever and make those estimates right.”

    I think it’s because we do a really poor job at the beginning of a project, or at the beginning of working with somebody, defining what it really means to do an estimate using Agile methodologies. What we were trying to is be accurate and be able to do some moderate planning, but we are going to have to inspect and adapt not only the way we’re doing things, but the length and the cost that it’s going to do those things as well.

    Jade:  Let’s say that I am a product owner and I have a project that I would like you guys to do, and I need to know how much this is going to cost me? How long it is going to take? Here is my requirements, or my stories, or whatever it is that I have gathered for you. How are you guys going to give me any assurance at all that I can plan for this?

    Derek:  My two questions to you would be, how quickly do you need the estimate? How precise do you need the estimate to be?

    Jade:  What’s the risk in getting an inaccurate estimate?

    Derek:  The more precise you want to be, the longer and more expensive it is going to be, to get you an estimate. If you changed your mind on anything, or we discover anything new, we’re going to have to not do those things, or we’re going to have to go out and do all new estimates.

    Jade:  I’ve got a $30,000 budget, and I needed it done in four weeks. Can Scrum do that?

    Derek:  I think Scrum can give you a moderate picture of what the team believes they can do in four weeks on your particular budget, or I guess they could give you one or two things. They can either tell you four weeks what you will get for that budget, or they would tell you with your budget, how many features you can get done.

    One of the two and I think that you can negotiate a fair amount of that feature set, and then have somewhat a good idea in every week. You will be able to potentially get feedback on how accurate those estimates were.

    Jade:  I want it all.

    Derek:  You should probably go to waterfall methodology then.

    [laughter]

    Jade:  Estimation is one of the most difficult parts, I believe of being a good scrum team, is being good estimators. What are some tips and tricks that we can offer people to help make their estimates more accurate, help deal with these questions that come up from products owners?

    Clayton:  I’d say that as far as becoming, say better at estimation. I would say really take the inspect and adapt concept, and apply that to your estimations too. I think a lot of times people do the padding thing, because they just pad everything. They don’t ever go back, and they don’t ever try and see, “Was I write?” Or “How far off was I?” Or anything like that.

    It’s always just, “I’m just going to take, whatever I think it’s going to take, and I’m going to add 50 percent.” That’s their general rule. They don’t ever go back. I did that here with this team, and went into a sprints worth of tasks from every single project I think, and they were 300 or so.

    Maybe it was two weeks of task, but we were off by an average of like half an hour I think. We were so close to our estimates, but at the time, everyone was saying that we are so bad at estimating, we did everything wrong. In reality, we were actually pretty close. We were way better than I think anyone would have thought.

    I would say that if we can go back, and come up with some way to look back at your estimates and see either you are right, you went over or you went under, and why. Apply that next time.

    Derek:  I think one of the things that I see most teams do when they estimate, that really hurts them, is they are still way too tied to thinking in terms of hours. I’m trying to map what does a three point story look like in terms of hours? What does a five point story look like in terms of hours? Instead of thinking about them in terms of difficulty.

    What I always like to say, is when somebody says that they are a bad estimator, usually what they mean is someone, either myself or somebody on the team, or somehow we derived a velocity that we thought was acceptable. We didn’t hit that velocity, and therefore our estimates were wrong.

    What I like to say is, “Well, perhaps your velocity estimate was wrong, but were your story estimates really wrong?” If I say something is an eight, and something else is a three, and something else is a one. If that three is three times harder than the one, and the eight is eight times harder than the one or a little over almost three times harder as a three, I would argue that your estimates were spot on. Even if your velocity was off by half, or double.

    That’s really where I see developers really getting hung up. Is that they get way too hang up on the velocity side, instead of how they are seeing stories and relative size. I think if they can nail relative size, you start to learn how to do velocity as you start to work as a team longer, and more together. You start to see what’s common.

    I think we get way too hang up on that, that’s because we do fixed bid price kind of work, even we do internal work usually as scrum teams. We put a dollar figure on something that relies on the velocity never changing. I think that’s bad.

    Roy:  I think something we run into a lot as well is that, we had this mentality a lot of times going into doing estimates, where we’ve done a lot of reals application, specifically for us in the past. We start off going in to estimates with this notion that a cred operation is automatically a three. Then everything is based off of that. The thing is not every single project that you come into is exactly the same.

    The skills are going to move all around, because what’s important is that, each story within that set of estimates is relative to other stories within that estimate. Not relative to any story outside of that.

    Clayton:  Yeah, I think the first time that became really abundantly clear to me is, I was working with an embedded engineer, and every single estimate was under a three. There were some things and I was like, “Dude, there’s no way. That’s going to take at least a week worth of work to do that, and you put a three on it.”

    Then we went through an exercise to estimate the initial velocity, and the initial velocity for a week was five. It’s like, “OK.” You get used to working with a team who the numbers are probably more in the threes and the fives, or the eights, but the velocities are 25 to 30. Velocity really has a big impact to where your sizing story is as well.

    Jade:  What advice do we have for trainers who are out there telling people to pad their estimates and use some multiplication factors? Things like that?

    Roy:  I think, ultimately, as a trainer, you’re hurting the team. If you’re doing something like that where they are padding their estimates, then they’re going to think of their estimates in terms of that multiplication factor.

    If I estimate this as a two, and I multiply that times whatever figure, then when I go back and reflect on my estimates, I’m going to think about it in terms of the multiplied amount. I’ll be comparing the accuracy of my estimates against the wrong actual estimate.

    Clayton:  Yeah. I think it’s to the detriment of the people that are doing the estimations, and also to the people that are paying for the work. What I found is, when someone goes under on a task, let’s say that they thought it was going to take an hour and it only takes 15 minutes. When that happens, there’s never a revelation of, “Hey, I got this done so much earlier than I thought.” But when they go over, it’s always a huge justification of, “Oh, I told you that. This is why our estimates are always wrong, blah, blah, blah.”

    It’s always like a one‑way street, and they don’t ever cancel each other out. When in reality, I think that’s what happens. It’s to the detriment of the people that are doing the estimations, because they don’t ever find out that they were right some of the time, and even though they were wrong some of the time, it was OK.

    Jade:  Yeah. I think that’s really good. I think that wraps up the podcast for this week. Thank you and we will talk to you again later.

    Derek:  Thanks.

    The post Episode #15 – Estimates appeared first on IBM CIO Study Suggests Collaboration is in Your Organizations Future http://integrumtech.com/2011/05/ibm-cio-study-suggests-collaboration-is-in-your-organizations-future/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/05/ibm-cio-study-suggests-collaboration-is-in-your-organizations-future/#respond Tue, 17 May 2011 15:02:18 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5486 IBM released another CIO study “The Essential CIO, Insights From the Global Chief Information Officer Study“.  The study validates a lot of what we believe …

    The post IBM CIO Study Suggests Collaboration is in Your Organizations Future appeared first on The Essential CIO, Insights From the Global Chief Information Officer Study“.  The study validates a lot of what we believe in offering a more human driven form of software development.  An approach that is much more holistic in it’s approach to collaboration and innovation within the organization.


    Nearly three out of four CIOs with a leverage mandate expect changes to their internal collaboration processes to have high transformative potential for their organizations.  Internal collaboration and client interaction are their principal goals. “We need to cope with change by re-engaging with our internal customers in a more intimate way,” said one Government CIO in Australia. “The solution is part structural and part cultural.

    CIOs have begun to recognize that transparency is key to success.  Nearly two-thirds of top-performing leverage mandate CIO’s identified sharing more information with clients as a key customer relationship initiative.  In addition it’s all about having the right talent, “We need our IT staff to be more business-centric to build trusted relationships with business units,” one Education CIO in Australia told us.

    Collaboration is the key to Expanding focused CIO’s as well. “For CIOs in top-performing Expand mandate organizations, collaboration and integration are especially important. More than two-thirds of those CIOs said they would focus more on internal collaboration and communication, compared to less than half in underperforming organizations with an Expand mandate”

    Amazingly two key principles of Human Software Development are Collaboration and Learning/Teaching. They also happen to be two of the linchpins for a successful CIO.  “Collaborate beyond what is currently imagined Get everyone talking, via new channels, on new schedules and with new tools. Teach and enable your entire enterprise to connect as often and as effectively as possible with their own most important stakeholders.”

    We are excited to see that IBM has verified what we already knew.  If you are a CIO that is looking to transform, engage or pioneer in your organization we can help, just give us a call.

     

    The post IBM CIO Study Suggests Collaboration is in Your Organizations Future appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5457 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss running retrospectives. What are some smells? Using same activities all the time. Bad facilitating Use the “F” …

    The post Episode #14 – Retrospectives appeared first on GameStorming, Agile Retrospectives, Thinkertoys, Coaching Agile Teams, Innovation Games)

  • Take a risk
  • Add alcohol
  • Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another episode of ScrumCast. I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Jade Meskill:  I’m Jade Meskill.

    Derek:  Today we’ll talk a little bit of retrospectives.

    Jade:  Actually, I have a question for you Derek. You are the one who usually runs the retrospective here at Integrum. Doing that for a while, what are some traps you could fall into as a Scrum master, where the retrospectives are kind of stale, where you are talking about the same thing over and over again. What some negative patterns you have seen, maybe some smells and ways to avoid those.

    Derek:  I think one negative pattern is using the same activities over and over again. I see a lot of organizations or a lot of teams that do the Plus, Minus, Delta. That has pretty much the only tool, no tool box, only activity. I think that teams kind of get into a rhythm of just, “OK, I’m just going to spit out the same kind of thing. I’m not really challenging my thinking.”

    I think sometimes if you start to go into a little bit deeper activities, you can almost ‑‑ I don’t want to say trick people ‑‑ but you can get people to stop thinking about being guarded about the data that they’re giving, or about the ideas that they’re having.

    Instead, allow flow to happen a little bit better. I think that the more you can get people out the rhythm of the activity, the more that they tend to be honest or give responses that they wouldn’t normally. Because they are too focused on, “I want to get that activity and not screw it up,” or do it right, “that I’m being more real with my responses.”

    Whereas, if I know exactly what you’re going to do with the data and how you’re going to respond to it, it’s just like, “I’m not going to add this to it because I know that next step is A, B, C, and I don’t want to deal with whatever comes after A, B, C.”

    One of the ways, I think, you can really deal with it is to change it up quite a bit.

    Jade:  I think the trap that some people fall into is they only think about facilitating a retrospective from an Agile perspective, instead of thinking about being a meeting facilitator. There are tons and tons of resources out there, but really great, smart people who have become very proficient at facilitating meetings, getting people to be creative and lots of games and exercises and different techniques.

    We buy the Agile retrospective book and stop there. I think that’s a huge mistake.

    Derek:  I think “Thinker Toys” is a really good book. “Games [inaudible 02:50] ” is a good book. “Innovation Games” is a good book. There’s definitely kind of a whole industry or segment that really talks about a lot of these brainstorming or innovative ways or game ways to unlock things in your brain. I think that anybody who’s doing a lot of facilitation exercises should really check those out.

    Additionally, I think there is an art to facilitation. We talked about traps. I think it’s very hard, especially if you are a Scrum Master or somebody who is kind of on the team, it’s hard not want to interject your opinion or to drive things the way you want them to be driven, opposed to being a facilitator who really lets people express themselves.

    One of the things I would say is, like the “F” word is a dirty word in engineering, and I’m not talking about “Fuck” because we all say that in [inaudible 03:45] . I’m talking about the explicit “F” word which is “Feelings.” I think that a lot of times to, really, unlock change you have to get people talking about how they feel about things, so they can overcome those feelings to move on.

    I think there is definitely an art, especially in dealing with engineers, in facilitating in a way to not really say, “How does that make you feel. Clayton?” But instead ask questions that pull those feelings out so that they can be dealt with, and so the team can deal with them. I think that’s definitely a trap that’s easy to fall into if you’re an engineer doing facilitation.

    Clayton:  One thing kind of segway into this that I’ve seen, we’ve had this problem and I’m sure other people maybe have this problem on their team, is when you want to get into the feelings, and you want to start talking about those things. But you also have a time box and you want to respect everyone’s time and people have things to do and whatnot.

    It seems like sometimes you get into the last 10 or 15 minutes of the retrospective, and there is some “aha” moment where you start getting into something deeper, but then it’s almost too late. It seems like that happens more often than not where it takes quite a while. Why do you think it is that it takes maybe the whole retrospective to get into that stuff? What are some things you could do to bring that up earlier?

    Derek:  I don’t know good ways necessarily to bring it up earlier. I think some of it is we have to let our guard down. Sometimes it just takes a little while of that surface level chitter‑chatter. If you think of it like a dating ritual, sometimes you need to break the ice, and relax with each other until you move it to the next level. I think the retrospectives follow a similar pattern.

    Everybody has been doing the work for the week, so your mind is a little bit burned, you’re a little bit on edge, and it takes a little while to getting a little more relaxed, and get out of the “doing the work” stage to talk about the mental part of reviewing the work, in retrospect, and all that.

    It takes that time to, say, let the guard down and really do that. I think if you can pick activities, if you know you’ve got a team that’s a slow mover team, if you can pick activities that help break down those barriers, and get it into the mood of being able to share more openly, that you try to do those more often.

    Jade:  I also think that you need to inspect and adapt on your retrospectives, and, if you’re always having this problem, maybe you need to change the timing or the length of your retrospective to deal with that. If it takes your team an hour to even get to moving beyond the surface level, maybe your retrospectives need to be two hours. You spend the second hour really digging into the meat of that. I think you really need to pay attention to what’s working and what’s not working with your teams.

    Clayton:  Maybe change format, like the CNN Crossfire.

    [laughter]

    Clayton:  SMART goals. Good or bad?

    Jade:  Hate them.

    [laughter]

    Jade:  It’s not very Crossfire‑ish.

    Derek:  I like the concept of SMART goals. I like setting a tangible action to improve. I like the principle of SMART in that it really allows you to keep things where, “Yes, I can do this,” “Yes, it’s reasonable,” “Yes, it’s timely,” “Yes, it’s actionable,” ‑‑ all of those things.

    I think some of the problems that come out of that is it’s very hard to do the follow‑up on those, and to build upon them. I think, if you’re doing discipline retrospectives, where you say, “Over a period of time, we’re trying to make this change,” and you’ve got multiple SMART goals, it maybe makes more sense.

    We’ve done them. It’s difficult to follow through, sometimes, all the way to the end. Then, where it’s really been a problem, I think, is the problem with SMART goals is you don’t do the habit setting. You say, “Oh, we’re going to this for the next iteration.” You do it, it works really great, and then you do it the next iteration.

    Then, it starts to follow across on the third iteration. Then, it’s gone on the fourth iteration. Then, in six more retrospectives, it comes back as, “Hey, we need to solve this problem,” and everybody goes, “Haven’t we already talked about this?”

    Jade:  The problem I have with it is not the actual SMART goals and the follow‑through, like you’re saying. I agree that those are issues. The problem that I see is, in the context of the retrospective, the way I’ve seen it on our teams, it totally derails the good conversation that we’re having, and changes it into, “Well, how do we come up with another stupid SMART goal that fits this formula?”

    I think a lot of times, it really detracts from some of the more powerful and more honest conversation that we could be having, and now it’s just about creating this formulaic thing.

    Derek:  Right, but I see the flip side of that is people will talk shit to death and never come up with anything actionable.

    Jade:  I agree.

    Derek:  We can have a really great, deep, meaningful conversation, but that doesn’t do shit for improving oneself.

    Jade:  Maybe it’s like everything else that we’re saying. It’s used appropriately and not abused. Maybe that’s where the secret lies, in moderation.

    Clayton:  For each of you guys, who both run a retrospective, what is your ‑‑ maybe not biggest ‑‑ but what is a retrospective pet peeve that you have that you think, if we did away with not only on our team but on other teams, things would be greatly improved?

    Jade:  [laughs] One that jumps to my mind is the biggest thing that irritates me when I’m facilitating is somebody speaking on behalf of the anonymous other people who feel this way, “But not me personally.” That drives me insane. I will usually shut that down and say, “Well, if those people need to say that, they need to speak for themselves,” especially if you are not part of that group.

    If you’re saying, “Well, I think that such and such people might be feeling this way, because I’ve heard about it, but I don’t feel this way,” you need to stay out of the conversation. Maybe bring that up and challenge the people to speak their mind, but don’t give me this big story about how other people are feeling.

    Derek:  I don’t really like that one much either. I really hate when people won’t express their feelings. When I say that is they won’t say what’s on their minds.

    Before retrospective, all during the week, somebody will really belabor and bitch and moan about something with the team. Then, when it comes to retrospective time, and it’s the wide‑open slate to bring up that issue with the team, the person won’t engage. When somebody else brings up the topic, there is no opinion on it from that person. If you ask them, try to pry it out of them, “It’s, oh no, no big deal.”

    Immediately after the retrospective, they’re right back to the, “Yeah, we’re never going to get rid of problem X, Y, Z that I’ve been bitching about for the last five days.” I just think we should institute the nut punch rule where anybody that does that, you’re OK to punch them in the nuts.

    Jade:  Some of that is being a good facilitator and watching out for some of those things. It is hard when you do acknowledge that, and they still refuse to initiate the conversation. That’s really challenging, but if you’re just watching body language, and watch for the eye rule and draw attention to that, you can solve some of that. Like you said if they still refuse to talk about it, then definitely nut punch.

    Clayton:  One technique I was actually reading about in the “Coaching Agile Teams” book that, I thought, was really interesting was as a facilitator phrasing your questions in such a way that you’re not actually asking the person. The example was rather than saying, “Hey Derek.” I know Derek has this problem about somebody, but I don’t think he’s going to talk about it. I could say, “Hey Derek, why do you think some people would feel this way?” Now, he’s not talking about his feelings.

    I thought that was really interesting. As a Scrum Master listening to this podcast, what is something that I could do at my next retrospective, real quick tip that would make it better than the last one?

    Derek:  I would read at the retrospectives by [inaudible 12:05] …

    [laughter]

    Derek:  …Diana Larson to start with. Lisa Adkins book “Coaching Agile Teams” has a lot of really good points about dealing with teams and good ways in facilitating. There are a ton of books that we don’t talk about on facilitation and coaching that have nothing to do with Agile that those skills are totally transportable, whether you are doing organizational redevelopment, or doing a respective for a team.

    Facilitation is facilitation. Coaching is coaching. I would say anything you could do to improve on those. Maybe, you’ve got a cat at home that doesn’t like to use the litter box, practice some of your facilitation techniques on the cat. See if you can get it to start using the litter box on a regular basis.

    Jade:  Take a risk, but that’s the biggest advice I would give. I ran a retrospective, at our last one. I’d been reading “Gamestorming” a lot. I pulled out an experiment, one of their games, and just tried it. I had no idea if it would work, but I thought it might be fun to at least try. We got really excellent results out of it.

    Derek:  The other thing, I would say, is add alcohol to your retrospectives. It does wonders for loosening inhibitions as far as the team saying what’s on their mind, and it’s definitely a little dangerous, too.

    See you next time.

    The post Episode #14 – Retrospectives appeared first on Episode #13 – Agile Certifications http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/scrumcast-13-agile-certifications/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/scrumcast-13-agile-certifications/#respond Thu, 28 Apr 2011 12:00:09 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5447 Jade Meskill, Alan Dayley, Mike Vizdos and Clayton Lengel-Zigich are in the studio talking about Agile Certifications. Should we certify people? The WOW factor When …

    The post Episode #13 – Agile Certifications appeared first on Jade Meskill, Alan Dayley, Mike Vizdos and Clayton Lengel-Zigich are in the studio talking about Agile Certifications.

    • Should we certify people?
    • The WOW factor
    • When does it jump the shark?
    • Broken hiring practices
    • HR vs real community
    • Who is doing the certification?
    • There is a demand…
    • Scalability
    • Certification mill problems
    • Why not in universities/schools
    • Certifications will evolve

    Transcript

    Jade Meskill:  Hello and welcome to another episode of the “Scrumcast.” I’m Jade Meskill.

    Clayton Lingel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lingel‑Zigich.

    Alan Dayley:  I’m Alan Dayley.

    Mike Vizdos:  And, I’m Mike Vizdos.

    Jade:  All right. We got a couple guests with us today and we are going to talk about the exciting topic of certification. Hold your breath. Let’s start out with a softball. Should we be certifying people? Go.

    Alan:  A softball?

    [laughter]

    Jade:  It’s fast pitch softball.

    [laughter]

    Alan:  I debate this in my own mind. Certification is valuable, evidently, to HR people. Therefore, perhaps, valuable to people who hold the certification. Where it’s not valuable is when the certification doesn’t have meat to it or it’s too easy to get. And so that’s where it gets called into question. So, personally, I wish the whole world didn’t need certification. That somehow there was a way that you could demonstrate capability without a piece of paper or someone else signing a piece of paper. But maybe that’s too hard to do in the business world. I don’t know.

    Jade:  Right. When you’re screening thousands of candidates, how do you deal with that?

    Clayton:  I think we should certify people if the certification…When you say, “I am ‘X‑Y‑Z’ certified”, and people say, “Wow. Really?”, and you say, “Yep!”, and they think that’s really cool. I think that’s when we should be certifying people but when it gets beyond that, I start to call into question if it’s worthwhile.

    Alan:  So if I say, “I’m a certified scrum master”, and somebody says, “Wow, that’s really cool” then that’s good?

    Clayton:  I think that…Well, that depends on who’s saying that. I think that if you can…If the certification elicits that kind of response from the, maybe you could say top of the industry or people that may be important…not like total newbies. Then I think maybe that would be…maybe there’s some value in having the certification when it’s hard to obtain and it’s awe‑inspiring. But when it’s something that is very easy to get or, kinda like you were saying, just a matter of someone signing a piece of paper

    Jade:  So if I come in telling you I got my A‑plus certification, you’re not going to be impressed?

    Clayton:  CompUSA is out of business, I’m sorry.

    [laughter}

    Clayton:  Where are you going to find a job?

    Jade:  But was that valuable at some point in time to somebody?

    Clayton:  Yeah

    Jade:  So how do you know when you’ve crossed the threshold of it’s no longer awe inspiring and cool?

    Alan:  I don’t know how to cross…well, it takes a little bit of research, I would hope. In other words, you hope that managers, HR’s, hiring people that look at a resume and say, “Oh, look. There’s a certification here.” That somehow, they would either know or research a little bit what that certification actually means.

    Jade:  Do you think that really happens, though?

    Alan:  No.

    Jade:  They’re told to look for keywords.

    Alan:  In general, it doesn’t happen. I don’t know.

    Clayton:  I think certifications will probably always be valuable in the HR community.

    I think where they start getting frowned upon in the actual community of the people that are using them are when people start thinking that it’s less about learning something and showing that you’re qualified in some certain skill and more about money making or prestige.

    Or just something that is not directly related to how much you know about a certain topic or how qualified you are in that certain area.

    Alan:  There needs to be, perhaps, a meta something. I don’t know what it is.

    Some of the higher certifications, most of my experiences with the Scrum Alliance and their further certifications beyond ScrumMaster tend to have a little bit of meat behind them. They have some peer review and things like that. Somehow, if you could do that more, then it has more meaning.

    Jade:  So what do you think, Mike? You’ve been awfully quiet so far.

    Mike:  I’m a good listener. It really does depend, I think, on who is doing the certification. The actual certification.

    I do think people have to do a lot of research before they jump in and take a class to do whatever. If anybody’s really in the market to just “take a class to take a class” to be able to get certified, does that really mean anything?

    Alan:  Yeah. It’s a tough conundrum, because I’ve met bad doctors in my life. Medical doctors. They’ve been certified many, many times in different ways, and yet I find them unacceptable.

    You can have all kinds of structure around a certification and still have bad people, as it were, get through. It’s a hard problem.

    Mike:  There is a demand for it, still.

    Jade:  Yep. Do you think that will always be the case?

    Mike:  There will be a demand, yes.

    Clayton:  Do you think that demand is driven from the more, like what Alan mentioned, the HR side, where people are saying, “We just need people that have this buzzword,” or is it driven by people saying, “There’s a lot of value in this for what I’m doing, so I want to go seek out that certification”?

    Mike:  I see a percentage of both of those types.

    Jade:  My personal fear is, with certifications like the Certified Scrum Developer, we were just talking about people who are going and taking those certification classes that aren’t actually programmers. Are they going to look better on paper than someone like myself who doesn’t have that certification but has been doing this professionally for 12 years? What are the pros and cons of that type of a world?

    Clayton:  There’s always something to be said for, if you’re a company and you’re hiring people just because of their certifications, then, obviously, there’s going to be some downsides to that.

    As much as I think some people would want to say, “We can’t certify,” and, “Certifications are meaningless,” and all that stuff, at the same time, if they really want to go down that road, they know that the stuff that really is important ‑‑ if they think that that stuff is really important, then they’ll maximize that. I think they’ll stand out even if they’re not certified.

    I think people usually just like to complain about a certification. They want to say it’s totally not important, but they love to talk about it. If it’s not important, then you’re fine.

    Alan:  Your question and your statement segues into the content. If I’m not a programmer and I take the Certified Scrum Developer class, is there a way to bridge concepts like pair programming and continuous integration or other such practices that are part of that course?

    Can they be bridged into other fields? Can I do pair programming on marketing design? Can I do continuous integration on whatever job I do? Can I come up with a way to do that sort of concept in my field?

    Jade:  I think that’s a really hard analog, especially compared to the Certified ScrumMaster training, where it is fairly generic and is a framework that can be applied to everything else. Once you start getting into engineering practices, I think that becomes a lot harder to translate or make generic.

    Alan:  I agree.

    Jade:  This leads to the question of, how do we scale this? If Scrum’s the new hotness for certification, what happens when we need to certify 10 million developers? What does that world look like if…? A hundred trainers can’t do that.

    Or we’re going to do Scrum in India or China, and there’s millions of developers ready and eager to embrace these certifications. How do we do that? How do we scale it up?

    Alan:  I don’t have a full answer for that. Obviously, I’m not trying to solve that problem in my own life or in my world. The danger, of course, is, it becomes some kind of mill, a certification mill, if you want to really pump the numbers through.

    I’ve always been curious about the academic side of things. In other words, why aren’t there Scrum classes at universities? Why aren’t there Scrum classes more often in engineering schools, or other types of Agile certifications or classes? That has always perplexed me. I haven’t understood why they don’t pick that up.

    Then, it could even, perhaps, turn into a college degree or part of your degree. Since you already have millions of people going to schools, there would be a place and a venue to scale it, but I don’t know how that would work.

    Jade:  Isn’t that a function of, it’s not being demanded of them by employers, by people who are working with these universities? If they’re not saying that, “We need Scrum‑certified people coming out of this university,” why would they go teach that class? That’s what drove a lot of Java‑ and .NET‑type classes into the university system, was the demand from employers to have those type of skills.

    Alan:  Go ahead if you want to say something. I think there’s a disconnect that I don’t understand. Maybe you do, Mike.

    Mike:  And, actually, I’ve seen a lot. I speak a lot at universities around the world and one of the strange things about academia is they’re almost a generation behind. They’re still being taught stuff that was taught 20 years ago. And they’re coming out of university today thinking that they don’t have to work as team members.

    They don’t have the skills to be able to communicate effectively and they think that they can go and get a job and just do one thing for the rest of their life. And they’re actually being told that communicating with a customer is a bad thing. [scoffs] This is the stuff that I hear as I go around the world taking to universities.

    Jade:  Great. So, you know that, but that leads back into my question of if we want to build a good workforce for the future and these are valuable skills that we’re training people in these certification classes, how do we get them involved? How do we get them into the system while keeping it meaningful, relevant and worthwhile?

    Alan:  There has to be the right person, the right bridge. In the Scrum email list and so on, there’s a few people that work at different universities or work with universities who have successfully integrated some of these types of topics into the universities that they work with.

    But these are individual efforts in single engineering schools or programming schools and I haven’t seen it spread at all. I suspect there’s going to be somebody somewhere that’s going to write the right Ph.D thesis or be a teacher of Ph.Ds who will suddenly launch on this and become a focal of it and maybe create it and get it in. Maybe the way Java and .net did, I don’t know.

    Academia is not my world, so, it puzzles me.

    Mike:  And with the whole scalability thing, somebody will eventually jump on it and drive down the cost and the value of any kind of certification.

    Jade:  So, then what happens at that point? Does a new breed of certifications come out on top of that and rise to the top?

    Mike:  Absolutely. Absolutely. But if you look at something like Scrum, it was purely a marketing ploy, at the beginning, to get HR dollars, to spend money. And it did help create an entire new industry and bring Agile into the forefront, like it or not.

    Clayton:  I think that’s an interesting thing to keep in mind that maybe you’re upset with the fact or maybe you have the world view that certification is a money maker and that’s all that it is. But there is something to be said for the fact that a lot of that maybe did help bring it to the forefront.

    The fact that you can use it in your company today is you benefited from that, too, one way or the other.

    Mike:  And nobody is forcing anybody to do any of these type of classes. But if you’re anti‑certification, continue doing what you’re doing and do some research on whatever class. If you’re interested in getting certified, do some research into who you’re going to get taught or facilitated with.

    Jade:  Yeah, and that world’s always existed, right? There’s always been companies who preferred to have, let’s say, an MCSE, right?

    Mike:  Mm‑hmm.

    Jade:  But if you could prove that you’ve had the experience, you didn’t necessarily have to have that particular certification, but it makes it harder to get your foot in the door with certain organizations. And I think that we just have to accept that as a reality, right? If you choose to not participate in the certification world, great.

    That doesn’t mean you’re not worthwhile, but expect to have a little bit harder time dealing with, especially larger organizations who are filtering that way.

    Mike:  And I can see, really, the validation of the whole certified Scrum Master kind of path with the PMI jumping on the board now and rolling out Agile certification. So, it’s going to be, it is mainstream. Like it or not, it is. And something will come next.

    Jade:  I look forward to seeing what the new hotness will be. Alright, we are out of time. [background music] Thank you everybody for your opinions and we will catch you next time on another Agile’s Scrum Cast.

    Clayton:  Thank you.

    Mike:  Thanks.

    Alan:  Thanks.

    The post Episode #13 – Agile Certifications appeared first on Episode #12 – Step Away From The Tools http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/scrumcast-12-step-away-from-the-tools/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/scrumcast-12-step-away-from-the-tools/#respond Thu, 21 Apr 2011 14:00:18 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5431 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors and Jade Meskill talk about a blog post from Liz Keogh called Step Away From the Tools. What does it mean …

    The post Episode #12 – Step Away From The Tools appeared first on Step Away From the Tools.

    • What does it mean to do BDD?
    • Agile as the Hope killer, the tools give you hope
    • Diving In vs Deliberate Discovery
    • Are we too focused on tools instead of the reason’s they exist?
    • Tactile Tools and their benefits over Digital in the Process
    • Tools as a blame catcher
    • Assuming you’re wrong

    Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another episode of “The ScrumCast.” I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Jade Meskill:  I’m Jade Meskill.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  And I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Derek:  Clayton, earlier this week you had posted on a blog post, about “Step Away From The Tools.” We gonna started a couple of discussions and came find around here. Maybe it’ll give us a little bit of background, the post, the reason why you post it and can’t find…some of the discussion around that.

    Clayton:  Yes, the headline was grabbing, kind of inner results to separate from the tools linking, frustrating this industry. It’s so cut‑up and their tools, stupid little things. That was just interesting…I clicked on it.

    It was interesting to me because, I’ve been lot of thinking lately about the way they we did BBD. What is the meaning of BBD and all those things. I think for a long time Cucumber came along and the rails community and it was, “You can do BDD if you use Cucumber” and “OK that’s great.” Then things like Webrat and Capybara came out and it was like, “Look at our cool web steps where you can fill out this form.”

    In her post she makes reference to a post by Dan North about understanding the domain language and how it’s pretty easy to write, you could write a test that seems like you’re doing BDD but you’re really not and it should be at a higher level and substance, just been interesting me lately. That’s why it stuck and there had been a few people on the team I’ve been talking about that whole concept with. That would be fun to share with everyone.

    Derek:  Yeah, I thought it was interesting because one of the things that I picked up from Liz last time she was out here that I really liked was that Agile is the hope killer and hope is what basically prevents projects from shipping on time.

    I think that sometimes when we get too focused on tools, the problem that tools are like hope. If I only use this Cucumber thing or I only do BDD using these tools then I’m just going to develop better software. The hope is that as long as you’re writing scenarios that you’re writing good software.

    I definitely agree that Dan’s focused discovery or deliberate discovery is…most of software development is about having conversations about what software to actually develop. As developers we like to dive right into the meat and say, “Let me code. Get out of my way and let me code. Just tell me enough information to let me start writing the first line of code and get out of the way and let me do it.”

    In reality that’s where all the problems start coming in, whereas we do some of that discovery of “Oh, you mean there’s just other role that doesn’t have access to this and this and this is how it works?”

    When we find those things out four weeks into after a feature’s been flipped and then we have to basically un‑plumb everything and add something new, this is where defects get out of control and we just get this kind of crazy, spaghetti mess by not really listening. I think that that’s definitely…

    Clayton:  That’s where the resentment starts to build up, too. “Well, don’t you know how much time I put into this thing? Making this awesome ivory tower?”

    Derek:  “Why didn’t you tell me?”

    Clayton:  Yeah. Yeah.

    Derek:  “How come you never told me that there was this user?” The takeaway there from the post for me was that conversations help us discover things. I think that too often we really want to write code more than we want to have conversations. BDD really, to me, isn’t about testing, it’s about having conversations. User stories aren’t about requirements gathering, they’re about creating opportunities to have future conversations.

    For me, what the title of that post really started to spark was, what are some other examples of places where we’re too focused on tools and not focused enough on the reason why the tools exist in the first place?

    Clayton:  Code coverage is another good place to go from there. A lot of times, teams that do get a lot of benefit out of BDD start to get obsessed with “Well, how much of my code is covered?” and what does that really mean?

    It’s really easy to lose sight of that. Is 100 percent coverage attainable? Is that even the right thing to be doing? We get so caught up on trying to get these numbers in place, the same with…losing my words here…like complexity analysis…

    Jade:  Oh, like flog and flay, or whatever…

    [crosstalk]

    Clayton:  Yeah. Cyclomatic checks, things like that. What do those numbers really mean to you? What are they trying to tell you? How do they further the conversation instead of become this place where we get all obsessed about the statistics of it?

    Jade:  Yeah. It goes back to when you have something like that ‑‑ like a flog or a flayer, some score, some number, or something ‑‑ it just makes it easy to throw that other stuff by the wayside.

    It’s like, “I don’t have time to have that conversation. I’m trying to get my code coverage up.” It’s just like this thing and everyone can drive towards that, and then you get to a certain point and people are kind of standing around like, “Hmm, wait a second. Are we doing something wrong here?” There’s a cycle for every different kind of team. Maybe it’s every six months or every three months, or whatever.

    People realize, “OK, these tools, they sounded really cool three months ago, but I don’t know. What are we really getting out of them?” I think everyone has some 20/20 hindsight every now and again.

    Derek:  Yeah. One other item for me is tools around process. I don’t know want to name names, because I’m not trying to sway one product versus other. I think most digital tools to deal with a Scrum process, track user stories, points, velocity, and backlog management, a number of those things. What I see a lot of teams do is they get so obsessed on the tool that they do one of two things: they either want to use a tool because they want to lose accountability.

    If you put everything on index cards, and you create some, I want to say, “ritual” around it, but there’s some visibility, and there’s some tactile kind of writing and some wiring of the brain happening, a lot of people back off of that and say, “I really don’t like cards,” either, or, “It hurts my hand too much to write them all out,” or, “That takes too much wall space,” or, “They’re just going to be recycled, and you’re killing trees,” whatever.

    But I usually see the teams that start to do that, they really focused on trying to either shirk accountability, like, “Don’t treat me like a kindergartener and make me write on a stupid index card with a giant sharpie and put it on the wall for everybody to see. I’m not in kindergarten anymore.”

    Or they like tools so that they can legalize behaviors. They can start to say, “Oh, you’re trained in this,” and they want to steer the conversation onto the fact of your average velocity over the last 39 sprints has been X and get legalistic about that, opposed to saying, “What’s the root cause of that?” or, “How can we improve to deal with that?”

    It’s more of the, “Let me see what you’re doing, and let me compare myself to what my team is doing to your team.” What are some of you guys’ thoughts about using digital tools and process?

    Jade:  I was actually thinking about this the other day. I’ve had the same kind of experience, where I was trying to have something out with someone, and they were complaining about, “Oh well, we’re just wasting these cards, just wasting time, because this is really simple stuff, blah, blah, blah.”

    For whatever reason I never really went down the path of, “This is a waste of time.” I just took it as, “This is a reasonable idea, whatever. Just go with it.” I was thinking about the digital tools that exist now, could you still do this process 50 years ago? 100 years ago?

    If you’re just doing cards, writing things down, and having conversations, go back to ancient Egypt. You could still do the same thing. But, if your process is dependent on, “Well, in order to be successful or have some measure of this or that, then we need to have these digital tools that require us to keep track of this, do these calculations.”

    It just seems that there’s so much overhead, but, again, if you go back how we started this, if you go back to the idea of, “Well, let’s just have this tool, and, if something is going wrong, look at the tool,” I think people will get too far into that, and they forget that there really can just be really simple stuff. You could just be having conversations and writing something down on paper. It sounds so simple, but what else do you need?

    Clayton:  I don’t want to manage a Scrum team in ancient Egypt.

    [laughter]

    Derek:  I don’t know. The pyramids were a pretty successful project, if you ask me.

    Jade:  Yeah. You could whip them, too.

    [laughter and crosstalk]

    Clayton:  That’s true.

    Jade:  …with a Scrum whip.

    [laughter]

    Derek:  For me, the determining point was when I heard somebody say, “Well, we couldn’t do that, because our tool doesn’t do that.” I don’t remember what it was. It was like, “Oh well, mark that as zero,” or, “Change to a Fibonacci sequence,” or, “Put your estimates in ideal hours,” or something, and the response from the person was, “Well, but our tool doesn’t support that.”

    Jade:  That’s why I love digital tools because it gives me something to blame other than myself.

    [laughter]

    Derek:  To me, our tools are just a distraction, for the most part. I think back to what you’re trying to get to Clayton, is, when we really get to the roots of what we do, how we do it, and why we do it, I think anytime the tools become a significant part of the conversation, I have to question, are we using them as a scapegoat of some kind, either blaming them for something, or “Look! A pony”! If we should use vim instead of Emacs.

    Let’s stop talking about what’s really important and start talking about something that’s…

    Jade:  I came across a blog post this morning that was like, “We’re this successful web shop,” or whatever. It was a blog post on how you get set up with Z shell, rvim, blah, blah, blah. All these other tools. I’m picturing someone going to that site and being like, “Whoa, this is totally awesome!”

    Then they’re going to spend five hours getting all that shit set up, and then they’re going to go back to work and be like, “Hmm, OK. What was I supposed to do today?”

    Clayton:  And, “I don’t know how to use any these tools at all.”

    Jade:  Right.

    Clayton:  Now I’m going to spend the next month figuring out how to become an expert at these tools, and then maybe I’ll get some work done.

    Derek:  I’ve definitely gone through that cycle in my career. I definitely think that good tools are important and understanding your tools is important, but this is one of the things, for me, on the craftsmanship side that I get a little worried about.

    A lot of people, when I look at the craftsmanship movement, they really start to say, “Well, in order to be a good gardener, I’ve got to have the perfect shovel. In reality, I think, to be a good gardener, a really good shovel helps, but I think you can be a really damn good gardener just using your hands.

    Clayton:  That’s like you need an expensive guitar to be an awesome guitar player. That’s not necessary.

    Derek:  Right. To me, how I interpret craftsmanship is being able to tell the difference and the caliber of the guitar is important, but being able to say, “Well, I can’t do good work because I don’t have a good guitar,” to me, it starts to sound like a cop‑out. It starts to sound like an excuse.

    We’ve come to this place now that we’ve got so many different competing processes, frameworks, and movements at foot that I think, right now, sometimes it’s hard to be a good software developer, because there’s so much noise that it’s hard to get distracted. You’re either paying too much attention to the process or you’re paying too much attention to the tools.

    What we’ve forgotten is that there’s a customer and there’s a value that we’re trying to deliver. I think that, to me, how do we get back to the roots of saying, “That’s what it’s really about. It’s about the people, the conversation, and providing value.”

    Clayton:  It’s about moderation. It’s about finding those points where, “Yes, this is helping us solve a problem.” Maybe some of our team is on site, so having some sort of digital tool in place is required, because that helps facilitate communication better to our distributed team.

    That is a perfect reality in these days, and it would be a good reason to go down that road. But it’s about finding that balance of, “Well, let’s not try to run the entire business and the entire process through this digital tool. Let’s use it to communicate the things that are hard to communicate at a distance, and everything else, let’s make sure that we keep those things, because that’s the most effective way.”

    When managing the tool takes more time than getting the work done, that’s where you have a serious problem that you’ve got to deal with.

    Jade:  Yeah. If you imagine a Venn diagram where one circle is introverts and the other circle is “I wrote my own something”…

    [laughter]

    Jade:  …they’re basically on top of each other.

    Clayton:  I want to see that.

    Jade:  Yeah. To be fair, a lot of software developers, when they hear about, “Here’s this new process,” and the process is difficult, because it requires things that I’m not good at or things that make me uncomfortable, the way I can make it easy is if I make a tool that bypasses those difficult things and, “Now I’m doing kanban, and I don’t have to talk to anybody,” or whatever.

    People go towards that route because that’s how they make the process easy, even though that’s not actually going to make the process easy.

    Clayton:  Right. That’s how they deflect.

    Jade:  Sure. Yeah.

    Derek:  The last thing Kennelly just posted that really was interesting to me was, “Assume you got it wrong.” I think that that’s a good life principle if you always operate. It’s, “I’m the stupidest guy or gal in the room, and I’m probably doing this wrong.” To me, it sums up the whole “Inspect and Adapt.”

    If I’m constantly thinking, “I’m doing this wrong,” I have to constantly be asking myself, “OK, what am I doing wrong?” What are some of you guys’ parting thoughts here?

    Jade:  I’ve had countless number of times where I have been at the end of a planning meeting, and I thought, “Well, I totally understand what they’re saying.” Then I repeat something back, and it’s like, “That is totally wrong,” and I’m like, “OK.”

    [laughter]

    Jade:  It’s just going over things, and that kind of mentality, even when you think you really got it right, just using different language too, I think, a lot of times, you think you got something right because you’re thinking about it in a certain way using certain words.

    Then, if you say it back, ask a question, or phrase it differently, then there’s some new little thing that comes out, but I think that’s just great advice in general but also for any actual process.

    Clayton:  Yeah, I agree. Just repeating things back and explaining them in your own terms, the way you understood it is one of the best ways to gain that clarity from all aspects of this process. Interpersonal communication on your team, to dealing with the product owner, all that stuff, it really is all about that communication and finding effective ways to communicate.

    [music]

    Derek:  Until next time, we’ll see you.

    Jade:  Thanks.

    Clayton:  Thanks.

    The post Episode #12 – Step Away From The Tools appeared first on Episode #11 – Continuous Deployment and Project Management http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/scrumcast-11-continuous-deployment-and-project-management/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/scrumcast-11-continuous-deployment-and-project-management/#respond Thu, 14 Apr 2011 12:00:24 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5414 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors and Jade Meskill talk about continuous deployment and what it means to project management.  The by product being a change in …

    The post Episode #11 – Continuous Deployment and Project Management appeared first on Episode #11 – Continuous Deployment and Project Management appeared first on Episode #10 – Growing People on Agile Teams http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/scrumcast-10-growing-people-on-agile-teams/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/scrumcast-10-growing-people-on-agile-teams/#respond Thu, 07 Apr 2011 12:00:26 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5411 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Derek Neighbors and Elvis talk about growing people on agile teams. Deliberate practice Mentoring team members Practice new skills Mentorship Openmind What’s the …

    The post Episode #10 – Growing People on Agile Teams appeared first on Deliberate practice

  • Mentoring team members
  • Practice new skills
  • Mentorship
  • Openmind
  • What’s the motivation
  • Saturated market
  • Culture
  • Shared goal
  • Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Hello and welcome to another episode of the Scrumcast. I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Elvis:  And I’m Elvis.

    Clayton:  Elvis is new to the studio.

    [laughs]

    Derek:  That’s how powerful Agile is. It can bring back Elvis. So, recently attended the Agile up in the Northwest, in Portland. There were a number of really great topics. One topic that seemed to come up in a couple of different formats was the concept of growing people or mentoring people or deliberate practice to get better. I think that that’s kind of one of the tenants of Agile is continuous improvement and really trying to get better and inspect and adapt.

    I wanted to talk a little bit about deliberate practice in areas that aren’t technical. A little bit about what it takes to mentor and grow people. And a little bit about how do you facilitate developers who care?

    Clayton:  [chuckles] Easy topics.

    [laughter]

    Derek:  It would hard to find a five minutes’ worth accounting time.

    Clayton:  OK. What was the first one?

    Derek:  I think they’re all one and the same. How do you deliberately practice things that aren’t really tangibles? I think you could say, “How do you practice becoming a better coder,” because it’s fairly easy to say, “Here’s what code. Code has an output.”

    But if you say, “How do you deliberately become a better communicator, or a better estimator, or better at intuition, or better at leadership,” those things have a lot more difficult outcome to predict. How do you go about deliberately practicing them? The second part of that is, how do you mentor good team members? How do you facilitate developers that really care about the work they’re doing, not just the code?

    Clayton:  I think as far as deliberate practice for some of those scenarios that you described, it’s hard to do as part of your work day, because the chances for doing that are pretty limited.

    One that I’ve tried to do is really take it beyond my work, and look for opportunities in general life, where I can say, “OK. I’m going to sit down and I’m going to estimate the difficulty of doing this particular task or whatever it is. I’m going to sit there, and I’m going to actually measure it. I’m going to see how accurate was I at predicting how long it took me to do that or how difficult that was,” et cetera, et cetera.

    Same with communication is how am I facilitating communication in my personal private life. Am I using that techniques that should make me a good scrum master, a good scrum coach? Am I using those things to talk to my wife or talk to my kids? I think there is plenty of opportunities if you can think outside of the box on ways to practice and exercise those skills.

    Derek:  I think I agree that code is an easier one because there’s some output and stuff. I like Jay’s idea of trying to take some of that stuff, what you’re learning, and trying to do that in your normal, everyday life.

    One thing that I found that’s kind of interesting is get home from work and wife and I talk about our days and stuff, and a lot of the stuff that I do is of a very technical nature and what’s kind of fun every now and again is just kind of to humor me, she asks me, “Explain that thing.”

    So I think it’s interesting to some degree to try and challenge yourself to say, here’s this person who doesn’t know anything about this technical thing I’m talking about, but I’m going to try to explain what the goal is and what the purpose is and all those things.

    And I think that when we take that for granted because we come across, it’s like you go home and you are like, “My wife doesn’t know much about this technology, but I’m going to explain it to her,” and you’re a nice guy. But then you go to your client and you’re like, “What a jerk that guy doesn’t know anything that he’s so stupid [laughs] .” So I think that’s a good opportunity just in your daily life.

    I’ve got these friends that, they’re curious, how’s work going and things like that. And they don’t understand anything from a technical perspective that I’m doing, but it’s kind of fun time to be able to like, “We’re working on this cool project and here’s the point of it and what we’re trying to do.”

    I think seizing those opportunities probably first. It’s hard to realize when those come up, as far as communication, improving your communication. I think just any opportunity you can to speak in front of people or even just answer a question or just anything like that is just kind of finding those opportunities and then doing something with them. I think that’s a really good way to improve on those intangibles.

    Clayton:  I think those are good ways of casual practice. I think experiments are really where you going to able to have deliberate practice, so whether that’s taking a different approach to solving a problem within some work problem that you’re dealing with, or lots of people have a side project or things like that, can you apply these things to your side project or test out new theories in those ways and measure the results that you’re seeing against that?

    To me, that’s working a little bit more towards a deliberate practice of trying to improve your skills in these areas.

    Derek:  Yeah, I agree that everyone has their side projects and I think sometimes we get to a point where we have too many side projects. You go out and say, “I’m going to try all these new things and see what they’re like,” and then you’re not really doing deliberate practice at that point, you’re just kind of goofing off.

    I think that is really challenging to say, “Here’s something that I want to deliberately practice and it’s of some value to me and my normal day or whatever, I’m really going to focus on that, I’m not going to start this project and then two weeks from now hear some new other new hotness and then go strike that one in.” You know then by the end of it, you’ve got like five projects that you haven’t actually done anything on.

    I think it’s very important that you stay focused if you’re going to try and use a side project or experimentation as a way to practice or learn newer things.

    Elvis:  I think there’s a couple of pieces to this that are interesting to me. One is that I think that when I look at really high performers, they’ve learned that, to get more performance, they have to start looking at different things. If I’m a highly functioning developer, I’m really good coder, I do really well with software development, to take it to the next level, I probably don’t have to practice code.

    I have to practice other skills, listening skills, problem solving skills, communication skills, different pieces. I think that, kind of to me, step one is if you’re already a high performer is you have to start saying, “What can be a big boon for me that’s not just like a new way of doing the thing that I’m already doing.”

    I moved from Java to Ruby. Yeah, you’re going to get a lot of performance potentially out of that, but I would argue that if you’re already really proficient at Java, you’d probably get a lot more performance at learning how to better deal with customers or better understand value of product or do other things that are going to get you a bigger bang for the buck.

    I think how do we start to get developers to realize that being the best coder or the best at a particular language or a tool, why not an all‑bad thing isn’t always the best way to succeed. I really actually loved Andre Agassi’s book called “Open.” He really talked about this and one of the big things that one of his mentors really pushed on him is, “You only have to be as good as the guy on the other side of the court.”

    I think sometimes when you talk software development, you only have to be as good as necessary to really succeed more than whatever the competitor is and I think sometimes as engineers, we focus on being perfect instead of being well‑rounded enough to beat the other guy.

    In his case, the thing that he really lacked was physical stamina. He would pretty much crush everybody through the first two or three sets in a match and he would fall apart in the fifth set. The other thing is mentally he would give up. Mentally, the opponents knew how to get underneath his skin and basically pull him.

    For him, to win all the titles that he did, he really had to overcome those two things. It really wasn’t about tennis. He was proficient enough at the game of tennis. It was the other two things.

    I think, within a team, part of that is how do we identify the deficiencies in our team and say, “You’re a really good Java programmer. You’re a really great Ruby programmer, but that’s not what’s really holding you back. What’s really holding you back is not understanding the value in product or you’re not understanding how to communicate well with other team members or you’re not testing well or what is that thing that’s really keeping it.”

    So that’s part of it, and I think the other part is, in deliberate practice I think that knowing is half the battle, to kind of go GI Joe on it is, I think that if you know what you’re lacking, you can deliberately practice against it. If you just say, “I’m trying to get better,” you don’t. And so I see people all the time with a side project, “I’m going to do a side project and I’m going to try this new technology and blah, blah, blah,” and they have no intent or no purpose.

    If you took a project you already had and you said, “Hey, I have been testing, but my tests always run really slow.” Over the next week, I’m going to try a bunch of different things to see if I can get my test speed up by 20 or 30 percent, and then you successfully do that.

    Now, you’ve created a skill set for yourself that now you know that say [inaudible 00:10:00] environment enough to know what gets performance and what doesn’t get performance, which is going to add to that if that’s one of the things you’re looking at doing.

    I think we’re too much of a generalist when it comes to wanting to get better and we just say, “Oh, we want to get better, so let’s just do more of what we’re already doing.” As opposed to saying, “What’s a very specific thing that I can measure, I can do, and I can say, ‘Did I get better at doing at after I practiced it?’?”

    Elvis:  I think you touch on a couple of key things. One is mentorship, and I think that’s something that we forget, is people who are professionals, they have coaches, they have people who are helping them every step of the way to see the things that they can’t see within themselves.

    I think the next logical step from that is trust. If we don’t have trust on a team, even with our mentors, we’re not really going to listen to what they’re saying, and we’re not going to get better, because we’re not going to do what they say, because we’re just going to blow it off.

    I feel like, as an engineer in particular, is we are really bad doing that, anyway, listening to people. So how do we build the trust up between peers and our supervisors, or whoever it is that we’re interact with? How do we build up that trust level to say, when you come and tell me, you’re really doing a bad job communicating with the rest of the team.

    It’s like, “Oh man! OK. What can I do? Instead of getting offended, teach me some techniques, tell me what did I do that made this bad, so that I can start to learn from those things.” I think we’re really bad at recognizing those opportunities.

    Clayton:  I think, if you ask anyone, “Do you want to get better? Do you want to improve?” they will say, “Yeah, sure. Of course.” But then, if you say, “OK. What do you need to improve?” It’s like, “Gee, let me think about it. I’m pretty good at everything.”

    [laughter]

    Clayton:  I think, when you’re a freshman at high school, the seniors seem totally awesome, and you want to be just like the seniors. But then, when you get to be a senior, you’re like, “Wow, this is nothing special!” Then the same thing happens in freshman college. It goes on through life.

    I feel, sometimes, people get to a point where they lose sight of the fact that there are people that are better than them, but at some point in time, they just forget about that, like the mentor thing. There’s a guy that’s probably 10 years older than I am. I talk to him all the time about software development stuff, and it’s funny, because there are things where I think I totally have it figured out, I go talk to him, and he’s, “Oh, ha, ha, ha! Let me tell you about 1987.”

    [laughter]

    Clayton:  It’s like, “OK, I didn’t know about that.” There’s all that stuff. I think that half of it, like knowing [inaudible 00:12:37] , just knowing that there’s a lot of stuff out there that, one, you’re probably not very good at, or, two, you can always be improving. I don’t think anyone’s a total expert on everything.

    If you are, then you’re so far beyond anything, but as far as I’m concerned, people in my position, there’s always something you could be learning for something else, and just having an open mind and not talking that as an offense. I don’t feel like I have to know everything by the time I’m 30, or something. I’m not worried about that.

    So I’m not going to be offended if someone says, “Hey, you’re not very good at XYZ.” That’s just an opportunity of, “Hey, you did half the work for me of figuring out what I’m not very good at, so now I can go do something to improve,” but I know people who have that knowledge, or whatever.

    Derek:  Going back to the sports analogies a little bit, I think one of the things that’s interesting in sports, where you’ve got a coach. I’ll go to the Agassi example again. At one point, he stated, “All that’s not true,” when somebody comes up to him and says, “You need to change your game.”

    Then, when that person can say, “Remember when you lost the US Open to me. I’m telling you right now you’re a better player than I am, and you lost that game because I got into your head.” That was a point that he was able to say, “A, you’re right, and, B, I want to win a US Open, so I’m willing to listen.”

    One of the things I hear all the time in the software development world is we really need to be intrinsically motivated. I believe in that to a large degree, but I have to ask, is some of our struggle saying our people what’s the motivation for somebody to say, “Why should I improve?” Meaning, if there’s not a world cup to win, a gold medal to win, or something, what do you tell a developer who is really competent and pretty good, but they’re not excellent?

    How do you get them to move to that excellent point? What’s the driving factor where you say to them, “If you just did these things, Clayton, if you’d really think about how you communicate a little better, if you understood product development a little bit better, what’s on the other end of that for you if you do those things.”

    Elvis:  What’s my motivation?

    Derek:  Is this one of the things we struggle with?

    Elvis:  Yeah. I think that’s true. What is my motivation? Is it I’m going to get more money, I’m going to get a better job? I don’t know. I don’t know what that is at that point in time in my life. Can you even really picture those things?

    Derek:  Is it to get on the Google team? Is it to get on the Facebook team? We don’t have the gold medal of programming.

    Elvis:  The XP Open.

    Clayton:  I think the reality of it is that there are a lot of programming jobs out there right now, and, if you’re someone that has something like Java or .NET experience, and you’ve got some, maybe, enterprise or corporate experience doing that, you could go make a pretty good living and not really have to extend yourself very much.

    I think a lot of people just say, “You know what? I’ve got a family, and I really love playing golf and fishing, so I’m going to go to work and do my 9:00 to 5:00, and that’s fine. I don’t need to improve.” I think the reality of it is that there are a lot of people who are in a position where they have to really stretch themselves.

    Now, if you’re some factory worker, you worked on the assembly line in Ohio making brake pads, and you’re future is in question. You’re going to think, “Gees, I really need to pivot and do something different,” but I don’t think a lot of people in the software development industry are in that position right now.

    Derek:  I definitely think that is an excellent point. The number of open positions compared to the number of people able to fill them is…I think people fill jobs all the time that are not qualified for them, and they’re able to hold them for years at a time because companies just don’t have a choice.

    So what could we do in our industry to change some of that? What changes need to be made or what can you do as an organization to attract, because money only goes so far. At a certain point, throwing more money at somebody is not going to make them be more motivated.

    Elvis:  No, and, a lot of times, it has the opposite effect. I don’t know. I think that’s a really great question, and I wish I had an answer. What could we create that would motivate people to do better? I don’t know.

    Clayton:  I think culture and environment, it’s probably the big one. I think you would be surprised that people that maybe have a comfortable job that’s in a corporate setting, but, if they had something that had a more lively, robust culture and wasn’t the same old…everything’s a color of gray and beige in the office kind of deal, I think that’s really motivating.

    People don’t realize that until they’re exposed to it and they compare, “Hey, this is what I used to have, and this is what I’ve got now,” or whatever. I think culture is a big deal.

    Elvis:  I think even that still only goes so far. If you look at the culture of our company, it’s pretty progressive and pretty far‑out beyond what most people are doing, yet we still struggle with the same problems, or maybe struggle with them a little bit further down the road. We might have people who are a little bit better than a Joe Corporate guy, but it’s not going to take us all the way to the next level.

    Derek:  I think, sometimes, it’s even detrimental. In the sense of, I see a lot of young vibrant companies, radically change culture, in order to attract people. Some of that culture is, working 10 hours a week, and you’ve got a ton of play time. A bunch of things, that are great for the individual, and they may not even be all that bad for the company, but, ultimately, they are not really doing things that are pressing that individual to become better.

    Really, what they are saying is, “We’re rewarding for being a really great player, so we’re bringing you over to the Pro Bowl. Come, and play, and hang out with some other really great players, and we are not really going to ask you to stretch yourself.”

    Elvis:  You just have to show up.

    Derek:  Correct.

    Clayton:  I think, if you go back to. Some soccer team, from Europe, that plays in the World Cup, or in the Olympics, those guys I think are motivated by the love of the game, and they really want to be there, and they are a great team. But then, you go back to 1990’s Iraqi national team, I get the impression, that they were pressured. Those guys I’m sure, love soccer, but they were pressured into it.

    There’s some level, what you were talking about [inaudible 00:19:08] . We have this culture, and we are getting there, but you still need to have that unified front. The team aspect, and trust, and all those things, still need to be there, even if you have a fun culture, and video games, and flexible schedules, and all that stuff. You still need some fundamentals, I think.

    Elvis:  I think part of that is a goal. I think that’s what you’re driving at, Derek. Really, what is the goal behind doing this? If I’m working at Google, or Apple, there is a goal that I can get behind, that I might be willing to push myself, above and beyond, what I would normally do on my own.

    So, how do the average, small companies, out there, create goals that are motivating to people that are inspiring enough to say, ” Look, I recognize where I’m at, and to accomplish this goal, it’s going to take more than where I’m at. How do I get there?”

    Derek:  I think we are hitting it right on the head. When I look at Facebook right now, today, look at the number of people that have exoduses out of Google, and jumped over to Facebook. When you look at that, Google has been treading water for the last three or four years, and Facebook has really got world domination on their mind.

    I think, salary, location, everything. Environment’s almost identical between the two companies. So people are really jumping, not for opportunity, but for the vision of where one is going, versus the other. Even as a small company, it really is about, really stretching yourself towards goals that people envision, that people can get behind, and can get excited about.

    If I go to this company and I pour my heart, and soul into it, and I stretch myself, that we’re doing something amazing. When we reach that, something amazing, that’s the reward. The reward is not the culture. The reward is not the money that I made, making it. It’s the, “I was part of the team.”

    If you look back at Olympic teams, if you look back at soccer teams, basketball teams, that win championships, what they talk about, is that shared experience of, “As a unit, we walked through, and we achieve this.”

    Elvis:  I think you even see that in software teams. I was on the OS2 team, or I was on the Unix team, or the C team. That exists in software, as well.

    Derek:  Right. I was part of Xerox park. I was part of the original C team, and I think, that that’s what you have to create. You have to create the, “We’re the sense of team, and, this is the purpose that our team has.” As we achieve these purposes that we put out, that every single time, those purposes get bigger, and bigger, and bigger.

    First, maybe it’s that we have a million users, or that we’re affecting this kind of change. Each step along the way, just snowballs in momentum, and you get more, and more buying, and there’s more interest to say, “I’m willing to stretch, not because I necessarily want to get better, but I want to stretch because I want to reach that goal.” I think that’s really what it’s about, setting goals that require people to stretch, in order to reach those goals.

    Elvis:  I think that’s a good set up for our next podcast.

    Derek:  Yeah. Sounds good. A little stretching.

    Elvis:  [laughs] . All right, thanks for listening. We’ll talk to you guys next time.

    Derek:  See you next time.

    The post Episode #10 – Growing People on Agile Teams appeared first on Desert Code Camp Grows, Integrum Rocks It http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/desert-code-camp-grows-integrum-rocks-it/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/04/desert-code-camp-grows-integrum-rocks-it/#respond Tue, 05 Apr 2011 20:36:31 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5420 With over 500 people for the first time, Desert Code Camp‘s first event of 2011 was a rousing success. The Integrum team represented with 18 …

    The post Desert Code Camp Grows, Integrum Rocks It appeared first on

    With over 500 people for the first time, Desert Code Camp‘s first event of 2011 was a rousing success. The Integrum team represented with 18 of the 100 sessions and received some great reviews from the attendees. Check out the photos from the event on Flickr and stay tuned for the next Desert Code Camp coming up in the fall.

    The post Desert Code Camp Grows, Integrum Rocks It appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5417 Liz Keogh, Pat Maddox, Federico Soria, Greg Mack, Lynn Langit and Clayton Lengel-Zigich talk about a code retreat held at Gangplank. What is a code …

    The post Special Episode : Code Retreat appeared first on Liz Keogh, Pat Maddox, Federico Soria, Greg Mack, Lynn Langit and Clayton Lengel-Zigich talk about a code retreat held at Gangplank.

    • What is a code retreat
    • Sometimes wrong is better
    • Mocking, flow and learning new languages
    • Microsoft cloud offerrings and exposure to new tools

    The post Special Episode : Code Retreat appeared first on Episode #09 – Design in Agile Software Development http://integrumtech.com/2011/03/scrumcast-9-design-in-agile-software-development/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/03/scrumcast-9-design-in-agile-software-development/#respond Thu, 31 Mar 2011 21:09:21 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5405 Clayton Lengel-Zigich, Jade Meskill, Derek Neighbors and William Price III sit down to discuss design in agile software development. Challenges of design in iterative development …

    The post Episode #09 – Design in Agile Software Development appeared first on Thoughtbot article on Everyone’s a Designer

    The Mike Cohn’s “I’m always right card” is a joke from a training session with Mike.

     

    Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another episode of ScrumCast. I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Jade Meskill:  I’m Jade Meskill.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    William Price III:  And I’m William Price.

    Derek:  Today we want to talk about…

    Jade:  The third.

    William:  The third.

    Derek:  Design in Agile Software Development. I just want to start an open dialog on, what are some of the challenges, of implementing design in an iterative methodology.

    Jade:  We are talking web design specifically.

    Derek:  Lets start with web design and if you want to go beyond that we can. But lets start there.

    Jade:  It sucks.

    William:  I think my experience with design for a website or whatever is that a designer comes up with some idea of something. It’ like a waterfall. Everyone’s used to the designer comes up with something and makes this nice pretty PSD. Somebody else slices the PSD up and it turns it into HTML and CSS at some point in time, and then that becomes your web app.

    I think that’s probably like 90 percent of the people out there, their experience with doing design. When you take than and try to put that into Agile, it makes it really difficult to say, “Well, this week we’re working on this set of features, and we need to design for that now or soon or whatever,” because I don’t think that’s how most traditional designers work. They need more lead time than that.

    Clayton:  Yeah, I think from a designer’s perspective the lead time is typically considered the biggest challenge, just the pace. I think a bigger challenge is knowledge and appreciation that overlaps as much as possible between developer and designer.

    You often hear people say, “Everyone is a designer.” That makes me kind of uneasy, because I think design is a craft. It’s a skill that you have to hone over time. Anyone can hone it. Anyone can learn it. Anyone can learn to draw. Anyone can learn to think well and design. The thing that makes me uneasy about everyone is a designer is that when you say that it’s like, “Oh, so now I’m a designer today, instantly.”

    As a designer that makes me uneasy, but what I need to do is develop relationships with developers and with product owners where I can appreciate their input and work with them as fully as possible. As a developer, being involved in that process and considering it meaningful I think is often missing.

    There are some developers that will say, “Oh, yeah. I think that’s important.” But do you spend time learning the fundamentals of design and things like that? Or do you just go by what you think looks good?

    Then as a designer, appreciating the developer’s input and not just thinking, “Whatever sexy pretty thing I come up with, is the best solution” because it may not be the best solution for the process.

    It may be a huge nightmare for everyone involved. It may be far more expensive than it’s worth. You might be developing something that looks great, feels great, to the product owner but gets torn out a month later because users don’t use it. Working together and having a tight relationship, that’s the biggest challenge in my opinion.

    Jade:  Well, I think to address something you said. You’re talking about everyone is a designer. Some of that came from a Thoughtbot article that we read as a team and had some discussion about. What I think he’s…

    Clayton:  Or is it, Derek who said as a team like three years ago?

    Jade:  Yeah, yeah, yeah. Where’s your Mike Cohen I‑know‑everything card? Can you pull that out right now?

    Clayton:  [laughs]

    Jade:  Now I just lost my train of thought. Thanks.

    Clayton:  [laughs]

    Derek:  Thoughtbot.

    Jade:  Yes, Thoughtbot. So I think what they’re trying to drive at is not that everyone is a professional designer in the sense that we think but that everyone plays a role and should be conscientious of design, right? It’s not acceptable for developers to just say, “Well, I don’t know anything about that because I just write code” and crank out some really crappy‑looking interface.

    We should be at least conscientious of the basics of what we’re doing and that it should be professional and not, like I said, some hack job that you know a developer put together because you can just tell. I think that’s what they’re driving at.

    Clayton:  Yeah, so I think an analogy would be I wouldn’t be able to figure out a good color scheme and whatnot for, say, my house. I’d probably paint the walls white and leave them some stupid color, and I wouldn’t bother decorating. But when it came to arranging the furniture, I wouldn’t put the couch in the middle of the room facing away from the TV or something stupid.

    So I think there’s something to be said for maybe you’re not very good with the design theory or color theory or some of the things that may be more traditional design when you think of design are. But in terms of maybe the user interface or how things flow or just sensible decisions, I think that’s the kind of designer that everyone could be. Just take a step back and say, “Does this make sense? Yes or no.”

    Derek:  Analogy wise maybe it’s similar to, I expect most adults to be able to drive a car. I don’t necessarily expect most adults to be able to race formula one, or race NASCAR, or race the Baja 500.

    I think that there’s definitely a difference of level of, and I think there should be expectation of people who are developing software to understand, like you said Clayto, to not put the couch facing the opposite direction of the TV in a functional living room space where 90 percent of the time people will be watching TV.

    I think we see developers do that every single day, do things that make absolute no sense. I think to me I’ve got two additional questions on a design in iterative fashion.

    One is we start to see iterations become shorter and shorter. I know one time in a Scrum that was pretty much a given that a sprint was a 30 day or month long function or iteration, and now we’re seeing sprints down to, a week are pretty normal. Two weeks are probably now the standard.

    In some days we’re pushing more towards Kanban where it really is a sprint might be, an iteration might be, in a day, or less than a day. How’s it feasible to, not even talking about coming up with the design, but how’s it even functional to implement the design in that quick of a time frame.

    What are some of the challenges? We’re starting a sprint on Monday, we’re ending a sprint on Friday and we’ve got to go from design implantation in five days. What are some of the challenges around that?

    William:  I think one of the challenges is the tools. Just to make an excuse for designers, that I think is legitimate, is that the tools suck. There’s been a push to do all your design and development in the browser. Then there’s this push to handle it all CSS3.

    Do everything you possibly can CSS3. Granted the great designers out there are able to be really involved in the front end development and do minimal stuff in Photoshop. In general to work fast is difficult with the tools that we have. I would love to see that improved.

    One thing I’ve been trying to get in a project that we would do here from a designer is to as much as possible think on a feature oriented level, instead of a site wide level. To design just for what needs to be designed, you don’t need to design a whole page.

    If you’re developing a feature and it’s a widget in the corner of a page, the whole page could be a wire‑frame and that widget could be designed. The challenge there is to be consistent throughout, to have a good vision of where you’re going.

    I think a designer that has good skills should be able to do that, should be able to stay consistent throughout, to keep going within the same vein of things. To keep the look and feel going but be able to turn around a widget fairly quickly and not to get so concerned about the whole page.

    I’d be really interested to see a project go from conception to launch with that whole process. So far it’s been a challenge to see that. I think that could be a potential solution.

    Jade:  That’s one of the complaints that I’ve heard from a lot of designers. I need to understand the big picture. I need to understand the world before we can start implementing some of these designs. If we start on sprint one, let’s just say with no design in place, we didn’t do a design iteration or anything like that.

    How do you see that developing? How do you maintain that vision of the bigger picture and the bigger idea when you’re doing it week long sprints?

    William:  That’s not a rhetorical question? You want me to actually answer that?

    Jade:  No I want you to.

    William:  [laughs] That’s a difficult thing to ask. I think there’s different scenarios. Are we talking about sprint one is a true sprint one and there isn’t this backlog of things that have been predetermined. I think that’s one thing that weighs designers down is when there’s already a whole bunch of stuff predetermined, and they’re saying, “Wait, I can’t think about this. If this is going to happen, I need to think about this.”

    I think a great example of success is Tumblr, which is founded by two guys who had a division of labor between them, but they had a major overlap. They were both very invested. One was a developer and one did business and design and stuff like that as far as I know.

    And they worked iteratively. I think Tumblr has a beautiful interface. It’s very usable. It’s very simple. I don’t know what their sprints were, but they worked a portion at a time. They kept maintaining. I think whenever they came to a big impasse, as far as I can tell, where there’s going to be a major shift, that’s where you look at, “Do we refactor design?”

    I think there has to be a willingness to say, “OK. We’re going along. We’re consistent. We’re going a certain direction. OK now, we’re going to make a big leap in a different direction, or a change. We’re doing something we never foresaw doing, and so that means that we need to go back and rethink what we’ve already done.”

    I think the big fear is, “We’ll never get a chance to do that, and if we don’t got it right the first time, we’ll never be able to improve.”

    Jade:  I think that’s a little bit easier to accomplish when it’s a couple of people, and you’re personally invested in…You’re not only just the developer. You’re also a stakeholder and product owner and all those things. It’s easier to manage that relationship because the relationship is with yourself.

    In a typical scrum team of five to nine people, that gets a lot messier and a lot harder to deal with. I don’t know what the answer is to try to do design at the same time as development. You see a lot of people trying to run design ahead of the game, but that leaves some opportunity for mistakes and waste.

    “If we don’t do that story next sprint, now what?” The world changes, and we’ve got to re‑prioritize the backlog because some new business requirement came up or some new opportunity showed up, and now, there’s no design for that. Now, it’s chaos and panic.

    Clayton:  I think that as we get towards the shorter iterations, the idea of doing work in Photoshop and then slicing it and chopping them off into a lot of stuff, I think that totally goes out the window.

    The same way that I don’t think you can go forward from, today, being a developer who just writes code, you have to have other skill sets. I don’t think that you can be a designer who doesn’t know HTML and CSS.

    I think that if you can get to a point where you are getting out of Photoshop as early as possible, that gives you the ability…I think there’s something to be said for having a Photoshop mockup of something to show people because people think that way or they like that stuff.

    If you can do design upfront or at least do a week ahead, whatever sprint ahead, where you’re not designing specific features that you might not do, but if you’re doing things where you say, “Here is the overall look and feel of the site…”

    Personally, I think that if we got towards where people are using style guides where you could say, “Here is the overall look and feel of the site, and here’s the style guide for 80 percent of what you’re going to run into as you’re developing the feature,” then the developers can hit the ground running with their iteration, not having specific design for every single feature, but they could have enough to get by where they’re not going to get hung up on something.

    And if they do, it’s probably just a quick fix. They could just talk to the designer about what’s the best way to handle this. Then, now that that frees up the designer to work on…If there are specific feature things, you could do something where they’re one step ahead of you where the world isn’t going to change that much perhaps.

    William:  Yeah, I think a style guide is a great way going back to what I’m saying later about keeping that consistency. You could spend that time upfront developing that style guide of colors and padding and margins and things like that, grid, all that kind of stuff, and then live inside that model, that framework.

    Designers do great inside a framework. I don’t know a single designer that resents having a framework to work with within. It’s actually freeing. I think another thing that can speed up the process is, I agree with Clayton totally. That you ought to have that ability to be a front‑end developer at least the HTML and CSS and to do that.

    But instead of spending all your time in Photoshop, maybe spend more time with pencil and paper. One of the first things that they’ll teach you in your design fundamentals class in art college is your first idea usually seems great and almost always sucks. Sometimes your first 10 ideas suck.

    One of the first assignments I ever did was I had to do a logo of my initials a hundred times, a hundred different logos. It was bang your head against the wall annoying. After 50, 60, 70 of them, you can’t think of any new way to do it.

    As a designer, you learn to be that way. So if you go straight to Photoshop, it’s a struggle to do that because it takes time. But if you go straight to the browser, it’s even more frightening because it’s like, “Well, if I do all these and I get it but it’s not the best solution, I have to rip it all out and start over and rip it all out and start over.”

    But maybe if we spend more time as designers with pencil and paper going through that mental process of bad idea, bad idea, bad idea, decent idea, bad idea, bad idea, bad idea, there’s the one, and then go straight to the browser and implement. Or like you said, minimal time in Photoshop creating an element like a tiled background image or an icon or something like that, and then get that in there.

    I think that could be a great process for a designer where they know their style guide. They know their framework. They hash through all the ideas on pencil and paper. Then they get to the browser as quickly as possible.

    Derek:  One thing I thought that was interesting at the beginning, as you said, it’s really difficult when you see the entire backlog and to not think about everything in that backlog. I think that developers fall in that same trap. “We’ve got an architect for the 491st thing in the backlog even though we’re on sprint one.”

    In the back of my head, I’m wondering, “Is this one of the reasons that maybe Kanban has taken a little bit of frontrunner approach, and that a lot of people are liking it is that it tries to move so quick and obfuscate more than the next 10 items? Does it give a calming effect to designers and developers that they’re only worrying about the next two or three things as opposed to item number 391?”

    I think it’s part of a different discussion but interesting nonetheless. So product owners hide as much of your backlog from your developers and your designers, and you might see their velocities go up perhaps. It’s a theory. You might try it out, but you might try it out.

    The next question I have, and this starts to go into a different element of design and what we’ve been talking about here which is probably more of the visual design and that is…I hear a lot of people say and really talk about, “How do you do usability or discovery?”

    “How are you going to ask an audience of people? How do you really get these questions answered about what the product is really supposed to do and how it’s supposed to work?” I think a lot of people even ask, “What happens to the business analyst?”

    We used to have this business analyst. Now, we’re in this Scrum team. How does a business analyst go gather data for a particular user story during the actual sprint?

    If I’ve got a 5‑day sprint, how do we do discovery on what the best way to solve this problem is within a 5‑day sprint or a 10‑day sprint, opposed to being able to gather some of that information up front to understand that? Maybe talk a little bit about some of the challenges or some of the things that we lose by not doing that as much anymore as we used to, or how we can incorporate that into a shorter sprint length or sprint cycle.

    Clayton:  I guess I’ve never really been convinced that…Even if you had a business analyst and you had people that were out doing a bunch of research and interviewing potential users and blah‑blah‑blah, you’re never going to come up with a great solution on the first go anyway. It seems like you have to go take that leap of faith into Scrum or Agile or whatever and say, “I’m not going to get it right the first time, but I’m going to get something out there that we can start working with and gathering feedback on.”

    I feel like it’s like an “emperor has no clothes” thing, because there’s a lot of people that are probably thinking, “That might work for your project, but, trust me, I really need to know all these details for my project.” I don’t think that is the case in almost any instance.

    Derek:  Let me, maybe, rephrase it to make sure I’m understanding. You’re suggesting a way to combat this is to actually release shippable software as often as possible and use the shipped project as the way to collect that information. Once you get that information, reiterate and make the changes necessary, based on the feedback you got from real customers.

    Clayton:  Right. Yeah. Actually use the point of Scrum or some other process.

    Jade:  I think that’s pretty interesting. Maybe that is some of the source of the problem. We’re OK with not getting development exactly right, right out of the gate, but a lot of the projects I’ve worked with, they’re obsessed with the design being correct the first time out of the gate.

    “We’ve got to get it right. We can’t afford to mess this up, because then nobody will ever come back and use the system again.” We’re psyching ourselves out, because we feel like we’ve got to nail this thing the first time around. We completely forget to be Agile about the design itself.

    William:  Yeah. It’s a lot like the whole Flash mentality of, what, the early 2000s, which was, come out with this Flash app that’s your whole site, that’s so fun and there’s things flying and noise being made. The Internet was so new to people that they went and used it and were like, “Oh, my…You can do this on the computer? This is amazing!”

    Then, it lost luster because people were like, “I just need to get this data. I just need to know how to get there. I just want to know what the hours are. Just tell me.” Now, obviously, with mobile, everyone knows the implications of that.

    Point being is there was this ability that people had, developers and designers to shock and awe people and to get them really thrilled. That was mostly because the Internet was so new to most people. That’s over now. It’s done. You’re rarely going to put something out that is going to excite someone just because they looked at it.

    If you’re a designer, you’re going to look at design and be excited by people’s good work. If you’re a developer, you’re going to look at ideas and concepts in development and be excited by their elegant solutions and things like…

    Jade:  APIs.

    William:  And APIs. Yes.

    Jade:  [laughs] Their sexy, sexy APIs.

    William:  And their fables.

    Derek:  Shiny.

    Jade:  [laughs]

    William:  But your common user doesn’t care. I mean, they do but they don’t. It’s really a combination of everything that matters to them. Can they get what they want quickly? Can they get through it easily? Is it confusing or not? Does it look good? Meaning, good to the layman, decent, not look bad. Does it look broken? Does it look inviting? Does it communicate the brand?

    Those kind of things are the big pile of influence on whether or not a user wants to keep using it. The big temptation, I think, with design is that a lot of times, product owners that have an eye for design and designers want it to be so attractive and so exciting that anyone who looks at it is going to be really impressed.

    I don’t even think it’s an ego thing most of the time. It is sometimes, but most of the time, it’s a business value thing. It’s like, “I think that if this gets perfect, then people will be thrilled and excited and think it’s the best thing that’s ever happened.” But it’s not that simple. Users don’t work that way.

    Clayton:  I think another big part of it is that if you’re the product owner for some start‑up or even just a product owner, maybe you don’t understand the technical details, but you know what looks good and what doesn’t, according to you. I think that’s why everyone gets so caught up on the design stuff.

    It’s like, “I don’t really know how this workflow should work, and I don’t really understand what you’re doing in the ‘backend,’ but I can look at this and say, ‘Wow, that’s really pretty.’ There’s other websites that I like, and they look kind of like this, too. The people that I want to attract on my website, they look at those websites, too.”

    It’s just something…It’s simple. It’s a high‑level thing, but everyone has an opinion about it. Product owners generally don’t have an opinion about how you implemented that technical thing, but they have an opinion about how it looks.

    Jade:  I think it’s a trap, too, because it might look really good, and it’s a total disaster from a functional standpoint. It might look shiny and pretty, but when you go to implement it, users just can’t understand it. “But, man, it looked so good on that comp that I got.”

    Derek:  I think the biggest trap that people fall into is, everything was an overnight success. If you look at ‑‑ I use an example of Twitter. If you were to look at Twitter today, it looks pretty reasonable. It’s got some pretty sexy UI elements. It’s got some nice UX layouts, where they’ve got some sliding drawers and some techniques that are a little bit more cutting‑edge.

    If I were to try to create something that competed with Twitter or had functionality similar to Twitter, I wanted a timeline feed, perhaps. And I said, “I need my timeline feed to look just like Twitter, because people will not accept a timeline feed that’s not as good as Twitter’s timeline feed.” What we forget is, rewind back five, six years to when Twitter started and look at what Twitter’s timeline…

    Jade:  Look at the first release of Twitter. Ugh. [laughs]

    Derek:  The new, and I’m doing air quotes here, Twitter didn’t come out until a few years ago, after or, not even a few years ago. Less than 12 months ago, after they’d already taken almost $60 million in funding.

    I think, with it, that people get obsessed on, “I have to compare myself to the thing that is fully funded and has been out for a better part of five, six years and has hundreds of millions of users on it. That’s my benchmark.” Instead of saying, “We’ve been working on something for three months, and we want to release the first version within the next quarter. We need to iterate over how our users use this product.”

    I think you’re absolutely right. People get way too fixated on, “We have to ship finished, and we can’t iterate, but code wise, you can do whatever you want. If we need to add a feature here and there, that’s great.

    But the minute we put a feature out the door, it has to be perfect, because we can never come back and visually make it different, functionally make it different, or aesthetically make it different, or people are going to say that we failed and we didn’t work.” I think that that’s a mistake.

    Jade:  I think there is some challenge in that, though. Because the Internet is moving at such a fast pace, there are some pretty revolutionary things that come out, that do become almost mandatory, that do become expectations of how things should work. I think that is a challenge that we’re always going to be faced with, is how to keep up with the things that are now mandatory, that six months ago were nice‑to‑haves.

    William:  I agree with you, Derek. I think, I would challenge a little bit the idea that people, product owners in particular are comfortable with not having all the functionality as well.

    Derek:  Yeah, I agree that a lot of them don’t do that.

    William:  You go, “I want to go up against this x thing that’s been around for six years.” They’ve had six years to develop all their features. When I come out of the gate, I want to be at par with them, in six months.

    I think that’s a major issue for design, because what you end up doing is just, as quickly as you can, designing everything. It over‑accelerates the pace of development. You shouldn’t be trying to develop. The one that product owners love to reference, Facebook.

    Jade:  Facebook. Yup.

    William:  In six months.

    Jade:  But it’s already been done, Billy.

    William:  “But it’s already been done.” Yeah. So why are you doing it again?

    [laughter]

    Derek:  My idea’s different.

    William:  Here’s the thing about really great design. Going beyond the skin of it, going beyond even the couch analogy, is, it takes time to really understand whatever your problem is ‑‑ however you want to look at it. Your problem, your problem‑solution analogy, your friend, your creation, whatever. It takes time to sit with it.

    Going from an iterative perspective, allowing things to come out of the gate less than perfect, and building from the ground up. I’m not talking about slowing down development or doing it deliberately more slowly, but increasing the amount of releases you have, and accepting that you’re not going to make a world‑changing design on day one.

    What that does is, it allows your design team to really get to know the brand the way the users encounter it, to get to know the way the users want to use it. You get that time to realize, what people are doing with Twitter is not what we thought they were going to do with it. The way people are using this or that product, this was not what we expected, but this is what they believe we are and what they want us to be for.

    Then, it allows you to go back and do what new Twitter did when they said, “We’re not a social network. We’re an information network. From now on, that’s what we’re focusing on. We’re going to design for that.” Then, you can come out with something that’s sexy and impressive and great.

    Jade:  And functional, and accomplishes the business goals.

    William:  Yeah. It’s not contingent on success, that you come out of the gate at that point. Which is the big fear, is that if we don’t come out of the gate at this level that’s way up here, then we’re going to fail, because no one is going to want to look at it. But you don’t even know where people are at with it yet.

    Derek:  Thank you, guys, for your time. I think, hopefully, in the next quarter or so, we’ll do another one of these on design and talk about some of what we’ve learned and where we’re going with it and maybe invite in a couple of outside guests and see how some other shops are doing it. Until next time, we’ll see you. Thanks.

    The post Episode #09 – Design in Agile Software Development appeared first on Integrum Team To Speak at Desert Code Camp http://integrumtech.com/2011/03/integrum-team-to-speak-at-desert-code-camp/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/03/integrum-team-to-speak-at-desert-code-camp/#comments Tue, 29 Mar 2011 15:19:21 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5395 On Saturday April 2nd, the Phoenix community will come together for their 6th Desert Code Camp and once again the Integrum team will be out …

    The post Integrum Team To Speak at Desert Code Camp appeared first on Desert Code Camp and once again the Integrum team will be out in force not only to attend but to teach a number of sessions.

    Check out the list of sessions below from our team and come learn from the community at Desert Code Camp:

    HTML and CSS
    You Don’t Have to be a Ninja to Learn HTML5! – Clayton Lengel-Zigich
    CSS 3 – Steve Swedler

    Game Development
    Facebook Game Architecture – Steve Swedler

    AJAX/Javascript
    Javascript 101 – Drew LeSueur
    CoffeeScript – Drew LeSueur
    Introduction to Node.JS – Drew LeSueur with Chris Matthieu of Tropo

    Mobile
    Making Android Development Less Painful – Kyle Stewart
    Intro to Windows Phone 7 Development – Chris Coneybeer
    Building the Desert Code Camp Windows Phone 7 App – Chris Coneybeer
    Playing nice with other Android Apps – Roy van de Water

    Agile
    Everyday Extreme Programming (XP) – Clayton Lengel-Zigich
    How to Manage Self Organizing Teams – Jade Meskill

    Software Development
    Git: Intro to Version Control – Roy van de Water
    Ruby on Rails 101 – Clayton Lengel-Zigich

    Business
    Sales for Non-Salespeople – Chris Conrey
    Using LinkedIn for Personal and Business Gain – Chris Conrey
    Managing Client Expectations – Chris Conrey with Matt Brooks of DevFu
    Big Shop vs Small Shop – Chris Conrey with Matt Brooks of Dev Fu

    The post Integrum Team To Speak at Desert Code Camp appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5390 Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Derek Neighbors talk about what it means to be done with a story. What is done? Works on my machine. Real data. …

    The post Episode #08 – Done is Done appeared first on Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Derek Neighbors talk about what it means to be done with a story.

    • What is done?
    • Works on my machine.
    • Real data.
    • Workflow verification.
    • UI/UX completeness.
    • Responsibilities.
    • Whole product thinking.
    • Planning Meetings & Acceptance Criteria

    Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another Scrumcast. I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Derek:  Today we want to talk about something that a lot of teams struggle with, and that’s the concept of “Done is done”. I guess to start off with Clayton, what do we mean when we say “Done is done.”?

    Clayton:  That’s a hard one to sum up in one phrase. There’re a lot of things that go into it, but I would say that it’s basically, if you want to go with more of a book answer, you want to delivery potentially shippable software. That’s an easy definition for that. Obviously you need to expand on it.

    Derek:  There’re a lot of exceptions depending on the size of your team, and what team functionality is. You might draw a different line in the sand of what is done. Meaning, maybe I’ve got a Q and A team that is entirely separate from my team so done is done for. My team would be making sure that we’ve done A, B and C, and we’ve handed it off to the Q and A team, and when we’ve handed it off to the Q and A team it’s thereby done.

    For today’s conversation we want to talk about “Done is done,”, is that a single team is responsible for the entire chain all the way to deployment. What does it mean to be done in order to deploy? What we see a lot is a developer will say “Oh, this is done.”

    “Mrs. Product Owner, it’s out there. It’s totally ready to go. Go check it out.”, and a product owner comes in and they go to the website and say “I don’t see how to…Where do I get to this”? “Oh. Well, you have to enter like this super magic URL to get there.” “OK.” They go in and they pull out some data, and they press a button, and boom the software blows up, and then there’s a defect.

    Obviously not done, but thought it was done. Today maybe let’s go over what are some things that hold developers back from being able to give product owners features that are actually done the first time.

    Clayton:  Take your maybe less savvy, what you want to call it, developer not doing any automated testing. Those people in my experience…I got into the industry. I’m going to do some feature, and I’m going to spend a lot of time manually going through their entire process. I know how to make a testing, but one way that people go wrong with that is they choose the golden paths. It’s a phrase I’ve heard before.

    I know that I need to fill in on these fields, and I know that if I put a two highway number in this field, it doesn’t going to work, so I normally put ten in that field. I know that I need to press the submit button, and I know that when I get to the next page, there’s a bunch of [indecipherable 03:18] , but there’s this little link down here. If I click on that, “OK, sweep, it’s done.”

    They’re just lazy in that regard. They don’t think about it in terms of how someone actually is going to use it. I would say for the more savvy developer, that’s actually writing automated test.

    It’s really easy to do the same thing when you’re testing. You have different test cases, but you still do the golden path for a lot of those. You don’t think to put in much crazy test cases, maybe you shouldn’t. You don’t necessarily wanting to catch every single edge case, but it’s still easy to do that.

    Also, you get the false sense of security of while this feature is tested when you actually maybe deployed of that. The product owner is looking at it. They don’t do the same except that you did in your test obviously. You get the ball of the software.

    Derek:  I definitely think that that’s one of the biggest things that…at least in web development. I don’t even say we see this slot in mobile development. It’s not actually deploying to target platforms and do the testing.

    It’s the classic, “Hey! This works in my environment. Everything is great,” the works on my machine syndrome, so going along, blistering along, everything is great, and I handed off, and the product owner complaints that it just doesn’t function at all. You scratch your head and say, “How the hell? I’ve worked on this for four hours, and I’ve not seen anything remotely close to what you’re talking about.” You’re completely crazy.

    You go to the diversion of the operating system on the mobile device or their particular mobile device where you go to their web browser and you go, “Oh, oh, oh. I forget about that dependency or whatever.” That is probably one of the lowest hanging pieces of fruit that developers can do to get a better done is done and that is, make sure that you’re deploying to a solid target platform.

    If it’s multiple platforms, we see this as mobile, if you have to support multiple versions of the operating system or multiple versions of a browser, they are actually doing deployment and a test with those and before you ask that product owner, do the same thing. Because invariably, they will pick the one platform that you did not choose to look at, in order to do their testing.

    Clayton:  Going along with that would be appropriate data set. It’s really easy when you’re developing some feature, and you’ve got your two dummy users in your system, and everything’s kosher. Then you’ve got to deploy it to the target platform, or the staging server, even in production. Everything goes great when I looked at it, all the functionality works, but it’s unusable.

    A big part of done is done, is that from beginning to end of the whole feature, it needs to be usable in a reasonable way. Not something that requires tricks, excessive waiting, or all those kind of things. You really have to be sensible in that regard.

    Derek:  That’s a big part. Even automated testing sometimes even makes it worse, but regardless, it exists even without automated testing. That’s the whole sensible workflow chain. What does this feature look like from cradle to grave?

    We get too hellbent on, “We’ve got these great regression tests, so when I go add this new piece of functionality, a feature that builds upon new feature, I’ve already tested the original feature. I’m testing the feature that I’m building that piggybacks on top of this feature, I don’t need to go walk through the visual workflow.”

    In reality, the product owner gets to it, and they say, “I did this, and I did that, but there’s no way to get to this other thing short of having to go the long way around the fence.”

    The other one I see a lot of times is missing roles. It works great as an admin, but as a guest it doesn’t work. It’s supposed to work because you’ve built this funky thing on. Making sure the UI and the UX are reasonable is a big part of making sure that things don’t come back.

    Clayton:  A lot of that, the UI, UX stuff…A lot of developers probably put on their I’m‑a‑developer hat, and they don’t want to get into the front end or UX mentality. Even if you read some basic stuff about UX or information architecture, or whatever those people call themselves these days, even if you knew basic stuff about that, it’s really just a common sense thing.

    I know common sense isn’t very common, but there’s a lot you can without really having to exert a lot of effort on your part while you’re developing the feature. Most of those things, in terms of the UX stuff especially, and the workflow, comes from communication with the product owner, and planning. That’s probably one of the biggest ones that prevent developers from delivering something that is actually what the product owner wanted.

    Derek:  What I see a lot, especially with people who don’t have as much experience or don’t have confidence, is they’ll have a planning meeting with the product owner, they’ll get some reasonably good wireframe, UX, UI, the designer would get involved to do that.

    They’ll go to start implementing the feature, and they’ll know the workflow is broken when they’re doing it. Instead of raising the red flag back up to the product owner, or to somebody else on the team who’s responsible for UX or UI, and saying, “This feels really clumsy. You’re asking me to select 100 items here, but if you try to select more than 5, it takes forever. Isn’t there a better way we can do it”?

    A lot of times, developers shirk that responsibility, and say, “I’m not the designer, I’m not a UX guy. I’m just going to implement what was given to me, and what was discussed.” The first thing that happens is the product owner or the designer might even sign off and say, “Yeah, it looks great.” Then they give it to the first user who actually has to select 100 things out of that 1000, and goes, “This is the worst piece of software, I can’t use this.”

    The developer instinct is, “I knew that.” If you knew that, you need to speak up. That’s a big part of it as well.

    Clayton:  More often than not, you probably run into a situation where you don’t wireframes necessarily or lots of well thought out interface elements, and things like that.

    When you get into that mentality, especially when people feel like they’re crunched for time, they try and use the simplest possible solution. Going back to the Web application example, if you don’t really have a whole lot of design elements in place, or a style guide for instance, and you’re just winging it, it’s really easy to crap out a bunch of stuff on this page. And it totally doesn’t make any sense. Submit button is this thin little thing that’s way off on the right‑hand side.

    When developers use a site like that, you tell them, “Go use this antiquated government website,” all they have to say are all these terrible things. “Oh, I’m so much better, and I would never do this.”

    But when they’re crunch for time or even when they’re not crunch for time, when they’re just trying to get the feature done, they say, “Hey sweet, I got the feature done. It totally works. I can click through it,” even though for the product owner or maybe a not so technical person or especially a user, it’s like, “What’s this huge thing I’m staring at? I have no idea how to do anything. I don’t know how to start.”

    Derek:  Yeah. Another part that comes along that is, sometimes we get such tunnel visioned on doing iterative development that we only think about the current iteration, the current feature set that we’re on. We forget those entry and exit points and some of those workflows along it.

    Maybe I’ve got some form of object that’s got some attributes on it. It goes through some form of a process to do calculations or to do something, and somebody asked for this brand new piece of functionality. He says, “Hey, I need to be able to calculate this new thing. I need a new attribute, and based on that attribute, I need to calculate new values. After 30 days, you need to go check this other attribute and re‑tally something.”

    So we go, and we add the attribute to the table. We update the calculation. We write this really fantastic test. We ran all of our regression test, and we say, “This is awesome. The feature’s implemented. We’re golden.”

    Then the product owner goes and says, “Look, I’ll go and check that.” And the first thing they do is, “Um, there’s no way to add the new value to the attribute.” We’ve totally forgotten that, “Oh yeah, we inserted that in the database, and we inserted that in our test without ever having a screen going and updating the screen for that object to allow for that attribute.”

    Sometimes it’s as simple as asking another person on the team that’s not part of that process and say, “Hey, can you just take a look at this and run through it really quick.” And you find that kind of stuff right away because the first thing they say is, “Where do I put that new value”?

    Clayton:  Right. Two big questions that would be huge wins for most teams would be, when you’re discussing a feature with the product owner, being able to say this question of, “How do I get here, and how does the user get here? Then after they do this thing, what happens next”?

    You can imagine a system where you built some system that takes a report that someone generates. They type up some values in some text file or whatever, and they are supposed to be able to put this report into the system. Then there’s some black box that happens, and then it spits out some report.

    People forget to ask, “Well, how do they get the report in the system in the first place”? because that’s the sort of thing that I think developers…They would develop the system, and they would say, “Oh well, I’m going to use my shell script that I wrote to import this file and parse it and blah, blah, blah.”

    Then they’ll tell this little old lady user who works part‑time, “Yeah, just use your shell script.” “What”? Then when things come out, it’s like, “Oh, your report was generated. Where do I get it”? “Oh yeah, just SFTP into this thing, and find it directly with your username.”

    It’s like, “Whoa, shouldn’t that get like emailed or put in a public place or something”? Those kinds of things. The, “How do I get here? What’s the entry point”? And then, “What happens next after I clicked the feature”? Those are two very important questions.

    Derek:  A lot of these things obviously can be addressed during planning meetings, meaning that if you’re asking a lot of these questions during your planning meeting, you’re getting good quality wireframes. You’re having those visual discussions and those entry and exit points, those workflows.

    It avoids a lot of problems which comes to the last thing and that’s…At least here in Integrum, we do something where we have acceptance criteria, and when we walk through the product owner during planning meeting, we basically say, “What are the terms that consider this complete”?

    I think that access a checklist at least on a functionality perspective for both the product owner and the developer to say, “I really shouldn’t be telling the product owner that this feature is complete. I know what’s done, these things that we agreed upon at the planning meeting.” It also allows the product owner to say, “Let me go through this checklist to make sure that the developers said what we agreed upon.”

    Though, I don’t think that’s enough. That’s a really good start, but I still think ‑‑ what we talked about ‑‑ is the design acceptable? Is the UI acceptable? Do we have the proper entry and exit points? Do we have a sensible workflow? Have we tested it on production? Did we have somebody else on the team test it on production? Is it shippable? Is it deployable? There’s a lot to it.

    I guess what I’m saying is, developers do not be so lazy when it comes to the point. A lot of times we try to push all the responsibility back to a product owner or to a QA team. In 20 years at software this has been problem in every single company I’ve been with.

    Even with the QA team…The QA team says, “Listen assholes, you guys don’t ever test anything before you give it to us. What’s wrong with you”? I’ve heard product owners say, “Why do you keep asking me to check this out when it doesn’t even remotely close to work”? How do we get to the point where when we got this checklist or this formula of “these are all the things we need to do” that we actually do it?

    Clayton:  That’s a hard thing to overcome in the sense of…Until you see the value that you get from that, it’s difficult to get yourself in that because it is extra work. Most people or a lot of developers have this idea of “That’s not my job. My job is to write code and implement the feature, and your job is to test it or whatever and make sure that it works, QA team people.”

    But if you look at it from some other aspect of your life…For instance, my wife and I, if I say, “We have all these dishes in the sink, and we need to put them in the dishwasher or whatever.” And I ask my wife, “Is that something you’ll be able to do while I go do this other thing”? And we’re exchanging things.

    She’s going to be pretty upset if every single dish I’ve ever put in the sink that week or that day or whatever has tons of fruitcake onto it. So there are certain things you’d have to do so that the next person in line…And I know that the benefit I get from taking that extra step is totally worth it.

    I know that if I follow the checklist, and I make it really easy for the product owner to sign things off, and I make it really easy for them to say, “I was able to go and demonstrate that this feature worked. It looks perfect. It’s just what we talked about,” that’s a huge win for me because now that that feature is actually done, I can move on to the next thing or I can complete some other story.

    It’s not this idea of, “I’m going to do a whole bunch of work, and then tell you halfway through the iteration, “Go take a look at 80 percent of the work that I’ve completed.” Then you find out, “Oh well, this is broken. This is broken, this is broken,” all that stuff and I have to go back and fix it.”

    If I have this confidence that when I say something is done, it actually is done, I don’t have to think about it anymore, I can just keep going. So getting people to understand that value, that’s a way that we can get people to start adapting the practice of following that checklist and really thinking about these things.

    Derek:  That’s just a good area that almost every team can improve upon. Again, whether you have a QA team, whether you are the QA team, whether you rely on a product donor or a third party to do verification for you, this is something every team can inspect and do some adaptation to and really improve their quality level, it’s independent a code. It’s really a discipline based improvement and so we just encourage you to check it out. We hope to see you next time.

    Clayton:  Thanks.

    The post Episode #08 – Done is Done appeared first on Episode #07 – Everything You Wanted to Know About Pairing On a SCRUM Team http://integrumtech.com/2011/03/scrumcast-7-everything-you-wanted-to-know-about-pairing-on-a-scrum-team/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/03/scrumcast-7-everything-you-wanted-to-know-about-pairing-on-a-scrum-team/#respond Thu, 10 Mar 2011 12:00:48 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5383 Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Derek Neighbors discuss numerous items around Pair Programming on a SCRUM team. Is agile just for teams? Pairing good traits Pitfalls found …

    The post Episode #07 – Everything You Wanted to Know About Pairing On a SCRUM Team appeared first on Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Derek Neighbors discuss numerous items around Pair Programming on a SCRUM team.

    • Is agile just for teams?
    • Pairing good traits
    • Pitfalls found while pairing
    • Good pairing habits
    • Pairing in a chaotic environment
    • Various pairing techniques
    • Physical pairing station setup
    • Remote pairing
    • Dealing with distractions

    Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another episode of the “ScrumCast”. I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Derek:  Today, we’re going to talk about a couple things. First, we’re going to field a question, and the question is, “Is Agile just for teams, or can it be used for solo workers also”?

    Clayton:  My experience with this is, I’ve done a lot of stuff, just personal projects, goofing around basically on the weekends, and I try and use some scrum process. The thing I’ve noticed is that, I feel like at work I’m a very disciplined person. I have lots of discipline in that regard, and blah, blah, blah.

    When I try and do it by myself, I feel like either I have no discipline or I don’t have enough. In my experience, I’d say that if you’re not a very disciplined person, it’s difficult to make it work. There are some benefits from it as far as…everyone has an experience with a personal project that just languishes and goes on forever, and you never finish it. There’s probably a lot to be said that Scrum could help you out with, in that regard. I don’t feel like I have the discipline to do it, myself.

    Derek:  A lot of agile techniques work fairly decent. In a solo environment, a lot of the principles do unexpectedly iterate. Using iterative approach, time‑boxing, continuous improvement, all of that stuff translates perfectly. When it gets a little bit more to estimating and doing some of the heavier parts of the methodology, it’s much more difficult to be disciplined about that, in a solo environment. It’s feasible when it works, but you have to have a lot of discipline to do it.

    Today, I wanted to talk a little bit about pairing. Clayton, as a team lead you do a lot of pairing on interviews, here at Integrum, and you get to see a lot of pairing. I wanted to talk a little bit about what you think are some traits that make somebody a good pair.

    Clayton:  In pairing the most important one is being engaged. That’s a broad term that means the concept of being a good listener, paying attention, being interested in not only what’s going on, but also…when’s someone’s driving, or they’re solving a technical problem, it’s easy for them to get in that mindset. You have to be able to switch back and forth, and switch modes. If you’re the person, you’re not driving, you’re the passenger, you need to be able to keep focus on maybe some certain processings, or the non‑technical things.

    Obviously if you are driving, being able to get into that mode and not worry about those things. Let someone else take care of that for you. I think that’s a big one for me. Outside of that, I would say that being a good pair is one of those things where I don’t think there’s a real good book answer for it.

    If you were to try and do something by the book or write a list of things that you can do to be a good pair, that would be really hard to come up with that list. It’s more of a matter of good communication, good soft skills, those kinds of things. I think that’s most of it.

    Derek:  What are some of the pitfalls? You get to pair with a lot of people who are new to pairing. What are some of the things…when you see two people that maybe have never paired before and don’t necessarily have good habits, what are some of the common things that you see where people fall down in pairing?

    Clayton:  The driver‑passenger role is one that people don’t do a very good job of. Especially people that are new that say, “I’m a coder; I’m a programmer.” They have this idea of what that means to them. Then when they’re not driving, there are some people that fall in the subset of, “I’m going to micromanage every decision that you make while you’re driving, because that’s not how I would do it.”

    There are some people that say, “Oh sweet, you’re doing all the work. I’m going to kick back and check my emails,” or whatever. Even in the pairing interviews, we notice that people, obviously they’re there for an interview, they’re trying very hard to be polite and engaged, and all those things. You can definitely tell when they get the keyboard, you mention something, “Oh hey. What about this?” and they can’t even hear you.

    I think people don’t have that, not listening when they’re driving. Other than that, pitfall wise, people fall into categories of being a bad driver; just going down some rabbit hole ignoring what the other person is saying. The passenger plays an important role in guiding you, especially if they say, “Hey. This doesn’t look like a good path to go down.” Bad drivers just ignore that.

    The one that we see the most is probably bad passengers. I think body language is a huge thing. If you ever want to evaluate people that are pairing, just look at the driver and the passenger. Usually the driver is leaning forward, because they are using the keyboard.

    Most of the time, you will find the bad pair who are the bad passengers, are the ones that are leaning back. They don’t have their shoulders facing the workstation, that kind of thing. The people that are leaning forward, have the same body posture as the driver, those are the ones that are probably more engaged.

    Derek:  In dealing with a lot of people that are new to pairing and getting them up to speed, what are some things that you found have been successful in getting people up to speed with the concept of pairing in a fairly short amount of time?

    Clayton:  Brief overview of the role of the driver and passenger. A lot of people view pairing as, “Half the time, I’m working. Half the time, I’m watching someone else work.” They don’t understand what really they’re supposed to do when they’re not actually coding. Getting people to understand that is very important.

    After that, I would say that there are bunch of games that we’ve had some good experience with. Ping Pong Pairing where one person writes the test, say a failing test, and then, the other person has to write the implementation for that to make the test pass. That’s a great way for both people to be engaged and both feel like they’re doing something.

    Another one would be switching off at predetermined intervals. Say you set a timer for 15 minutes and it’s not this thing where the timer runs out and the person that’s driving says, “OK, cool, give me another two minutes, I’ll finish this up.” It’s literally, 15 minutes is over and slide the keyboard and mouse over and the other person has to just pick right up.

    You can’t…it’s very obvious that you’re not being effective when the first 15 minute bell goes off and the other person is like, “Oh. What was on the menu?” They don’t have any idea. I think that’s a really good one to keep people engaged. I’m trying to think of some of the other games we played.

    One that’s good, actually, for a lot of people have a criticism of pairing, is that they feel like, “Well, I’m really good at what I do. I’m a really good developer. I don’t want to pair with people that aren’t very good because it slows me down.” One thing that you can do to improve those people on your team that may be more junior or don’t have your level of expertise, which you probably don’t have any, but you think you do.

    But, those people, to train them or to help them out, would be to do the distant passenger. A lot of times, I see that when people are in that situation, pairing the person that’s the more senior person will be micromanaging and driving and basically, telling them, dictating what to type.

    “You should write this method. You should return it this way. You should use the turner in, blah, blah, blah. If you talk at a higher level and say, “Well, we want this model to be able to…we want this instance of this object to build or respond to this method. I want it to return a hash of these things.”

    When you speak at a high level like that and then, you let the person go do the implementation. Whether or not you’re doing TDD even, but let the person do the implementation and then, maybe set aside some time at the end to do some kind of code review of like, “OK, see how you did that. You solved the problem. Here’s how I would have done it.” Have that discussion. I think that’s really helpful when you have a mix of skill levels.

    Derek:  One of the things we see, obviously, operating on the Gangplank because it’s pretty noisy in here. We’ve got a lot of people pairing in close proximity. One of the things that a lot of people ask me is, “How can your guys be developing in such louder, chaotic environment”

    Maybe if you could explain a little bit about what it’s like to Pair Program in an environment where you’ve got lots of people Pair Programming in fairly close proximity and whether that positively or negatively affects productivity.

    Clayton:  I’ll give an example, recently one of the guys on the team got everyone little Nerf guns that shoot darts. For the past two weeks, it’s been like every day, it’s people shooting darts.

    You could be sitting there, trying to solve some complex problem and darts whizzing over your head. That’s the nature of the environment. I found that a litmus test for me is if I feel like I’m distracted or I hear people talking about, “I can’t get anything done today,” I feel like that’s not good pairing.

    Or there’s a problem with their pairing because I notice that when I feel like I’m doing a good job and have an engaged pair and we’re really hammering things out, it’s almost like all that stuff just doesn’t matter anymore. It’s really easy to block it out, probably more than people would think.

    You’ll notice that when people aren’t pairing, a lot of times people will put on headphones and try and get into the more traditional coder mentality of, “I’m going to go into my own little world, so I can’t hear or see anything. Don’t bother me kind of thing.”

    When you’re pairing, you, obviously, can’t do that. When you’re pairing, you don’t really need to do that as much, in my opinion.

    Derek:  What you’re saying is you like to look deeply into the eyes of your pair and have some tantric pairing going on and nothing else in the world exists except for your pair?

    Clayton:  No, it helps if you have a little mirror, so you can glance at each other’s eyes every now and again. You put that above the monitor and you’re good to go.

    Derek:  I think that’s something interesting. One of the things that I’ve seen people talk about are some different pairing techniques in the way of physically setting up how you are pairing, whether that be some face‑to‑face pairing, some potentially pairing without even a laptop or a machine in front of you to solve the problem.

    Then, to go to actually pair to implement the problem. Have you tried any of those things and if so, what are some of your thoughts on those?

    Clayton:  I tried the face‑to‑face pairing at one point in time. That was quite a while ago, I would say, before I was…I was trying things out. I don’t know. I hadn’t made my mind up really on pairing yet.

    I found that to be distracting. It seems like the face‑to‑face stuff would be good and maybe it just was the person I was pairing with, but I found like it was more convenient to be looking up and away from what we were doing and doing a lot more conversational talking. That was probably the down‑side to that.

    Other than that, as far as different pairing configurations, one technique that I had to do working with someone, this is easy to do when you’re pairing. People have a certain different degrees of personal space and that kind of thing. I had noticed that every time we sat down at the desk, this person would always sit in the middle and so it’s like I found that towards the end of the day, I would be pushed over to the side.

    We got to a point where we drew some lines on the desk with some tape and we said, “OK, here’s our zone where we need to be and if we drift out of this zone, then one of us is going to be uncomfortable because we can’t see the screen or whatever.” That brought us actually much closer physically together in that regard. Then, we also made a rule that the keyboard had to be in a certain spot on the desk.

    That was a way of balancing that stuff out so we could say, “We’re slightly off center from the desk and from the keyboard and the mouse and everything, but we’re still comfortable.” That cut a lot of problems out because we didn’t realize how much time we were spending nudging each other left or right and repositioning yourself through the day.

    Once we set that ground rule, it was easy to be able to get going, keep going.

    Derek:  That’s a good segue into the physical set‑up. Tell me a little bit about what your optimal pairing station is. Is it a one keyboard, one mouse, two keyboards, two mice? If you’ve tried some different variations, why you prefer one over the other?

    Is it single screen, double screen, preference of one over other?

    Clayton:  As far as the screens and work station set‑up, personally, when I was maybe younger, there was this dream of like I want to have 10 screens in front of me and that seemed so cool. Then, as I’ve gained more experience, if I just had one…we use iMac. The 27‑inch iMac, that’s got a big screen on it. Sometimes people load up that screen. Traditional set‑up is that screen and a secondary monitor. People load that stuff up with just tons of things.

    I feel like it’s distracting for one thing. When I’m sitting on the left side of the station, I like big fonts and everything, but I have a hard time reading specific code or terminal or whatever that’s on the complete opposite side of the desk.

    In that regard, I would prefer to probably have one monitor. As far as the keyboard stuff, I personally like two keyboards.

    The reason I like that is because two keyboards, two mice. I’ve noticed that when you’ve got someone who’s pretty strong willed and they want to go down their own path, and they’re pairing with someone that maybe isn’t, maybe someone that’s more willing to go along with them, it’s harder for that weaker willed person to grab the keyboard if they want to take control.

    If they have their own keyboard, it’s really easy to just press a key. It’s amazing how much you can screw somebody up by pressing a key or two keys. It’s kind of, “I don’t think we’re doing the right thing.” “No, trust me this is right. Let me keep doing”

    You press command‑TAB and switch to whatever the other application is and bring it in focus and then, it’s like…it’s a total…it’s an easy way to have this stopping point of, “OK, put the brakes on. Let’s talk about this.”

    Without having to physically, grab the keyboard from somebody.

    Derek:  What you’re saying is dual keyboards prevent pair assaults?

    Clayton:  There you go, yeah.

    Derek:  One that a lot of people are probably asking at this point, remote pairing. Thoughts on having to pair remotely.

    Clayton:  Every programmer that I’ve ever known has this ideal that, “My job is totally over the Internet, so I can work super effectively at home.” We tried that when people were sick or people are away or whatever.

    It’s really difficult unless you’ve got…even with like the screen sharing and remote control that like, say iChat gives you or remote desk software or whatever, that stuff is really difficult because you get a little bit of lag and you don’t realize how much that effects the way that things look.

    If someone is scrolling a web page and you can’t see things anymore or whatever, that’s really distracting. Then, I would say the good thing about it is that when you’ve got two people who potentially can control the mouse or the keyboard, having like a code order where you actually have to physically stop everything and say, “Mouse,” or whatever, so you can get control because, obviously, two people are remotely doing that, isn’t going to work.

    I would say that’s nice, but overall, the negatives outweigh the positives as far as remote pairing is concerned.

    Derek:  The last question really is distractions. How do you deal with distractions in two ways? One distraction would be somebody else on the team needs you for something. Instead of just interrupting one person, now they’re interrupting an entire pair. If it takes a certain amount of time to get back on task when you’re interrupted and now, you’re affecting two people.

    What are some ways or techniques to be able to minimize that? Then, the second one is physical distractions, in the terms of, I’m going to say, near‑term problems, laptops, smart phones, things that, I think, as a passive pair are really tempting to get into.

    What are some thoughts on mitigating those two things?

    Clayton:  I would say that as far as…that one first, as far as the passive stuff where you…sorry. When people are distracted or tempted to look at their phone or their laptop or whatever, that’s something that is up to the pair.

    Definitely, you’ll have situations where, especially if you have someone that’s driving that doesn’t really want to be pairing, when the other person looks at their phone, it’s like, “Thank God, I don’t have to worry about this person anymore.”

    If you’re the kind of person that is…personally, I think that’s disrespectful when you’re pairing, you don’t want the other person just goofing off because then, you get into the mindset of, “Wow, pairing is really useless because I’m just doing all the work and this person’s surfing the Internet.”

    People try and make a lot of excuses about it where they say, “Well, I need my laptop so that I can do research,” or, “I need my phone so that I can check my email because I don’t want to miss anything,” or whatever.

    That’s a real concern, but it segues into the idea of solving the first problem where I feel like having some kind of consistent timer, that totally solves that problem. If you say, “We’re going to to set a timer every 15 minutes, we’re gonna switch pairs.” If someone walks over to you and says, “Hey, I’ve a question.” You can reference the timer and say, “Well, I’ve got 10 minutes left.” Usually 15 minutes or less, there’s nothing that’s so important that it can’t wait that much time.

    If you’re worried about missing an email from a client or something, it’s pretty easy to say, “OK, we’re going to work for every 15 minutes, and then every 15 minutes I’m gonna check.” At most you’re going to go 15 minutes without seeing it. Which for most people is probably acceptable. I’d say that having the timer is really good and that helps solve both problems.

    [music]

    Derek:  We’ll see you next time.

    Clayton:  Thanks.

    The post Episode #07 – Everything You Wanted to Know About Pairing On a SCRUM Team appeared first on Episode #06 – Community Questions http://integrumtech.com/2011/03/scrumcast-6-community-questions/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/03/scrumcast-6-community-questions/#respond Tue, 08 Mar 2011 02:24:25 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5380 Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Derek Neighbors field questions about SCRUM from Twitter. Reading recommendations for SCRUM Basics. How do I recognize a dysfunctional team? How do …

    The post Episode #06 – Community Questions appeared first on Clayton Lengel-Zigich and Derek Neighbors field questions about SCRUM from Twitter.

    • Reading recommendations for SCRUM Basics.
    • How do I recognize a dysfunctional team?
    • How do I deal with team members with wildly different schedules?
    • What is the agile response for a Request for Proposal?
    • What happens when the team is agile but the company is not?

    Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Welcome to another edition of the ScrumCast. I’m Derek Neighbors.

    Clayton Lengel‑Zigich:  And I’m Clayton Lengel‑Zigich.

    Derek:  Today we are just going to take a few questions that we have gotten over twitter in the last few days. The first question up is…Do you have recommendations on particular reading materials that are good for people to learn the basics?

    Clayton:  The basic stuff. I think there’s quite a bit of good information on the Scrum, the Wikipedia entry for Scrum. That gets you some of the glossary and some key terms, and then other than that…What are those two…there are a couple of Mike Cone books?

    Derek:  Yeah, I think Add, Estimating, and Planning by Mike Cone and User Stories Applied by Mike Cone are both great kind of planning and user story gathering books. James Shore has Agile Practices or Art of Agile Practices, something similar to that that I think is a really good overview of a number of different agile methodologies including Scrum.

    The Agile retrospective books by Esther Derby is another really great book on retrospectives. The good news is, there is much stuff out there from just a pure content blogs and websites, strong just going to ScrumAlliance.com or just ScrumAlliance.org or any of the XP extreme programming site, both have a lot of downloadable content available.

    Clayton:  Yeah, the interviews and articles, especially the interviews on Infoq.com whenever they do anything with pretty much any technology or methodology.

    The person that they interview always has to do some introduction, because you know, under the assumption that whoever is watching this episode may be know what Scrum is so that person always will do a good introduction. I found this would be helpful.

    Derek:  The next question. We have got a couple pretty good ones here, so we are trying to target these to be 15 minutes or less, you can catch them right at the end of work or walk around the block.

    This one might get a little bit deeper, but I think it is something that is good fodder for discussion and that is…how do you recognize the dysfunctional team?

    Clayton:  Yeah, that is a good one. There are lots of different things. One of the things at least in my experience is that, a good sign of a dysfunctional team is when you have got lots of…I guess maybe passive aggressiveness is a good way to say it where team members want to either some problem or something that some team member’s having with another, or with a process or something like that.

    There is lots of grumbling, all solve your problem and I’ll also make some kind of back handed comment about it and maybe I won’t help you out later when you need something, that kind of stuff. That happens a lot. What about you Derek, what do you think?

    Derek:  It’s Patrick Lencioni has a great book out there: Five Disfunctions of Team and you can map those directly across to agile principles as well. Anything that exhibits a lack of trust which is hard for some people to tell, that there really is a lack of trust but the one that I see more often than not are…the two biggest I see are Fear of Conflict.

    Nobody wants to say the hard things or to step out or to make any kind of waves, it’s “I think you’re wrong.” “No I’m not wrong.” “OK, I’ll let it go.” To me that’s a red flag that there’s something deeper going on.

    The best stuff gets made when people have a healthy debate an argument about how to solve problems. The other piggy bank on to that is the absence of commitment or accountability, like I’ll do anything possible to shirk accountability and all of those are rooted in fear and there rooted in fear because there’s lack of trust for the people around.

    Clayton:  An important part about the trust aspect especially that book just in general Lack of Trust, a lot of people misinterpret that to mean that, that for instance, either I trust or don’t trust Derek to do his job.

    But what the book, what they’re really trying to get to is that you have the trust required to feel vulnerable so that you don’t feel…if I really trust Derek and Derek trusts me then I’m OK saying, “Hey, you know what? I screwed up” or I don’t know what I’m doing or I don’t have the means to solve this problem. It’s really that’s the important part that other team members can trust each other and be vulnerable with each other.

    Derek:  It’s hard to build that stuff too. I’d like to say that time is one of the only things that can really make that happen. That’s probably one of big things that new adult themes fall into is that they want to gel and to have all of these.

    They look at this is what a high functioning high velocity team is made up of and they want that overnight, and truth is that those teams get built over sometimes a matter of years in working with people. That’s a tough one to do.

    Next question, this is one that I’m curious to hear. I’d love to hear even outside opinions of this, so when we post this, if people can comment on this, it’d be great. That’s, “I’m facing having a team with wildly differing work schedules, I’m finding this makes estimating and stand‑ups more challenging. How do you handle that”?

    Clayton:  Having very different schedules on a team is going to make things difficult. A lot of people have that problem mostly because people have this desire to have different schedules. Maybe they’re used to that, or they want certain things. I don’t know that there’s a really easy way to overcome that problem other than to get people on more similar schedules.

    That’s going to be painful, and some people aren’t going to like that, obviously. It is very difficult, especially when the team’s out of sync. We’ve experienced this. If you’ve got people that are coming in much earlier and leaving much later, there’s this overlap for that. You also have people taking lunches or breaks at different times.

    You get to a point where the team as a core only has two or three hours out of day where they’re actually all together, working in the same space with the ability to answer and ask questions with each other. That’s really challenging.

    Derek:  My gut reaction is there’re the legalistic answers, and there’s the more fluid answer. The fluid answer is, “What impact is it having on your team”? If you can work all different schedules, and have virtually no impact on the team, then it’s really not an issue. I’ve yet to see anybody really do that, but I don’t want to be facetious and say, “It’s just not possible.”

    It might be possible on some really highly functioning teams. I’ve seen it tackled one of three ways. Either fear of conflict, and nobody deals with it.

    The other option is the middle‑of‑the‑road option, the best‑for‑everybody mentality that is to have some form of core hours where you say, “From 10 to 2, or 10 to 3, everybody’s got to be in the office, and everybody goes to lunch at the same time. You can come in earlier, you can come in at 6 and leave at 2, or you can come in at 10 and leave at 7, but you need to be here from 10 to 2.”

    That can work depending on what your work environment’s like, the type of work you’re doing, whether you’re doing XP pair programming, and the hours of your customer. Are you doing internal product development? Are you doing consulting? A lot of that has a lot of play into it. If you’re dealing with external teams, you have to get on a schedule with some of those external teams.

    The last way I’ve seen it implemented is a much more rigid approach which pretty much says, “This is the time that the entire team works, come hell or high water. Take it or leave it. We work from 7 to 4, 8 to 5, 9 to 6, or 10 to 7, or whatever it is. It’s expected that you’re there within those times.”

    There’re pros and cons to each one of those approaches. It depends on what type of work you’re doing, who you’re doing it with, and how you do it. It depends on the pluses and minuses of each of those choices.

    Let’s see, two more, and they’re really good questions. The first one is, “What is the agile response to a request for a proposal, i.e. RFP, when the true answer is, we don’t know time or cost until we are done”?

    Clayton:  I’ll let you field that one, Derek. You’ve got more experience in that regard.

    Derek:  It’s really difficult. In the RFP, you can really document or describe your process, and how you handle that. There’s a few estimating techniques where you can take an RFP, and you can derive some kind of high level guesses or estimates on those.

    You can say, “Do we think we can do something like this based on the RFP that’s been put in place”? What you do at that point is you’ve got the Triple Constraint, so you can say, “We can do it for this price with this feature set in this time frame, assuming that you don’t change anything.”

    If they’re going to stay completely rigid on that then everything’s good to go, if they need to be able to change, if they need to be able to change the scope, you can do that, but you just have to know that there’s a cost adjustment for that.

    What we’ve seen some success in, in responding to RFPs, is our approach of user stories and creating a backlog and responding to the RFP with a backlog of estimates and then having lots of language talking about how that relates to scope change, that’s a much more appealing process for most larger companies than the change‑order requirement hell that they’re normally put in from a contract perspective.

    The hard part of that is getting a contract written that speaks to those scope changes without having to have the inordinate amount of documentation around every little scope change.

    The last question, what happens when the team is agile but the company is not? What are the first steps to get agile practices at a strategic level?

    Clayton:  One thing that a lot of people on a development team or even at a scrum master, project manager level, they see a lot of success with what they’re doing and people can get stuck in a rut where they can’t think of any ways that translates up the food chain.

    One of the things, I feel like if you’re on an agile team and you’re developing things and providing lots of good value and doing things in a good amount of time and you’re doing all these things, you’re reaping all these benefits, the benefits that you’re seeing, those directly translate to business goals or some business value.

    Those are things I think that it’s just a matter of finding some way in your organization that you could translate the successes that you’re having with your product development into, hey, here are things that we’re doing, and here are the benefits that we’re seeing, and this is how those benefit you.

    That’s one way to drive that change, from the bottom up. Here’s all this great success we’re having. If you guys could make these incremental changes, keeping in mind that you have to make baby steps that would be a good way to drive that change up the food chain so that you can start experiencing that more across the organization.

    Derek:  I’ve yet to meet a CEO that isn’t interested in the fundamental principles of agile. I think the problem that we generally have as practitioners is we have to change the language we use when we talk to C‑level executives. Most of them want to be able to use the word “pivot.” They want to be able to pivot their company in a different direction.

    I’ve yet to find one that’s not interested in being an innovator or being able to be ahead of the curve. Agile practices allow them to do that a lot more simply. It’s a matter of getting them to say, hey, the same way that we’re able to take a feature backlog and create that feature backlog and break it down into sprints, and to tackle those sprints, and allow ourselves to change as need be, you can do a very similar thing from a strategy perspective.

    You can say, what’s the goal we’re looking for? Can we break that goal down into smaller segments or smaller chunks and still have a long‑term goal? But if two months into our strategic plan, our biggest competitor does something completely different and out of the water, and we need to change course, we’ve got the ability to do that.

    A lot of big corporations fall into this. They basically create a five‑year strategic plan and it takes them four years to update it, so they get totally submarined. If you look at a Blockbuster and a Netflix comes along and has a totally different model, the inability to basically pivot and say, can we compete in that market, took them probably three to four years to even get their product out, and at that point, it was so far behind and had become so irrelevant.

    They spent so much money trying to get that product to market that they basically submarined their stores. Again, I don’t think there’s a single CEO that’s not interested in being able to be nimble or pivot or you name it, but I think we just have to stop talking in technical terms and start talking in marketing terms or in strategic terms to get them to understand that these very same principles can be applied to the work that they do as well.

    That segways in. Hopefully next time we’ll talk a little bit about scrum outside of software. Can you use scrum to manage an organization? And with that, we’ll see you next time.

    The post Episode #06 – Community Questions appeared first on Episode #05 – Multi Team Retrospectives http://integrumtech.com/2011/02/scrumcast-5-multi-team-retrospectives/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/02/scrumcast-5-multi-team-retrospectives/#respond Thu, 24 Feb 2011 12:00:04 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5370 This episode was part of the original episodes recorded more than 18 months ago. Derek Neighbors and Chris Young discuss the difficulty in doing retrospectives …

    The post Episode #05 – Multi Team Retrospectives appeared first on Derek Neighbors and Chris Young discuss the difficulty in doing retrospectives when you have a several small teams.

    • Getting specific information
    • Dealing with multiple small teams (2-4 people)
    • Problems doing retrospectives using the lowest common denominator amongst teams

    Transcript

    Derek Neighbors:  Here, at Integrum Technologies, we are a consulting company. We, generally, work in pairs. As part of working in pairs, we generally don’t have more than two or four people per team. But we’ve, generally, got five or six different pairs working together. We do weekly retrospectives. We do them as a team instead of as just the two people working on a project, or the pair working on a project.

    That brings about certain difficulties in writing the retrospective. I’ve got Chris Young our Scrum master here. We wanted to start doing a daily or weekly podcast, where we just talk about some of the Agile hurdles that we have here at Integrum, that we deal with. This is one that’s bid us over time, so we thought we’d talk a little bit about it.

    Chris Young:  Hi everybody. Today was the second retrospective that I’ve run. What I try to do is actually ‑‑ like Derek said ‑‑ we have a team, I think there’s 12, 13 people in our company right now. Those are broken down into smaller teams right now of two people each on each team.

    We’re running into a problem because ‑‑ I won’t say it’s a problem yet ‑‑ I’ll just say when we do retrospectives we have to bring in everybody into that retrospective. The problem that I’m finding is that it’s difficult as a scrum master to address specific team problems when we’re trying to pull information out of the whole team.

    I think probably, Derek, you can relate to that too. The idea is that you, actually, set up an environment in which problems that maybe you’re seeing throughout the week are bubbling to the surface on their own, certainly requires a lot of courage and openness on your teams.

    We face this problem, like if I have one team that has a specific problem, for instance if a team is having trouble. Say we have one team that was not meeting the velocity that they had signed up for the week or not meeting the commitment that they had signed up for, and none of the other teams were having that problem, and this is a total hypothetical situation.

    Do we really want to concentrate the whole retrospective on the one team’s problem, or do we have to hope that it just sort of comes up by speaking in generalities? From what I’ve seen, most of our retrospectives are dealing a lot with kind of generalities, best practices, high‑level types of things, and we’re not getting down to into the data and the directly working with what happened this week specifically. There’s a lot of different hindrances that keep us from being able to do that.

    Derek:  I definitely think that in doing them you have to play to the lowest common denominator, so you have to play to the weakness or the strength that all the teams as a whole exhibit, instead of being able to target just what one single team is doing.

    I think the thing that is difficult is trying to do a retrospective with a single pair and an off‑site customer, is nearly impossible. It’s very difficult if you’ve got just one pair of programmers that are part of a project. In doing a project, it’s very hard for them to be brutally honest with each other. Meaning that they either aren’t able to see the problems that they are facing because they can’t see the forest through the trees, or they don’t have the courage to speak up and maybe admit to things that they know are currently going on.

    Putting them in with several other teams helps create that courage and maybe helps visibility, but the problem is it doesn’t allow you as a facilitator to have that laser‑like focus specifically to a project.

    I think one of the things that becomes hard is, I don’t know the proper way to address that. We talked about trying to do individual retrospectives with other team. Of course, that’s hard now as a facilitator if you’ve got to run five different retrospectives. Additionally, it’s very difficult for people to have the courage to be honest when it’s basically just you and your pair and a facilitator. You’ve got a three‑man retrospective that is also makes it fairly difficult.

    Chris:  It’s difficult also in terms of scheduling, if I were to try to do that. Also we do get a lot of benefit from the whole team retrospective. That’s where a lot of our engineering practices and things are established. In reading in the Agile Estimation Book Retrospectives ‑‑ I’m sorry, what is it? The Agile Retrospectives?

    Derek:  With Esther Derby, I believe?

    Chris:  Yeah. That, generally, I’d be coming in with data say, “Hey, our code coverage is dropping.” “Hey listen, our” whatever. I’d, actually, have some data and we could talk specifically to that. Is it sort of embarrassing to say, “Hey, this team. Let’s talk about this team’s problem. Let’s all focus on them.”?

    I don’t think that’s going to meet with a lot of success either. We did make this move to bring on somebody as full time Scrum Master. I’m realizing more and more that my engaging people during the week is going to more important when it comes to those types of things.

    I have to have some courage myself to be able to bring people together, and see what we can do about those types of problems. From what I’ve been reading about, generally, the best type of situation is we actually have Scrum Master per team.

    That’s silly when we’re running two person teams as well. I’m still not exactly sure exactly what the…

    Derek:  That’s one of the other difficult things. I really played with it one time, maybe two weeks where we do retrospectives as entire unit, and inter‑mix the teams, and mix the teams up and try to get some honest courage, hit those lowest common denominator problems and really pick up our engineering practices, and pick up our Scrum practices and XP practices.

    Then, maybe every third week, try to do a retrospective that highlighted each team as an individual team as part of the exercise, even though it was facilitated all at one time. The problem is that that becomes fairly difficult to find exercises that work that only have two people providing the input to that data.

    Maybe, the right answer is we do something like that, but instead of being a data gathering, retrospective, maybe we take some of the data that has been gathered as part of retrospectives over the two previous weeks, plus data that we’ve seen or harvested or discussed, not during retrospectives, and bring that in. Then try to facilitate those one‑on‑one with each team for part of the retrospective, and have it be a little more pointed.

    Of course, the difficulty is some of these start‑up projects that we deal with only run four to eight weeks. If you’re only doing that every third week or every fourth week, you’re halfway through a project before you’re potentially dealing with issues that could dramatically improve, either the quality of work or the pace, or any number of things, revolving around the project.

    Chris:  It seems like we’re having some difficulties mapping best practices in Agile because we are a very traditional consulting shop in a way. We want to do short‑term projects. We want to try to get as close as we can to fix bids, so that we can bring people in and that does make it difficult, having two people teams.

    If we had something internal, if we were a product company or something like that, then we would have some time to work these things over time to let things play themselves out. It seems like here at Integrum, we’re really, really analyzing.

    We, really, respect Agile. It’s a deep part of our core values, but finding, almost like a hybrid of certain aspects, so that it can work with consulting, less open‑ended type of release cycles and things like that.

    Derek:  I think that one of the beauties of doing pairs and then, doing either one pair of pairs or two pairs of pairs, and capping it to no more than four people per project, actually, makes this extremely Agile and extremely nimble in bringing on new customers. Even existing customers, big projects, allows us to be really nimble in how we use people and use resources on the team to solve problems.

    It almost allows us to go so fast that it’s hard to have some of the structure that is required in Scrum to the continuous improvement. Just like if you doubled your velocity, you might drop testing or might drop other good engineering practices.

    I think, in some ways, by having these very small, nimble, Agile teams, in some ways, we’re not going so fast that we’re dropping ability to have some of those sanity checks to come back and say, “How can we improve, and how can we continue and improve with what we’re doing?” I think those are things that are going to be a challenge for us for the coming months.

    Chris:  Absolutely! Hopefully as we do this we won’t just be talking about things that we have no idea how to solve, so we can help you guys out. In this case we would definitely like some good advice and help on how to manage lots of small teams in one retrospective.

    Derek:  Absolutely! I think a big part of this podcast for us is to talk about things that we struggle with as much as the things that we are doing well. Anytime you are doing something professionally or as a hobby, you get stuck in your own isolated world, and you don’t know the pain that other people are having, and the solutions they have had.

    Sometimes you get great answers to problems that you have and other times you hear everybody else is having the same problem. It makes you feel a little bit better that you are not the idiot who cannot figure out how to crack the particular nut.

    We are hoping we can do a little bit of both, we help you solve some of your problems, and you help us solve some of our problems. At the worst we realize that there is a lot of tough problems out there that have not been solved yet. More than anything we just want to talk about what we are doing and hope you guys do the same thing.

    [music]

    Chris:  All right, thank you guys.

    Derek:  Thank you.

    The post Episode #05 – Multi Team Retrospectives appeared first on Special Episode : 2011 Predications for Agile http://integrumtech.com/2011/02/scrumcast-special-episode-2011-predications-for-agile/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/02/scrumcast-special-episode-2011-predications-for-agile/#comments Wed, 23 Feb 2011 01:36:55 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5367 In this episode Clayton Lengel-Zigich solicits predictions from Alan Dayley, Perry Reinert, Jade Meskill and Derek Neighbors about what 2011 has in store for Agile. …

    The post Special Episode : 2011 Predications for Agile appeared first on Alan Dayley, Perry Reinert, Jade Meskill and Derek Neighbors about what 2011 has in store for Agile.

    • What is the most promising concept/idea?
    • What do we see in the way of Agile community?
    • Who will be the biggest winners/losers?
    • What are new things you plan on trying this year?

    The post Special Episode : 2011 Predications for Agile appeared first on Episode #04 – Programming as a Craft http://integrumtech.com/2011/02/scrumcast-4-programming-as-a-craft/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/02/scrumcast-4-programming-as-a-craft/#respond Fri, 18 Feb 2011 00:21:45 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5360 Derek Neighbors, Jade Meskill and Clayton Lengel-Zigich discuss Dan North‘s article “Programming is not a Craft“.

    The post Episode #04 – Programming as a Craft appeared first on Dan North‘s article “Programming is not a Craft“.

    The post Episode #04 – Programming as a Craft appeared first on Springboard Series Project http://integrumtech.com/2011/01/springboard-series-project/ http://integrumtech.com/2011/01/springboard-series-project/#respond Thu, 27 Jan 2011 23:24:04 +0000 http://integrumtech.com/?p=5342 When Microsoft needed assistance building a Windows Phone 7 application to give users of the Springboard Series website access while on the go, Integrum was …

    The post Springboard Series Project appeared first on Microsoft needed assistance building a Windows Phone 7 application to give users of the Springboard Series website access while on the go, Integrum was perfectly placed to assist.

    Microsoft wanted to provide a easy way for users to stay up-to-date with the latest news and resources from the site. In addition, they wanted to group and present these resources in a way that mimicked what users saw on the site so it was familiar.

    Chris Coneybeer was assigned the project, having joined the Integrum team in October to lead Windows Phone 7 efforts. “I really enjoyed using Agile methods to deliver the project on schedule to our client, as well as keep them involved and excited during the process.”

    Integrum adapted the website using the new WP7 platform to provide a seamless transition for users. This included finding the best ways to present and group data inside the application, along with building a favorite system into the application to entice users. Combine that with the easy to use search function, giving users a powerful tool in performing their daily jobs.

    “We faced a few challenges designing and laying out the app so that it was easy for users to navigate,” said lead developer Chris Coneybeer. “The new Metro interface and standard UI controls allowed us to give the users a really simple flowing experience, with a wealth of information at their fingertips.”

    By having the Springboard for Windows app on their phone, IT Professionals will have the ability to see the latest news, articles and videos anywhere. Content is separated into the same Lifecycle Stages as on the website: Discover & Explore, Pilot & Deploy and Manage.

    The WP7 application also provides the ability for users to search TechNet based on Keywords, Knowledge Base article IDs and Event/Error Codes which gives them a great tool for working in the field. Another great feature is the ability to save favorites inside the application for when users come across a great video, article or find a search result you want to keep for later you can.

    The Springboard app went live on December 23, 2010 after Integrum’s first submission to the marketplace.

    The post Springboard Series Project appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5305 Working at Integrum can occasionally feel a little bit like attending camp. Back in the fall, the Integrum team decided to switch to an 8am-5pm …

    The post Breakfast of Champions appeared first on Yoli’s Cafe to serve breakfast each morning for staff members.

    Each morning, Integrum employees walk through the back gate to access Yoli’s, anxious to see what delicious delights lie in store. Menu items range from oatmeal and sweet rolls to biscuits and gravy. The atmosphere occasionally takes on the aura of camp, as tables are moved to form one large table with benches for seats.

    Taking care of your employees means they will take care of you. Partaking in french toast and sausage at the same time is just gravy.

    The post Breakfast of Champions appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5314 We all make resolutions for the new year – lose weight, connect with old friends, train for that half-marathon. What about being the best at …

    The post Good to Great appeared first on

    Classes focus on current pressing topics and issues raised during retrospectives. Topics include issues like Commitment Driven 101 and Feature Development.

    “I attend the classes because they provide a deeper understanding of our process,” said Director of Client Development, Chris Conrey. “I have better interactions with clients as a result of the professional development because I better understand what the developers are doing, and more importantly why.”

    The post Good to Great appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5245 When Kevin Goldman requested Integrum build the Savage Love application, the assignment must have appeared fairly typical – build a web application that can be …

    The post Savage Love: Not your average app appeared first on Kevin Goldman requested Integrum build the Savage Love application, the assignment must have appeared fairly typical – build a web application that can be easily ported to other platforms. Integrum mobile developers Kyle Stewart and Roy Van de Water had no idea what they were in for.

    The Savage Love mobile application allows fans of the column by the same name to access Dan Savage’s unique discussions from any platform.

    “You’d never know what you’d read or see each day,” said Roy. “It made the development process interesting to say the least.”

    Kyle and Stewart tested on an Android phone, with development taking only two weeks. “Savage Love shows the power of mobile browsers,” said Roy. “Savage Love proves it’s a viable medium for Android applications.”

    Additionally, the sleek design of the application by Goldman Designs assisted in keeping development time short. “We were fortunate to work with a company that provided great design,” said Kyle.

    The Savage Love application is currently in beta, and will be available XXXX.

    The post Savage Love: Not your average app appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5249 Providing revolutionary software development that focuses on a human driven approach must start with our employees. We value constant communication and exceptional efficiency, values that …

    The post A peek inside Retrospective appeared first on talking stick‘ to indicate their turn to provide ideas, promoting respect of everyone’s feedback.

    Once the columns are full, voting follows to narrow down the feedback to what the team feels is most important to work on. Three or four topics are chosen and then open to discussion. Team members have an opportunity to clarify their opinions or ask questions. After another voting session, one smart goal is chosen for the next week and the team breaks out into smaller groups to focus on solutions. A SMART goal is defined as: specific, measurable, attainable, reasonable and timely.

    Retrospective ends with team members sharing appreciations – thanking other team members for their help during the past week.

    Having a time for team reflection, such as a Retrospective, is a useful way to allow your employees a time to be honest with their coworkers, as well as keep the team solution driven.

    The post A peek inside Retrospective appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5243 Long time client Valley Metro relies on Integrum to keep their technology up-to-date with their user’s needs – whether that’s a customer or administrator. The …

    The post Valley Metro Improves Usability appeared first on Valley Metro relies on Integrum to keep their technology up-to-date with their user’s needs – whether that’s a customer or administrator.

    The majority of the work was on improving administrative management of the site. Developers Steve Swedler and Andrew Bowerman made management of routes easier, as well as provided more options for administrators.

    On the public end, consumers of the site will notice updates to the interface to make it more user friendly, with a redesign by IMP Designs.

    “This project is a chance to make the system more about the customers and userbase, as well as correct any issues,” said Steve.

    The post Valley Metro Improves Usability appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5164 This week, Integrum was recognized as one of the Top 100 Companies by the Chandler Chamber of Commerce. The Chandler 100 distinguished award program honors …

    The post Integrum joins Chandler 100 appeared first on This week, Integrum was recognized as one of the Top 100 Companies by the Chandler Chamber of Commerce. The Chandler 100 distinguished award program honors the most influential leaders in the Chandler business community for exhibiting corporate responsibility and having a positive impact on Chandler’s economic development.

    Integrum employees are actively involved in promoting the Downtown Chandler community. Located just south of Historic Chandler, Integrum frequents local establishments for team outings, staff lunches and client meetings. Additionally, CEO Jade Meskill sits on the Chandler Cultural Foundation, while co-owner Derek Neighbors is board member for the Downtown Chandler Community Partnership.

    Gangplank, the collaborative workspace founded by Integrum was recognized as part of the company’s efforts to impact Chandler’s economic development. The workspace brings in small companies, local talent and thought leaders to spark creative growth in downtown.

    The is the second time Integrum has been recognized by the Chandler Chamber. Earlier this year, the City of Chandler named Integrum as the Small Business of the Year.

    The post Integrum joins Chandler 100 appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5073 We talk often on our site about the collaborative workspace, Gangplank, in which Integrum is based. The benefits of working in such a space are innumerable, …

    The post Gangplank anchor becomes client appeared first on talk often on our site about the collaborative workspace, Gangplank, in which Integrum is based. The benefits of working in such a space are innumerable, not the least of which is an engaged audience looking for our services.

    AuthorityLabs, SEO software and simple rank monitoring service founded by Chase Granberry, has been a long-time Gangplank member. Chase came up with for the idea for Authority Labs at a Gangplank event in October 2008, as well as secured funding from Gangplank, LLC for his venture.

    Chase has seen his business grow over the last year and when it came to expand, he looked inside the Gangplank community to Integrum.

    Due to such tremendous growth and attracting large client deals, Chase needed expand his core infrastructure to offer new web services and scalability for his clients.

    Jade Meskill had already developed much of the infrastructure that allowed the site to achieve such rapid growth. AuthorityLabs and Integrum have worked to design an easy SEO software that’s simple enough for the small business, but scalable enough for the enterprise. Integrum and AuthorityLabs have also created features that make the software perfect for agencies.

    “A lot of the growth has to do with the simplicity of the design,” said Chase. “The fact that the system is flexible enough that an enterprise can pull insights out of the volume of data that they have.”

    The post Gangplank anchor becomes client appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5151 We have recently expanded our mobile development services to include Windows Phone 7, in addition to iPhone and Android. We have been fortunate enough to …

    The post Windows Phone 7 appeared first on Windows Phone 7 training event at Gangplank. Chris is also the Vice President of the South East Valley Dot Net User Group.

    Many of the Integrum staff attended the Windows Phone 7 Unleashed event and had an opportunity to develop a small app for the software. Jade Meskill, CEO, sees a lot of potential in development on the Windows mobile platform, and is excited to be able to offer a full range of modern smartphone platform development services for our clients.

    The post Windows Phone 7 appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5054 Integrum CEO Jade Meskill set out to create an enjoyable and productive work environment early in the company’s history. Quoted in the Arizona Republic back …

    The post Best Places to Work 2010 appeared first on Arizona Republic back in 2008, Meskill expressed his desire to “build a place I and everyone who works with me wanted to come to every day. I like to make people laugh and have them enjoy coming to work.”

    That goal has been recognized by the Phoenix Business Journal in this year’s ‘Best Places to Work’ awards.

    Integrum employees enjoy an open work environment, free of cubicles, to encourage interaction and exchanging of ideas. The pairing technique utilized by staff varies the work day, in addition to providing practice for employees looking to improve their skills in certain areas.

    Of course, the access to video games doesn’t  hurt either. Between stories, Integrum employees challenge each other to quick Street Fighter and Off Road battles. Even software issues are addressed with a little bit of fun. Staff members with a bug are required to wear a sombrero until the error is fixed.

    And at the end of a hard week, Meskill and Integrum co-owner Derek Neighbors, treat employees to a team lunch at a location of their choosing. The Friday ritual let’s the team wind down, promotes camaraderie, as well as reminds the team their hard work is appreciated.

    The post Best Places to Work 2010 appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5056 SoChurch approached Integrum with a unique idea on how to change they way churches interact with their members and the outside community. SoChurch seeks to …

    The post SoChurch: Building a communications platform appeared first on SoChurch approached Integrum with a unique idea on how to change they way churches interact with their members and the outside community. SoChurch seeks to streamline communication for churches by being a one-stop shop for websites, email marketing, as well as member engagement and event management. All they needed now was a software company to build the system.

    Designer William Price saw the project as an opportunity to really hit a niche market. “The application SoChurch hired us to build takes what’s successful about social networking and applies those ideas to a new market.”

    Of course, building an application with that many moving parts isn’t easy. Essentially, Integrum was tasked with building a large application that has as many features as Facebook, in only nine months. Programmers Chris Irish and Robby Colvin rose to the challenge, with the website and application set to launch by November 30, 2010.

    The post SoChurch: Building a communications platform appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=5071 Goldman Design, on behalf of Superpages, came to us looking for a complete interface redesign of their iPhone and Android applications. Superpages, which provides information on local …

    The post Redesigning Superpages mobile appeared first on Goldman Design, on behalf of Superpages, came to us looking for a complete interface redesign of their iPhone and Android applications. Superpages, which provides information on local businesses, also includes the SuperGuarantee, a program that allows users to customize their searching through frequently used listings, voting on businesses and mapping locations.

    Roy Van de Water and Kyle Stewart worked on the Android application. One of the few projects to do so, the developers followed Googles’ styling guide to rebuild the app from the ground up. Integrum also did significant work on the iPhone application, providing the client with a comprehensive mobile solution under one roof. Much of the design for the applications was done by Goldman Design, while Integrum completed implementation.

    The iPhone and Android applications are available for download from the AppStore and Android Market.

    The post Redesigning Superpages mobile appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=4806 originally posted by Jade on the invalid binary error after a several hour fight to determine what the issue was uploading a client’s app: Invalid …

    The post iTunes Connect: Invalid Binary Error appeared first on invalid binary error after a several hour fight to determine what the issue was uploading a client’s app:

    Invalid Binary.

    Gee thanks Apple for that insightful, descriptive message. Surely with all your advanced binary scanning, static analysis, Application Uploader, etc. all you can give us is a most unhelpful “Invalid Binary”?

    If you are suffering from “Invalid Binary” issues, and have done everything short of sacrificing small farm animals, try this trick.

    If your Entitlements.plist file was generated with an version of Xcode prior Xcode 3.2.3, remove Entitlements.plist and regenerate it using Xcode 3.2.3. You don’t need to change any of the options generated on your new Entitlements.plist file, just recompile and submit again. Hopefully this helps someone.

    This is a part of the cryptic “etc” Apple speaks of with the possible reasons for an “Invalid Binary” app rejection reason.

    The post iTunes Connect: Invalid Binary Error appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=4793 We had the great fortune last weekend of seeing our logo on national TV, thanks to a client of ours, Digital Qpons. The team at …

    The post Integrum Makes NASCAR Debut appeared first on Digital Qpons. The team at DQ sponsored Denny Hamlin’s #15 Toyota Tundra at the Pocono Mountains 125 in NASCAR’s Camping World Truck Series. The Integrum logo was a nice touch on the truck.

    Screen shot 2010-08-03 at 8.31.31 AM

    We’ve been very happy to work with Nick and the team at Digital Qpons as they’ve expanded from iPhone to Android and beyond.

    Screen shot 2010-08-03 at 8.42.30 AM

    Screen shot 2010-08-03 at 9.02.53 AM

    Good luck to Denny Hamlin in his next race, and we’ll be excited to see Integrum and Digital Qpons in the winner’s circle in the future!

    The post Integrum Makes NASCAR Debut appeared first on http://integrumtech.com/?p=4781 If you are programming web applications you should be constantly trying to improve your quality of decision making when it comes to design implementation. Why …

    The post Design Principles Are Fundamental to Web Application Development appeared first on williampriceiii

    The post Design Principles Are Fundamental to Web Application Development appeared first on